Alienware Alpha (Late 2014) alienware-alpha_Setup%20Guide_fr-fr.pdf - Manuels - DELL DELL sur FNAC.COM  - Revenir à l'accueil

 

 

 

Alienware Alpha (Late 2014)

 

 

Manuels

 
  • Ce document est disponible en anglais uniquement
 
 
 Autres langues
 
 
 Autres langues

 

Voir également :

[TXT]

 DELLmanuelsutilisate..> 13-Jun-2014 20:35   12M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-5100-e..> 13-Jun-2014 20:35  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-l-Uti..> 13-Jun-2014 20:33  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENW..> 13-Jun-2014 20:32  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Laser-Printer-3..> 13-Jun-2014 20:31  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 13-Jun-2014 20:30  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-530s-M..> 13-Jun-2014 20:30  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-530s-M..> 13-Jun-2014 20:29  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Liste-des-manue..> 13-Jun-2014 20:28  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-V131-Man..> 13-Jun-2014 20:28  3.4M  

[TXT]

 DellDimension1100Ser..> 13-Jun-2014 20:27  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3750-Man..> 13-Jun-2014 20:27  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Jun-2014 20:26  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Imprimante-personnel..> 13-Jun-2014 20:25  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-17R-Ma..> 13-Jun-2014 20:25  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 13-Jun-2014 20:24  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-NX40..> 13-Jun-2014 20:24  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 13-Jun-2014 20:23  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-9200-..> 13-Jun-2014 20:23  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Divers-Manuels.htm 13-Jun-2014 20:22  3.2M  

[TXT]

 AlienwareAurora-R3.htm  13-Jun-2014 20:22  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel..> 13-Jun-2014 20:21  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Imprimante-laser-de-..> 13-Jun-2014 20:20  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Jun-2014 20:20  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 13-Jun-2014 20:19  3.2M  

[TXT]

 AlienwareAuroraAuror..> 13-Jun-2014 20:19  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 13-Jun-2014 20:18  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 13-Jun-2014 20:18  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-E520-..> 13-Jun-2014 20:17  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-630i-Manuel..> 13-Jun-2014 20:17  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Chassis-RAID-Dell-Po..> 13-Jun-2014 20:16  3.0M  

[TXT]

 AlienwareAurora-R4.htm  13-Jun-2014 20:16  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 13-Jun-2014 20:15  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-700m-M..> 13-Jun-2014 20:15  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 13-Jun-2014 20:14  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 13-Jun-2014 20:14  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Logiciel-de-ges..> 13-Jun-2014 20:13  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-Printer-7..> 13-Jun-2014 20:13  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 13-Jun-2014 20:12  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 13-Jun-2014 20:12  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 13-Jun-2014 20:11  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 13-Jun-2014 20:11  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Jun-2014 20:10  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-moniteur-D1920-..> 13-Jun-2014 20:10  2.7M  

[TXT]

 AlienwareArea-51Area..> 13-Jun-2014 20:10  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-XT3-Ma..> 13-Jun-2014 20:09  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Baie-de-stockag..> 13-Jun-2014 20:09  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 13-Jun-2014 20:08  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Streak-Manuel-d..> 13-Jun-2014 20:08  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-l-Uti..> 13-Jun-2014 20:07  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Imprimante-Dell-Phot..> 13-Jun-2014 20:07  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Jun-2014 20:06  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Clavier-Axim-Ma..> 13-Jun-2014 20:06  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-ST-Man..> 13-Jun-2014 20:06  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Jun-2014 20:05  2.5M  

[TXT]

 alienwareX51.htm        13-Jun-2014 20:05  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 13-Jun-2014 20:04  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 13-Jun-2014 20:04  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Jun-2014 20:03  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 13-Jun-2014 20:03  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 13-Jun-2014 20:02  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 13-Jun-2014 20:02  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 13-Jun-2014 20:02  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel..> 13-Jun-2014 20:01  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1100-M..> 13-Jun-2014 20:01  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 13-Jun-2014 20:01  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 13-Jun-2014 20:00  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-9400-E..> 13-Jun-2014 20:00  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 13-Jun-2014 20:00  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Laser-Printer-1..> 13-Jun-2014 19:59  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell..> 13-Jun-2014 19:59  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1525-1..> 13-Jun-2014 19:59  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Laser-Printer-1..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  1.0M  

[TXT]

 listedesproduitsDELL..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  871K  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-3100-..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  906K  

[TXT]

 Liste des produits D..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  871K  

[   ]

 sitemapDELL.xml         13-Jun-2014 19:58  418K  

[TXT]

 Lien-Manuels-Utilisa..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58   90K  

[TXT]

 rechercheDELL.htm       13-Jun-2014 19:58  7.7K  

[TXT]

 2715LinksysWireless-..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  5.0K  

[TXT]

 970SacocheMeridianII..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  5.0K  

[TXT]

 2714LinksysWireless-..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.9K  

[TXT]

 957Sacochedetranspor..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.9K  

[TXT]

 3288D-LinkXtremeNGig..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.8K  

[TXT]

 1873LinksysWireless-..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.8K  

[TXT]

 3107Sacochemessagerp..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.8K  

[TXT]

 1249iDRAC6Enterprise..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.8K  

[TXT]

 1250iDRAC6Express-Ki..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.8K  

[TXT]

 1248iDRAC6Express-Ki..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.8K  

[TXT]

 1288LogitechWireless..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.7K  

[TXT]

 clicDELL.htm            13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.7K  

[TXT]

 1244Cartedegestionde..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.7K  

[TXT]

 1214DellNotebookEsse..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.7K  

[TXT]

 2888TargusUSB2.0Dock..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.6K  

[TXT]

 DellEView-Standpouro..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.6K  

[TXT]

 1278LogitechWireless..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.5K  

[TXT]

 3020MicrosoftArcKeyb..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.5K  

[TXT]

 1631Adaptateurpourim..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.4K  

[TXT]

 1622KensingtonSD400D..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.4K  

[TXT]

 1170Carteadaptateurc..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.3K  

[TXT]

 1171Carteadaptateurc..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.3K  

[TXT]

 317Dell-19-en-1-Lect..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.3K  

[TXT]

 327Lecteurdecarte19-..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.3K  

[TXT]

 326Lecteurdecarte19-..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.3K  

[TXT]

 1164Adaptateuradapta..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.3K  

[TXT]

 322Dell-19-en-1-Lect..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.3K  

[TXT]

 321Dell-19-en-1-Lect..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.3K  

[TXT]

 320Dell-19-en-1-Lect..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.3K  

[TXT]

 1251iDRAC6Express-Ki..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.3K  

[TXT]

 1701Ampoulederechang..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58  4.3K  

[TXT]

 1703Ampoulederechang..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.3K  

[TXT]

 316Dell-19-en-1-Lect..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.2K  

[TXT]

 660CartoucheHDamovib..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.2K  

[TXT]

 1077AdaptateurDispla..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.1K  

[TXT]

 982Sacochedetranspor..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.1K  

[TXT]

 762Onduleurfaiblepro..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.1K  

[TXT]

 984Sacochedetranspor..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.1K  

[TXT]

 1900AMERICANPOWERCON..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.1K  

[TXT]

 1302Dell-A940A960-Co..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.1K  

[TXT]

 3213NETGEARProSafeJG..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.1K  

[TXT]

 1240DELLCartedegesti..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.1K  

[TXT]

 609Cartouchedenettoy..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.1K  

[TXT]

 950Stationd''accueil..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.1K  

[TXT]

 352Dell-500Go-7200tp..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.1K  

[TXT]

 1332Dell-964-Couleur..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 761Onduleurde2700Wfo..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 983Sacochedetranspor..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 760Onduleurde1920Wfo..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 759Onduleurde1000Wfo..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1151Graphics6GBNVIDI..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 325LecteurdecarteLec..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1467Dell17201720dnca..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1388Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1439Dell17101710ncar..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1418Dell17001700ncar..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1509Dell2330ddn&2350..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 3736IomegaStorCenter..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 3735IomegaStorCenter..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1580Dell5230dn5350dn..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1387Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1386Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1385Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1394Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1150Graphics1GBNVIDI..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 3651IomegaStorCenter..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1466Dell17201720dnca..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 3434StarTech.com4Por..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1384Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1538Dell3330dncartou..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1586Dell3335dncartou..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1383Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1532Dell2230dcartouc..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1414DellS2500cartouc..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1406Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1400Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1393Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1392Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1382Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1410DellP1500cartouc..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1582Dell5230dncartou..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1391Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1587Dell3335dncartou..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1536Dell3330dncartou..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 557Dell16xLecteurdeD..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1415DellS2500cartouc..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1411DellP1500cartouc..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1405Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1404Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1399Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1398Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1390Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1381Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1380Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 772Onduleurde1000Wfo..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 770Onduleurde1920Wfo..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1403Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1397Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1389Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 1379Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 771Onduleurde500Wfor..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  4.0K  

[TXT]

 613DellCartouchedene..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 1329Dell-964-Couleur..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 1227Sansfilmini-cart..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 1396Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 1378Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 345Disquedur500GoSAT..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 1401Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 1395Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 1377Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 1224Sansfilmini-cart..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 232PET100doubleCoreX..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 1615DellUltraSharpU2..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 231PET100doubleCoreX..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 376Disquedur160GoSAT..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 1402Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 254DoubleCoreXeonE31..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 209DoubleCoreXeonE31..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 735Dell-Blocd''alime..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 492250GoSATA72k6cm25..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 260DoubleCoreXeonX52..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 253DoubleCoreXeonX52..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 246DoubleCoreXeonX52..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 1152Graphics1GBNVIDI..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 229PET100doubleCoreC..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 198DoubleCoreXeonE52..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 195DoubleCoreXeonX52..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 354Dell-250Go-7200tr..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 422500GoSATA72k9cm35..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 3341IomegaScreenPlay..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 1511Dell2330ddn&2350..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 188DoubleCoreXeonE31..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 255ProcesseurCore2Du..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 204DoubleCoreXeonL52..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[TXT]

 228PET100SimpleCoreC..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57  3.9K  

[   ]

 telecharger.php         12-Oct-2012 11:44  960   

[DIR]

 rechercheDELL_files/    12-May-2012 14:26    -   

[TXT]

 test.htm                13-Dec-2011 18:39  745   

[TXT]

 4220AlienwareM14X.ht..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53  2.9K  

[TXT]

 4221AlienwareM18x.ht..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53  3.3K  

[TXT]

 4222AlienwareM11.htm..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53  3.2K  

[TXT]

 4223AlienwareM11xR3...> 28-Oct-2011 11:53  2.9K  

[TXT]

 4224Alienware17x.htm..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53  3.4K  

[TXT]

 4225AlienwareM17x.ht..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53  3.0K  

[TXT]

 4226XPS15-Essentiel...> 28-Oct-2011 11:53  3.0K  

[TXT]

 4227XPS15.htm.htm       28-Oct-2011 11:53  3.1K  

[TXT]

 4228XPS15Performance..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53  3.0K  

[TXT]

 4229XPS15Premium.htm..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53  3.1K  

[TXT]

 4230XPS15-Multimédia..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53  3.1K  

[TXT]

 4231XPS15-Premium.ht..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53  3.1K  

[TXT]

 4232XPS17-Essentiel...> 28-Oct-2011 11:53  3.0K  

[TXT]

 4233XPS17-Efficacité..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53  3.1K  

[TXT]

 4234XPS17Multimédia...> 28-Oct-2011 11:53  3.1K  

[TXT]

 4235XPS17Premium.htm..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53  3.1K  

[TXT]

 4236XPS17-3D.htm.htm    28-Oct-2011 11:53  3.1K  

[TXT]

 4237XPS17-Multimédia..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53  3.1K  

[TXT]

 4238XPS17-Premium.ht..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53  3.1K  

[TXT]

 4239Imprimantephotoà..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53  3.0K  

[TXT]

 4240DellProjecteuràc..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53  3.0K  

[TXT]

 4241DellProjecteurS5..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53  3.0K  

[TXT]

 4242Imprimantephotoà..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53  3.0K  

[TXT]

 4243Imprimantephotoà..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53  3.0K  

[TXT]

 4245Imprimantephotoà..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53  3.0K  

[TXT]

 4244Imprimantephotoà..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53  3.0K  

[TXT]

 3637NETGEARN300Wirel..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52  3.1K  

[TXT]

 3638NETGEARWN2000RPT..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52  3.2K  

[TXT]

 3639NETGEARProSafeGS..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52  3.3K  

[TXT]

 3640NETGEARProSafeXS..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52  3.1K  

[TXT]

 3641NETGEARProSafeGS..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52  3.2K  

[TXT]

 3643NETGEARProSafeGS..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52  3.2K  

[TXT]

 3642NETGEARWirelessR..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52  3.2K  

[TXT]

 3644TrustWirelessSli..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52  3.2K  

[TXT]

 3645TrustWirelessDes..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52  3.1K 
Connect the display Sluit het beeldscherm aan Connectez l’écran Conecte la pantalla 2 Connect the power cable and press the power button Sluit de stroomkabel aan en druk op de aan-uitknop Connectez le câble d’alimentation et appuyez sur le bouton d’alimentation Conecte el cable de alimentación y presione el botón de encendido Connect the Xbox receiver 4 Sluit de Xbox-ontvanger aan Connectez le récepteur Xbox Conecte el receptor Xbox 1 Connect the network cable — optional Sluit de netwerkkabel aan (optioneel) Connectez le câble réseau (facultatif) Conecte el cable de red (opcional) 3 Insert batteries in the Xbox controller Plaats de batterijen in de Xbox-controller Insérez les batteries dans la manette Xbox Introduzca las pilas en el controlador Xbox 5 NOTE: For more information, see the documentation that shipped with the controller. N.B.: Raadpleeg voor meer informatie de documentatie van de controller. REMARQUE : pour plus d’informations, consultez la documentation fournie avec la manette. NOTA: Para obtener más información, consulte la documentación entregada con el controlador. 2014-08 © 2014 Dell Inc. © 2014 Microsoft Corporation Printed in China. Turn on the Xbox controller Zet de controller van de Xbox aan Allumez la manette Xbox Encienda el controlador Xbox 6 NOTE: The drivers for the controller are already installed on your computer. N.B.: De drivers voor de controller zijn al op uw computer geïnstalleerd. REMARQUE : les pilotes de la manette sont déjà installés sur l’ordinateur. NOTA: Los controladores para el controlador ya están instalados en el equipo. Quick Start Guide Snelstartgids Guide d’information rapide Guía de inicio rápido Alienware Alpha | | Features Kenmerken | Caractéristiques | Funciones 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Product support and manuals Productondersteuning en handleidingen Support produits et manuels Soporte técnico de productos y manuales alienware.com dell.com/support/manuals Contact Dell Neem contact op met Dell | Contacter Dell Póngase en contacto con Dell dell.com/contactdell Regulatory and safety Regelgeving en veiligheid | Réglementations et sécurité Normativa y seguridad dell.com/regulatory_compliance Regulatory model Wettelijk model | Modèle réglementaire Modelo normativo D07U Regulatory type Wettelijk type | Type réglementaire Tipo normativo D07U001 Computer model Computermodel | Modèle de l’ordinateur Modelo de equipo Alienware Alpha Información para NOM, o Norma Oficial Mexicana La información que se proporciona a continuación se mostrará en los dispositivos que se describen en este documento, en conformidad con los requisitos de la Norma Oficial Mexicana (NOM): Importador: Dell Mexico S.A. de C.V. AV PASEO DE LA REFORMA NO 2620 PISO 11 COL. LOMAS ALTAS MEXICO DF CP 11950 Modelo D07U Voltaje de alimentación 19,5 V CC Consumo de corriente de entrada 6,70 A País de origen Hecho en China y India 10 1. Power button 2. USB 2.0 ports (2) 3. Power-adapter port 4. HDMI-in port 5. HDMI-out port 6. S/PDIF port 7. Network port 8. USB 3.0 ports (2) 9. Hard-drive activity light 10. Service Tag and regulatory labels 1. Aan-uitknop 2. USB 2.0-poorten (2) 3. Poort voor netadapter 4. HDMI-in-poort 5. HDMI-uit-poort 6. S/PDIF-poort 7. Netwerkpoort 8. USB 3.0-poorten (2) 9. Activiteitenlampje harde schijf 10. Servicetag en labels met voorschriften 1. Bouton d’alimentation 2. Ports USB 2.0 (2) 3. Port de l’adaptateur d’alimentation 4. Port d’entrée HDMI 5. Port de sortie HDMI 6. Port S/PDIF 7. Port réseau 8. Ports USB 3.0 (2) 9. Voyant d’activité du disque dur 10. Numéro de série et étiquettes de conformité aux normes 1. Botón de encendido 2. Puertos USB 2.0 (2) 3. Puerto de adaptador de alimentación 4. Puerto HDMI de entrada 5. Puerto HDMI de salida 6. Puerto S/PDIF 7. Puerto de red 8. Puertos USB 3.0 (2) 9. Indicador luminoso de la actividad de la unidad de disco duro 10. Etiqueta de servicio y etiquetas normativas Pair the Xbox controller and receiver Koppel de controller van de Xbox en de ontvanger Associez la manette Xbox au récepteur Empareje el controlador Xbox y el receptor Press the button on the receiver till the light starts blinking and then press the pairing button on the controller. Druk op de ontvanger op de knop totdat het lampje begint te knipperen en druk vervolgens op de controller op de knop voor het koppelen. Appuyez sur le bouton du récepteur jusqu’à ce que le voyant clignote, puis appuyez sur le bouton d’association sur la manette. Pulse el botón del receptor hasta que la luz empiece a parpadear y, a continuación, pulse el botón de emparejar del controlador. 7 Finish Alienware Alpha setup Voltooi de installatie van Alienware Alpha Terminez l’installation d’Alienware Alpha Termine la instalación de Alienware Alpha 8 Select Console Mode and follow the instructions on the screen to set up the controller Selecteer Console-modus en volg de scherminstructies om de controller in te stellen Sélectionnez le mode Console et suivez les instructions à l’écran pour configurer la manette Seleccione el modo de consola y siga las instrucciones de la pantalla para configurar el controlador NOTE: For more information, see dell.com/support/manuals N.B.: Ga voor meer informatie naar dell.com/support/manuals REMARQUE : pour plus d’informations, rendez-vous sur dell.com/support/manuals NOTA: Para obtener más información, consulte dell.com/support/manuals Create your Alienware Alpha account Maak uw account aan voor Alienware Alpha Créez votre compte Alienware Alpha Cree su cuenta de Alienware Alpha Connect to your wireless network Maak verbinding met uw draadloze netwerk Connectez-vous à votre réseau Conéctese a su red inalámbrica NOTE: If you are connecting to a secured wireless network, enter the password for the wireless network access when prompted. N.B.: Als u verbinding maakt met een beveiligd draadloos netwerk, vul dan het wachtwoord voor het netwerk in wanneer daar om gevraagd wordt. REMARQUE : si vous vous connectez à partir d’un réseau sans fil sécurisé, saisissez le mot de passe d’accès au réseau sans fil lorsque vous y êtes invité. NOTA: Si está conectado a una red inalámbrica con seguridad, escriba la contraseña de acceso de la red inalámbrica cuando se le indique. Download latest updates for Alienware Alpha Download de nieuwste updates voor Alienware Alpha Téléchargez les dernières mises à jour pour Alienware Alpha Descargue las últimas actualizaciones de Alienware Alpha Vues Spécifications Copyright © 2014 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. Le présent produit est protégé par les législations américaine et internationale sur le droit d’auteur et la propriété intellectuelle. Dell et le logo Dell sont des marques commerciales de Dell Inc. aux États-Unis et/ou dans d’autres pays. Toutes les marques et les noms mentionnés dans le présent document peuvent être des marques commerciales de leur propriétaire respectif. 2014 ‑ 09   Rév. A00 Modèle réglementaire : D07U | Type : D07U001 Modèle de l’ordinateur : Alienware Alpha REMARQUE : les images de ce document peuvent différer de votre ordinateur, selon la configuration que vous avez commandée. Alienware Alpha 1 Port USB 2.0 (sous le couvercle du port USB) Permet de connecter un récepteur Bluetooth/sans fil pour un clavier ou une souris sans fil, etc. 2 Port USB 2.0 (2) Permet de connecter des périphériques (périphériques de stockage, imprimantes, etc.). Assure des débits de transfert de données pouvant aller jusqu’à 480 Mbits/s. 3 Bouton d’alimentation Appuyez pour mettre l’ordinateur sous tension s’il est éteint ou en état de veille. Appuyez pour arrêter l’ordinateur s’il est allumé. Appuyez pendant 4 secondes pour forcer l’ordinateur à s’éteindre. REMARQUE : il est possible de personnaliser la fonction du bouton d’alimentation depuis les Options d’alimentation. Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous à la section Mon Dell et moi sur dell.com/support. Avant 1 2 3 Spécifications Vues Avant Arrière 1 Port de l’adaptateur d’alimentation Permet de connecter un adaptateur d’alimentation pour alimenter votre ordinateur. 2 Port d’entrée HDMI Permet de connecter des consoles de jeux, des lecteurs Bluray ou tout autre périphérique de sortie HDMI compatible. 3 Port de sortie HDMI Permet de connecter un écran, un téléviseur ou tout autre périphérique d’entrée HDMI compatible. Fournit des sorties vidéo et audio. 4 Connecteur S/PDIF optique Permet de relier un amplificateur, des hauts-parleurs ou un téléviseur pour une sortie audio numérique à travers des câbles optiques. 5 Port réseau Permet de connecter un câble Ethernet (RJ45) depuis un routeur ou un modem haut débit permettant d’accéder au réseau ou à Internet. Les deux témoins près du port signalent l’état de la connectivité et l’activité réseau. 6 Port USB 3.0 (2) Permet de connecter des périphériques (périphériques de stockage, imprimantes, etc.). Assure des débits de transfert de données pouvant aller jusqu’à 5 Gbits/s. 7 Voyant d’activité du disque dur S’allume lorsque l’ordinateur lit ou écrit des données sur le disque dur. Arrière 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Spécifications Vues Avant Arrière Vues Spécifications Informations système Mémoire Ports et connecteurs Dimensions et poids Communications Vidéo Audio Stockage Adaptateur d’alimentation Environnement de l’ordinateur Dimensions et poids Hauteur 55 mm (2,17 pouces) Largeur 200 mm (7,87 pouces) Profondeur 200 mm (7,87 pouces) Poids (maximal) 1,81 kg (4 pouces) REMARQUE : le poids de votre ordinateur varie en fonction de la configuration commandée et de divers facteurs liés à la fabrication. Vues Spécifications Informations système Mémoire Ports et connecteurs Dimensions et poids Communications Vidéo Audio Stockage Adaptateur d’alimentation Environnement de l’ordinateur Informations système Modèle de l’ordinateur Alienware Alpha Processeur • 4ème génération Intel Dual Core i3 • 4ème génération Intel Quad Core i5 • 4ème génération Intel Quad Core i7 Chipset Intel H81 Vitesse DMI 5,0 GT/s Largeur des données du processeur 64 bits Vues Spécifications Informations système Mémoire Ports et connecteurs Dimensions et poids Communications Vidéo Audio Stockage Adaptateur d’alimentation Environnement de l’ordinateur Mémoire Connecteur Deux logements SO-DIMM Type DDR3L Vitesse 1600 MHz Configurations prises en charge 2 Go, 4 Go, 8 Go et 16 Go Vues Spécifications Informations système Mémoire Ports et connecteurs Dimensions et poids Communications Vidéo Audio Stockage Adaptateur d’alimentation Environnement de l’ordinateur Ports et connecteurs Externes : Réseau Un port RJ45 USB • Trois ports USB 2.0 • Deux ports USB 3.0 Vidéo/audio • Un port S/PDIF optique • Un port d’entrée HDMI • Un port de sortie HDMI Internes : M.2 Un logement de carte M.2 pour WLAN et Bluetooth Vues Spécifications Informations système Mémoire Ports et connecteurs Dimensions et poids Communications Vidéo Audio Stockage Adaptateur d’alimentation Environnement de l’ordinateur Communications Ethernet Contrôleur Ethernet Realtek RTL8151 10/100/1000 Mbits/s intégré sur la carte système Sans fil • Wi-Fi 802.11 a/g/n • Wi-Fi 802.11 a/g/n/ac • Bluetooth 4.0 Vues Spécifications Informations système Mémoire Ports et connecteurs Dimensions et poids Communications Vidéo Audio Stockage Adaptateur d’alimentation Environnement de l’ordinateur Vidéo Contrôleur GPU NVIDIA GeForce Mémoire GDDR5 2 Go Vues Spécifications Informations système Mémoire Ports et connecteurs Dimensions et poids Communications Vidéo Audio Stockage Adaptateur d’alimentation Environnement de l’ordinateur Audio Contrôleur • Intel HD Audio • Realtek ALC3220 pour sortie S/PDIF optique Vues Spécifications Informations système Mémoire Ports et connecteurs Dimensions et poids Communications Vidéo Audio Stockage Adaptateur d’alimentation Environnement de l’ordinateur Stockage Interface SATA 6 Gbits/s Disque dur Un lecteur de 2,5 pouces Vues Spécifications Informations système Mémoire Ports et connecteurs Dimensions et poids Communications Vidéo Audio Stockage Adaptateur d’alimentation Environnement de l’ordinateur Adaptateur d’alimentation Type 130 W Tension d’entrée 100 VCA–240 VCA Fréquence d’entrée 50 Hz–60 Hz Courant de sortie 6,70 A Tension de sortie nominale 19,50 VCC Plage de températures : En fonctionnement 0 °C à 40 °C (32 °F à 104 °F) En entreposage –40 °C à 70 °C (–40 °F à 158 °F) Vues Spécifications Informations système Mémoire Ports et connecteurs Dimensions et poids Communications Vidéo Audio Stockage Adaptateur d’alimentation Environnement de l’ordinateur Environnement de l’ordinateur Niveau de contaminants atmosphériques G2 ou inférieur selon la norme ISA-S71.04-1985 En fonctionnement En entreposage Plage de températures 5 °C à 35 °C (41 °F à 95 °F) –40 °C à 65 °C (–40 °F à 149 °F) Humidité relative (maximale) 10 % à 90 % (sans condensation) 0 % à 95 % (sans condensation) Vibration (maximale)* 0,26 Grms 1,37 Grms Choc (maximale) 40 G pour 2 ms avec un changement de vélocité de 51 cm/s (20 pouce/s)† 105 G pour 2 ms avec un changement de vélocité de 133 cm/s (52,5 pouce/s) Altitude (maximale) –15,24 m à 3048 m (–50 pieds à 10 000 pieds) –15,24 m à 10 668 m (–50 pieds à 35 000 pieds) * Mesurée à l’aide d’un spectre de vibration aléatoire simulant l’environnement utilisateur. † Mesuré avec disque dur en fonctionnement avec impulsion demi-sinusoïdale de 2 ms. Alienware Alpha Service Manual Computer Model: Alienware Alpha Regulatory Model: D07U Regulatory Type: D07U001 Notes, Cautions, and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. Copyright © 2014 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. This product is protected by U.S. and international copyright and intellectual property laws. Dell™ and the Dell logo are trademarks of Dell Inc. in the United States and/or other jurisdictions. All other marks and names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies. 2014 - 10 Rev. A00 Contents Before Working Inside Your Computer........................8 Before You Begin ................................................................................................8 Safety Instructions..............................................................................................8 Recommended Tools.........................................................................................10 After Working Inside Your Computer...........................11 Technical Overview..............................................................12 Inside View Of Your Computer...........................................................................12 System-Board Components..............................................................................13 Removing the Base Cover.................................................14 Procedure...........................................................................................................14 Replacing the Base Cover................................................. 16 Procedure...........................................................................................................16 Removing the Top Cover................................................... 17 Prerequisites......................................................................................................17 Procedure...........................................................................................................17 Replacing the Top Cover................................................... 19 Procedure...........................................................................................................19 Post-requisites.................................................................................................. 19 Removing the Hard Drive.................................................20 Prerequisites.....................................................................................................20 Procedure..........................................................................................................20 Replacing the Hard Drive................................................. 23 Procedure..........................................................................................................23 Post-requisites..................................................................................................23 Removing the Bottom USB Port...................................24 Prerequisites.....................................................................................................24 Procedure..........................................................................................................24 Replacing the Bottom USB Port....................................28 Procedure..........................................................................................................28 Post-requisites..................................................................................................28 Removing the Power-Button Board............................29 Prerequisites.....................................................................................................29 Procedure..........................................................................................................29 Replacing the Power-Button Board............................ 33 Procedure..........................................................................................................33 Post-requisites..................................................................................................33 Removing the Processor Fan.........................................34 Prerequisites.....................................................................................................34 Procedure..........................................................................................................34 Replacing the Processor Fan......................................... 36 Procedure..........................................................................................................36 Post-requisites..................................................................................................36 Removing the Processor Heat-Sink............................37 Prerequisites..................................................................................................... 37 Procedure.......................................................................................................... 37 Replacing the Processor Heat-Sink............................39 Procedure..........................................................................................................39 Post-requisites..................................................................................................39 Removing the Video-Card Fan.......................................40 Prerequisites.....................................................................................................40 Procedure..........................................................................................................40 Replacing the Video-Card Fan........................................42 Procedure..........................................................................................................42 Post-requisites..................................................................................................42 Removing the Video-Card Heat Sink..........................43 Prerequisites.....................................................................................................43 Procedure..........................................................................................................44 Replacing the Video-Card Heat Sink...........................45 Procedure..........................................................................................................45 Post-requisites..................................................................................................45 Removing the Memory Module(s)............................... 46 Prerequisites.....................................................................................................46 Procedure..........................................................................................................46 Replacing the Memory Module(s)................................48 Procedure..........................................................................................................48 Post-requisites..................................................................................................49 Removing the Processor..................................................50 Prerequisites.....................................................................................................50 Procedure..........................................................................................................50 Replacing the Processor.................................................. 52 Procedure..........................................................................................................52 Post-requisites..................................................................................................53 Removing the Front-Panel Light Board....................54 Prerequisites.....................................................................................................54 Procedure..........................................................................................................54 Replacing the Front-Panel Light Board.....................57 Procedure.......................................................................................................... 57 Post-requisites..................................................................................................57 Removing the Wireless Card.......................................... 58 Prerequisites.....................................................................................................58 Procedure..........................................................................................................58 Replacing the Wireless Card...........................................60 Procedure..........................................................................................................60 Post-requisites................................................................................................. 60 Removing the Antenna Modules.................................. 61 Prerequisites......................................................................................................61 Procedure..........................................................................................................62 Replacing the Antenna Modules..................................64 Procedure..........................................................................................................64 Post-requisites..................................................................................................64 Removing the System Board......................................... 65 Prerequisites.....................................................................................................65 Procedure..........................................................................................................66 Replacing the System Board..........................................69 Procedure..........................................................................................................69 Post-requisites..................................................................................................69 Removing the Coin-Cell Battery.....................................71 Prerequisites...................................................................................................... 71 Procedure........................................................................................................... 71 Replacing the Coin-Cell Battery.................................... 73 Procedure.......................................................................................................... 73 Post-requisites.................................................................................................. 73 System Setup.........................................................................74 Overview ........................................................................................................... 74 Entering System Setup .................................................................................... 74 System Setup Options...................................................................................... 74 Boot Sequence..................................................................................................80 Changing Boot Sequence for the Current Boot..........................................80 Changing Boot Sequence for Future Boots.................................................81 Clearing Forgotten Passwords.......................................................................... 81 Prerequisites...............................................................................................82 Procedure....................................................................................................82 Post-requisites............................................................................................84 Clearing CMOS Settings....................................................................................84 Prerequisites...............................................................................................84 Procedure....................................................................................................84 Post-requisites............................................................................................86 Flashing the BIOS................................................................. 87 Before Working Inside Your Computer CAUTION: To avoid damaging the components and cards, handle them by their edges and avoid touching pins and contacts. NOTE: The images in this document may differ from your computer depending on the configuration you ordered. Before You Begin 1 Save and close all open files and exit all open applications. 2 Shut down your computer. – Windows 8.1: On the Start screen, click or tap the power icon → Shut down. – Console Mode: On the Home screen, click Power → SHUT DOWN. NOTE: If you are using a different operating system, see the documentation of your operating system for shut-down instructions. 3 Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical outlets. 4 Disconnect all cables such as telephone cables, network cables and so on, from your computer. 5 Disconnect all attached devices and peripherals, such as keyboard, mouse, monitor, and so on, from your computer. 6 Remove any media card and optical disc from your computer, if applicable. 7 After the computer is unplugged, press and hold the power button for 5 seconds to ground the system board. Safety Instructions Use the following safety guidelines to protect your computer from potential damage and ensure your personal safety. 8 WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. WARNING: Disconnect all power sources before opening the computer cover or panels. After you finish working inside the computer, replace all covers, panels, and screws before connecting to the power source. CAUTION: To avoid damaging the computer, make sure that the work surface is flat and clean. CAUTION: To avoid damaging the components and cards, handle them by their edges and avoid touching pins and contacts. CAUTION: You should only perform troubleshooting and repairs as authorized or directed by the Dell technical assistance team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. See the safety instructions that shipped with the product or at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. CAUTION: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate static electricity, which could harm internal components. CAUTION: When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its pull-tab, not on the cable itself. Some cables have connectors with locking tabs or thumb-screws that you must disengage before disconnecting the cable. When disconnecting cables, keep them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. When connecting cables, make sure that the ports and connectors are correctly oriented and aligned. CAUTION: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug the cable from the network device. 9 CAUTION: Press and eject any installed card from the mediacard reader. Recommended Tools The procedures in this document may require the following tools: • Philips screwdriver • Flat-head screwdriver • Plastic scribe 10 After Working Inside Your Computer CAUTION: Leaving stray or loose screws inside your computer may severely damage your computer. 1 Replace all screws and make sure that no stray screws remain inside your computer. 2 Connect any external devices, peripherals, and cables you removed before working on your computer. 3 Replace any media cards, discs, and any other part(s) that you removed before working on your computer. 4 Connect your computer and all attached devices to their electrical outlets. 5 Turn on your computer. 11 Technical Overview WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Inside View Of Your Computer 1 video-card fan 2 back panel 3 processor fan 4 power-button module 5 front-panel light module 12 System-Board Components 1 processor socket 2 processor-fan cable connector (CPU_FAN) 3 clear password jumper (CLEAR_PASSWORD) 4 power-button connector (ALIEN_HEAD) 5 memory-module slot (DIMM2) 6 memory-module slot (DIMM1) 7 video-card fan cable connector (GPU_FAN) 8 front-panel light board cable connector (LOGO) 9 USB-port cable connector (INT_USB2) 10 wireless-card slot 11 clear CMOS jumper (RTCRST) 12 video card 13 Removing the Base Cover WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Procedure 1 Turn the computer over. 2 Remove the screws that secure the base cover to the top cover. 1 screws (4) 2 base cover 14 3 Using a plastic scribe, pry the base cover off the top cover. 1 plastic scribe 2 base cover 15 Replacing the Base Cover WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Procedure 1 Align the screw holes on the base cover with the screw holes on the top cover and snap the base cover over the top cover. 2 Replace the screws that secure the base cover to the top cover. 16 Removing the Top Cover WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Prerequisites Remove the base cover. Procedure 1 Hold the chassis along with the top cover and then turn the computer over. 17 2 Lift the top cover off the chassis. 1 top cover 18 Replacing the Top Cover WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Procedure 1 Align the slots on the top cover with the ports on the chassis and place the top cover on the chassis. 2 Hold the chassis along with the top cover and then turn the computer over. Post-requisites Replace the base cover. 19 Removing the Hard Drive WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. CAUTION: Hard drives are fragile. Exercise care when handling the hard drive. CAUTION: To avoid data loss, do not remove the hard drive while the computer is in sleep or on state. Prerequisites Remove the base cover. Procedure 1 Remove the screw that secures the hard-drive assembly to the chassis. 2 Slide the hard-drive assembly towards the back of the computer to disconnect the hard drive from the system board. 20 3 Lift the hard-drive assembly off the chassis. 1 screw 2 hard-drive assembly 4 Remove the screws that secure the hard-drive bracket to the hard drive. 21 5 Lift the hard drive off the hard-drive bracket. 1 hard-drive bracket 2 hard drive 3 screws (4) 22 Replacing the Hard Drive WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. CAUTION: Hard drives are fragile. Exercise care when handling the hard drive. Procedure 1 Align the screw holes on the hard drive with the screw holes on the harddrive bracket. 2 Replace the screws that secure the hard-drive bracket to the hard drive. 3 Align the slots on the hard-drive assembly with the tabs on the chassis. 4 Slide the hard-drive assembly towards the front of the computer to connect the hard drive to the system board. 5 Replace the screw that secures the hard-drive assembly to the chassis. Post-requisites 1 Replace the top cover. 2 Replace the base cover. 23 Removing the Bottom USB Port WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Prerequisites 1 Remove the base cover. 2 Remove the top cover. Procedure 1 Disconnect the USB-port cable from the system board. 24 2 Push down the USB-port cable through the cable-routing hole on the chassis. 1 USB-port cable 2 routing hole 3 Turn the computer over. 4 Remove the USB-port cable from the routing guides on the chassis. 5 Remove the screw that secures the USB-port bracket to the chassis. 6 Lift the USB-port bracket at an angle to release the tabs on the USB-port bracket from the slots on the chassis. 25 7 Lift the USB-port bracket off the chassis. 1 screw 2 USB-port bracket 3 chassis 4 USB-port cable 5 routing guides 8 Remove the screw that secures the USB port to the chassis. 26 9 Slide and remove the USB port, along with the cable, from under the tab on the chassis. 1 screw 2 tab 3 USB port 4 chassis 5 USB-port cable 27 Replacing the Bottom USB Port WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Procedure 1 Slide the USB port under the tab on the chassis. 2 Replace the screw that secures the USB port to the chassis. 3 Align and slide the tabs on USB-port bracket in the slots on the chassis. 4 Replace the screw that secures the USB-port bracket to the chassis 5 Route the USB-port cable through the routing guides on the chassis and slide the cable through the cable-routing hole on the chassis. 6 Turn the computer over. 7 Connect the USB-port cable to the system board. Post-requisites 1 Replace the top cover. 2 Replace the base cover. 28 Removing the Power-Button Board WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Prerequisites 1 Remove the base cover. 2 Remove the top cover. Procedure 1 Disconnect the power-button board cable from the system board. 2 Turn the chassis over and remove the antenna cable from the routing guides on the power-button module. 3 Press the tabs on the power-button module to release the module from the front panel. 4 Release the tabs at the bottom of the power-button module from the slots on the chassis. 29 5 Remove the power-button module along with its cable through the slot on the front panel. 1 tabs (2) 2 routing guides 3 tabs (2) 4 power-button module 5 power-button board cable 30 6 Push the tab that secures the power-button board to the power-button board bracket. 1 tab 2 power-button board cable 3 power-button board 4 bracket 7 Lift and slide the power-button board to release it from the power-button board bracket. 31 8 Remove the power-button board along with its cable off the power-button board bracket. 1 power-button board cable 2 power-button board 3 bracket 32 Replacing the Power-Button Board WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Procedure 1 Use the alignment posts on power-button board bracket to align the power-button board into the slot on the power-button board bracket. 2 Snap the power-button board in place on the power-button board bracket. 3 Route the power-button board cable through the cable-routing hole on the chassis. 4 Align and snap the power-button module into the slot on the front panel. 5 Connect the power-button board cable to the system board. 6 Turn over the chassis and route the antenna cable through the routing guides on the power-button board module. Post-requisites 1 Replace the top cover. 2 Replace the base cover. 33 Removing the Processor Fan WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Prerequisites 1 Remove the base cover. 2 Remove the top cover. Procedure 1 Press the tabs and lift the processor fan off the system board. 1 processor fan 2 tabs (2) 34 2 Disconnect the processor-fan cable from the system board. 1 processor fan 2 processor-fan cable 35 Replacing the Processor Fan WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Procedure 1 Connect the processor-fan cable to the system board. 2 Align and snap the processor fan over the processor heat sink. Post-requisites 1 Replace the top cover. 2 Replace the base cover. 36 Removing the Processor Heat-Sink WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. CAUTION: For maximum cooling of the processor, do not touch the heat transfer areas on the heat sink. The oils in your skin can reduce the heat transfer capability of the thermal grease. Prerequisites 1 Remove the base cover. 2 Remove the top cover. 3 Remove the processor fan. Procedure NOTE: The original thermal grease can be reused if the original processor and heat sink are reinstalled together. If either the processor or the heat sink is replaced, use the thermal grease provided in the kit to make sure that thermal conductivity is achieved. 1 Loosen the captive screws that secure the processor heat sink to the system board. 37 2 Lift the processor heat sink off system board. 1 processor heat sink 2 captive screws (4) 38 Replacing the Processor Heat-Sink WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. CAUTION: For maximum cooling of the processor, do not touch the heat transfer areas on the heat sink. The oils in your skin can reduce the heat transfer capability of the thermal grease. Procedure CAUTION: Incorrect alignment of the heat sink may damage the system board and processor. NOTE: The original thermal grease can be reused if the original processor and heat sink are reinstalled together. If either the processor or the heat sink is replaced, use the thermal grease provided in the kit to make sure that thermal conductivity is achieved. 1 Place the processor heat sink over the processor. 2 Align the captive screws on the processor heat sink with the screw holes on the system board. 3 Tighten the captive screws that secure the processor heat sink to the system board. Post-requisites 1 Replace the processor fan. 2 Replace the top cover. 3 Replace the base cover. 39 Removing the Video-Card Fan WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Prerequisites 1 Remove the base cover. 2 Remove the top cover. Procedure 1 Disconnect the video-card fan cable from the system board. 40 2 Press the tabs and lift the video-card fan off the system board. 1 video-card fan 2 tabs (2) 3 video-card fan cable 41 Replacing the Video-Card Fan WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Procedure 1 Align and snap the video-card fan over the video-card heat sink. 2 Connect the video-card fan cable to the system board. Post-requisites 1 Replace the top cover. 2 Replace the base cover. 42 Removing the Video-Card Heat Sink WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. CAUTION: For maximum cooling of the processor, do not touch the heat transfer areas on the heat sink. The oils in your skin can reduce the heat transfer capability of the thermal grease. Prerequisites 1 Remove the base cover. 2 Remove the top cover. 3 Remove the video-card fan. 43 Procedure NOTE: The original thermal grease can be reused if the original video card and heat sink are reinstalled together. If either the video card or the heat sink is replaced, use the thermal grease provided in the kit to make sure that thermal conductivity is achieved. 1 In sequential order (indicated on the heat sink), loosen the captive screws that secure the video-card heat sink to the system board. 1 video-card heat sink 2 captive screws (4) 2 Lift the video-card heat sink off the video-card heat sink. 44 Replacing the Video-Card Heat Sink WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. CAUTION: For maximum cooling of the processor, do not touch the heat transfer areas on the heat sink. The oils in your skin can reduce the heat transfer capability of the thermal grease. Procedure CAUTION: Incorrect alignment of the heat sink may damage the system board and video card. NOTE: The original thermal grease can be reused if the original video card and heat sink are reinstalled together. If either the video card or the heat sink is replaced, use the thermal grease provided in the kit to make sure that thermal conductivity is achieved. 1 Place the heat sink over the video card. 2 Align the captive screws on the video-card heat sink with the screw holes on the system board. 3 In sequential order (indicated on the heat sink), tighten the captive screws that secure the video-card heat sink to the system board. Post-requisites 1 Replace the video-card fan. 2 Replace the top cover. 3 Replace the base cover. 45 Removing the Memory Module(s) WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Prerequisites 1 Remove the base cover. 2 Remove the top cover. 3 Remove the processor fan. Procedure 1 Using your fingertips, pry apart the securing clips on each end of the memory-module slot until the memory module pops up. 46 2 Slide and remove the memory module from the memory-module slot. 1 memory-module slot 2 memory module 3 securing clips (2) 47 Replacing the Memory Module(s) WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Procedure 1 Align the notch on the memory module with the tab on the memorymodule slot. 48 2 Slide the memory module into the memory-module slot and press the memory module down until it clicks into place. NOTE: If you do not hear the click, remove the memory module and reinstall it. 1 memory module 2 notch 3 tab 4 memory-module slot Post-requisites 1 Replace the processor fan. 2 Replace the top cover. 3 Replace the base cover. 49 Removing the Processor WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Prerequisites 1 Remove the base cover. 2 Remove the top cover. 3 Remove the processor fan. 4 Remove the processor heat sink. Procedure 1 Press the release lever down and then push it away from the processor to release it from the tab. 2 Extend the release lever completely and open the processor cover. 50 3 Lift the processor off the processor socket. 1 release lever 2 tab 3 processor cover 4 processor socket 5 processor 51 Replacing the Processor WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. CAUTION: If either the processor or the heat sink is replaced, use the thermal grease provided in the kit to make sure that thermal conductivity is achieved. Procedure 1 Make sure that the release lever on the processor socket is fully extended and the processor cover is fully open. CAUTION: Position the processor correctly in the processor socket to avoid permanent damage to the processor. 2 Align the notches on the processor with the tabs on the processor socket. 3 Align the pin-1 corner on the processor with the pin-1 corner on the processor socket, and then place the processor in the processor socket. CAUTION: Make sure that the processor-cover notch is positioned underneath the alignment post. 4 When the processor is fully seated in the socket, close the processor cover. 52 5 Pivot the release lever down and place it under the tab on the processor cover. 1 processor socket 2 processor 3 tab 4 processor cover 5 release lever Post-requisites 1 Replace the processor heat sink. 2 Replace the processor fan. 3 Replace the top cover. 4 Replace the base cover. 53 Removing the Front-Panel Light Board WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Prerequisites 1 Remove the base cover. 2 Remove the top cover. 3 Remove the video-card fan. Procedure 1 Disconnect the front-panel light board cable from the system board. 54 2 Slide the front-panel light board cable through the routing-hole on the chassis. 1 front-panel light board cable 2 routing hole 55 3 Press the front-panel light module tabs to release the module from the front panel. 1 front-panel light module 2 tabs 3 front panel 4 Lift the front-panel light module, along with its cable, off the front panel. 56 Replacing the Front-Panel Light Board WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Procedure 1 Align the tabs on the front-panel light module with the slots on the front panel, and snap the front-panel light module onto the front panel. 2 Route the front-panel light board cable through the cable-routing hole on the chassis. 3 Connect the front-panel light board cable to the system board. Post-requisites 1 Replace the video-card fan. 2 Replace the top cover. 3 Replace the base cover. 57 Removing the Wireless Card WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Prerequisites 1 Remove the base cover. 2 Remove the top cover. 3 Remove the video-card fan. Procedure 1 Remove the screw that secures the wireless card to the system board. 2 Lift the protective cover off the wireless card. 3 Disconnect the antenna cables from the wireless card. 58 4 Slide and remove the wireless card out of the wireless-card slot. 1 protective cover 2 screw 3 antenna cables (2) 4 wireless card 59 Replacing the Wireless Card WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Procedure CAUTION: To avoid damage to the wireless card, do not place any cables under it. 1 Align the notch on the wireless card with the tab on the wireless-card slot. 2 Connect the antenna cables to the wireless card. A label at the tip of the antenna cables indicates color scheme for the wireless card supported by your computer. Connectors on the wireless card Antenna-cable sticker color Auxiliary (1) White Main (2) Black 3 Slide the wireless card at an angle into the wireless-card slot. 4 Press the other end of the wireless card down and replace the protective cover on the wireless card. 5 Replace the screw that secures the wireless card to the system board. Post-requisites 1 Replace the video-card fan. 2 Replace the top cover. 3 Replace the base cover. 60 Removing the Antenna Modules WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Prerequisites 1 Remove the base cover. 2 Remove the top cover. 3 Remove the video-card fan. 4 Remove the wireless card. 61 Procedure 1 Slide the antenna cables through the cable-routing hole on the chassis. 1 antenna cables (2) 2 routing hole 2 Turn the computer over. 3 Remove the antenna cable from the routing guides on the power-button module and chassis. 4 Remove the screws that secure the antenna modules to the chassis. 62 5 Using a plastic scribe, pry and slide the antenna modules, and release the tabs on the antenna modules from the slots on the chassis. 1 routing guides 2 screws (2) 3 antenna modules (2) 4 antenna cable 6 Lift the antenna modules, along with the cable, off the chassis. 63 Replacing the Antenna Modules WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Procedure 1 Align and slide the tabs on the antenna modules in the slots on the chassis. 2 Align the screw holes on the antenna modules with the screws hole on the chassis. 3 Replace the screws that secure the antenna modules to the chassis. 4 Route the antenna cable through the routing guides on the chassis and power-button module. 5 Route the antenna cable through the cable-routing hole on the chassis. Post-requisites 1 Replace the wireless card. 2 Replace the video-card fan. 3 Replace the top cover. 4 Replace the base cover. 64 Removing the System Board WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. NOTE: Your computer’s Service Tag is stored in the system board. You must enter the Service Tag in the BIOS setup program after you replace the system board. NOTE: Replacing the system board removes any changes you have made to the BIOS using the BIOS setup program. You must make the desired changes again after you replace the system board. NOTE: Before disconnecting the cables from the system board, note the location of the connectors so that you can reconnect them correctly after you replace the system board. Prerequisites 1 Remove the base cover. 2 Remove the top cover. 3 Remove the hard drive. 4 Remove the processor fan. 5 Remove the processor heat sink. 6 Remove the processor. 7 Remove the video-card fan. 8 Remove the video-card heat sink. 9 Remove the memory modules. 10 Remove the wireless card. 65 Procedure 1 Disconnect the USB-port cable, front-panel light board cable, and powerbutton board cable from the system board. For information on the location of connectors, see “System- Board Components”. 1 power-button board cable 2 front-panel light board cable 3 USB-port cable 2 Remove the screws that secure the back panel to the chassis. 66 3 Push the tab at the bottom of the back panel and remove the back panel from the chassis. 1 screws (2) 2 back panel 3 tab 4 Remove the screws that secure the system board to the chassis. 67 5 Lift the system board at an angle and remove it from the chassis. 1 system board 2 screws (4) 68 Replacing the System Board WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. NOTE: Your computer’s Service Tag is stored in the system board. You must enter the Service Tag in the BIOS setup program after you replace the system board. NOTE: Replacing the system board removes any changes you have made to the BIOS using the BIOS setup program. You must make the desired changes again after you replace the system board. Procedure NOTE: Make sure that no cables are under the system board. 1 Slide the system board into the slot on the chassis and align the screw holes on the system board with the screw holes on the chassis. 2 Replace the screws that secure the system board to the chassis. 3 Align and snap the back panel onto the chassis. 4 Align the screw holes on the back panel with the screw holes on the chassis and replace the screws that secure the back panel to the chassis. 5 Connect the USB-port cable, front-panel light board cable, and powerbutton board cable to the system board. For more information on the location of connectors, see “System-Board Components”. Post-requisites 1 Replace the wireless card. 2 Replace the memory modules. 3 Replace the video-card heat sink. 4 Replace the video-card fan. 69 5 Replace the processor. 6 Replace the processor heat sink. 7 Replace the processor fan. 8 Replace the hard drive. 9 Replace the top cover. 10 Replace the base cover. 70 Removing the Coin-Cell Battery WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. CAUTION: Removing the coin-cell battery resets the BIOS settings to default. It is recommended that you note the BIOS settings before removing the coin-cell battery. Prerequisites 1 Remove the base cover. 2 Remove the top cover. 3 Remove the hard drive. 4 Remove the processor fan. 5 Remove the processor heat sink. 6 Remove the processor. 7 Remove the video-card fan. 8 Remove the video-card heat sink. 9 Remove the memory modules. 10 Remove the wireless card. 11 Remove the system board. Procedure 1 Turn the system board over. 2 Disconnect the coin-cell battery cable from the system board. 71 3 Peel off the coin-cell battery from the system board. 1 coin-cell battery 2 coin-cell battery cable 3 system board 72 Replacing the Coin-Cell Battery WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Procedure 1 Adhere the coin-cell battery to the system board. 2 Connect the coin-cell battery cable to the system board. Post-requisites 1 Replace the system board. 2 Replace the wireless card. 3 Replace the memory modules. 4 Replace the video-card heat sink. 5 Replace the video-card fan. 6 Replace the processor. 7 Replace the processor heat sink. 8 Replace the processor fan. 9 Replace the hard drive. 10 Replace the top cover. 11 Replace the base cover. 73 System Setup Overview CAUTION: Unless you are an expert computer user, do not change the settings in the system setup program. Certain changes can make your computer work incorrectly. NOTE: Before you change system setup, it is recommended that you write down the system setup screen information for future reference. Use system setup to: • Get information about the hardware installed in your computer, such as the amount of RAM, the size of the hard drive, and so on. • Change the system configuration information. • Set or change a user-selectable option, such as the user password, type of hard drive installed, enabling or disabling base devices, and so on. Entering System Setup NOTE: You must connect a keyboard and mouse to access and configure system setup. 1 Turn on (or restart) your computer. 2 During POST, when the Dell logo is displayed, watch for the F2 prompt to appear and then press F2 immediately. NOTE: The F2 prompt indicates that the keyboard has initialized. This prompt can appear very quickly, so you must watch for it, and then press F2. If you press F2 before the F2 prompt, this keystroke is lost. If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the operating system’s desktop. Then, turn off your computer and try again. System Setup Options NOTE: Depending on your computer and its installed devices, the items listed in this section may or may not appear. 74 Main BIOS Revision Displays the BIOS version number. BIOS Build Date Displays the BIOS release date. System Name Displays the system name. System Time Displays the current time in hh:mm:ss format. System Date Displays the current date in mm/dd/yyy format. Service Tag Displays the service tag of your computer. Service Tag Input Allows you to enter the service tag of your computer. Asset Tag Displays the asset tag of your computer. Processor Information Processor Type Displays the processor type. Processor ID Displays the processor identification code. Processor Core Count Displays the number of cores in the processor. Processor L1 Cache Displays the processor L1 cache size. Processor L2 Cache Displays the processor L2 cache size. Processor L3 Cache Displays the processor L3 cache size. Memory Information Memory Installed Displays the total computer memory. Memory Available Displays the amount of memory available on the computer. Memory Running Speed Displays the memory speed. Memory Technology Displays the type of memory technology used. SATA Information 75 Main SATA 1 Displays the device connected to SATA Port1. Device Type Displays the type of the connected device. Device ID Displays the identification code of the device. Device Size Displays the size of the device. Advanced Processor Configuration Intel Hyper-Threading Technology Allows you to enable or disable the HyperThreading in the processor. Intel(R) SpeedStep Technology Allows you to enable or disable Intel (R) SpeedStep Technology. NOTE: If enabled, the processor clock speed and core voltage are adjusted dynamically based on the processor load. Intel(R) Virtualization Technology Allows you to enable or disable Intel Virtualization Technology feature for the processor. CPU XD Support Allows you to enable the Execute Disable mode of the processor. Limit CPUID Value Allows you to limit the maximum value the processor standard CPUID function supports. Multi Core Support Allows you to enable or disable multi-core processor. Intel(R) Turbo Boost Technology Allows you to enable or disable Intel Turbo Boost Technology mode for the processor. USB Configuration Front USB Ports Allows you to enable or disable the front USB ports. 76 Advanced Rear USB Ports Allows you to enable or disable the rear USB ports. Onboard Device Configuration Onboard Audio Controller Allows you to enable or disable the onboard audio controller. SATA Mode Displays the SATA mode on your computer. Onboard LAN Controller Allows you to enable or disable the onboard LAN controller. Onboard LAN Boot ROM Allows you to boot your computer from a network. Boot Numlock Key Allows you to set the status of the Num Lock key during boot to On or Off. Secure Boot Allows you to enable or disable the secure boot control. Load Legacy OPROM Allows you to enable or disable the Legacy Option ROM. Keyboard Errors Allows you to enable or disable the display of keyboard-related errors during boot. USB Boot Support Allows you to enable or disable booting from USB mass storage devices such as external hard drive, optical drive, USB drive, and so on. Boot Mode Boot Option #1 Displays the first boot device. Default: UEFI: Windows Boot Manager. Boot Option #2 Displays the second boot device. Default: USB Storage Device. Boot Option #3 Displays the third boot device. Default: Internal ODD Devices. 77 Boot Boot Option #4 Displays the fourth boot device. Default: USB Floppy Device. Boot Option #5 Displays the fifth boot device. Default: Onboard NIC Device. Hard Disk Drivers Displays the boot sequence of the hard drive. Power Wake Up by Integrated LAN Allow the computer to be powered on by special LAN signals. Deep Sleep Control Allows you to define the controls when Deep Sleep is enabled. AC Recovery Sets what action the computer takes when power is restored. Auto Power On Allows you to enable or disable the computer from turning on automatically. Auto Power On Mode Allows you to set the computer to turn on automatically every day or on a preselected date. This option can be configured only if the Auto Power On mode is set to Enabled Everyday or Selected Day . Auto Power On Date Allows you to set the date on which the computer must turn on automatically. This option can be configured only if the Auto Power On mode is set to Enabled 1 to 31. Auto Power On Time Allows you to set the time at which the computer must turn on automatically. This option can be configured only if the Auto Power On mode is set to Enabled hh:mm:ss. 78 Security Supervisor Password Displays whether the supervisor password is set. User Password Displays whether the user password is set. Set Supervisor Password Allows you to set, change, or delete the supervisor password. The supervisor password controls access to the system setup utility. NOTE: Deleting the supervisor password deletes the user password. Set the supervisor password before setting the user password. User Access Level Allows you to restrict or provide access to the system setup utility. • No Access: Restricts users from editing system setup options • View Only: Allows users to only view system setup options • Limited: Allows users to edit limited system setup options • Full Access: Allows users to edit all system setup options except the supervisor password Set User Password Allows you to set, change, or delete the user password. Password Check Allows you to enable password verification either when you attempt to enter system setup or each time the computer boots. NOTE: Password Check option is visible only when the user password is set. 79 Exit Save Changes and Reset Allows you to exit system setup and save your changes. Discard Changes and Reset Allows you to exit system setup and load previous values for all system setup options. Load Defaults Allows you to load default values for all system setup options. Boot Sequence This feature allows you to change the sequence of devices that your computer attempts to boot from. If the computer cannot boot from the device you select, it attempts to boot from the next bootable device. You can use this feature to change the: • Current Boot Sequence — change the boot sequence for the current boot, for example, to boot from the optical drive to run Dell Diagnostics from the Drivers and Utilities disc or to reinstall your operating system using an external media. The previous boot sequence is restored at the next boot. • Future Boot Sequence — change the boot sequence for all future boots, for example, to boot from the primary hard drive. Changing Boot Sequence for the Current Boot 1 If you are booting from a USB device, connect the USB device to a USB port. 2 Turn on (or restart) your computer. 3 When F2 Setup, F12 Boot Options appear in the lower-right corner of the screen, press F12. NOTE: If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft Windows desktop. Then, shut down your computer and try again. The Boot Options appears, listing all available boot devices. 4 On the Boot Options, select the device you want to boot from and press Enter. For example, if you are booting to a USB hard drive, highlight USB Hard Disk and press Enter. Boot Options Following are the devices that your computer can boot from: 80 Floppy — The computer attempts to boot from the floppy disk drive. If no operating system is on the drive, the computer generates an error message. Hard Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the primary hard drive. If no operating system is on the drive, the computer generates an error message. CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the optical drive. If no disc is in the drive, or if the disc is not bootable, the computer generates an error message. USB Storage Device — Insert the memory device into a USB connector and restart the computer. When F12 Boot Options appear in the lower-right corner of the screen, press F12. The BIOS detects the device and adds the USB flash option to the boot menu. NOTE: To boot to a USB device, the device must be bootable. To ensure that your device is bootable, check the device documentation. Network — The computer attempts to boot from the network. If no operating system is found on the network, the computer generates an error message. Changing Boot Sequence for Future Boots 1 Enter system setup. See "Entering System Setup". 2 Use the arrow keys to highlight the Boot menu option and press Enter to access the menu. NOTE: Note your current boot sequence in case you want to restore it. 3 Navigate to Set Boot Priority to configure the boot priority. 4 Use the arrow keys to highlight the boot priority and press Enter to display the different devices. 5 Select the device and press Enter to set the boot priority. Clearing Forgotten Passwords WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. 81 Prerequisites 1 Remove the base cover. 2 Remove the top cover. 3 Remove the processor fan. Procedure 1 Locate the password jumper (CLEAR_PASSWORD) on the system board. For information on the location of the CMOS jumper, see “System- Board Components”. 82 2 Remove the jumper plug. 1 jumper plug 2 password jumper (CLEAR_PASSWORD) 3 Replace the processor fan. 4 Replace the top cover. 5 Replace the base cover. 6 Turn on your computer and wait till the operating system is completely loaded. 7 Shut down your computer. 8 Remove the base cover. 9 Remove the top cover. 10 Remove the processor fan. 83 11 Replace the jumper plug on the password jumper. 1 jumper plug 2 password jumper (CLEAR_PASSWORD) Post-requisites 1 Replace the processor fan. 2 Replace the top cover. 3 Replace the base cover. Clearing CMOS Settings WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer and follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer. After working inside your computer, follow the instructions in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Prerequisites 1 Remove the base cover. 2 Remove the top cover. 3 Remove the processor fan. 4 Remove the video-card fan. Procedure 1 Locate the CMOS jumper (RTCRST) on the system board. For information on the location of the CMOS jumper, see “System- Board Components”. 84 2 Remove the jumper plug from the password jumper (CLEAR_PASSWORD) and place it on the CMOS jumper (RTCRST). 1 jumper plug 2 CMOS jumper (RTCRST) 3 password jumper (CLEAR_PASSWORD) 3 Replace the video-card fan. 4 Replace the processor fan. 5 Replace the top cover. 6 Replace the base cover. 85 7 Turn on your computer. A message is displayed to confirm that the CMOS settings are reset and default BIOS setup has been loaded. 8 Press F1 to continue and wait till the operating system is completely loaded. 9 Shut down your computer. 10 Remove the base cover. 11 Remove the top cover. 12 Remove the processor fan. 13 Remove the video-card fan. 14 Remove the jumper plug from the CMOS jumper and replace it on the password jumper. Post-requisites 1 Replace the video-card fan. 2 Replace the processor fan. 3 Replace the top cover. 4 Replace the base cover. 86 Flashing the BIOS NOTE: It is recommended that you connect a keyboard and mouse to flash the BIOS. You may need to flash (update) the BIOS when an update is available or when you replace the system board. To flash the BIOS: 1 Turn on the computer. 2 Go to dell.com/support. 3 If you have your computer's Service Tag, type your computer's Service Tag and click Submit. If you do not have your computer's Service Tag, click Detect My Product to allow automatic detection of the Service Tag. NOTE: If the Service Tag cannot be detected automatically, select your product under the product categories. 4 Click Get Drivers and Downloads. 5 Click View All Drivers. 6 In the Operating System drop-down, select the operating system installed on your computer. 7 Click BIOS. 8 Click Download File to download the latest version of the BIOS for your computer. 9 On the next page, select Single-file download and click Continue. 10 Save the file and once the download is complete, navigate to the folder where you saved the BIOS update file. 11 Double-click the BIOS update file icon and follow the instructions on the screen. 87 Technical Guide 1-socket 1U rack server providing the features you need without a lot of the unnecessary extras. Dell PowerEdge R210 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 2 This document is for informational purposes only. Dell reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any products herein. The content provided is as is and without express or implied warranties of any kind. Dell, PowerEdge, PowerVault, OpenManage, and ReadyRails are trademarks of Dell, Inc. Citrix® and XenServer™ are trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. and/or one or more of its subsidiaries, and may be registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. ENERGY STAR is a registered trademark of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). Intel, Xeon, and Pentium are registered trademarks and Core is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. HP and COMPAQ are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company. Broadcom is a registered trademark and NetXtreme is a trademark of Broadcom Corporation and/or its affiliates in the United States, certain other countries and/or the EU. CommVault Galaxy® or Simpana® are registered trademarks of CommVault Systems, Inc. InfiniBand is a registered trademark and service mark of the InfiniBand Trade Association. Matrox is a registered trademark of Matrox Electronic Systems Ltd. Microsoft and SQL Server are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Mellanox is a registered trademark of Mellanox Technologies, Inc. and ConnectX, InfiniBlast, InfiniBridge, InfiniHost, InfiniRISC, InfiniScale, and InfiniPCI are trademarks of Mellanox Technologies, Inc. Red Hat is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Symantec and Backup Exec are trademarks owned by Symantec Corporation or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. Novell, SUSE, PlateSpin, and PowerConvert are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. QLogic and PathScale are registered trademarks of Qlogic Corporation. VMware is a registered trademark and vSphere is a trademark of VMware, Inc. in the United States and/or other jurisdictions. Vizioncore, vRanger, vConverter, and vFoglight are trademarks of Vizioncore Inc. in the United States of America and other countries. Winbond is a registered trademark of Winbond Electronics Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell disclaims proprietary interest in the marks and names of others. ©Copyright 2010 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction or translation of any part of this work beyond that permitted by U.S. copyright laws without the written permission of Dell Inc. is unlawful and strictly forbidden. Initial Release April 2010 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 3 Table of Contents 1 Product Comparison........................................................................... 7 2 New Technologies ........................................................................... 11 2.1 Overview................................................................................ 11 2.2 Detailed Information.................................................................. 11 2.2.1 System Management ............................................................ 11 2.2.2 Software RAID.................................................................... 11 2.2.3 eSATA.............................................................................. 13 3 System Overview ............................................................................ 14 4 Mechanical.................................................................................... 16 4.1 Chassis Description.................................................................... 16 4.2 Dimensions and Weight............................................................... 16 4.3 Front Panel View and Features...................................................... 17 4.4 Back Panel View and Features ...................................................... 18 4.5 Power Supply Indicators .............................................................. 18 4.5.1 Power Button LED ............................................................... 18 4.5.2 System Status/ID LED ........................................................... 18 4.6 NIC Indicators .......................................................................... 18 4.7 Side View ............................................................................... 19 4.8 Internal Chassis View ................................................................. 20 4.9 Rails ..................................................................................... 21 4.10 Fans...................................................................................... 22 4.11 Control Panel LED ..................................................................... 22 4.12 Security ................................................................................. 22 4.12.1 Top Cover Lock Mechanism .................................................... 22 4.12.2 Bezel............................................................................... 22 4.12.3 Trusted Platform Module (TPM)............................................... 22 4.12.4 Power Switch Security .......................................................... 23 4.12.5 Intrusion Alert.................................................................... 23 4.12.6 Secure Mode...................................................................... 24 4.13 USB Ports ............................................................................... 24 4.14 Battery .................................................................................. 24 4.15 Field Replaceable Units (FRU)....................................................... 25 4.16 User Accessible Jumpers, Sockets, and Connectors ............................. 25 5 Power, Thermal, Acoustic ................................................................. 26 5.1 Power Supplies......................................................................... 26 5.2 Power Supply Connectors on the Planar........................................... 26 5.3 Environmental Specifications........................................................ 27 5.3.1 Temperature ..................................................................... 27 5.3.2 Relative Humidity ............................................................... 27 5.3.3 Maximum Vibration.............................................................. 27 5.3.4 Maximum Shock.................................................................. 27 5.3.5 Altitude ........................................................................... 27 5.3.6 Airborne Contaminant Level................................................... 27 5.4 Power Supply Unit (PSU) Specifications............................................ 28 5.5 ENERGY STAR® Compliance .......................................................... 28 5.6 Thermal ................................................................................. 28 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 4 5.7 Acoustics ................................................................................ 29 6 Processors .................................................................................... 31 6.1 Overview................................................................................ 31 6.2 Supported Processors ................................................................. 31 6.3 Processor Configurations ............................................................. 31 7 Memory........................................................................................ 32 7.1 Overview................................................................................ 32 7.2 DIMMs Supported ...................................................................... 32 7.3 Slots/Risers ............................................................................. 33 7.4 Speed.................................................................................... 33 7.5 Sparing .................................................................................. 33 7.6 Mirroring ................................................................................ 33 7.7 RAID...................................................................................... 33 8 Chipset ........................................................................................ 34 8.1 Overview................................................................................ 34 8.2 Direct Media Interface................................................................ 34 8.3 PCI Express Interface ................................................................. 34 8.4 SATA Interface ......................................................................... 34 8.5 AHCI ..................................................................................... 34 8.6 PCI Interface ........................................................................... 34 8.7 Low Pin Count (LPC) Interface ...................................................... 35 8.8 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) .................................................... 35 8.9 Compatibility Module ................................................................. 35 8.10 Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC) ........................... 35 8.11 USB Interface........................................................................... 35 8.12 Real-Time Clock (RTC)................................................................ 36 8.13 GPIO ..................................................................................... 36 8.14 Enhanced Power Management....................................................... 36 8.15 System Management Features ....................................................... 36 8.15.1 TCO Timer ........................................................................ 36 8.15.2 Processor Present Indicator.................................................... 36 8.15.3 Error Code Correction (ECC) Reporting ...................................... 36 8.15.4 Function Disable ................................................................. 37 8.16 System Management Bus (SMBus 2.0) .............................................. 37 8.17 Intel Anti-Theft Technology ......................................................... 37 8.18 Intel Virtualization Technology for Directed I/O................................. 37 8.19 JTAG Boundary-Scan .................................................................. 38 9 BIOS............................................................................................ 39 9.1 Overview................................................................................ 39 9.2 ACPI...................................................................................... 40 9.3 Power Management Modes ........................................................... 40 9.3.1 Dell Active Power Controller .................................................. 40 9.3.2 Power Saving BIOS Setting (OS Control) ..................................... 41 9.3.3 Maximum Performance ......................................................... 41 10 I/O Slots....................................................................................... 43 10.1 Overview................................................................................ 43 10.2 PCI Devices ............................................................................. 44 10.3 Boot Order.............................................................................. 47 10.4 NICs ...................................................................................... 47 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 5 11 Storage ........................................................................................ 48 11.1 Overview................................................................................ 48 11.2 Drives.................................................................................... 48 11.3 RAID Configurations ................................................................... 49 11.4 Optical Disk Drive (ODD) ............................................................. 49 11.5 Tape Drives ............................................................................. 50 12 Video and Audio ............................................................................. 51 12.1 Video .................................................................................... 51 12.2 Audio .................................................................................... 51 13 Rack Information ............................................................................ 52 13.1 Overview................................................................................ 52 13.2 Rails ..................................................................................... 52 13.3 Cable Management Arm (CMA) ...................................................... 52 14 Operating Systems .......................................................................... 53 15 Virtualization................................................................................. 55 16 Systems Management ....................................................................... 56 16.1 Overview................................................................................ 56 16.2 Server Management ................................................................... 56 16.3 Embedded Server Management ..................................................... 57 16.4 Lifecycle Controller and Unified Server Configurator ........................... 57 16.5 iDRAC6 Express ........................................................................ 58 16.6 iDRAC6 Enterprise ..................................................................... 58 17 Peripherals ................................................................................... 61 17.1 USB....................................................................................... 61 17.2 USB Device.............................................................................. 61 17.3 External Storage ....................................................................... 62 18 Packaging Options ........................................................................... 62 Tables Table 1. Comparison of PowerEdge Server Features ......................................8 Table 2. Comparison Overview PERC S100 and S300..................................... 12 Table 3. eSATA Modes ........................................................................ 13 Table 4. Product Feature Summary ........................................................ 14 Table 5. Overall Dimensions and Weight .................................................. 16 Table 6. Specific Measurements ............................................................ 16 Table 7. TPM Pin Signals ..................................................................... 23 Table 8. Power Supply 24 Pins and Signals ................................................ 26 Table 9. Power Supply 4 Pins and Signals ................................................. 26 Table 10. PSU Specifications.................................................................. 28 Table 11. Acoustical Specifications .......................................................... 29 Table 12. Processor Information ............................................................. 31 Table 13. Supported Processor Configurations............................................. 32 Table 14. Wake Up Events and States ....................................................... 40 Table 15. Summary of R210 Power Management Features ............................... 41 Table 16. Power Profiles that R210 BIOS will Expose in BIOS Setup .................... 42 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 6 Table 17. I/O Slot Information ............................................................... 45 Table 18. PCI Card Dimensions ............................................................... 46 Table 19. Bandwidth, Quantities, and Priorities........................................... 46 Table 20. Available Drives..................................................................... 48 Table 21. RAID Configurations ................................................................ 49 Table 22. Supported Tape Drives............................................................. 50 Table 23. PowerEdge R210 Rail Information ............................................... 52 Table 24. Supported Microsoft Operating Systems ........................................ 53 Table 25. Supported Linux Operating Systems ............................................. 54 Table 26. Supported Virtualization OS ...................................................... 55 Table 27. Unified Server Configurator Features and Description ....................... 58 Table 28. Features List for BMC, iDRAC6, and vFlash..................................... 59 Table 29. USB Controller Priorities .......................................................... 61 Table 30. External Storage .................................................................... 62 Table 31. AMF Single Pack Dimensions and Weights ...................................... 63 Table 32. EMF Single Pack Dimensions and Weights ...................................... 63 Table 33. PowerEdge R210 Volatility ........................................................ 66 Table 34. Volatility: Data Writing and Purpose ............................................ 68 Table 35. Methodology for Data Input to Memory ......................................... 69 Table 36. Methodology for Memory Protection and Clearing ............................ 71 Figures Figure 1. Server Dimensions .................................................................. 17 Figure 2. Front Panel View ................................................................... 17 Figure 3. Back Panel View .................................................................... 18 Figure 4. Power Button LED .................................................................. 18 Figure 5. Side View ............................................................................ 19 Figure 6. Internal Chassis View .............................................................. 20 Figure 7. R210 Static Rails .................................................................... 21 Figure 8. R210 Mounted In Four-Post Square-Hole Rack ................................. 21 Figure 9. System Fans ......................................................................... 22 Figure 10. Intrusion Switch.................................................................. 23 Figure 11. Internal USB Ports ............................................................... 24 Figure 12. Battery on Motherboard ........................................................ 25 Figure 13. PCIe x16 Riser Card ............................................................. 43 Figure 14. SAS 6/iR Adapter Card Installed............................................... 44 Figure 15. Rack Adjustability Range....................................................... 52 Figure 16. Packaging ......................................................................... 64 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 7 1 Product Comparison Dell aims to add value to your business by including the features you need without a lot of the unnecessary extras. Our goal is to deliver value through tailored solutions based on industry standards, as well as purposeful, innovative design of our servers. The Dell™ PowerEdge™ R210 was developed with a purposeful design, energy-optimized technology, simplified systems management, and the flexibility that make it a great first rack server for the small business or as a specialized application server or edge server for larger corporations. Dell’s entry 1-socket 1U rack server, the PowerEdge R210, offers value, the performance of Intel® Xeon® 3400 series processors, DDR3 memory, eSATA external storage expandability, and enterprise-class manageability in an ultra-compact chassis. Purposeful Design: The PowerEdge R210 follows the 11th generation PowerEdge portfolio specifications and features the same system design commonality and reliability true to the entire portfolio. All 11th generation PowerEdge servers are built to make the user experience easier. We put all external ports, power supplies, and LED lights in the same location for familiar experience as well as easy installation and deployment. Robust, metal hard drive carriers and organized cabling are designed to help improve component access and airflow across the server. The PowerEdge R210’s design also provides a LED display positioned on the front of the server for ease of monitoring and troubleshooting condition of the server. It was designed to meet the needs of many IT environments with a short 15.5 inch chassis to allow for flexible deployment almost anywhere, including spaceconstrained environments. Energy Efficiency: The PowerEdge R210 incorporates Energy Smart design using a low 250 watt power supply, low-flow fans and logical component layout of the internal components which aids with airflow direction, helping to keep the server cool and reduce noise as much as possible. The result is a server with the smallest power footprint within the 11th generation PowerEdge server portfolio. Simplified System Management: With the optional advanced embedded systems management capabilities of Lifecycle Controller, Dell brings comprehensive enterprise class manageability into the 1-socket space. Lifecycle Controller is delivered as part of the optional iDRAC Express or iDRAC Enterprise in the PowerEdge R210. The Lifecycle Controller helps to simplify administrator tasks by performing a comprehensive set of provisioning functions such as system deployment, system updates, hardware configuration and diagnostics from a single intuitive interface called Unified Server Configurator (USC) in a pre-OS environment. This helps eliminate the need to use and maintain multiple pieces of disparate CD/DVD media. Also part of the Dell OpenManage™ portfolio is the Dell Management Console which is included with every Dell server and provides IT administrators with a consolidated console view of their IT infrastructure. Built with cost-effective RAID options to further protect your valuable data, new eSATA external storage connectivity options, and the latest Intel® Xeon® processor technology, the PowerEdge R210 is an ideal entry 1 socket 1U rack for small businesses and larger offices needing flexibility and manageability in a very small chassis. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 8 Table 1. Comparison of PowerEdge Server Features Feature R210 R200 (Predecessors) R310 (Next level up) Processor Quad-core Intel® Xeon® processor 3400 series Dual-core Intel® Celeron® G1101 Dual-core Intel® Pentium® G6950 Dual-core Intel® Core i3 530 Dual-core Intel® Core i3 540 processors Single Quad-Core Intel® Xeon® 3300 series Single Dual-Core Intel® Xeon® E3100 series Single Quad-Core Intel® Xeon® 3200 series Single Dual-Core Intel® Xeon® 3000 series Single Intel® CoreTM 2 Duo® E4000 series Single Intel® CoreTM 2 Duo® E7000 series Single Intel® Pentium® Dual-Core E2000 series Single Intel® Celeron® E1000 and 400 series Quad-core Intel® Xeon® processor 3400 series Dual-core Intel® Celeron® G1101 Dual-core Intel® Pentium® G6950 Dual-core Intel® Core i3 530 Dual-core Intel® Core i3 540 processors Front Side Bus DMI 1333MHz DMI @2.5 Gb/s # Processors 1 1 1 # Cores Dual or Quad Dual or Quad Dual or Quad L2/L3 Cache 4MB or 8MB 512K~6M Intel® Xeon®: 8M DT proc: 4, 3 or 2M Chipset Intel® 3420 chipset Intel® 3210 chipset+ICH9R Intel® 3420 chipset DIMMs 4 DDR3 Unbuffered w/ECC 1333/1066 MHz 4 DDR2 Unbuffered w/ECC 800/ 667MHz 6 DDR3 Unbuffered w/ECC or Registered w/ECC 1333/1066MHz Min/Max RAM 1GB/16GB 512MB/8GB 1GB/32GB HD Bays 2 x 3.5” or 2 x 2.5” 2 x 3.5” 4 x 3.5” Optional Hot-Swap Support 2.5" HDDs via Hot-Swap tray HD Types Default SATA. Optional SAS and SSD via add-in controller Default SATA. Optional SAS via addin controller Default SATA. Optional SAS and SSD via add-in controller Ext Drive Bay(s) 1 for slim ODD 1 for slim ODD 1 for slim ODD Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 9 Feature R210 R200 (Predecessors) R310 (Next level up) Embedded HD Controller Chipset based SATA Chipset based SATA Chipset based SATA Optional Storage Controller NON-RAID: SAS 5/E LSI 2032 (For TBU only) RAID: SAS 6/iR Adapter PERC S100 PERC S300 PERC H200 PERC 6/E PERC H800 NON-RAID: SAS 5/E LSI 2032 (For TBU only) RAID: SAS 6/iR Adapter PERC 6/E NON-RAID: SAS HBA LSI 2032 (For TBU only), PERC H800 RAID: SAS 6/iR Modular PERC H200 (6Gb/s) PERC H700 (6Gb/s) with 512MB PERC H700 (6Gb/s) NV DRAM with 512MB or 1G PERC S100 (software based) PERC S300 Modular (software based) Availability ECC Memory, ADD-in RAID, TPM/CTPM ECC memory, Add-in RAID, toolless chassis Hot-swap HDD; Redundant PSU; Quad-pack LED diagnostic/LCD with Hot-swap HDD chassis ;ECC Memory Server Mgt. BMC, IPMI 2.0 compliant; Full Dell™ OpenManage™ suite Optional; iDRAC6 Express, iDRAC6 Enterprise, vFlash DRAC4 Full Dell™ OpenManage™ suite BMC, IPMI 2.0 compliant; Full Dell™ OpenManage™ suite Optional; iDRAC6 Express, iDRAC6 Enterprise, vFlash I/O Slots 1 x PCIe x16 (True x16, Gen2); full height, half length Support x16 bandwidth card under 25W Riser 1: One PCIex 8, one PCIe x4 (w/ x8 connector) Riser 2: One PCI-X 64/133 and one PCIe x8 Riser 1: PCIe x16 (x8 routing), Full Height/ Half Length, Gen 2 Riser 2: PCIe x8 (x8 routing), Full Height / Half Length, Gen 2 2 PCIe G2 slots: Slot 1: PCIe x16 (x8 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 10 Feature R210 R200 (Predecessors) R310 (Next level up) RAID See Optional Storage Controller row above See Optional Storage Controller row above See Optional Storage Controller row above NIC/LOM 2x GbE LOM w/o TOE Optional: various NIC available 2x GbE LOM Optional: various NIC available 2x GbE LOM Optional: various NIC available USB 2 front/2 rear/2 internal 2 front/2 rear 2 front/2 rear/2 internal Power Supplies Non-redundant, 250W (80+ Bronze) Auto Ranging (100V~240V) Non-redundant, 345W Non-redundant, 350W (80+ Bronze) Optional redundant, 400W (80+ Silver) Auto Ranging (100V~240V) Fans Non-redundant, nonhot swappable Non-redundant, nonhot swappable Non-redundant, nonhot swappable Form Factor 1U rack 1U rack 1U rack Dimensions (HxWxD) 42.6 x 431 x 393.7 (mm) (w/o ear and bezel) 1.67” x 17.1” x 15.5” 42.67 x 447.0 x 546.1 (mm) (w/o ear and bezel) 1.68” x 17.6” x 21.5” 42.4 x 434.0 x 610 (mm) ( w/o bezel) 1.67” x 17.10” x 24.00” Weight Max. 17.76 lbs (8.058 Kg) Max. 28.7 lbs (13.01 Kg) Max. 33.02 lbs (15 Kg) Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 11 2 New Technologies 2.1 Overview A number of new technologies are used in the PowerEdge R210, including: • iDRAC6 (new Dell server remote management controller) • Software RAID PERC S100 and PERC S300 • E-SATA connector 2.2 Detailed Information 2.2.1 System Management The PowerEdge R210 supports iDRAC6 Express and Enterprise for advanced manageability. For more information on iDRAC 6 options, please see Section 16, Systems Management. 2.2.2 Software RAID Dell PowerEdge RAID controller portfolio now offers Enterprise Software RAID in the PERC S100 and PERC S300 options. PERC S100 and S300 are supported in PowerEdge 11th generation value-based servers. Software RAID code uses the CPU of the computer system to execute the RAID tasks including leveraging the CPUs (calculating power as well as sharing memory), internal bus resources, operating system, and all associated applications. Software-based RAID uses drives which are attached to the computer system via a built-in I/O interface or a processor-less host bus adapter (HBA). The RAID function becomes active as soon as the operating system has loaded the RAID driver software. Previous generations of PERC controllers have been based on Hardware RAID technology, the PERC S100 and PERC S300 are based on Software RAID technology. The software based RAID options provide a cost effective entry-level RAID. Both the PERCS100 and S300 versions offer similar RAID level support, including RAID 0, 1, 5, 10. In the case of the PERC S100, it offers a minimal RAID option where the I/O Controller Hub (ICH) chipset of the motherboard enables a SATA RAID option. There is no new hardware involved. The PERC S100 controller solution supports up to 4 cabled SATA Hard Disk Drives (HDD) or Solid State Disk (SSD) drives and is ideal for SMB usage scenarios. For the PERC S300, the hardware component of the controller is based on the Dell SAS HBA (leveraging SAS 6/iR) and allows for both SAS and SATA connectivity. PERC S300 controller solution supports up to 8 cabled or hot plug SAS/SATA Hard Disk Drives (HDDs). Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 12 Table 2. Comparison Overview PERC S100 and S300 Feature/Spec S100 S300 Interface 3Gb SATA (SATA II) 3Gb SAS/SATA (SAS 1.1) I/O Controller Intel® ICH10R Dell 3Gb/s SAS Adapter (2 internal connectors with x4 SAS ports) System Communication Integrated PCIe Lanes Cache Memory N/A N/A Battery-backed cache No No Max Number of Physical Drives 4 8 HDD Support SATA (Cabled) SAS & SATA (Cabled or hot plug) SSD Support SATA (Cabled) Not Supported SED Support Not Supported Not Supported RAID Levels 0, 1, 5, 10 0, 1, 5, 10 Non-RAID Volumes Yes Yes Max Number of Virtual Disks per Controller 8 8 Global Hotspare Support Yes Yes Operating System Support (Windows Server Only) Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 SP2, 32/64-bit, Standard & Enterprise Editions* Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 SP2 32-bit Web Edition Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 SP2, 32/64-bit, Standard & Enterprise Editions Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2, 64-bit, Web, Standard, and Enterprise Editions Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 SP2, 32/64-bit, Standard & Enterprise Editions* Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 SP2 32-bit Web Edition Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 SP2, 32/64-bit, Standard & Enterprise Editions Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2, 64-bit, Web, Standard, and Enterprise Editions Virtualization Support Not Supported Not Supported Storage Management OpenManage™ 6.2 or later OpenManage 6.2™ or later Note: Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 is supported with Service Pack 2. For the most Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 13 up-to-date information, see the Operating System Support Matrix for Dell PowerEdge Systems on Dell.com. 2.2.3 eSATA External Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (eSATA) serves as an external interface for SATA technologies. For customers who want fast (up to 1.5Gbit/s), easyto-use external storage that has advanced features such as S.M.A.R.T. (SelfMonitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology) protection, eSATA may be a good choice. eSATA devices are not bootable when BIOS is set to RAID mode and are not supported as a part of Virtual Disks when in RAID mode for S100. To operate eSATA devices in the Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® 4.8 environment, the BIOS mode must be manually switched from default (AHCI mode) to ATA mode. Table 3. eSATA Modes Mode Bootable Hot-Pluggable Restrictions ATA mode Yes No AHCI mode Yes Yes RHEL 4.8 is not supported. RAID mode (S100 enabled) No No Linux and Virtualization OS are not supported Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 14 3 System Overview Table 4. Product Feature Summary Feature Product Description Form Factor Rack Processors Quad-core Intel® Xeon® 3400 series processors Dual-core Intel® Celeron® G1101 Dual-core Intel® Pentium® G6950 Dual-core Intel® Core™ i3 530 Dual-core Intel® Core™ i3 540 processors Processor Sockets 1 Front Side Bus or HyperTransport DMI (Direct Media Interface) Cache 8MB Chipset Intel® 3420 chipset Memory Up to 16GB (4 U-DIMMs): 1GB/2GB/4GB DDR3 1066MHz or 1333MHz I/O Slots 1 PCIe x16 G2 slot RAID Controllers Internal Controllers: SAS 6/iR PERC S100 (software-based) PERC S300 (software-based) PERC H200 External Controllers: PERC 6/E with 256MB or 512MB of battery-backed cache SAS 5/E PERC H800 LSI2032 PCIe SCSI HBA Drive Bays Cabled options available: Up to two 2.5”/ 3.5” SAS, SATA or SSD drives Maximum Internal Storage 4TB Hard Drives 3.5 inch SATA (7.2K rpm): 160GB, 250GB, 500GB, 1TB, 2TB 3.5 inch Near-line SAS (7.2 rpm): 1TB, 2TB 3.5 inch SAS (10K rpm): 600GB 3.5 inch SAS (15K rpm): 146GB, 300GB, 450GB, 600GB 2.5 inch SAS (10K rpm): 146GB, 300GB Network Interface Cards 1 Broadcom® NetXtreme™ 5709 with Dual Port Gigabit Ethernet NIC, Copper, w/TOE PCIe x4 Broadcom® NetXtreme™ 5709 Dual Port Gigabit Ethernet NIC, Copper, TOE/ISCI PCIe x4 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 15 Feature Product Description Intel® PRO/ 1000PT Single Port Adapter, Gigabit Ethernet NIC, PCIe x1 Intel® Gigabit ET Dual Port Adapter, Gigabit Ethernet NIC, PCIe x4 Intel® Gigabit ET Quad Port Adapter, Gigabit Ethernet NIC, PCIe x4 Power Supply Single-cabled power supply (250W) Availability Quad-pack LED diagnostics, ECC Memory, add-in RAID, TPM/CTPM Video Matrox® G200eW w/ 8MB memory Remote Management iDRAC6 optional Systems Management BMC, IPMI 2.0 compliant Dell™ OpenManage™ featuring Dell Management Console Unified Server Configurator Lifecycle Controller enabled via optional: iDRAC6 Express, iDRAC6 Enterprise and vFlash Rack Support Support for Static ReadyRails™ 4-post and 2-post racks Operating Systems Microsoft® Factory Installed OS Options: Microsoft® Windows® Small Business Server 2008, 64-bit Standard and Premium Edition Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 with SP2 32-bit Standard and Enterprise Edition Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 with SP2 64-bit, Standard and Enterprise Editions Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 32-bit, Web, Standard and Enterprise Edition Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 64-bit, Web, Standard and Enterprise Editions Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 SP2 32-bit, Web, Standard and Enterprise Edition Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 SP2 64-bit, Web, Standard and Enterprise Edition Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 64-bit Web, Standard and Enterprise Edition Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Foundation Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Foundation R2 Microsoft® Non- Factory Installed OS Option: Microsoft® Windows® Essential Business Server 2008 64-bit Standard and Premium Edition Factory Installed Linux OS Options: Novell® SUSE® Linux® Enterprise Server 11 Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® 5.3 Virtualization OS Option: Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008, with Hyper-V™ Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 16 4 Mechanical 4.1 Chassis Description The PowerEdge R210 is a 1-socket 1U server. The configuration details are as follows: • HDD Type : 2x 3.5” Cabled HDD or 2 x 2.5” cabled HDD • PSU Type: Single Non-Redundant PSU • Diagnostic: LED 4.2 Dimensions and Weight Table 5. Overall Dimensions and Weight Dimensions (HxWxD) (w/o ear and bezel) 1.68” x 17” x 15.5” (42.6 x 431 x 393.7 mm) Max Weight 17.76 lbs (8.058kg) Measurements in Table 6 correspond to the diagram shown in Figure 1 below. Table 6. Specific Measurements Xa Xb Ya Yb Yc Za with bezel Za without bezel Zb* Zc L6 Sys Wgt (Kg) 434.0 482.58 42.4 N/A N/A 31.35 NA 393.7 397.49 5.95 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 17 Figure 1. Server Dimensions * Zb goes to the nominal rear wall external surface where the motherboard I/O connectors reside. 4.3 Front Panel View and Features Figure 2. Front Panel View Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 18 4.4 Back Panel View and Features Figure 3. Back Panel View 4.5 Power Supply Indicators 4.5.1 Power Button LED The Power button controls the system's power, turning the unit on and off. All PowerEdge servers have the Power LED light-pipe integrated in the Power button. The color of the power LED is green. The lighting pattern must be in the form of a standard Power icon. Figure 4. Power Button LED 4.5.2 System Status/ID LED The System Status/ID LED, present on non-modular rack-dense and rackable tower PowerEdge servers, has the following states: • No light—System is in the off state (S5, or mechanical (no AC power) • Blinking Amber—System fault/error condition. • Steady Blue—Normal operating state (S0) • Blinking Blue—System ID engaged This LED remains powered during non-operational (standby, shutdown) modes to enable system identification. 4.6 NIC Indicators See the Hardware Owner’s Manual for information. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 19 4.7 Side View Figure 5. Side View Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 20 4.8 Internal Chassis View Figure 6. Internal Chassis View Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 21 4.9 Rails ReadyRails™ static rails for tool-less mounting in 4-post racks with square or unthreaded round holes or tooled mounting in 4-post threaded and 2-post racks The R210 rails must first be attached to the sides of the system and then inserted into the cabinet members installed in the rack. For additional information regarding rail options for the R210, see Section 13. Figure 7. R210 Static Rails Figure 8. R210 Mounted In Four-Post Square-Hole Rack Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 22 4.10 Fans There are three system fans located in the middle of the system. Figure 9. System Fans 4.11 Control Panel LED See the Hardware Owner’s Manual for information. 4.12 Security 4.12.1 Top Cover Lock Mechanism The PowerEdge R210 uses a coin lock on the top cover. This lock must be unlocked and the cover removed to access the internal components. 4.12.2 Bezel The bezel lock is located on the front of the bezel and provides security for the system by preventing access to optical disk drives and the Power button. 4.12.3 Trusted Platform Module (TPM) The PowerEdge R210 uses a TPM 1.2 compliant encryption chip solution on the system board with BIOS support worldwide, except for China where Trusted Computing Module (TCM) is the standard. TPM is disabled by default. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 23 Table 7. TPM Pin Signals Pin SIGNAL Pin SIGNAL 1 TPM_PRES_N 20 I2C_TPM_SCL 2 LPC_LAD0 19 P3V3 3 GND 18 I2C_TPM_SDA 4 LPC_LAD1 17 LPC_LAD3 5 SEEPROM I2C Address E0 16 GND 6 P3V3_AUX 15 SERIRQ 7 RST_TPM_R_N 14 P3V3 8 LPC_LFRAME_N 13 LPC_LAD2 9 GND 12 GND 10 TPM 33MHz Clock 11 TPM 14MHz Clock 4.12.4 Power Switch Security The LED control panel is designed so the power switch cannot be accidentally turned on or off. In addition, in BIOS there is an optional setting in the CMOS setup to disable the power switch. 4.12.5 Intrusion Alert The intrusion switch snaps into the chassis located under the side cover. The intrusion switch detects and alerts the user that the side cover is open. Figure 10. Intrusion Switch Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 24 4.12.6 Secure Mode BIOS has the ability to enter a secure boot mode via setup. This mode includes the option to lock out the power and NMI switches on the control panel or set up a system password. See the BIOS specification in the Hardware Owner’s Manual for information. 4.13 USB Ports The PowerEdge R210 has two internal USB ports. Figure 11. Internal USB Ports 4.14 Battery A replaceable lithium battery (CR2032) is mounted on the motherboard to provide backup power for the real-time clock and CMOS RAM in the Platform Controller Hub (PCH). Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 25 Figure 12. Battery on Motherboard 4.15 Field Replaceable Units (FRU) The planar contains a 16K x 8 serial EEPROM to store FRU information including Dell part number, part revision level, and serial number. This information is used by the SEL (system event log) and the BMC (baseboard management controller). Parts available for field replacement include: • CMOS battery • Expansion card • Front bezel • HDD • I/O panel • Memory • ODD • Power supply • Processor • Processor shroud • System board • System fan 4.16 User Accessible Jumpers, Sockets, and Connectors See the Hardware Owner’s Manual. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 26 5 Power, Thermal, Acoustic 5.1 Power Supplies The base system includes a single 250W power supply. This unit provides power to the planar and the two internal hard drive bays. Power will be “soft-switched” allowing power cycling using a switch on the front of the system enclosure or through software control (server management functions). The power system is compatible with industry standards, such as ACPI and Server 2000. Standard VRD (Voltage Regulator Down) modules that conform to VRD11.1 specification are used. This reduces the board layout complexity while offering design modularity. As processor speeds increase, a newer VRD can be used to accommodate the power increase with no need to re-spin the board. The VRD is integrated onto the planar and is not field upgradeable. 5.2 Power Supply Connectors on the Planar There are 2 separate power supply connectors on the planar. One connector is an ATX connector (2x12) and the other one is a 2x2 connector to provide an additional two pins for +12V. The connector Pin definition (2 x 12 power connector) is not ATX standard. The 2x12 connector provides 3.3V, 5V, 12V, and 12V standby to the system. (3.3V standby to system is generated from 12V standby). Table 8. Power Supply 24 Pins and Signals Pin SIGNAL Pin SIGNAL 1 P3V3 13 P3V3 2 P3V3 14 P12V1 3 GND 15 GND 4 P5V 16 PS_ON_N 5 GND 17 GND 6 P5V 18 GND 7 GND 19 GND 8 PS_PWROK 20 P12V1 9 P12V_STBY 21 P5V 10 P12V1 22 P5V 11 P12V1 23 P5V 12 P3V3 24 GND Table 9. Power Supply 4 Pins and Signals Pin SIGNAL Pin SIGNAL 1 GND 3 P12V2 2 GND 4 P12V2 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 27 5.3 Environmental Specifications 5.3.1 Temperature Operating: 10° to 35°C (50° to 95°F) with a maximum temperature gradation of 10°C per hour (NOTE: For altitudes above 2950 feet, the maximum operating temperature is de-rated 1ºF/550 ft.) Storage: –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F) with a maximum temperature gradation of 20°C per hour 5.3.2 Relative Humidity Operating: 20% to 80% (non-condensing) with a maximum humidity gradation of 10% per hour Storage: 5% to 95% (non-condensing) 5.3.3 Maximum Vibration Operating : 0.26 Grms at 5–350 Hz for 15 min Storage: 1.54 Grms at 10–250 Hz for 15 min 5.3.4 Maximum Shock Operating: One shock pulse in the positive z axis (one pulse on each side of the system) of 31 G for 2.6 ms in the operational orientation Storage: Six consecutively executed shock pulses in the positive and negative x, y, and z axes (one pulse on each side of the system) of 71 G for up to 2 ms Six consecutively executed shock pulses in the positive and negative x, y, and z axes (one pulse on each side of the system) of 32 G faired square wave pulse with velocity change at 270 inches/second (686 centimeters/second) 5.3.5 Altitude Operating: 16 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft) (Note: For altitudes above 2950 feet, the maximum operating temperature is de-rated 1ºF/550 ft.) Storage: 16 to 10,600 m (–50 to 35,000 ft) 5.3.6 Airborne Contaminant Level Class: G2 or lower as defined by ISA-S71.04-1985 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 28 5.4 Power Supply Unit (PSU) Specifications Table 10. PSU Specifications Feature Non Redundant PSU Dimensions L-2101 mm x W-106 mm x H-40.0 mm Status Indicators 1 x bi-color Light Emitting Diode Integrated Fans None AC Cord Rating 15 Amps @ 120 VAC, 10 Amps @ 240 VAC Input Voltage 90 – 264 VAC Auto-ranging Yes Line Frequency 47–63 Hertz Maximum Inrush Current Under typical line conditions and over the entire system ambient operating range, the inrush current may reach 25 Amps for 10 ms or less. Hot-Swap Capability No Output Power 250W Maximum Heat Dissipation 1039 BTU per hour maximum Efficiency 20% to 100% Load 82–85% @115 VAC 82–85% @ 230 VAC 1 Does not include the power supply handle or ejection tab 5.5 ENERGY STAR® Compliance See the ENERGY STAR Compliance results on Dell.com. 5.6 Thermal The thermal design of the PowerEdge R210 reflects the following: • Closed loop thermal control algorithm. Closed loop thermal control method uses feedback temperatures to dynamically determine proper fan speeds. • Comprehensive thermal management. The PowerEdge R210 controls system cooling fan speed based on several different responses from critical components’ sensors, such as CPU temperature, DIMM temperature, inlet ambient temperature, and system configurations. The thermal management adjusts proper cooling ability for the system according to what the system really needs. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 29 • Optimized Ventilation. R210 chassis has a custom ventilation design for optimized air flow path. Each component and peripheral is ensured sufficient air to cool. • Power-to-Cool. Dell continues to improve the design and cooling efficiency for server products. The power-to-cool ratio of the PowerEdge R210 is improved over that of its predecessor, PowerEdge R200. 5.7 Acoustics The acoustical design of the PowerEdge R210 reflects the following: • Adherence to Dell’s high sound quality standards. Sound quality is different from sound power level and sound pressure level in that it describes how humans respond to annoyances in sound, like whistles, hums, etc. One of the sound quality metrics in the Dell specification is prominence ratio of a tone, as listed in the table below. • Noise ramp and descent at bootup. Fan speeds, hence noise levels, ramp during the boot process in order to add a layer of protection for component cooling in case the system were not to boot properly. • Noise levels vs. configurations. The noise level of PowerEdge R210 is not dependent upon the hardware configuration of the system. The table below shows the noise levels of the PowerEdge R210 with maximum configuration. Table 11. Acoustical Specifications Configurations @ 23 ± 2 °C Operating Mode LWA-UL (Bels) LpA (dBA) PROMINENT CPU DIMM ODD HDD TONES Intel® Xeon® X3450 2.66 GHz 4 x 4GB 1 X DVD+/- RW 4 x 3.5” SAS (450 GB/ 15000 RPM) Standby 2.8 16 None Idle 6.5 49 None Stressed Processor 6.5 49 None Definitions Standby: AC Power is connected to Power Supply Units but system is not turned on. Idle: Reference ISO7779 (1999) definition 3.1.7; system is running in its OS but no other specific activity. Stressed Processor: An operating mode per ISO7779 (1999) definition 3.1.6. The software MemBW4 is activated to stress the processors. LwA–UL: The upper limit sound power level (LwA) calculated per section 4.4.2 of ISO 9296 (1988) and measured in accordance to ISO 7779 (1999). LpA: A-Weighted sound pressure level. The system is placed in a rack with its bottom at 75 cm from the floor. The acoustic transducer is at front bystander position, ref ISO7779 (1999) Section 8.6.2. Prominent tone: Criteria of D.5 and D.8 of ECMA-74 9th ed. (2005) are followed to determine if discrete tones are prominent. The system is placed in a rack with its Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 30 bottom at 75 cm from the floor. The acoustic transducer is at front bystander position, ref ISO7779 (1999) Section 8.6.2. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 31 6 Processors 6.1 Overview The PowerEdge R210 is a 1S, entry-level server based on the Intel FCLGA1156 to support Intel Xeon 3400 series and Core i3 processors. 6.2 Supported Processors Table 12. Processor Information Model Speed Power Cache Cores Max. Memory Intel® Xeon® X3430 2.4GHz 95W 8M 4C 1333MHz Intel® Xeon® X3440 2.53GHz 95W 8M 4C 1333MHz Intel® Xeon® X3450 2.67GHz 95W 8M 4C 1333MHz Intel® Xeon® X3460 2.8GHz 95W 8M 4C 1333MHz Intel® Xeon® X3470 2.93GHz 95W 8M 4C 1333MHz Intel® Xeon® L3426 1.86GHz 45W 8M 4C 1333MHz Intel® Core™ i3 540 3.06GHz 73W 4M 2C 1333MHz Intel® Core™ i3 530 2.93GHz 73W 4M 2C 1333MHz Intel® Pentium® G6950 2.8GHz 73W 3M 2C 1066MHz Intel® Celeron® G1101 2.26GHz 73W 2M 2C 1066MHz Intel® Xeon® L3406 2.26GHz 30W 4M 2C 1066MHz 6.3 Processor Configurations The PowerEdge R210 is a single socket 1U rack server that operates in single processor mode only. The memory controller is embedded in the processor. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 32 7 Memory 7.1 Overview Features of the PowerEdge R210 memory include: • 2 channels per processor • Support for Unbuffered ECC DDDR3 DIMMs. • Support for DDR3 speeds of 1066/1333 • 4 DIMM sockets (16GB Maximum capacity) • Support for Single Rank and Dual Rank DIMMs 7.2 DIMMs Supported The following DIMMs are supported by the PowerEdge R210: • 1GB, DDR3 UDIMM, 1066 w/ECC • 1GB, DDR3 UDIMM, 1333 w/ECC • 2GB, DDR3 UDIMM, 1066 w/ECC • 2GB, DDR3 UDIMM, 1333 w/ECC • 4GB, DDR3 UDIMM, 1066 w/ECC • 4GB, DDR3 UDIMM, 1333 w/ECC Table 13. Supported Processor Configurations System Capacity System Memory Speed DIMM Speed DIMM_T ECH DIMM Capacity NUM_DI MM Slot NUM_ Rank Data Width 1GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 1 1 1 1 X8 1GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 1 1 1 1 X8 2GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 1 2 1,2 1 X8 2GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 1 2 1,2 1 X8 4GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 1 4 1,2,3,4 1 X8 4GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 2 2 1,2 2 X8 4GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 1 4 1,2,3,4 1 X8 4GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 2 2 1,2 2 X8 8GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 2 4 1,2,3,4 2 X8 8GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 4 2 1,2 2 X8 8GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 2 4 1,2,3,4 2 X8 8GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 4 2 1,2 2 X8 16GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 4 4 1,2,3,4 2 X8 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 33 System Capacity System Memory Speed DIMM Speed DIMM_T ECH DIMM Capacity NUM_DI MM Slot NUM_ Rank Data Width 16GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 4 4 1,2,3,4 2 X8 2GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 2 1 1 2 X8 2GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 2 1 1 2 X8 4GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 4 1 1 2 X8 4GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 4 1 1 2 X8 7.3 Slots/Risers The PowerEdge R210 planar provides four 72-bit (240-pin) sockets for DIMM memory modules. These modules are DDR3-800/1066/1333 Unbuffered DDR SDRAM DIMMs. The modules are configured as 72 bits wide to provide for ECC. The memory controller in the CPU performs the ECC. The system supports a minimum of 1GB upgradeable to 16 of RAM, using the following DIMM sizes: • 1GB, DIMM Module • 2GB, DIMM Module • 4GB, DIMM Module 7.4 Speed The PowerEdge R210 supports 1066/1333MHz DDR3 memory. 7.5 Sparing Not supported. 7.6 Mirroring Not supported. 7.7 RAID Memory RAID is not supported. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 34 8 Chipset 8.1 Overview The PowerEdge R210 planar incorporates the Intel Ibex Peak as PCH chipset. The Ibex Peak is a highly integrated I/O controller. The high-level features supported by the chipset and implemented on the PowerEdge R210 are detailed in the sections that follow. 8.2 Direct Media Interface Direct Media Interface (DMI) is the chip-to-chip connection between the processor and Ibex Peak chipset. This high-speed interface integrates advanced priority-based servicing allowing for concurrent traffic and true isochronous transfer capabilities. Base functionality is completely software-transparent, permitting current and legacy software to operate normally. 8.3 PCI Express Interface The Ibex Peak provides up to 8 PCI Express Root Ports, supporting the PCI Express Base Specification, Revision 2.0. Each Root Port supports 2.5 GB/s bandwidth in each direction (5 GB/s concurrent). PCI Express Root Ports 1-4 can be statically configured as four x1 Ports or ganged together to form one x 4 ports. Ports 5 and 6 can only be used as two x 1 port. 8.4 SATA Interface The Ibex Peak has two integrated SATA host controllers that support independent DMA operation on up to six ports and supports data transfer rates of up to 3.0 GB/s (300MB/s). The SATA controller contains two modes of operation – a legacy mode using I/O space, and an AHCI mode using memory space. Software that uses legacy mode will not have AHCI capabilities. The Ibex Peak supports the Serial ATA Specification, Revision 1.0a. The Ibex Peak also supports several optional sections of the Serial ATA II: Extensions to Serial ATA 1.0 Specification, Revision 1.0 (AHCI support is required for some elements). 8.5 AHCI The Ibex Peak provides hardware support for Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI), a new programming interface for SATA host controllers. Platforms supporting AHCI may take advantage of performance features such as no master/slave designation for SATA devices—each device is treated as a master—and hardware-assisted native command queuing. AHCI also provides usability enhancements such as Hot-Plug. AHCI requires appropriate software support (e.g., an AHCI driver) and for some features, hardware support in the SATA device or additional platform hardware. 8.6 PCI Interface The Ibex Peak PCI interface provides a 33 MHz, Revision 2.3 implementation. The Ibex Peak integrates a PCI arbiter that supports up to four external PCI bus masters in addition to the internal Ibex Peak requests. This allows for combinations of up to four PCI down devices and PCI slots. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 35 8.7 Low Pin Count (LPC) Interface The Ibex Peak implements an LPC Interface as described in the LPC 1.1 Specification. The Low Pin Count (LPC) bridge function of the Ibex Peak resides in PCI Device 31:Function 0. In addition to the LPC bridge interface function, D31:F0 contains other functional units including DMA, interrupt controllers, timers, power management, system management, GPIO, and RTC. 8.8 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) The Ibex Peak implements an SPI Interface as an alternative interface for the BIOS flash device. An SPI flash device can be used as a replacement for the FWH, and is required to support Gigabit Ethernet, Intel® Active Management Technology and integrated Intel Quiet System Technology. The Ibex Peak supports up to two SPI flash devices with speed up to 20 MHz, 33 MHz utilizing two chip select pins. 8.9 Compatibility Module The DMA controller incorporates the logic of two 82C37 DMA controllers, with seven independently programmable channels. Channels 0–3 are hardwired to 8-bit, count-by-byte transfers, and channels 5–7 are hardwired to 16-bit, count-by-word transfers. Any two of the seven DMA channels can be programmed to support fast Type-F transfers. Channel 4 is reserved as a generic bus master request. The Ibex Peak supports LPC DMA, which is similar to ISA DMA, through the Ibex Peak’s DMA controller. LPC DMA is handled through the use of the LDRQ# lines from peripherals and special encoding on LAD[3:0] from the host. Single, Demand, Verify, and Increment modes are supported on the LPC interface. The timer/counter block contains three counters that are equivalent in function to those found in one 82C54 programmable interval timer. These three counters are combined to provide the system timer function, and speaker tone. The 14.31818 MHz oscillator input provides the clock source for these three counters. The Ibex Peak provides an ISA-Compatible Programmable Interrupt Controller (PIC) that incorporates the functionality of two, 82C59 interrupt controllers. The two interrupt controllers are cascaded so that 14 external and two internal interrupts are possible. In addition, the Ibex Peak supports a serial interrupt scheme. All of the registers in these modules can be read and restored. This is required to save and restore system state after power has been removed and restored to the platform. 8.10 Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC) In addition to the standard ISA compatible Programmable Interrupt controller (PIC) described in the previous section, the Ibex Peak incorporates the Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC). 8.11 USB Interface The Ibex Peak contains up to two Enhanced Host Controller Interface (EHCI) host controllers that support USB high-speed signaling. High-speed USB 2.0 allows data transfers up to 480 Mb/s which is 40 times faster than full-speed USB. The Ibex Peak also contains up to seven Universal Host Controller Interface (UHCI) controllers that support USB full-speed and low-speed signaling. The Ibex Peak supports up to fourteen USB 2.0 ports. All fourteen ports are high-speed, fullspeed, and low-speed capable. Ibex Peak’s port-routing logic determines whether a USB port is controlled by one of the UHCI or EHCI controllers. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 36 8.12 Real-Time Clock (RTC) The Ibex Peak contains a real-time clock with 256 bytes of battery-backed RAM. The real-time clock performs two key functions: keeping track of the time of day and storing system data, even when the system is powered down. The RTC operates on a 32.768 KHz crystal and a 3 V battery. The RTC also supports two lockable memory ranges. By setting bits in the configuration space, two 8-byte ranges can be locked to read and write accesses. This prevents unauthorized reading of passwords or other system security information. The RTC also supports a date alarm that allows for scheduling a wake up event up to 30 days in advance, rather than just 24 hours in advance. 8.13 GPIO Various general purpose inputs and outputs are provided for custom system design. The number of inputs and outputs varies depending on Ibex Peak configuration. 8.14 Enhanced Power Management The Ibex Peak’s power management functions include enhanced clock control and various lowpower (suspend) states (e.g., Suspend-to-RAM and Suspend-to-Disk). A hardware-based thermal management circuit permits software-independent entrance to low-power states. The Ibex Peak contains full support for the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) Specification, Revision 3.0a. 8.15 System Management Features In addition to Intel AMT, the Ibex Peak integrates several functions designed to manage the system and lower the total cost of ownership (TCO) of the system. These system management functions are designed to report errors, diagnose the system, and recover from system lockups without the aid of an external microcontroller. 8.15.1 TCO Timer The Ibex Peak’s integrated programmable TCO (Total Cost of Ownership) timer is used to detect system locks. The first expiration of the timer generates an SMI# that the system can use to recover from a software lock. The second expiration of the timer causes a system reset to recover from a hardware lock. 8.15.2 Processor Present Indicator The Ibex Peak looks for the processor to fetch the first instruction after reset. If the processor does not fetch the first instruction, the Ibex Peak will reboot the system. 8.15.3 Error Code Correction (ECC) Reporting When detecting an ECC error, the host controller has the ability to send one of several messages to the Ibex Peak. The host controller can instruct the Ibex Peak to generate an SMI#, NMI, SERR#, or TCO interrupt. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 37 8.15.4 Function Disable The Ibex Peak provides the ability to disable the following integrated functions: LAN, USB, LPC, Intel HD Audio, SATA, PCI Express or SMBus. Once disabled, these functions no longer decode I/O, memory, or PCI configuration space. Also, no interrupts or power management events are generated from the disabled functions. Intruder Detect. The Ibex Peak provides an input signal (INTRUDER#) that can be attached to a switch that is activated by the system case being opened. The Ibex Peak can be programmed to generate an SMI# or TCO interrupt due to an active INTRUDER# signal. 8.16 System Management Bus (SMBus 2.0) The Ibex Peak contains an SMBus Host interface that allows the processor to communicate with SMBus slaves. This interface is compatible with most I2C devices. Special I2C commands are implemented. The Ibex Peak’s SMBus host controller provides a mechanism for the processor to initiate communications with SMBus peripherals (slaves). Also, the Ibex Peak supports slave functionality, including the Host Notify protocol. Hence, the host controller supports eight command protocols of the SMBus interface (see System Management Bus (SMBus) Specification, Version 2.0): Quick Command, Send Byte, Receive Byte, Write Byte/Word, Read Byte/Word, Process Call, Block Read/Write, and Host Notify. Ibex Peak’s SMBus also implements hardware-based Packet Error Checking for data robustness and the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) to dynamically provide address to all SMBus devices. 8.17 Intel Anti-Theft Technology The Ibex Peak introduces a new hardware-based security technology which encrypts data stored on any SATA compliant HDD in AHCI Mode. This feature gives the end-user the ability to restrict access to HDD data by unknown parties. Intel Anti-Theft Technology can be used alone or can be combined with software encryption applications to add protection against data theft. Intel Anti-Theft Technology functionality requires a correctly configured system, including an appropriate processor, Intel Management Engine firmware, and system BIOS support. 8.18 Intel Virtualization Technology for Directed I/O The Ibex Peak provides hardware support for implementation of Intel Virtualization Technology with Directed I/O (Intel VT-d). Intel VT-d Technology consists of technology components that support the virtualization of platforms based on Intel Architecture Processors. Intel VT-d Technology enables multiple operating systems and applications to run in independent partitions. A partition behaves like a virtual machine (VM) and provides isolation and protection across partitions. Each partition is allocated its own subset of host physical memory. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 38 8.19 JTAG Boundary-Scan Ibex Peak adds the industry standard JTAG interface and enables Boundary-Scan in place of the XOR chains used in previous generations of the Ibex Peak. Boundary-Scan can be used to ensure device connectivity during the board manufacturing process. The JTAG interface allows system manufacturers to improve efficiency by using industry available tools to test the Ibex Peak on an assembled board. Since JTAG is a serial interface, it eliminates the need to create probe points for every pin in an XOR chain. This eases pin breakout and trace routing and simplifies the interface between the system and a bed-of-nails tester. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 39 9 BIOS 9.1 Overview The following features are supported by BIOS: • System BIOS • System Setup • Onboard PCI video BIOS support • SATA enabled for CDROM and HDD • PCI FW3.0 compliant • PCI-to-PCI bridge 1.0 compliant • Plug and Play BIOS 1.0a compliant • MP 1.4 • SMBIOS 2.5 • USB 1.1 with legacy USB support • USB 2.0 support in BIOS during pre-boot • Dell Server Assistant 7.0 support • System Service support • iDRAC supported • Error logging via ESM • ACPI 2.0 support (S0, OS-S4, S5 states) • I2O v1.5 ready • Selectable Boot support based on BIOS Boot Specification v1.01 • CD-ROM Boot 1.0 • Remote BIOS Update support • Remote Configuration Interface (RCI) support • Console redirection via COM1 • PXE support based on Preboot Execution Environment Specification v2.1 • 2-byte ID support • ePPID support in flash • Memory remapping support • DDR3 UDIMM memory support • UEFI shell Support • IDRAC6/IDRAC6 Lite support • VT-d • IOAT Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 40 • AC recovery staggering Power-Up • DIMM mismatch checking • Support for multiple power profiles: • Static Maximum Performance Mode • OS Control (DBS) • Active Power Controller • Custom 9.2 ACPI ACPI compliance: S0, S4, S5 supported NO S1, S2, S3 (STR) support. S4 will be supported by OS support only. Table 14. Wake Up Events and States Wake Up Events States Can Wake From RTC S5, OS-S4 Power Button S5, OS-S4 RI# Not supported PME# S5, OS-S4 KB Not supported MOUSE Not supported USB Not supported WOL S5, OS-S4 9.3 Power Management Modes 9.3.1 Dell Active Power Controller The Dell Active Power Controller (DAPC) is a Dell proprietary implementation that provides improved performance/watt over the OS implementation of Intel’s DBS. DAPC is implemented in system BIOS and uses hardware level counters, etc. to determine hardware utilization. The BIOS uses this information to determine when to change the processor’s operating frequency. The DAPC is OS independent and means that the OS no longer has control. This provides a consistent power management solution regardless of the installed OS. Some OS(s), particularly hypervisors, do not support power management, thus DAPC provides a solution when there otherwise would not be one. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 41 9.3.2 Power Saving BIOS Setting (OS Control) Intel processors support Demand Based Switching (DBS) which enables the processor to dynamically change its operating frequency in response to workload changes. The industry standard implementation of this power management feature is in the Operating System (OS). The OS monitors process/thread level utilization of the processor and uses processor controls to change the processor’s operating frequency. For heavy workloads, the OS will run the processor at higher frequencies for additional performance. Lighter workloads do not need high performance, thus the OS will run the processor at lower frequencies. 9.3.3 Maximum Performance The Maximum Performance Mode disables power management. In this mode, the processor frequency is statically set to the highest supported frequency. The power management features are implemented via two categories: fixed or generic. Fixed features use bits defined in the ACPI specification for specific capabilities. The fixed feature bits give the OS complete control over the power management of a device since the location of the bits is given to the OS in the FACP table. Thus, a driver can directly access bits to control a device’s power management. Generic features have defined enable and status bits, but the functionality is not fully visible to the OS. Dell provides ASL code to handle the details of generic features, allowing the OS to intelligently communicate with system-specific hardware. Table 15. Summary of R210 Power Management Features Feature Type Enable/Status /Ctrl bit location Description ACPI mode switch Fixed PCH The OS uses the SCI_EN bit to switch from legacy mode to ACPI mode. Sleep states Fixed PCH Supported states: S0(Working), S4-OS (‘Hibernation’ in W2K), and S5 (Soft-off). S1 (also called ‘standby’ or ‘suspend’) and S3 are not supported. Power Button Fixed PCH In ACPI mode, OS has control of the power button. In non-ACPI mode, SMI handler owns power button events. Real-Time Clock Fixed PCH The OS is able to configure the system to wake on the RTC alarm. Power Mgmt. Timer Fixed PCH 24-bit power management timer is used. Power Mgmt. Event (PME) Generic PCH Each host bus’s PME# signal is routed to a separate general-purpose event pin in the chipset. When a device signals PME#, the system wakes (if necessary), the OS detects the event, and a Dell defined ASL routine handles the event. Wake-on-LAN is one example of a PME. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 42 USB wake Generic N/A This feature is not supported on this system since the S1 state is not supported. DBS N/A Processor MSRs This feature does P state transition under Windows C State Support N/A Processor and PCH registers This feature allows multiple C state supports for Processor. This feature will work under Windows and ACPI OS that understand C states. Power Profile support N/A Processor/IMC and PCH chipset registers. 11G Servers will be the most energy smart servers that Dell will ship. In addition to P,C and T states, BIOS will expose the Power Profiles to the OS. Each Power profile will have a specific settings and it will fine tune processor, MCH, IOH and South Bridge. For detailed explanation on how this feature works, please look at BIOS Power Management specification located in Design Docs under R310 engineering. Table 16. Power Profiles that R210 BIOS will Expose in BIOS Setup Maximum Performance DBPM Disabled ( BIOS will set P-State to MAX) Memory frequency = Maximum Performance Fan algorithm = Maximum Performance OS Control Enable OS DBPM Control (BIOS will expose all possible P states to OS) Memory frequency = Maximum Performance Fan algorithm = Minimum Power Active Power Controller Enable DellSystem DBPM (BIOS will not make all P states available to OS) Memory frequency = Maximum Performance Fan algorithm = Minimum Power Custom CPU Power and Performance Management: Maximum Performance | Minimum Power | OS DBPM | System DBPM Memory Power and Performance Management: Maximum Performance |1333Mhz |1067Mhz |800Mhz| Minimum Power Fan Algorithm Maximum Performance | Minimum Power Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 43 10 I/O Slots 10.1 Overview The PowerEdge R210 system provides: • Riser support x16 PCIe card (Gen2 link x16) • Support x16 bandwidth card under 25W Figure 13. PCIe x16 Riser Card Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 44 Figure 14. SAS 6/iR Adapter Card Installed 10.2 PCI Devices Xeon 3400 Series CPU PCI devices include: • Intel QuickPath Architecture Generic Non-core Registers • Intel QuickPath Architecture System Address Decoder • Intel QuickPath Interconnect Link 0 • Intel QuickPath Interconnect Physical 0 • Integrated Memory Controller General Registers • Integrated Memory Controller Target Address Decoder • Integrated Memory Controller Test Registers • Integrated Memory Controller Channel 0 Control • Integrated Memory Controller Channel 0 Address • Integrated Memory Controller Channel 0 Rank • Integrated Memory Controller Channel 0 Thermal Control • Integrated Memory Controller Channel 1 Control • Integrated Memory Controller Channel 1 Address • Integrated Memory Controller Channel 1 Rank • Integrated Memory Controller Channel 1 Thermal Control • DMI Root Port • PCI Express Root Port 1 • PCI Express Root Port 3 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 45 • Core Addressing Mapping, Intel VT-d, System Management • Core Semaphore and Scratchpad Registers • Core System Control/Status Registers • Core Miscellaneous Control/Status Registers • Intel QuickPath Interconnect Link • Intel QuickPath Interconnect Routing and Protocol Core i3/Pentium/Celeron CPU PCI devices include: • Host Bridge/DRAM Controller • Host-to-PCI Express Bridge • Internal Graphics Device • Secondary Host–to-PCI Express Bridge PCH and Slots devices include: • Virtualization Engine Controller Interface (VECI) • USB HS EHCI Controller #2 • PCI Express Port 1 • PCI Express Port 2 • PCI Express Port 3 • PCI Express Port 4 • PCI Express Port 5 • PCI Express Port 6 • PCI Express Port 7 • PCI Express Port 8 • USB HS EHCI Controller #1 • DMI-to-PCI Bridge • LPC Controller1 • SATA Controller #1 o Non-AHCI and Non-RAID Mode (Ports 0,1, 2 and 3) o Desktop Non-AHCI and Non-RAID Mode (Ports 0 and 1) o AHCI Mode (Ports 0-5) o AHCI Mode (Ports 0,1,4 and5) o RAID 0/1/5/10 mode • SMBus Controller • SATA Controller #2 o Non-AHCI and Non-RAID Mode (Ports 4 and 5) • Thermal Subsystem • Slot 1 PCI-E x16 [IIO] • BCM5716 (1) • BCM5716 (2) • Matrox® G200eW w/ 8MB memory The onboard devices are SATA, USB (x4), SMBus, IOxAPIC, and the LOM. Table 17. I/O Slot Information PCI Slot # Mechanical Electrical Height Length 1 PCIe x 16 PCIe x 16 Gen 2 Full Half Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 46 Table 18. PCI Card Dimensions Link Width Height Length x1 Standard height, half length card 111.15 mm (4.376 inches) max 167.65 mm (6.600 inches max X1, x4, x8, x16 Standard height, full length cards 111.15 mm (4.376 inches) max 312.00 mm (12.283 inches) max Low profile cards 68.90 mm (2.731 inches) max 167.65 mm (6.600 inches) max Table 19. Bandwidth, Quantities, and Priorities Category Description Bandwidth Max Qty. Slot Priority Internal Storage Controllers Dell™ SAS 6iR Adapter (SASRAID) PCIe x8 1 1 Dell™ PERC S300 (SW RAID) PCIe x8 1 1 Dell™ PERC H200 (HW RAID) PCIe x8 1 1 External Storage Controllers Dell™ SAS 5E Adapter PCIe x8 1 1 Dell™ PERC 6E Adapter 256MB PCIe x8 1 1 Dell™ PERC 6E Adapter 512MB PCIe x8 1 1 6Gbps SAS HBA PCIe x8 1 1 Dell™ PERC H800 PCIe x8 1 1 Optional NICs Dell™ LSI2032 PCIe HBA SCSI Adapter PCIe x4 1 1 Intel® Gigabit ET Dual Port Server Adapter PCIe x4 1 1 Broadcom® NetXtreme™ II 5709 Dual Port Ethernet PCIe Card with TOE PCIe x4 1 1 Broadcom® NetXtreme™ II 5709 Dual Port Ethernet PCIe Card with TOE and iSCSI Offload PCIe x4 1 1 Intel® PRO/1000 PT Server Adapter PCIe x1 1 1 Intel® Gigabit ET Quad-Port Server Adapter PCIe x4 1 1 Broadcom® NetXtreme™ II BCM5709 Quad Port Ethernet PCIe™ Card with TOE and iSCSI Offload PCIe x4 1 1 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 47 10.3 Boot Order The PowerEdge R210 supports only 1 PCIe x8 slot. 10.4 NICs There is Broadcom 5716 chip on the PowerEdge R210 motherboard. The chip is connected to the PCH via a PCI Express x4 gen2 link. Broadcom 5716 does not support TOE (TCP Offload Engine). The chip provides two Gigabit Ethernet ports. There are two RJ-45 connectors with integrated magnetic and LED on the rear of the system. The firmware for the LOM chip resides in a flash part. The PowerEdge R210 supports Wake on LAN (WOL) from either port. For listing of NICs supported on the R210, please see Section 10.1 Table 24 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 48 11 Storage 11.1 Overview The PowerEdge R210 supports up to 2 HDDS: • 2 x 2.5”/ 3.5” cabled SATA or SSD from motherboard SATA connector • 2 x 2.5”/ 3.5” cabled SAS, SSD, or SATA via add-on storage controller Customer must be selected at point of purchase. This is not an upgrade option for APOS. 11.2 Drives Table 20. Available Drives Drive Specifications HDD Bays 2 x 3.5" or 2 x 2.5” Cabled only HDD/SATA 3.5"/7.2K: 160, 250, or 1000GB, 2000GB HDD/Near Line SAS 3.5"/7.2K: 1000GB, 2000GB HDD/SAS 3.5”/15K: 146, 300, or 450GB, 600GB 3.5”/10K: 600GB 2.5”/10K: 146 or 300GB HDD/SSD 2.5”: or 50GB, 100GB Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 49 11.3 RAID Configurations Table 21. RAID Configurations Non-Mixed Drives, all SATA, all SSD, or ALL SAS Config Type Configs # Name Description Min HDD Max HDD No HDD 0 NCZCBL No controller/No hard drive 0 0 SATA – No Raid 1 MSTCBL On-board SATA Controller (Ibex Peak) 1 2 SATA Raid 2 MSTR0CBL Embedded SATA SW RAID – RAID0 2 2 3 MSTR1CBL Embedded SATA SW RAID – RAID1 2 2 SAS/SATA RAID 4 ASSCBL Add-in SAS/SATA RAID card, No RAID (S300) 1 1 5 ASSCBL Add-in SAS/SATA RAID card, No RAID (S300) with 2 HDDs 2 2 6 ASSR0CBL Add-in SAS/SATA RAID card, RAID 0 (S300) 2 2 7 ASSR1CBL Add-in SAS/SATA RAID card, RAID 1 (S300) 2 2 8 ASSCBL Add-in SAS/SATA RAID card, No RAID (SAS 6/iR /H200 ) 1 2 9 ASSR0CBL Add-in SAS/SATA RAID card, RAID 0 (SAS 6/iR /H200) 2 2 10 ASSR1CBL Add-in SAS/SATA RAID card, RAID 1 (SAS 6/iR/H200 ) 2 2 11.4 Optical Disk Drive (ODD) The PowerEdge R210 will support up to 1 slim type internal optical drive and optional external USB DVD-ROM. The PowerEdge R210 can boot from either the internal optical drive or the optional external drive and supports the following: • Configurations with no ODD • Optional internal DVD-ROM (SATA) • Optional internal DVD+RW (SATA) Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 50 11.5 Tape Drives Table 22. Supported Tape Drives PV DAS PowerVault™ MD1000 PowerVault™ MD3000 PowerVault™ MD1120 External TBU PowerVault™ RD1000 PowerVault™ 114X PowerVault™ DAT 72 PowerVault™ LTO-3-060 PowerVault™ 110T LTO-3 PowerVault™ LTO4-120 External TBU/Automation PowerVault™ ML6000 PowerVault™ 124T PowerVault™ TL2000/TL4000 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 51 12 Video and Audio 12.1 Video Matrox® G200eW w/ 8MB memory integrated in Winbond® WPCM450 (BMC controller): • 640x480 (60/72/75/85 Hz; 8/16/32-bit color) • 800x600 (60/72/75/85 Hz; 8/16/32-bit color) • 1024x768 (60/70/75/85 Hz; 8/16/32-bit color) • 1280x1024 (60/75/85 Hz; 8/16-bit color) • 1280x1024 (60 Hz, 32-bit color) 12.2 Audio The PowerEdge R210 does not support audio (sound card or speakers). Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 52 13 Rack Information 13.1 Overview The ReadyRails™ static rail system for the R210 provides tool-free support for racks with square or unthreaded round mounting holes (including Dell’s 42xx and 24xx series racks) with an adjustment range of 60–87 cm. The rails also offer tooled mounting support for 4-post threaded and 2-post (Telco) racks for added versatility. 13.2 Rails The static rails for the R210 support tool-less mounting in 19”-wide, EIA-310-E compliant square hole and unthreaded round hole racks via Dell’s ReadyRails™ mounting interface. The rails also support a “generic” mounting interface for tooled mounting in threaded hole and 2-post (Telco) racks. Screws are not included in the kit since threaded racks are offered with a variety of thread designations. Users must provide their own screws when mounting the rails in threaded or 2-post racks. Table 23. PowerEdge R210 Rail Information Rail Identifier Mounting Interface Rail Type Rack Types Supported 4-Post 2-Post Square Round Thread Flush Center A4 ReadyRails™/Generic Static Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes The adjustment range of the rails is a function of the type of rack in which they are being mounted. The min-max values listed below represent the allowable distance between the front and rear mounting flanges in the rack. Figure 15. Rack Adjustability Range Rail Identifier Mounting Interface Rail Type Rack Adjustability Range (mm) Rail Depth (mm) Square Round Threaded Without CMA With CMA Min Max Min Max Min Max A4 ReadyRails™/Generic Static 608 879 594 872 604 890 622 — 13.3 Cable Management Arm (CMA) The static rails for the R210 support a wide variety of racks and mounting configurations but do not support the ability to extend the system out of the rack for service. Thus, they do not provide support for a cable management arm (CMA). Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 53 14 Operating Systems For the most up-to-date information, see the Operating System Support Matrix for Dell PowerEdge Systems on Dell.com. Table 24. Supported Microsoft Operating Systems Operating Systems x86 or x64 Installation Factory Install Logo/ Certification Windows® Essential Business Server X64 Standard DIB N/A Premium Microsoft® Hyper-V™ Server 2008 X64 Standard Download N/A Windows® Small Business Server 2008 X64 Standard FI N/A Premium Windows Server® 2008 x32-bit x86 Web Standard Test Only WHQL Enterprise x64 (Hyper-V™ role enabled except for foundation) Web Test Only WHQL Standard Foundation Enterprise Windows Server® 2003 R2 32-bit x86 Standard Test Only WHQL Enterprise x64 Standard Test Only WHQL Enterprise Windows Server® 2008 SP2 X86 Web FI WHQL (WLK1.4) Standard Enterprise X64 (Hyper-V™ role enable) Web Standard Enterprise Windows Server® 2008 R2 (Windows 7 includes SP2 bits) X64 (only) (Hyper-V™ role enabled except for foundation) Web FI WHQL (WLK1.4) Standard Foundation Enterprise Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 54 Table 25. Supported Linux Operating Systems Operating Systems x86 or x64 Installation Factory Install Logo/ Certification Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® 4.8 x86-64 ES DIB, NFI Yes x86 ES DIB, NFI Yes Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® 5.3 x86-64 Enterprise FI Yes x86 Enterprise DIB, NFI Yes Novell® SUSE® Linux® Enterprise S10 SP3 x86-64 ES DIB, NFI Yes Novell® SUSE® Linux® Enterprise S11 X86-64 ES FI Yes Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 55 15 Virtualization Table 26. Supported Virtualization OS Virtualization OS Install Method VMware® ESX 4 update 1 DIB Embedded VMware ESXi 4 update 1 Download version VMWare ESX 3.5.1 Supported; not offered through Dell (No FI nor DIB) VMWare ESXi 3.5.1 Supported; not offered through Dell (No FI or DIB) PlateSpin® PowerConvert® Website download fulfillment; instructions are DIB Vizioncore™ suite: vRanger™ Pro vConverter™ vReplicator vFoglight™ Website download fulfillment; instructions are DIB Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 56 16 Systems Management 16.1 Overview Dell delivers open, flexible, and integrated solutions that help you reduce the complexity of managing disparate IT assets by building comprehensive IT management solutions. Combining Dell PowerEdge Servers with a wide selection of Dell-developed management solutions gives you choice and flexibility, so you can simplify and save in environments of any size. To help you meet your server performance demands, Dell offers Dell OpenManage systems management solutions for: • Deployment of one or many servers from a single management console • Monitoring of server and storage health and maintenance • System update, configuration change, and maintenance Dell offers IT management solutions for organizations of all sizes—priced, sized, and supported right. 16.2 Server Management A Dell Systems Management and Documentation DVD and a Dell Management Console DVD are included with the product. Content includes: • Dell Systems Build and Update Utility: Dell Systems Build and Update Utility assists in OS install and pre-OS hardware configuration and updates. • OpenManage Server Administrator: The OpenManage Server Administrator (OMSA) tool provides a comprehensive, one-to-one systems management solution, designed for system administrators to manage systems locally and remotely on a network. OMSA allows system administrators to focus on managing their entire network by providing comprehensive one-to-one systems management. • Management Console: Our legacy IT Assistant console is also included, as well as tools to allow access to our remote management products. These tools are Remote Access Service for iDRAC and the BMC Management Utility. • Active Directory Snap-in Utility: The Active Directory Snap-in Utility provides an extension snap-in to the Microsoft Active Directory. This allows you to manage Dell specific Active Directory objects. The Dell-specific schema class definitions and their installation are also included on the DVD. • Dell Systems Service Diagnostics Tools: Dell Systems Service and Diagnostics tools deliver the latest Dell optimized drivers, utilities, and operating system-based diagnostics that you can use to update your system. • eDocs: The section includes PDF files for PowerEdge systems, storage peripheral, and OpenManage software. • Dell Management Console DVD: The Dell Management Console is a Webbased systems management software that enables you to discover and inventory devices on your network. It also provides advanced functions, such as health and performance monitoring of networked devices and patch management capabilities for Dell systems. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 57 • Server Update Utility: In addition to the Systems Management Tools and Documentation and Dell Management Console DVDs, customers have the option to obtain Server Update Utility DVD. This DVD has an inventory tool for managing updates to firmware, BIOS, and drivers for either Linux or Windows operating systems. 16.3 Embedded Server Management The PowerEdge R210 implements circuitry for the next generation of embedded server management. It is Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) v2.0 compliant. The optional iDRAC (Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller) is responsible for acting as an interface between the host system and its management software and the periphery devices. These periphery devices consist of the PSUs, the storage backplane, integrated SAS HBA or PERC 6/I, and control panel with display. The optional upgrade to iDRAC6 provides features for managing the server remotely or in data center lights-out environments. Advanced iDRAC features require the installation of the optional iDRAC6 Enterprise card. 16.4 Lifecycle Controller and Unified Server Configurator Embedded management is comprised of four key components: • Dell Lifecycle Controller • Dell Unified Server Configurator • iDRAC6 (Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller) • vFlash (virtual flash media) Lifecycle Controller powers the embedded management features. It is integrated and tamperproof storage for system-management tools and enablement utilities (firmware, drivers, etc.). Dell Unified Server Configurator (USC) is a local 1:1 graphical user interface embedded on Lifecycle Controller that aids in local server provisioning in a pre-OS environment. For servers with iDRAC Express, the Lifecycle Controller offers OS install, platform updates, platform configuration, and diagnostics capabilities. For servers without iDRAC6 Express, this utility has limited functionality and offers OS install and diagnostics capabilities only. To access the Unified Server Configurator, press the key within 10 seconds of the Dell logo’s appearance during the system boot process. Current functionality enabled by the Unified Server Configurator is detailed in the following table. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 58 Table 27. Unified Server Configurator Features and Description Feature Description Faster O/S Installation Drivers and the installation utility are embedded on system Faster System Updates Integration with Dell support automatically directed to latest versions of the Unified Server Configurator, iDRAC, RAID, BIOS, NIC, and Power Supply Update Rollback Ability to recover to previous known good state for all updatable components More Comprehensive Diagnostics Diagnostic utilities are embedded on system Simplified Hardware Configuration Detects RAID controller and allows user to configure virtual disk and choose virtual disk as boot device, eliminating the need to launch a separate utility. Also provides configuration for iDRAC, BIOS, and NIC/LOM. 16.5 iDRAC6 Express The optional iDRAC6 Express is the first tier of iDRAC6 upgrades. In addition to upgrading the system with a Lifecycle Controller, the iDRAC6 Express offers the following key features: • Graphical web interface • Standard-based interfaces • Server Sensor monitoring and fault alerting • Secure operation of remote access functions including authentication, authorization, and encryption • Power control and management with the ability to limit server power consumption and remotely control server power states • Advanced troubleshooting capabilities For more information on iDRAC6 Express features see table below. 16.6 iDRAC6 Enterprise The optional iDRAC6 Enterprise card provides access to advanced iDRAC6 features. The iDRAC6 Enterprise connects directly to the R210 planar and is mounted parallel to the planar with stand-offs. Key features for the iDRAC6 Enterprise include: • Scripting capability with Dell’s Racadm command-line • Remote video, keyboard, and mouse control with Virtual Console • Remote media access with Virtual Media • Dedicated network interface Additionally, the iDRAC6 Enterprise can be upgraded by adding the vFlash Media card. This is a 1 GB Dell branded SD card that enables a persistent 256 or 512 MB virtual Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 59 flash partition. A more detailed feature list for iDRAC6 Enterprise and vFlash is included in the following table. Table 28. Features List for BMC, iDRAC6, and vFlash Feature BMC iDRAC6 Express iDRAC6 Enterprise vFlash Media Interface and Standards Support IPMI 2.0     Web-based GUI    SNMP    WSMAN    SMASH-CLP    Racadm commandline   Conductivity Shared/Failover Network Modes     IPv4     VLAN Tagging     IPv6    Dynamic DNS     Dedicated NIC   Security and Authentication Role-based Authority     Local Users     Active Directory    SSL Encryption    Remote Management and Remediation Remote Firmware Update     Server power control     Serial-over-LAN (with proxy)     Serial-over-LAN (no proxy)    Power capping    Last crash screen    Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 60 Feature BMC iDRAC6 Express iDRAC6 Enterprise vFlash Media capture Boot capture    Serial-over-LAN    Virtual media   Virtual console   Virtual console sharing   Virtual flash  Monitoring Sensor Monitoring and Alerting     Real-time Power Monitoring*     Real-time Power Graphing*     Historical Power Counters*     Logging Features System Event Log     RAC Log    Trace Log   * BMC availability through OpenManage Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 61 17 Peripherals 17.1 USB All PowerEdge systems have a minimum of 2 front-accessible USB 2.0 compliant ports with enough spacing around to accommodate full usage of both connectors simultaneously along with any/all other front panel features (Video connector, buttons, LED’s, etc.) without mechanical interference. These ports are connected to the same controller and not shared with internal or back USB ports For security reasons, all external USB ports must have an enable/disable function. Disabling USB controllers must observe the hierarchy in Table 29 (listed from lowest to highest priority in a 4 controller design). Internal USB ports connected to internal persistent storage devices have an enable/disable function independent of the other ports present in the system. Table 29. USB Controller Priorities USB Controller Function If Disabled 4 (Lowest) Internal USB peripherals No other Controller is disabled 3 Front USB Controller 4 is disabled as well 2 Back USB Controllers 3 & 4 are disabled as well 1 (Highest) Remote Access (RAC) Controllers 2,3, & 4 are disabled as well The above hierarchy dictates that connections that are lower in the hierarchy must be disabled anytime a higher level connection is disabled (e.g., when Back USB is disabled the Front USB ports are also disabled). 17.2 USB Device Optional external USB DVD-ROM. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 62 17.3 External Storage Table 30. External Storage External Optical Drive (Optional) USB DVD-ROM PowerVault™ DAS MD1000 JBOD MD3000 RBOD MD1120 – 2.5 SAS/SATA JBOD External TBU RD1000 USB PV114T (2U) DAT 72 SCSI LTO3-060 SCSI LTO3FH SCSI LTO4-120 HH and FH SAS External TBU/Automation ML6000 PV124T TL2000 TL4000 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 63 18 Packaging Options Options for single pack and multipack are available. Multipack will support 4 units in one pack. Table 31. AMF Single Pack Dimensions and Weights INSIDE DIMENSIONS OUTSIDE DIMENSIONS WEIGHT Length: 81.3 cm (32”) Width: 59.4 cm (23.38”) Depth: 23.5 cm (9.25”) Length: 82.9 cm (32.63”) Width: 61 cm (24”) Depth: 26.7 cm (10.5”) System packed out weight: PowerEdge R210: 9.71 kg (21.42 lbs) Cushion: 0.42 kg (.93 lbs) Corrugated Box: 2.75 kg (6.05 lbs) Total Weight: 12.88 kg (28.4 lbs) Table 32. EMF Single Pack Dimensions and Weights INSIDE DIMENSIONS OUTSIDE DIMENSIONS WEIGHT Length: 61.9 cm (24.38”) Width: 59.4 cm (23.38”) Depth: 24.1 cm (9.50”) Length: 63.5 cm (25.00”) Width: 61 cm (24”) Depth: 27.3 cm (10.75”) System packed out weight: PowerEdge R210: 8.56 kg (18.87 lbs) Cushion: 0.36 kg (.80 lbs) Corrugated Box: 2.06 kg (4.55 lbs) Total Weight: 10.98 kg (24.2 lbs) Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 64 Figure 16. Packaging Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 65 Appendix A. Regulatory Certifications • FCC (U.S. only) Class A • ICES (Canada) Class A • CE Mark (EN 55022 Class A, EN55024, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3) • VCCI (Japan) Class A • BSMI (Taiwan) Class A • C-Tick (Australia/New Zealand) Class A • NRCS/SABS (South Africa) Class A • CCC (China) Class A • KCC (Korea) Class A • UL 60950-1 • CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1 • EN 60950-1 • IEC 60950-1 • IRAM (Argentina) • NOM (Mexico) • Bellis (Belarus) • Koncar (Croatia) • TUV GS (Germany) • SII (Israel) • CKT (Kazakhstan) • KEBS (Kenya) • INSM (Moldova) • Soncap (Nigeria) • Nemko (Norway) • GOST (Russia) • KVALITET (Serbia, Bosnia, Herzegovina, Montenegro) • UKRTEST (Ukraine) • UZBEKISTAN GOST (Uzbekistan) • KUCAS (Kuwait) • KSA-ICCP (Saudi Arabia) • MPT (Vietnam) Dell 66 PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide Appendix B. R210 Volatility Tables Table 33. PowerEdge R210 Volatility NonVolatile Volatile RAM Reference Design -ator Q t y Size Type Planar System BIOS SPI Flash Y SYS_S PI 1 4MB Flash EEPROM (SPI interface) LOM Configuration Data Y U7 1 512KB FLASH (NOR) iDRAC6 Controller ROM Y U_IBM C1 1 4KB ROM iDRAC6 Controller RAM Y U_IBM C1 1 8KB RAM System CPLD Y U_CPL D1 1 1200 Macro cells Internal Flash EEPROM System CPLD Y U_CPL D1 1 1KB RAM iDRAC6 Express Internal Flash Y U_EM MC 1 1GB NAND FLASH System RAM Y DIMM_ A1, DIMM_ A2, DIMM_ B1, DIMM_ B2 4 up to 4 DIMMs 16GB RAM TPM ID EEPROM (Plug in module only) Y U_SEE PROM 1 256B EEPROM TPM Binding EEPROM (on China planar only) Y U21 1 256B EEPROM Dell 67 PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide NonVolatile Volatile RAM Reference Design -ator Q t y Size Type iDRAC6 SDRAM Y U_IBM C_MEM 1 128MB DDR2 RAM iDRAC6 FRU Y U_IBM C_FRU 1 4KB EEPROM iDRAC6 Boot Block Flash Y IBMC_ SPI 1 16MB FLASH (NOR) Trusted Platform Module Y N U_TPM 1 1 128 bytes EEPROM Chipset CMOS Y U_PCH 1 1 256B Battery-backed RAM Control Panel Internal USB Y USB3 USB4 2 User selectable License key hard set ROM or user choice iDRAC6 Enterprise vFlash Y J_SD (conne ctor) 1 1GB Secure Digital NAND Flash Dell 68 PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide Table 34. Volatility: Data Writing and Purpose Can user programs or operating system write data to it during normal operation? Purpose? Planar System BIOS SPI Flash No Not used LOM Configuration Data NO iDRAC Internal RAM iDRAC6 Controller ROM No System-Specific Hardware Logic iDRAC6 controller RAM No Not used System CPLD (non-volatile) No for iDRAC Operating System; Yes for Managed System Services Repository iDRAC Operating System plus Managed System Services Repository (i.e., Unified Server Configurator, OS drivers, diagnostics, rollback versions of various programmables) System CPLD (volatile) Yes System OS RAM iDRAC6 Express Internal Flash No Not used System RAM NO iDRAC internal RAM TPM ID EEPROM (Plug in module only) No BIOS binding of plug in module to a particular planar. TPM Binding EEPROM (China only) No BMC OS + VGA frame buffer iDRAC6 SDRAM No motherboard electronic product identifier iDRAC6 FRU No iDRAC boot loader and configuration (i.e. MAC address), Lifecycle log. nd system event log. iDRAC6 Boot Block Flash yes Storage of encryption keys Trusted Platform Module No BIOS binding of plug-in module to a particular planar Dell 69 PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide Can user programs or operating system write data to it during normal operation? Purpose? Chipset CMOS No BIOS settings Control Panel Internal USB Yes as allowed by OS Normal usage is read only software license key, but not limited iDRAC6 Enterprise vFlash Yes when enabled, installed, and the media does not have the write protect switch applied Storage of logs, user images such as files, drivers, and Operating Systems Table 35. Methodology for Data Input to Memory How is data input to this memory? Planar System BIOS SPI Flash Loading flash memory requires a vendor-provided firmware file and loader program which is executed by booting the system from a floppy or OS-based executable containing the firmware file and the loader. System loaded with arbitrary data in firmware memory will not operate LOM Configuration Data Loading flash memory requires a vendor-provided firmware file and loader program which is executed by booting up the system from a floppy or OS based executable containing the firmware file and the loader. LOMs loaded with arbitrary data in firmware memory will not operate. iDRAC6 Controller RAM iDRAC embedded system System CPLD Loading flash memory requires a vendor-provided firmware file and loader program which is executed by booting up the system from a floppy or OS-based executable (currently only DRMK utility support) containing the firmware file and the loader. System loaded with arbitrary data in CPLD memory will not operate. iDRAC6 Express Internal Flash Not used System RAM iDRAC OS: Loading flash memory requires a vendor-provided firmware file and loader program which is executed by booting the system from a floppy or OS-based executable containing the firmware file and the loader. System loaded without a good iDRAC firmware image yields a non-functional iDRAC. Dell 70 PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide How is data input to this memory? Managed Services Repository: Various partitions are loaded using vendor-provided firmware file and loader program just like iDRAC OS. TPM ID EEPROM (Plugin module only) Factory loaded only TPM Binding EEPROM (on China planar only) BIOS only iDRAC6 SDRAM Embedded iDRAC OS for 108MB and 8MB for VGA frame buffer iDRAC6 FRU Factory and iDRAC embedded OS iDRAC6 Boot Block Flash Loading flash memory requires a vendor-provided firmware file and loader program which is executed by booting up the system from a floppy or OS-based executable or out of band firmware updates across the management network. Bad contents yield the iDRAC inoperable and unrecoverable in the customer environment. The lifecycle log is automatically updated by the iDRAC as various system component firmware, hardware, and software versions change. Trusted Platform Module Using TPM-enabled operating systems; except in China where TCM is used. Chipset CMOS BIOS control only via input such as BIOS F2 menu user configuration settings (such as boot order) Control Panel Internal USB Either read only license key or OS control copies iDRAC6 Enterprise vFlash Preloaded media before installation, or remote out-of-band upload of user data (i.e., ISO images, files) or local server read/write capability to use like a hard disk. Dell 71 PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide Table 36. Methodology for Memory Protection and Clearing How is this memory write protected? How is the memory cleared? Planar System BIOS SPI Flash Software write protected Not possible with any utilities or applications and system is not functional if corrupted/removed. LOM Configuration Data No explicitly protected but special applications are needed to communicate through the LOMs to reprogram this ROM Not user clearable iDRAC6 Controller ROM protected permanently by hardware Not clearable iDRAC6 controller RAM n/a iDRAC reset System CPLD (non-volatile) Requires special system specific utility Not possible with any utilities or applications and system is not functional if corrupted/removed. System CPLD (volatile) Not accessible Not clearable iDRAC6 Express Internal Flash Writes are proxied through a temporary iDRAC scratchpad RAM and not directly made from an OS or OS application Not user clearable System RAM OS control Reboot or power down system TPM ID EEPROM (Plug in module only) HW read only Not clearable, read only Dell 72 PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide TPM Binding EEPROM (on China planar only) Locked by BIOS from physical access by anyone after boot Not applicable, BIOS control only iDRAC6 SDRAM n/a AC cycle for BMC OS and reset/power off server for VGA frame buffer iDRAC6 FRU writes controlled by iDRAC embedded OS EPPID is not clearable iDRAC6 Boot Block Flash iDRAC embedded OS control of the write protection Not possible with any utilities or applications and iDRAC does not function as expected if corrupted/removed. Lifecycle log is clearable only in a factory environment; System Event Log is user clearable Trusted Platform Module SW write protected F2 Setup option Chipset CMOS N/A, BIOS only control Planar NVRAM_CLR jumper or by removal of AC cord, cover, and coin cell battery, then waiting 30 seconds prior to replacement of battery, cover and AC cord.; F2 system setup option is used to restore defaults Control Panel Internal USB OS control OS control format iDRAC6 Enterprise vFlash Media write protection switch or OS control iDRAC-based format, local OS format, deleted, or card removed and formatted on a client Dell™ POWEREDGE™ M610 technical guidebook Inside the poweredge M610 Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 1. System overview 5 A. Overview / Description 5 Section 2. Mechanical 6 A. Dimensions and Weight (blade only) 6 B. Front Panel View and Features 6 C. Side Views and Features 8 D. Security 8 E. USB Key 9 F. Battery 9 G. Field Replaceable Units (FRU) 9 Section 3. Power, Thermal, Acoustic 9 A. Environmental Specifications 9 B. Acoustics 10 Section 4. block diagram 10 Section 5. PROCESSORS 11 A. Overview / Description 11 B. Features 12 C. Supported Processors 12 D. Processor Configurations 12 Section 6. Memory 14 A. Overview / Description 14 B. DIMMs Supported 15 C. Speed 16 Section 7. CHIPSET 18 A. Overview / Description 18 Section 8. bios 19 A. Overview / Description 19 B. I C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) 20 Section 9. Embedded NICs / LOMs 20 A. Overview / Description 20 Section 10. MEZZANINE CARD SLOTS 20 A. Overview / Description 20 2 Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook Section 11. STORAGE 21 A. Overview / Description 21 B. Storage Controllers 21 Section 12. video 22 A. Overview / Description 22 Section 13. OPERATING SYSTEMS 23 A. Overview / Description 23 Section 14. Virtualization 25 Section 15. SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT 25 A. Overview / Description 25 B. Server Management 25 C. Embedded Server Management 26 I. Unmanaged Persistent Storage 26 II. Lifecycle Controller / Unified Server Configurator 27 III. iDRAC6 Express / Enterprise 27 Section 16. Peripherals 29 A. USB peripherals 29 Section 17. DOCUMENTATION 29 A. Overview, Description, and List 29 Section 18. Packaging Options 30 Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 4 The Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 The Dell PowerEdge M-Series blade servers help cut operating expenses through energy efficiency, product flexibility, and efficient use of data center space. When combined with Dell’s world-class storage, management, and support offerings, the result is a total enterprise solution that can help you simplify and save on IT expenses. Strong IT Foundation To build the most efficient data center solutions, Dell sought input from IT professionals. You asked for reliability, scalability, energy efficiency, and a lower total cost of ownership. Our next-generation M610 blade servers deliver, becoming the cornerstone of a high-performance data center capable of keeping pace with your changing business demands. Purposeful Design Designed with your needs in mind, these M-Series blades use the Intel® Xeon® 5500 Series Processor. This processor series adapts to your software in real time, processing more tasks simultaneously. Using Intel Turbo Boost Technology, the M-Series blades can increase performance during peak usage periods. When demand decreases, Intel Intelligent Power Technology helps reduce operating costs and energy usage by proactively putting your server into lower power states. To enhance virtualization and database performance, the M610 is designed with 50% more memory capacity than its predecessor. This increased memory capacity saves money by enabling you to use smaller, less-expensive DIMMs to meet your computing needs. Scalability for Growth As your application needs increase, M-Series blades allow you to scale up to 128 cores and 1536GB of memory per 10U chassis, with opportunities for even greater capacities in the future. To keep pace with changing requirements, you can effectively scale I/O application bandwidth with end-to-end 10Gbe or FC8 solutions. Virtualize I/O within your M-Series chassis using Cisco’s Virtual Blade Switch technology, and manage up to nine Cisco Ethernet switches as a single switch. Additionally, use NPIV and Port Aggregator modes on a variety of switches to virtualize Ethernet or Fibre Channel ports for integration into heterogeneous fabrics. By harnessing Dell’s FlexIO modular switches, you can scale your I/O needs cost effectively, adding ports and functionality through switch modules, including 10Gb uplinks and stacking ports instead of needing to buy complete new switches. Simplified Systems Management Gain more control with the next-generation Dell OpenManage™ suite of management tools. These tools provide enhanced operations and standards-based commands designed to integrate with existing systems for effective control. Dell Management Console (DMC) helps simplify operations and creates stability by shrinking infrastructure management to a single console. This delivers a single view and a common data source for your entire infrastructure management. Built on Symantec® Management Platform, it has an easily extensible, modular foundation that can provide basic hardware management all the way up to more advanced functions, such as asset and security management. Dell Management Console reduces or eliminates manual processes, enabling you to save time and money for more strategic technology usage. The Dell Management Console integrates with the Chassis Management Controller allowing a single view of the chassis. The DMC allows the customer to manage the chassis as one entity, further simplifying management. Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 5 Section 1. System Overview A. Overview / Description The PowerEdge M610 is the next generation of Intel single-slot blade with enhanced processors, RAM, and management while still taking advantage of the M1000e chassis architecture. Along with the M1000e, it leads the industry in high speed, redundant IO throughput and power consumption. Feature Details Processor Nehalem EP - 2-Socket Intel® Xeon® 5500 Series Front Side Bus Intel Quickpath Interconnect (QPI) @ maximum of 6 GT/s # Procs 2S # Cores 4 L2/L3 Cache 4MB and 8MB Chipset Intel Tylersberg DIMMs 12 DDR3 – RDIMM or UDIMM Min/Max RAM 1GB - 96GB HD Bays 2 (2.5” only) HD Types SAS/SATA/SSD Int. HD Controller SATA Opt. HD Controller CERC. PERC available end of June 2009 Video Matrox G200 (8MB memory) Server Management OpenManage Dell Management Console CMC on chassis iDRAC Express iDRAC Enterprise, CMC (on M1000e) Mezz Slots 2 x8 (PCI 2.0) RAID 0, 1 NIC/LOM 2 Broadcom 5709 1Gb USB 2 external 1 internal Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 6 Section 2. Mechanical A. Dimensions and Weight (blade only) Height: 38.5cm (15.2in) Width: 5cm (2in) Depth: 48.6cm (19.2in) Weight: 11.1kg (24.5lbs.) - Maximum configuration B. Front Panel View and Features Figure: Front Panel Features PowerEdge M610 1. Blade Handle Release Button 2. Blade Power Indicator 3. Blade Power Button 4. USB Connectors (2) 5. Blade Status / Indentification Indicator 6. Hard Drives (2) 1 2 3 4 5 6 Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 7 FEATURE icon description Blade Power Indicator Off – Power is not available to the blade, the blade is in standby mode, the blade is not turned on, or the blade is installed incorrectly. For detailed information on installing a blade, see "Installing a Blade." Green increasing from low brightness to full brightness – Blade power on request is pending. Green on – The blade is turned on. Blade Status/ Identification Indicator Off – The blade power is off. Blue – Normal operating state. Blue Blinking – The blade is being remotely identified via the CMC. Amber Blinking – Blade has either detected an internal error, or the installed mezzanine card(s) does not match the I/O modules installed in the M1000e enclosure. Check the CMC for an I/O configuration error message and correct the error. Blade Power Button N/A Turns blade power off and on. • If you turn off the blade using the power button and the blade is running an ACPI-compliant operating system, the blade can perform an orderly shutdown before the power is turned off. • If the blade is not running an ACPI-compliant operating system, power is turned off immediately after the power button is pressed. • Press and hold the button to turn off the blade immediately. The blade power button is enabled by default by the System Setup program. (If the power button option is disabled, you can only use the power button to turn on the blade. The blade can then only be shut down using system management software.) USB Connector Connects external USB 2.0 devices to the blade. Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 8 C. Side Views and Features D. Security Trusted Platform Module (TPM) The TPM is used to generate/store keys, protect/authenticate passwords, and create/store digital certificates. TPM can also be used to enable the BitLocker™ hard drive encryption feature in Windows Server® 2008. TPM is enabled through a BIOS option and uses HMAC-SHA1-160 for binding. There will be different part numbers to accommodate different TPM solutions around the world. Power Off Security Through the CMC the front USB’s and power button can be disabled so as to not allow any control of the system from the front of the blade. Intrusion Alert A switch mounted on the left riser board is used to detect chassis intrusion. When the cover is opened, the switch circuit closes to indicate intrusion to ESM. When enabled, the software can provide notification to the customer that the cover has been opened. Secure Mode BIOS has the ability to enter a secure boot mode via Setup. This mode includes the option to lock out the power and NMI switches on the Control Panel or set up a system password. Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 9 E. USB Key The PowerEdge M610 supports the following USB devices: • DVD (bootable; requires two USB ports) • USB Key (bootable) • Keyboard (only one USB keyboard is supported) • Mouse (only one USB mouse is supported) F. Battery A replaceable coin cell CR2032 3V battery is mounted on the planar to provide backup power for the Real-Time Clock and CMOS RAM on the ICH9 chip. G. Field Replaceable Units (FRU) The planar contains a serial EEPROM to contain FRU information including Dell part number, part revision level, and serial number. The Advanced Management Enablement Adapter (AMEA) also contains a FRU EEPROM. The backplane’s SEP and the power supplies’ microcontroller are also used to store FRU data. Section 3. Environmental Specifications and Acoustics A. Environmental Specifications Environmental Temperature Operating 10° to 35°C (50° to 95°F) NOTE: Decrease the maximum temperature by 1°C (18°F) per 300m (985 ft.) above 900m (2955 ft.) Storage -40° to 65°C (-40° to 149°F) Relative Humidity Operating 8% to 85% (noncondensing) with a maximum humidity gradation of 10% per hour Storage 5% to 95% (noncondensing) Maximum Vibration Operating 0.26 Grms at 10-350Hz for 15 mins Storage 1.54 Grms at 10-250Hz for 15 mins Maximum Shock Operating One shock pulse in the positive z axis (one pulse on each side of the system) of 41 G for up to 2 ms Storage Six consecutively executed shock pulses in the positive and negative x, y, and z axes (one pulse on each side of the system) of 71 G for up to 2 ms Altitude Operating -16 to 3048 m (-50 to 10,000 ft.) Storage -16 to 10,600 m (-50 to 35,000 ft.) Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 10 B. Acoustics The acoustical design of the PowerEdge M610 reflects the following: • Adherence to Dell’s high sound quality standards. Sound quality is different from sound power level and sound pressure level in that it describes how humans respond to annoyances in sound, like whistles, hums, etc. One of the sound quality metrics in the Dell specification is prominence ratio of a tone, and this is listed in the table below. • Hardware configurations and types of applications affect system noise levels. Dell’s advanced thermal control provides for optimized cooling with varying hardware configurations and component utilizations. Most typical configurations will perform as listed in the table below. However, some less typical configurations and components can result in higher noise levels. Higher application loads, e.g., CPU utilization, can also result in higher noise levels. Definitions Idle: Reference ISO7779 (1999) definition 3.1.7; system is running in its OS but no other specific activity. LwA-UL: The upper limit sound power level (LwA) calculated per section 4.4.2 of ISO 9296 (1988) and measured in accordance with ISO7779 (1999). Tones: Criteria of D.5 and D.8 of ECMA-74 9th ed. (2005) are followed to determine if discrete tones are prominent. The system is placed in a rack with its bottom at 75 cm from the floor. The acoustic transducer is at front bystander position, ref ISO7779 (1999), Section 8.6.2. PowerEdge M610 typically configured blade in an m1000e chassis Condition in 23±2° C ambient LwA-UL, bels Tones Idle 7.4 No prominent tones Section 4. Block Diagram Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 11 Section 5. Processors A. Overview / Description The Intel® 5500 series 2S processor (Nehalem - Efficient Processor (EP)), is the microprocessor designed specifically for servers and workstation applications. The processor features quad-core processing to maximize performance and performance/watt for data center infrastructures and highly dense deployments. The Nehalem-EP 2S processor also features Intel’s Core™ micro-architecture and Intel 64 architecture for flexibility in 64-bit and 32-bit applications and operating systems. The 5500 series 2S processor (Nehalem EP) utilizes a 1366-contact Flip-Chip Land Grid Array (FC-LGA) package that plugs into a surface mount socket. PowerEdge M610 provides support for up to two 5500 series 2S processors (Nehalem EP). Nehalem-EP 2S Processor Features Cache Size 32KB instruction, 32KB data, 4 or 8MB (shared) Multi-processor Support 1-2 CPUs Package LGA1366 Table: Nehalem-EP Features Figure: PowerEdge M610 Main Components 1. 2 2.5” Hard Drives Hard drive controller underneath 2. Internal USB 3. Chipset 4. 2 Processor Sockets 5. 12 DDR3 DIMM Slots 6. High-speed Mezz Card Slots On-board NICs underneath 7. iDRAC6 Enterprise 8. Persistent Storage (underneath iDRAC6) 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 12 B. Features Key features of the 5500 series 2S processor (Nehalem EP) include: • Four or two cores per processor • Two point-to-point QuickPath Interconnect links at up to 6.4 GT/s • 1366-pin FC-LGA package • 45 nm process technology • No termination required for non-populated CPUs (must populate CPU socket 1 first) • Integrated three-channel DDR3 memory controller at up to 1333MHz • Compatible with existing x86 code base • MMX™ support • Execute Disable Bit Intel Wide Dynamic Execution • Executes up to four instructions per clock cycle • Simultaneous Multi-Threading (Hyper-Threading) capability • Support for CPU Turbo Mode (on certain SKUs) • Increases CPU frequency if operating below thermal, power, and current limits • Streaming SIMD (Single Instruction, Multiple Data) Extensions 2, 3, and 4 • Intel 64 Tecnology for Virtualization • Intel VT-x and VT-d Technology for Virtualization • Demand-based switching for active CPU power management as well as support for ACPI P-States, C-States, and T-States model speed power cache cores X5570 2.93GHz 95W 8M 4 X5560 2.80GHz 95W 8M 4 X5550 2.66GHz 95W 8M 4 E5540 2.53GHz 80W 8M 4 E5530 2.40GHz 80W 8M 4 E5520 2.26GHz 80W 8M 4 L5520 2.26GHz 60W 8M 4 E5506 2.13GHz 80W 4M 4 L5506 2.13GHz 60W 4M 4 E5504 2.00GHz 80W 4M 4 E5502 1.86GHz 80W 4M 2 C. Supported Processors D. Processor Configurations Single CPU Configuration The PowerEdge M610 is designed such that a single processor placed in the CPU1 socket will function normally, however PowerEdge M610 systems require a CPU blank in the CPU2 socket for thermal reasons. The system will be held in reset if a single processor is placed in the CPU2 socket. Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 13 Intel® Turbo Boost Technology Improves application responsiveness Delivers higher processor frequency on demand Cores / Threads 2 (2 socket/HT on) Core 0 IDLE IDLE IDLE Core 0 IDLE IDLE IDLE up to 10% for 2 software threads Benefit up to 6%† for 16 concurrent software threads 16 (2 socket/HT on) BASE Freq TURBO Freq 2.93 GHz 3.33 GHz 2.93 GHz 3.20 GHz Core 0 Core 2 Core 1 Core 3 Core 0 Core 2 Core 1 Core 3 OR Performance Enhancements Intel Xeon® 5500 Series Processor (Nehalem-EP) Intel® Turbo Boost Technology Increases performance by increasing processor frequency and enabling faster speeds when conditions allow Higher performance on demand All cores operate at rated frequency Normal Core 1 Core 1 Core 2 Core 3 All cores operate at higher frequency 4C Turbo Core 0 Core 1 Core 2 Core 3 Fewer cores may operate at even higher frequencies <4C Turbo Core 0 Core 1 Frequency Intel® Hyper-Threading Technology Increases performance for threading applications delivering greater throughput and responsiveness Higher performance for threaded workloads Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 14 model speed power cache cores X5570 2.93GHz 95W 8M 4 X5560 2.80GHz 95W 8M 4 X5550 2.66GHz 95W 8M 4 E5540 2.53GHz 80W 8M 4 E5530 2.40GHz 80W 8M 4 E5520 2.26GHz 80W 8M 4 L5520 2.26GHz 60W 8M 4 E5506 2.13GHz 80W 4M 4 L5506 2.13GHz 60W 4M 4 E5504 2.00GHz 80W 4M 4 E5502 1.86GHz 80W 4M 2 CPU Power Voltage Regulation Modules (EVRD 11.1) Voltage regulation to the 5500 series 2S processor (Nehalem EP) is provided by EVRD (Enterprise Voltage Regulator-Down). EVRDs are embedded on the planar. CPU core voltage is not shared between processors. EVRDs support static phase shedding and power management via the PMBus. Section 6. Memory A. Overview / Description The PowerEdge M610 utilizes DDR3 memory providing a high performance, high-speed memory interface capable of low latency response and high throughput. The PE M610 supports registered ECC DDR3 DIMMs (RDIMM) or unbuffered ECC DDR3 DIMMs (UDIMM). Key features of the PowerEdge M610 memory system include: • Registered (RDIMM) and Unbuffered (UDIMM) ECC DDR3 technology • Each channel carries 64 data and eight ECC bits • Support for up to 96GB of RDIMM memory (with twelve 8GB RDIMMs) • Support for up to 24GB of UDIMM memory (with twelve 2GB UDIMMs) • Support for 1066/1333MHz single and dual-rank DIMMs • Support for 1066MHz quad rank DIMMs Single DIMM configuration only with DIMM in socket A1 • Support ODT (On Die Termination) Clock gating (CKE) to conserve power when DIMMs are not accessed • DIMMs enter a low-power self-refresh mode • I 2C access to SPD EEPROM for access to RDIMM thermal sensors • Single Bit Error Correction • SDDC (Single Device Data Correction – x4 or x8 devices) • Support for closed loop • Thermal Management on RDIMMs and UDIMMs Multi Bit Error Detection Support for Memory Optimized Mode • Support for Advanced ECC mode • Support for Memory Mirroring • Support for Memory Sparing Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 15 B. DIMMs Supported The DDR3 memory interface consists of three channels, with up to two RDIMMs or UDIMMs per channel for single-/dual-rank and up to two RDIMMs per channel for quad rank. The interface uses 2GB, 4GB, or 8GB RDIMMs. 1GB, or 2GB UDIMMs are also supported. The memory mode is dependent on how the memory is populated in the system: Three channels per CPU populated identically: • Typically, the system will be set to run in Memory Optimized (Independent Channel) mode in this configuration. This mode offers the most DIMM population flexibility and system memory capacity, but offers the least number of RAS (reliability, availability, service) features. • All three channels must be populated identically. • Users wanting memory sparing must also populate the DIMMs in this method, but one channel is the spare and is not accessible as system memory until it is brought online to replace a failing channel. • The first two channels per CPU populated identically with the third channel unused • Typically, two channels operate in Advanced ECC (Lockstep) mode with each other by having the cache line split across both channels. This mode provides improved RAS features (SDDC support for x8-based memory). • For Memory Mirroring, two channels operate as mirrors of each other — writes go to both channels and reads alternate between the two channels. • One channel per CPU populated • This is a simple memory optimized mode. No mirroring or sparing is supported. The PowerEdge M610 memory interface supports memory demand and patrol scrubbing, single-bit correction and multi-bit error detection. Correction of a x4 or x8 device failure is also possible with SDDC in the Advanced ECC mode. Additionally, correction of a x4 device failure is possible in the Memory Optimized mode. If DIMMs of different speeds are mixed, all channels will operate at the fastest common frequency. RDIMMs and UDIMMs cannot be mixed. • If memory mirroring is enabled, identical DIMMs must be installed in the same slots across both channels. • The third channel of each processor is unavailable for memory mirroring. • The first DIMM slot in each channel is color-coded with white ejection tabs for ease of installation. Figure: Memory Locations for Poweredge M610 B1 B6 A6 A1 Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 16 Note: For QR mixed with a SR/DR DIMM, the QR needs to be in the white DIMM connector. There is no requirement in the order of SR and DR DIMMs. NOTE: For Quad-Rank DIMMs mixed with single- or dual-rank DIMMs, the QR DIMM needs to be in the slot with the white ejection tabs (the first DIMM slot in each channel). There is no requirement for the order of SR and DR DIMMs Supported Not Supported • The DIMM sockets are placed 450 mils (11.43 mm) apart, center-to-center in order to provide enough space for sufficient airflow to cool stacked DIMMs. • The PowerEdge M610 memory system supports up to 12 DIMMs. DIMMs must be installed in each channel starting with the DIMM farthest from the processor. Population order will be identified by the silkscreen designator and the System Information Label (SIL) located on the chassis cover. • Memory Optimized: {1, 2, 3}, {4, 5, 6}, {7, 8, 9} • Advanced ECC or Mirrored: {2, 3}, {5, 6}, {8, 9} • Quad Rank or UDIMM: {1, 2, 3}, {4, 5, 6}, {7, 8, 9} C. Speed Memory Speed Limitations The memory frequency is determined by a variety of inputs: • Speed of the DIMMs • Speed supported by the CPU • Configuration of the DIMMs The table below shows the memory populations and the maximum frequency achievable for that configuration. dimm type DImm 0 dimm 1 dimm 2 number of dimms 800 1066 1333 RDIMM SR DR 2 DR DR 2 QR SR 2 QR DR 2 QR QR 2 SR SR SR 3 SR SR DR 3 SR DR DR 3 DR DR DR 3 dimm type DImm 0 dimm 1 dimm 2 number of dimms 800 1066 1333 UDIMM SR 1 DR 1 SR SR 2 SR DR 2 DR DR 2 RDIMM SR 1 DR 1 QR 1 SR SR 2 Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 17 NHM-EP Platform Memory Overview • Platform capability (18 DIMMs): – Up to 3 channels per CPU – Up to 3 DIMMS per channel • Memory Types Supported: – DDR 1333, 1066, and 800 – Registered (RDIMM) and unbuffered (UDIMM) – Single-rank (SR), dual-rank (DR), quad-rank (QR) • System memory Speed (i.e. the speed at which the memory is actually running) is set by BIOS depending on: – CPU capability – DIMM type(s) used (memory speed, U/RDIMM, SR/DR/QR) – DIMM populated per channel • All channels in a system will run at the fastest common frequency 1 2 3 NHM-EP NHM-EP Up to 3 channels per CPU Up to 3 DIMMs per Channel 1 2 3 Memory Population Scenarios CPUs • Maximum B/W: – DDR3 1333 across 3 channels – 1 DPC (6 DIMMs) – Max capacity: 48 GB+ CPU 10.6 GB/s 10.6 10.6 CPU E5550 and above • Balanced Performance: – DDR3 1066 across 3 channels – Up to 2 DIMMs per Channel (DPC) (12 DIMMs) – Max capacity: 96 GB+ CPU 8.5 GB/s 8.5 8.5 CPU E5520 and above • Maximum capacity: – DDR3 800 across 3 channels – Up to 3 DPC (18 DIMMs total) – Max capacity: 144 GB+ CPU 6.4 GB/s 6.4 6.4 CPU All NHM-EP SKUs • RAS capabilities: CPU Mirroring Channel 0 & 1 mirror each other Channel 2 unused CPU Lockstep Channel 0 & 1 operate in lockstep Channel 2 unused Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 18 Performance that adapts to your software environment Delivering Intelligent Performance Next Generation Intel® Microarchitecture Threaded Applications 45nm Quad-Core Intel® Xeon® processors Intel® Hyper-Threading Technology Controller Performance On Demand Intel® Turbo Boost Technology Intel® Intelligent Power Technology Bandwidth Intensive Intel® QuickPath Technology Integrated Memory Controller Section 7. Chipset A. Overview / Description The PowerEdge M610 planar incorporated the Intel 5520 chipset (code named Tylersburg) for I/O and processor interfacing. Tylersburg is designed to support Intel's 5500 series processors (code named Nehalem-EP), QPI interconnect, DDR3 memory technology, and PCI Express Generation 2. The Tylersburg chipset consists of the Tylersburg-36D IOH and ICH9. The Intel 5520 chipset (code named Tylersburg) I/O Hub (IOH) The planar uses the The Intel® 5520 chipset (code named Tylersburg) I/O Hub (IOH)-36D IOH to provide a link between the 5500 series 2S processor (Nehalem EP) and I/O components. The main components of the IOH consist of two full-width QuickPath Interconnect links (one to each processor), 36 lanes of PCI Express Gen2, a x4 Direct Media Interface (DMI), and an integrated IOxAPIC. IOH QuickPath Interconnect (QPI) The QuickPath Architecture consists of serial point-to-point interconnects for the processors and the IOH. The PowerEdge T610 has a total of three QuickPath Interconnect (QPI) links: one link connecting the processors and links connecting both processors with the IOH. Each link consists of 20 lanes (full-width) in each direction with a link speed of up to 6.4 GT/s. An additional lane is reserved for a forwarded clock. Data is sent over the QPI links as packets. The QuickPath Architecture implemented in the IOH and CPUs features four layers. The Physical layer consists of the actual connection between components. It supports Polarity Inversion and Lane Reversal for optimizing component placement and routing. The Link layer is responsible for flow control and the reliable transmission of data. The Routing layer is responsible for the routing of QPI data packets. Finally, the Protocol layer is responsible for high-level protocol communications, including the implementation of a MESIF (Modify, Exclusive, Shared, Invalid, Forward) cache coherence protocol. Intel Direct Media Interface (DMI) The DMI (previously called the Enterprise Southbridge Interface) connects the Tylersburg IOH with the Intel I/O Controller Hub (ICH). The DMI is equivalent to a x4 PCIe Gen1 link with a transfer rate of 1 Gb/s in each direction. Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 19 PCI Express Generation 2 PCI Express is a serial point-to-point interconnect for I/O devices. PCIe Gen2 doubles the signaling bit rate of each lane from 2.5 Gb/s to 5 Gb/s. Each of the PCIe Gen2 ports are backwards-compatible with Gen1 transfer rates. In the Tylersburg-36D IOH, there are two x2 PCIe Gen2 ports (1Gb/s) and eight x4 PCIe Gen2 ports (2 Gb/s). The x2 ports can be combined as a x4 link; however, this x4 link cannot be combined with any of the other x4 ports. Two neighboring x4 ports can be combined as a x8 link, and both resulting x8 links can combine to form a x16 link. Intel I/O Controller Hub 9 (ICH9) ICH9 is a highly integrated I/O controller, supporting the following functions: • Six x1 PCIe Gen1 ports, with the capability of combining ports 1-4 as a x4 link • These ports are unused on the PowerEdge M610 • PCI Bus 32-bit Interface Rev 2.3 running at 33MHz • Up to six Serial ATA (SATA) ports with transfer rates up to 300 MB/s • The PowerEdge M610 features two SATA port for optional internal optical drive or tape backup • Six UHCI and two EHCI (High-Speed 2.0) USB host controllers, with up to twelve USB ports • The PowerEdge M610 has eight external USB ports and two internal ports dedicated for UIPS. Refer to the Whoville Hardware/BIOS Specification for the USB assignments for each platform • Power management interface (ACPI 3.0b compliant) • Platform Environmental Control Interface (PECI) • Intel Dynamic Power Mode Manager • I/O interrupt controller • SMBus 2.0 controller • Low Pin Count (LPC) interface to Super I/O, Trusted Platform Module (TPM), and SuperVU • Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) support for up to two devices • The PowerEdge M610’s BIOS is connected to the ICH using SPI Section 8. BIOS A. Overview / Description The PowerEdge M610 BIOS is based on the Dell BIOS core, and supports the following features: • Nehalem-EP 2S Support • Simultaneous Multi-Threading (SMT) support • CPU Turbo Mode support • PCI 2.3 compliant • Plug n’ Play 1.0a compliant • MP (Multiprocessor) 1.4 compliant • Boot from hard drive, external optical drive, iSCSI drive, USB key, and SD card • ACPI support • Direct Media Interface (DMI) support • PXE and WOL support for on-board NICs • Memory mirroring and spare bank support • SETUP access through key at end of POST • USB 2.0 (USB boot code is 1.1 compliant) • F1/F2 error logging in CMOS • Virtual KVM, CD, and floppy support • Unified Server Configurator (UEFI 2.1) support • Power management support including DBS, Power Inventory and multiple Power Profiles Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 20 The PowerEdge M610 BIOS does not support the following: • Embedded Diagnostics (embedded in MASER) • BIOS language localization • BIOS recovery after bad flash (but can be recovered from iDRAC6 Express) B. I 2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) What is I2C? A simple bi-directional 2-wire bus for efficient inter-integrated circuit control. All I2C-bus compatible devices incorporate an on-chip interface which allows them to communicate directly with each other via the I2C-bus. This design concept solves the many interfacing problems encountered when designing digital control circuits. These I2C devices perform communication functions between intelligent control devices (e.g., microcontrollers), general-purpose circuits (e.g., LCD drivers, remote I/O ports, memories) and application-oriented circuits. Section 9. Embedded NICs/LOMs A. Overview/Description Embedded Gigabit Ethernet Controllers with TCP Offload Engine (TOE) support One embedded dual-port Broadcom 5709C LAN controller is on the PowerEdge M610 planar as an independent Gigabit Ethernet interface device. The following information details the features of the LAN devices. • x4 PCI Express Gen2 capable interface • The M610 operates this controller at Gen1 speed • Integrated MAC and PHY 3072x18 byte context memory • 64KB receive buffer • TOE (TCP Offload Engine) • iSCSI controller (enabled through an optional hardware key) • RDMA controller (RNIC) (enabled post-RTS through an optional hardware key) • NC-SI (Network Controller-Sideband Interface) connection for manageability • Wake-On-LAN (WOL) • PXE 2.0 remote boot • iSCSI boot • IPv4 and IPv6 support • Bare metal deployment support • ISCSI offload - Used for offloading iSCI traffic as an iSCSI accelerator/HBA SECTION 10. Mezzanine Card Slots A. Overview/Description The PowerEdge M610 contains 2 PCIe x8 Gen 2 mezzanine card slots. Each card is a dual port. Every M610 blade can support up to 4 I/O ports (2 from each of the 2 mezzanine cards) plus the two integrated NIC/LOM ports. PLEASE NOTE: For space, the size of new mezzanine cards has been reduced and in the M610 only ONE of some older size cards can fit. Fabric C can fit any card. Fabric B can NOT fit: FC4 HBAs, Infiniband HCAs or Broadcom 5708 1Gb NICs. Mezzanine card options include: • Emulex and QLogic dual-port 8Gb FC HBA • Broadcom 5709 dual-port Gb Ethernet w/ TOE and iSCSI offload • Supports IPv6 offloads, improved virtualization performance, enables M610 to support 2 Ethernet mezzanine cards, and lowers power consumption • Mellanox ConnectX dual-port Double Data Rate (DDR – 20Gbps) Infiniband HCA or Quad Data Rate (QDR – 40Gbps) HCA • Broadcom dual-port 10Gb Ethernet w/ TOE and iSCSI offload Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 21 SECTION 11. Storage A. Hard Drive Overview / Description The PowerEdge M610 supports 2 2.5" hard drives. These drives can be either SATA, SAS or SSD. Both RAID 0 and RAID 1 are supported as long as a RAID card is included. Hard Disk Drive Carriers Hard drives must use the new Dell drive carrier for 2.5" drives. Empty Drive Bays For the slots that are not occupied by drives, a carrier blank is provided to maintain proper cooling, maintain a uniform appearance to the unit, and provide EMI shielding. Diskless Configuration Support The system supports diskless configuration with no storage controller installed in the system. Hard Drive LED Indicators Each disk drive carrier has two LED indicators visible from the front of the system. One is a green LED for disk activity and the other is a bi-color (green/amber) LED for status information. The activity LED is driven by the disk drive during normal operation. The bi-color LED is controlled by the SEP device on the backplane. Both LEDs are used to indicate certain conditions under direction of a storage controller. B. Storage Controllers The PowerEdge M610 will support a variety of RAID cards • A SATA controller comes standard and supports both the SATA drives and some SSD. • CERC6 - The M610 supports this card with 128MB of RAID cache. Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 22 Section 12. Video A. Overview / Description The PowerEdge M610 Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller 6 (iDRAC6) incorporates an integrated video subsystem, connected to the 32-bit PCI interface of the ICH9. This logic is based on the Matrox G200 with 8MB of cache. The device only supports 2D graphics. The video device outputs are multiplexed between the front and rear video ports. If a monitor is connected to the front video connector, it will take precedence over the rear connection, thereby removing the display from the rear connection. The PowerEdge M610 system supports the following 2D graphics video modes: Resolution Refresh Rate (Hz) Color Depth (bit) 640 x 480 60, 72, 75, 85 8, 16, 32 800 x 600 56, 60, 72, 75, 85 8, 16, 32 1024 x 768 60, 72, 75, 85 8, 16, 32 1152 x 864 75 8, 16, 32 1280 x 1024 60, 75, 85 8, 16 1280 x 1024 60 32 Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 23 section 13. Operating Systems A. Overview / Description The PowerEdge M610 supports Windows® , Linux® , and Solaris™ Operating Systems. Windows® Support: x86 or x64 INSTALLATION Factory INSTALLATION logo certification schedule Test/ Validate support Windows® Essential Business Server 2008 x64 Standard/ Premium Yes Windows Hardware Quality Labs - Windows 2008 Shipping Yes Yes Windows Server® 2008 (x64 includes Hyper-V™) x64 Standard Yes Windows Hardware Quality Labs - Windows 2008 Enterprise Shipping Yes Yes Datacenter Windows Server® 2008 x86 Standard Yes Windows Hardware Quality Labs - Windows 2008 Shipping Yes Yes Enterprise Windows® Web Server 2008 x86 and x64 Web Yes Windows Hardware Quality Labs - Windows 2008 Shipping Yes Yes Windows Server® 2008, SP2 (x64 includes Hyper-V™) x64 Standard Yes Windows Hardware Quality Labs - Windows 2008 Available in August - October 2009 Enterprise Yes Yes Datacenter Windows Server® 2008, SP2 x86 Standard Yes Windows Hardware Quality Labs - Windows 2008 Available in August - October 2009 Yes Yes Enterprise Windows® Web Server 2008, SP2 x86 and x64 Web Yes Windows Hardware Quality Labs - Windows 2008 Available in August - October 2009 Yes Yes Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 24 Red Hat® Enterprise Linux 4.7 x86 and x64 ES/AS Available in June 2009 n/A Available in June 2009 Yes Yes Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.2 x86 and x64 Standard/AP Yes n/A Shipping Yes Yes Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.3 x86 and x64 Standard/AP Available in June 2009 n/A Available in June 2009 Yes Yes Novell® SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP2 x64 Enterprise Yes n/A Shipping Yes Yes Novell SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 11 x64 Enterprise Available in June 2009 n/A Available in June 2009 Yes Yes Solaris™ 10 05/09 x64 Enterprise Drop in the box n/A Available in June 2009 Yes Yes Linux support: Windows Server® 2008, R2, (x64 includes Hyper-V™) x64 Standard Yes Windows Hardware Quality Labs - Windows 2008 Release 2 Available in November 2009 - January 2010 Enterprise Yes Yes Datacenter x86 or x64 INSTALLATION Factory INSTALLATION logo certification schedule Test/ Validate support Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 25 Section 15. Systems Management A. Overview / Description Dell is focused on delivering open, flexible, and integrated solutions the help our customers reduce the complexity of managing disparate IT assets. We build comprehensive IT management solutions. Combining Dell PowerEdge Servers with a wide selection of Dell-developed management solutions, we provide customers choice and flexibility – so you can simplify and save in environments of any size. To help you meet your server performance demands, Dell offers Dell OpenManage™ systems management solutions for: • Deployment of one or many servers from a single console • Monitoring of server and storage health and maintenance • Update of system, operating system, and application software We offer IT management solutions for organizations of all sizes – priced right, sized right, and supported right. B. Server Management A Dell Systems Management and Documentation DVD and a Dell Management Console DVD are included with the product. ISO images are also available. The following sections briefly describe the content. Dell Systems Build and Update Utility: Dell Systems Build and Update Utility assists in OS install and pre-OS hardware configuration and updates. OpenManage Server Administrator: The OpenManage Server Administrator (OMSA) tool provides a comprehensive, one-to-one systems management solution, designed for system administrators to manage systems locally and remotely on a network. OMSA allows system administrators to focus on managing their entire network by providing comprehensive one-to-one systems management. Management Console: Our legacy IT Assistant console is also included, as well as tools to allow access to our remote management products. These tools include: Remote Access Service, for iDRAC, and the BMC Management Utility. Active Directory Snap-in Utility: The Active Directory Snap-in Utility provides an extension snap-in to the Microsoft Active Directory. This allows you to manage Dell specific Active Directory objects. The Dell-specific schema class definitions and their installation are also included on the DVD. Dell Systems Service Diagnostics Tools: Dell Systems Service and Diagnostics tools deliver the latest Dell optimized drivers, utilities, and operating system-based diagnostics that you can use to update your system. eDocs: The section includes Acrobat files for PowerEdge systems, storage peripheral and OpenManage software. Section 14. virtualization Supported embedded hypervisors: • Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Hyper-V™ • VMware® ESXi Version 4.0 and 3.5 update 4 • Citrix® XenServer™ 5.0 with Hotfix 1 or later Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 26 Dell Management Console DVD: The Dell Management Console is a Web-based systems management software that enables you to discover and inventory devices on your network. It also provides advanced functions, such as health and performance monitoring of networked devices and patch management capabilities for Dell systems. Server Update Utility: In addition to the Systems Management Tools and Documentation and Dell Management Console DVDs, customers have the option to obtain Server Update Utility DVD. This DVD has an inventory tool for managing updates to firmware, BIOS and drivers for either Linux or Windows varieties. C. Embedded Server Management The PowerEdge M610 implements circuitry for the next generation of Embedded Server Management. It is Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) v2.0 compliant. The iDRAC6 (Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller) is responsible for acting as an interface between the host system and its management software and the periphery devices. These periphery devices consist of the PSUs, the storage backplane, integrated SAS HBA or PERC 6/i and control panel with semi-intelligent display. The iDRAC6 provides features for managing the server remotely or in data center lights-out environments. Advanced iDRAC features require the installation of the iDRAC6 Enterprise card. I. Unmanaged Persistent Storage The unmanaged persistent storage consists of two ports: • one located on the control panel board • one located on the Internal SD Module (formerly UIPS). The port on the control panel is for an optional USB key and is located inside the chassis. Some of the possible applications of the USB key are: • User custom boot and pre-boot OS for ease of deployment or diskless environments • USB license keys for software applications like eToken™ or Sentinel Hardware Keys • Storage of custom logs or scratch pad for portable user-defined information (not hot-pluggable) The Internal SD Module is dedicated for an SD Flash Card with embedded Hypervisor for virtualization. The SD Flash Card contains a bootable OS image for virtualized platforms. Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 27 II. Lifecycle Controller / Unified Server Configurator Embedded management is comprised of several pieces which are very interdependent. • Lifecycle Controller • Unified Server Configurator • iDRAC6 • vFLASH Lifecycle controller is the hardware component that powers the embedded management features. It is integrated and tamperproof storage for system-management tools and enablement utilities (firmware, drivers, etc.). It is flash partitioned to support multiple, future use cases Dell Unified Server Configurator is a 1:1 user interface exposing utilities from Lifecycle Controller. Customers will use this interface to configure hardware, update server, run diagnostics, or deploy the operating system. This utility resides on Lifecycle Controller. To access the Unified Server Configurator, press key within 10 seconds of the Dell logo display during the system boot process. Current functionality enabled by the Unified Server Configurator includes: feature description Faster O/S Installation Drivers and the installation utility are embedded on system, so no need to scour DELL.COM Faster System Updates Integration with Dell support automatically directed to latest versions of the Unified Server Configurator More Comprehensive Diagnostics Diagnostic utilities are embedded on system Simplified Hardware Configuration Detects RAID controller and allows user to configure virtual disk and choose virtual disk as boot device, eliminating the need to launch a separate utility III. iDRAC6 Express/Enterprise For the M610, all features of both the iDRAC6 Express and Enterprise are included with each server. The iDRAC6 is a managed persistent storage space for server provisioning data and consists of 1GB flash and VFlash. VFlash offers the hot-plug portability and increased storage capacity benefits of SD while still being managed by the system. iDRAC6 is currently partitioned to support the following applications: • Unified Server Configurator Browser and System Services Module (SSM) (25MB): The Unified Server Configurator browser provides a consistent graphical user interface for bare metal deployment and is ideal for 1-to-1 deployment. The SSM supports automatic 1-to-N deployment • Service Diagnostics (15MB): Formerly on the hard drive as the Utility Partition, this is a bootable FAT16 partition for Service Diagnostics • Deployment OS Embedded Linux (100MB): Storage space to hold embedded Linux • Deployment OS WinPE (200MB): Storage space to hold Windows Preinstallation Environment • Driver Store (150MB): Holds all files required for OS deployment • iDRAC6 firmware (120MB): Holds the two most recent versions of iDRAC6 firmware • Firmware Images (160MB): Holds the two most recent versions of BIOS, RAID, embedded NIC, power supplies, and hard drive firmware. This partition also holds the BIOS and option ROM configuration data • Life Cycle Log (2MB): Stores initial factory configuration as well as all detectable hardware and firmware changes to the server since its deployment. The Life Cycle Log is stored on the BMC SPI flash • RJ-45 Management 10/100Mbps Ethernet port Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 28 • VFlash SD card connector - Launches with limited functionality but designed for future expansion • Other iDRAC6 features: • Remote virtual floppy / CD / disk (with super floppy support) • Graphics console redirection (also called remote virtual KVM-Keyboard / Video / Mouse) (For M Series part of the M1000e) • Virtual flash (requires VFlash card) • Rip and replace • RACADM Command Line Interface Approximately 20% of the Flash space is reserved for wear leveling on the NAND Flash. Wear leveling is a method designed to extend the life of the NAND Flash by balancing the use cycles on the Flash’s blocks. For more information on iDRAC6 Express/Enterprise features see the table below. Feature BMC iDRAC6 Enterprise VFlash Media Interface and Standards Support IPMI 2.0 4 4 4 Web-based GUI 4 4 SNMP 4 4 WSMAN 4 4 SMASH-CLP 4 4 Racadm command-line 4 4 Conductivity Shared/Failover Network Modes 4 4 4 IPv4 4 4 4 VLAN tagging 4 4 4 IPv6 4 4 Dynamic DNS 4 4 Dedicated NIC 4 4 Security & Authentication Role-based Authority 4 4 4 Local Users 4 4 4 Active Directory 4 4 SSL Encryption 4 4 Remote Management & Remediation Remote Firmware Update 4 1 4 4 Server power control 4 1 4 4 Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 29 Feature BMC iDRAC6 Enterprise VFlash Media Virtual console sharing 4 4 Virtual flash 4 Monitoring Sensor Monitoring and Alerting 4 1 4 4 Real-time Power Monitoring 4 4 Real-time Power Graphing 4 4 Historical Power Counters 4 4 Logging Features System Event Log 4 4 4 RAC Log 4 4 Trace Log 4 4 Feature BMC iDRAC6 Enterprise VFlash Media Serial-over-LAN (with proxy) 4 4 4 Serial-over-LAN (no proxy) 4 4 Power capping 4 4 Last crash screen capture 4 4 Boot capture 4 4 Serial-over-LAN 4 4 Virtual media 4 4 Virtual console 4 4 Section 16. Peripherals A. USB peripherals The PowerEdge M610 supports the following USB devices with its 2 externally accessible USB ports: • DVD (bootable; requires two USB ports) • USB Key (bootable) • Keyboard (only one USB keyboard is supported) • Mouse (only one USB mouse is supported Section 17. Documentation A. Overview, Description, and List PowerEdge M610 and other 11G systems use the new Enterprise documentation set. The following is a summary of some of the documents slated for the M610 product. For the complete list of documents, including language requirements and delivery scheduling, refer to the Documentation Matrix and the Documentation Milestones in the InfoDev Functional Publications Plan. Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 30 • Getting Started Guide: This guide provides initial setup steps, a list of key system features, and technical specifications. This document is required for certain worldwide regulatory submittals. This guide is printed and shipped with the system, and is also available in PDF format on the Dell support site. • Hardware Owner’s Manual: This document provides troubleshooting and remove/replace procedures, as well as information on the System Setup program, system messages, codes, and indicators. This document is provided to customers in HTML and PDF format at the Dell support site. • System Information Label: The system information label documents the system board layout and system jumper settings and is located on the system cover. Text is minimized due to space limitations and translation considerations. The label size is standardized across platforms. • Information Update: This is a PDF document that provides information on late changes and issues having significant customer impact which were discovered after document signoff. • General System Information Placemat: This is a paper document that is provided with every system. The document provides general information about the system, including software license agreement information and the location of the service tag. • Rack Placemat: This is a paper document that is provided with the rack kits. The document provides an overview of procedures for setting up the rack. Section 18. Packaging Options The PowerEdge M610 can ship in three ways: 1. Integrated into the M1000e chassis in one large box 2. In a multi-pack box holding up to eight single-slot blades 3. As a single server in one box DELL™ OPTIPLEX580 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK INSIDE THE OPTIPLEX 580 OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 2 OVERVIEW Mini Tower Computer (MT) View 4-5 Desktop Computer (DT) View 6-7 Small Form Factor Computer (SFF) View 8-9 MARKETING SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS Operating System, Chipset 10 Processor 11-12 Advanced System Manageability Modes 12 Memory 13 Drives and Removable Storage 14 System Board Connectors 15 Graphics/Video Controller, External Ports/Connectors 16 Communications—Network Adapter (NIC), Modem 17 Audio and Speakers, Keyboard and Mouse 17 Security, Service and Support, Software 18 DETAILED ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS System Dimensions (Physical) 19 System Board Connector Maximum Allowable Dimensions 19-20 System Level Environmental and Operating Conditions 21 Power 21-22 Audio 22 Communications 23-25 OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 3 Graphics/Video Controller 25-30 Hard Drives 30-37 Optical Drive 37-40 BIOS Defaults 40-41 Chassis Enclosure and Ventilation Requirements 42-43 Acoustic Noise Emission Information 44-47 OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 4 Mini Tower (MT) Computer View Front and Back View 1 CD/DVD drive 2 CD/DVD drive eject button 3 CD/DVD drive panel 4 USB 2.0 connectors (2) 5 drive activity light 6 power button, power light 7 diagnostic lights (4) 8 headphone connector 9 microphone connector 10 network connectivity light 11 padlock ring 12 cover-release latch, security cable slot 13 voltage selector switch 14 power cable connector 15 back panel connectors 16 expansion card slots (4) 17 power supply diagnostic button 18 power supply diagnostic light OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 5 MT Back Panel Connectors 1 serial connector 2 link integrity light 3 network adapter connector 4 network activity light 5 line-out connector 6 line-in/microphone connector 7 USB 2.0 connectors (6) 8 VGA connector 9 eSata connector 10 DisplayPort connector MT System Board 1 Fan connector (FAN_CPU) 2 Speaker connector (INT_SPKR) 3 N/A 4 Processor connector (CPU) 5 Processor power connector (12VPOWER) 6 Memory module connectors (4) 7 SATA connectors (SATA0, SATA1) 8 Front-panel connector (FRONTPANEL) 9 Power connector (POWER) 10 SATA connectors (SATA2) 11 SATA connectors (SATA3) 12 Intrusion switch connector (INTRUDER) 13 N/A 14 Battery socket (BATTERY) 15 PCI Express x16 connector (SLOT1) 16 PCI Express x4 connector (SLOT2) 17 PCI connector (SLOT3, SLOT4) 18 PS/2 or serial connector (SERIAL2) 19 Floppy drive connector (not offered) OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 6 Desktop (DT) Computer View Front and Back View 1 CD/DVD drive 2 CD/DVD drive eject button 3 USB 2.0 connectors (2) 4 drive activity light 5 diagnostic lights (4) 6 power button, power light 7 network connectivity light 8 microphone connector 9 headphone connector 10 power supply diagnostic button 11 power supply diagnostic light 12 voltage selector switch 13 cover-release latch, security cable slot 14 padlock ring 15 power cable connector 16 back panel connectors 17 expansion card slots (3) OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 7 DT Back Panel Connectors 1 serial connector 2 link integrity light 3 network adapter connector 4 network activity light 5 line-out connector 6 line-in/microphone connector 7 USB 2.0 connectors (6) 8 VGA connector 9 eSata connector 10 DisplayPort connector DT System Board 1 Fan connector (FAN_CPU) 2 Speaker connector (INT_SPKR) 3 Processor connector (CPU) 4 Processor power connector (12VPOWER) 5 Memory module connectors (4) 6 SATA connectors (SATA0, SATA1) 7 Front-panel connector (FRONTPANEL) 8 Power connector (POWER) 9 SATA connectors (SATA2) 10 N/A 11 Intrusion switch connector (INTRUDER) 12 Battery socket (BATTERY) 13 PCI Express x16 connector (SLOT1) 14 PCI Express x4 connector (SLOT2) 15 PCI connector (SLOT3) 16 PS/2 or serial connector (SERIAL2) OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 8 Small Form Factor (SFF) Computer View Front and Back View 1 CD/DVD drive 2 CD/DVD drive eject button 3 USB 2.0 connectors (2) 4 drive activity light 5 diagnostic lights (4) 6 power button, power light 7 network connectivity light 8 microphone connector 9 headphone connector 10 power supply diagnostic button 11 power supply diagnostic light 12 voltage selector switch 13 cover-release latch, security cable slot 14 padlock ring 15 power cable connector 16 back panel connectors 17 expansion card slots (3) OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 9 SFF Back Panel Connectors 1 serial connector 2 link integrity light 3 network adapter connector 4 network activity light 5 line-out connector 6 line-in/microphone connector 7 USB 2.0 connectors (6) 8 VGA connector 9 eSata connector 10 DisplayPort connector SFF System Board 1 Fan connector (FAN_CPU) 2 Processor connector (CPU) 3 Processor power connector (12VPOWER) 4 Memory module connectors (4) 5 SATA drive connectors (SATA0, SATA1) 6 Front-panel connector (FRONTPANEL) 7 Power connector (POWER) 8 SATA connectors (SATA2) 9 Fan connector (FAN_HDD) 10 Intrusion switch connector (INTRUDER) 11 N/A 12 Battery socket (BATTERY) 13 PCI Express x16 connector (SLOT1) 14 PCI Express x4 connector (SLOT2) 15 PS/2 or serial connector (SERIAL2) 16 N/A 17 Speaker connector (INT_SPKR) OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 10 Marketing System Configurations NOTE: Offerings may vary by region. For more information regarding the configuration of your computer, click StartHelp and Support and select the option to view information about your computer. Operating System NOTE: One of the following Operating Systems will be preinstalled. MT DT SFF Windows 7® operating system Windows 7® Home Basic (32 bit), Windows 7® Home Premium (32 bit), Windows 7® Professional (32 and 64 bit), Windows 7® Ultimate (32 bit) Windows Vista® operating system Windows Vista® SP2 Home Basic (32 bit) Windows Vista® SP2 Business (32 and 64 bit), Windows Vista® SP2 Ultimate (32 bit), Windows Vista® SP2 Business downgrade via Windows 7® Professional Windows Vista® SP2 Ultimate downgrade via Windows 7® Ultimate Windows XP® operating system Windows XP® Professional SP3 (32 bit) downgrade via Windows 7® Professional or Ultimate Windows XP® Professional SP3 (32 bit) downgrade via Windows Vista® Business or Ultimate Other Ubuntu® Linux® (select countries) FreeDOS for (n-series), OS Media Support X X X Chipset MT DT SFF Chipset AMD 785G Non-volatile memory on chipset BIOS Configuration SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) 8Mbit (1MB) located at SPI_1 on chipset TPM 1.2 Security Device (Trusted Platform Module)1 16KB located at TPM on chipset Non-TPM Available in select countries NIC EEPROM LOM configuration contained within SPI_1 1 TPM not available in some regions OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 11 Processor NOTE: Global Standard Products (GSP) are a subset of Dell's relationship products that are managed for availability and synchronized transitions on a worldwide basis. They ensure the same platform is available for purchase globally. This allows customers to reduce the number of configurations managed on a worldwide basis, thereby reducing their costs. They also enable companies to implement global IT standards by locking in specific product configurations worldwide. The following GSP processors identified below will be made available to Dell customers. NOTE:  Processor numbers are not a measure of performance.  Processor availability subject to change and may vary by region/country MT DT SFF AMD Phenom II Quad Core AMD Phenom II Quad Core B95/ 3.0GHz, 8M X X X AMD Phenom II Quad Core B93/ 2.8GHz, 8M X X X AMD Phenom II Triple Core AMD Phenom II Triple Core B75/ 3.0GHz, 7.5M X X X AMD Phenom II Triple Core B73/ 2.8GHz, 7.5M X X X AMD Phenom II Dual Core AMD Phenom II Dual Core B55/ 3.0GHz, 7M X X X AMD Phenom II Dual Core B53/ 2.8GHz, 7M X X X AMD Athlon Quad Core AMD Athlon II Quad Core 630/ 2.8GHz, 2M X X X AMD Athlon II Quad Core 620/ 2.6GHz, 2M X X X AMD Athlon Triple Core AMD Athlon II Triple Core 435/ 2.9GHz, 1.5M X X X AMD Athlon II Triple Core 425/ 2.7GHz, 1.5M X X X AMD Athlon Dual Core AMD Athlon II Dual Core B24/ 3.0GHz, 2M X X X OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 12 MT DT SFF AMD Athlon II Dual Core B22/ 2.8GHz, 2M X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP AMD Athlon II Dual Core 250/ 3.0GHz, 2M X X X AMD Athlon II Dual Core 245/ 2.9GHz, 2M X X X AMD Athlon II Dual Core 240/ 2.8GHz, 2M X X X AMD Sempron Single Core AMD Sempron Single Core 140/ 2.7GHz, 1M X X X Advanced System Manageability Mode NOTE: Hardware management mode options allow you to select the right systems management feature support for your enterprise. Dell’s innovative approach to scalable remote client management offers you a choice of built-in hardware management capabilities across platform offerings. The latest generation of Broadcom TruManage technology provides the capability to manage your install base of systems regardless of the power state or hardware functionality of the system. This functionality allows IT to address issues remotely rather than having to physically visit systems. The OptiPlex™ 580 supports Broadcom® TruManage™ technology which supports the following features: BIOS Management, asset reporting, remote troubleshooting and repair , power on f o r remote patching/updating. *The functionality described above requires an appropriate software management console MT DT SFF Broadcom TruManage Systems Management Ready X X X OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 13 Memory Your computer supports a maximum of 16 GB of memory when you use four 4-GB DIMMs; however, 32-bit operating systems, such as the 32-bit version of Microsoft® Windows® XP, can only use a maximum of 4 GB of address space. Moreover, certain components within the computer require address space in the 4GB range. Any address space reserved for these components cannot be used by computer memory; therefore, the amount of memory available to the operating system is less than 4GB. NOTE: The entire 16-GB memory range is available to 64-bit operating systems. Memory modules should be installed in pairs of matched memory size, speed, and technology. If the memory modules are not installed in matched pairs, the computer will continue to operate, but with a slight reduction in performance. MT DT SFF Type: DDR3 Synch DRAM Non-ECC Memory DIMM Slots 4 4 4 DIMM Capacities Up to 16GB Up to 16GB Up to 16GB Minimum Memory 1GB 1GB 1GB Maximum Memory with 1066MHz speed memory 16GB1 16GB1 16GB1 Configurations: 1066MHz Memory configurations 16GB1 DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (4 DIMM) X X X 8GB1 DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (4 DIMM) X X X 8GB1 DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (2 DIMM) X X X 4GB1 DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (4 DIMM) X X X 4GB1 DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (2 DIMM) X X X 4GB1 DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (1 DIMM) X X X 3GB DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (3 DIMM) X X X 2GB DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (2 DIMM) X X X 2GB DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (1 DIMM) X X X 1GB DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (1 DIMM) X X X 1 The total amount of available memory will be less than 4GB. The amount less depends on the actual system configuration. To fully utilize 4GB or more of memory requires a 64-bit enabled processor and 64-bit operating system. OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 14 Drives and Removable Storage MT DT SFF Bays: 3.5-inch bay (External) 1 1 1 (slimline) 5.25-inch bay (External) 2 1 1 (slimline) Hard Drives Supported (Internal and External) 2 x 3.5” Or 2 x 2.5” 1 x 3.5” Or 2 x 2.5” 1 x 3.5” Or 2 x 2.5” Optical Drives Supported (External) 2 1 1 (slimline) Interface: SATA 4 3 3 3.5” Hard Drives: 160GB1 SATA 10K RPM HDD X X X 500GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 250GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 160GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 2.5” Hard Drives 128GB1 SATA Solid State HDD X X X 64GB1 SATA Solid State HDD X X X 320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 250GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 160GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 3.5” RAID 1 Data Protection: (includes two matching capacity/speed hard drives) 160GB1 SATA 10K RPM HDD X 500GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X 320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X 250GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X 160GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X 2.5” RAID 1 Data Protection: (includes two matching capacity/speed hard drives) 320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 250GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 15 MT DT SFF 160GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 3.5” RAID 0 Performance: (includes two matching capacity/speed hard drives) 320GB1 SATA 10K RPM HDD X 1TB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X 500GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X 320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X 2.5” RAID 0 Performance: (includes two matching capacity/speed hard drives) 500GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X Optical Drive: (SFF requires a slimline optical drive) DVD+/-RW2 SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s DVD-ROM3 SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s DVD+/-RW2 with Blu-Ray-ROM SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s 1 For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less. 2 Discs burned with this drive may not be compatible with some existing drives and players; using DVD+R media provides maximum compatibility. 3 DVD-ROM drives may have write-capable hardware that has been disabled via firmware modifications. System Board Connectors NOTE: See Detailed Engineering Specifications for maximum card dimensions support. MT DT SFF PCI Slot(s): number of 2 1 0 PCIe x16 Slot: number of 1 1 1 PCIe x16 (wired as x4) Slot: number of 1 1 1 Flexbay 1 1 1 Serial ATA (SATA) 4 3 3 OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 16 Graphics/Video Controller NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile card. MT DT SFF Integrated ATI Radeon HD 4200 Graphics1 Integrated on system board with specific processors Enhanced Graphic/Video Options 256MB AMD RADEON HD 3450 Graphics, dual DVI or VGA and TV Out Optional full height or low profile card 256MB NVIDIA 9300GE Graphics, dual DVI or VGA and TV Out Optional full height or low profile card 256MB AMD RADEON HD 3470 Graphics, dual DP Optional full height or low profile card 512MB AMD RADEON HD4550 Graphics, dual DP Optional full height or low profile card 512MB NVIDIA NVS420 Graphics, quad DP or DVI NA NA Low Profile 1 Up to 1.7 GB of system memory may be allocated to support integrated graphics, depending on operating system, system memory size and other factors. External Ports/Connectors NOTE: MT supports full height cards, DT supports low profile cards or full height cards with optional riser. SFF supports low profile cards. See chassis diagrams section for port/connector locations MT DT SFF USB 2.0 (includes two internal on MT, DT and SFF) 8 8 8 Serial One rear PS/2 NA eSATA One rear Parallel NA Network Connector (RJ-45) One rear Video: (enabled with specific processors) VGA One rear Display Port One rear Audio: Microphone-in One minijack front Headphone One minijack front Stereo line-in/micropone One minijack rear Speakers line out One minijack rear OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 17 Communications - Network Adapter (NIC) – NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile card. MT DT SFF Integrated Broadcom 5761 Ethernet LAN 10/100/1000 (Remote Wake Up, PXE support) Integrated on system board Broadcom NetXtreme 10/100/1000 PCIe Gigabit Networking Card (5722) Supports full height Low-profile or full height card with optional riser Supports low profile card 1 This term does not connote an actual operating speed of 1 Gb/sec. For high speed transmission, connection to a Gigabit Ethernet server and network infrastructure is required. Communications – Wireless MT DT SFF Broadcom® 1505 PCIe WLAN card -802.11 draft-N WiFi (with Remote Wake Up support) Optional full height or low profile card Audio and Speakers MT DT SFF RealTek ALC269 High Definition Audio Integrated on system board Dell AX210 USB Stereo Speakers Optional Dell AX510/AX510PA Dell Flat Panel Display Soundbar Optional Dell AY410 Sting 2.1 Muitimedia Speaker System Optional Keyboard and Mouse MT DT SFF Dell USB Keyboard Optional Dell USB QuietKey Keyboard Optional Dell USB Multimedia Pro Keyboard Optional Dell USB Entry Mouse Optional Dell Laser Mouse Optional OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 18 Security MT DT SFF Trusted Platform Module (TPM) 1.21 Integrated on system board Chassis Intrusion Switch Standard Chassis lock slot Standard 1 TPM not available in some regions Service and Support NOTE: For more details on Dell Service Plans please to go to www.dell.com/service/service_plans/ MT DT SFF 3 Year Limited Warranty1 (3-3-0) Standard 3 Year Next Business Day On-site2 Service (3-3-3) Optional Dell ProSupport Optional 1 For a copy of our guarantees or limited warranties, please write Dell USA L.P., Attn: Warranties, One Dell Way, Round Rock, TX 78682. For more information, visit www.dell.com/warranty. 2 Service may be provided by third-party. Technician will be dispatched if necessary following phone-based troubleshooting. Subject to parts availability, geographical restrictions and terms of service contract. Service timing dependent upon time of day call placed to Dell. U.S. only. Software MT DT SFF Dell Client Manager Available via Dell.com Dell Control Point Standard Dell Backup & Recovery Manager Optional Norton Internet Security 2010 90 Day Trial or Optional Subscription McAfee 10 Security Center 90 Day Trial or Optional Subscription OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 19 Detailed Engineering Specifications System Dimensions (Physical) NOTE: System Weight* and Shipping Weight* is based on a typical configuration and may vary based on PC configuration. A typical configuration includes: integrated graphics, one hard drive, one optical drive, and one diskette drive. MT DT SFF Chassis Volume liters 32.62 15.08 8.00 Chassis Weight*1 pounds/kilograms 25.3 / 11.6 16.5 / 7.26 13 / 5.90 Chassis Dimensions: (HxWxD) Height inches/centimeters 15.8 / 40.8 4.4 / 11.4 3.5 / 9.26 Width inches/centimeters 7.4 / 18.7 15.4 / 39.9 11.8 / 31.4 Depth inches/centimeters 17.2 / 43.3 13.7 / 35.3 12.9 / 34 Shipping Weight*1 pounds/kilograms includes packaging materials 43.5 / 19.73 28.0 / 12.7 11.25/ 28.6 Packaging Parameters (HxWxD)2 Height inches/centimeters 22.06/ 56.0 20.35/ 51.7 20.75/ 52.7 Width inches/centimeters 20.94/ 53.2 20.04/ 50.9 16.38/ 41.6 Depth inches/centimeters 14.56/ 37.0 11.96/ 30.4 11.25/ 28.6 1 Weights are approximates and may change based on system configuration and included accessories. 2 Dimensions are DAO specific. Each region has unique packing. System Board Connector Maximum Allowable Dimensions MT DT SFF PCI Slot(s) Dimensions: (HxL) 2 1 0 Height inches/centimeters 4.376/11.115 2.731/6.89 Length inches/centimeters 6.6/16.765* 6.6/16.765 PCIe x16 Slot Dimensions: (HxL) 1 1 1 Height inches/centimeters 4.376/11.115 2.731/6.89 OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 20 Length inches/centimeters 6.6/16.765* 6.6/16.765 PCIe x16 (wired as x4)Slot Dimensions: (HxL) 1 1 1 Height inches/centimeters 4.376/11.115 2.731/6.89 Length inches/centimeters 6.6/16.765* 6.6/16.765 * Card length can be longer than standard Half-Length Card but cannot be a Full-Length Card. ** 6.9/17.53 in/cm is longer than the standard Half-Length Card System Level Environmental and Operating Conditions MT DT SFF Temperature Operating 10° to 35° C (50° to 95° F) Non-Operating (Storage) -40° to 65° C (-40° to -149° F) Relative Humidity 20% to 80% (non-condensing) Maximum vibration Operating 5 to 350 Hz at 0.0002 G2/Hz Non-Operating 5 to 500 Hz at 0.001 to 0.01 G2/Hz Maximum Shock Operating 40 G +/- 5% with pulse duration of 2 msec +/- 10% (equivalent to 20 in/sec [51 cm/sec]) Non-Operating 105 G +/- 5% with pulse duration of 2 msec +/- 10% (equivalent to 50 in/sec [127 cm/sec]) Maximum Altitude Operating –15.2 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft) Non-Operating –15.2 to 10,668 m (–50 to 35,000 ft) OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 21 Power MT APFC EPA DT APFC EPA SFF APFC EPA Power Supply Wattage 305W 255W 255W 255W 235W 235W AC input Voltage Range 90 – 264Vac 90 – 264Vac 90 – 264Vac 90 – 264Vac 90 – 264Vac 90 – 264Vac AC input current (low ac range/high AC range) 5.6/2.8 Arms 3.6/1.8 Arms 5.0/2.5 Arms 4.0/2.0 Arms 4.5/2.25 Arms 3.5/1.75 Arms AC input Frequency 47 – 63 Hz 47 – 63 Hz 47 – 63 Hz 47 – 63 Hz 47 – 63 Hz 47 – 63 Hz AC holdup time (80% load) 16 ms 16 ms 16 ms 16 ms 16 ms 16 ms Average Efficiency ( Energy Star Compliant) 85 – 88 – 85% @ 20 – 50 – 100% load 85 – 88 – 85% @ 20 – 50 – 100% load 85 – 88 – 85% @ 20 – 50 – 100% load Minimum Efficiency (Active PFC) 65% 65% 65% DC parameters +3.3v output 8.0 A 8.0 A 5.0 A 5.0 A 5.0 A 5.0 A +5.0v output 16.0 A 15.0 A 15.0 A 15.0 A 16.0 A 16.0 A +12.0v output 15.0 A & 10.0 A 13.0 A & 7.0 A 18.0 A 18.0 A 17.0 A 17.0 A +5.0v auxiliary output 4.0 A 4.0 A 4.0 A 4.0 A 4.0 A 4.0 A -12.0v output 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A Max total power 305 W 255 W 255 W 255 W 235 W 235 W Max combined +3.3v / +5.0v power 80 W 80 W 91.5 W 91.5 W 88 W 88 W Max combined 12.0v power (note: only if more than one 12v rail) 240W 220W N/A N/A N/A N/A BTUs/h (based on PSU max wattage) 1603 BTU 1000 BTU 1341 BTU 1000 BTU 1235 BTU 921 BTU Power Supply Fan 80 x 25mm 80 x 25mm 92 x 25mm 92 x 25mm 80 x 15mm or 80 x 20mm 80 x 15mm or 80 x 20mm Compliance: OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 22 Energy Star Compliant No Yes No Yes No Yes Blue Angel Compliant Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Climate Savers / 80Plus Compliant No Yes No Yes No Yes FEMP Standby Power Compliant Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes TCO Compliant Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 3.3v CMOS battery (type and estimated battery life) 3-V CR2032 lithium coin cell. Est. 5 year life Audio Integrated RealTek ALC269 High Definition Audio MT DT SFF High Definition Stereo support X X X Number of channels 2 Number of Bits / Audio resolution 16, 20, and 24-bit resolution Sampling rate (recording/playback) Variable Any multiple or sub-multiple of 48kHz or 44.1kHz Signal to Noise Ratio 98dB audio outputs, -98dB audio inputs Analog Audio X X X Dolby Digital THX Digital out (S/PDIF) Audio Jack Impedance Microphone 150 kΩ Line-In 150 kΩ Line-Out 190 Ω Headphone .5 Ω Internal Speaker Power Rating 2W OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 23 Communications - Integrated LAN NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile card. Integrated Broadcom 5761 Ethernet LAN 10/100/1000 MT DT SFF External Connector Type RJ45 Data Rates supported 10/100/1000 Mbps Controller Details Controller bus architecture (example PCIe 1.0a x1) Intel Gigabit LAN Connect Interface (GLCI) and LAN Connect Interface (LCI) Integrated memory N/A Data transfer mode (example Bus-Master DMA) N/A Power consumption (full operation per data rate connection speed) 781mW (Max.) Power consumption (standby operation) with WOL enabled 200mW (Max, 100Mb) 66mW (Max, 10Mb) Power consumption (standby operation) with WOL disabled in BIOS 0mW (Max) Power consumption (standby operation) with WOL disabled with driver 47mW (Max) IEEE standards compliance (example 802.1P) 802.3 Hardware Certifications (example FCC, B, GS mark…) N/A Boot ROM Support EEPROM (located in SPI) Network Transfer Mode (example Full Duplex, Half Duplex) Network Transfer Rate (example 10BASE-T (half-duplex) 10 Mbps 10BASE-T (full-duplex) 20 Mbps 100BASE-TX (half-duplex) 100 Mbps 100BASE-TX (full-duplex) 200 Mbps 1000BASE-T (full-duplex) 2000 Mbps 10 Mb (full/half-duplex) 100 Mb (full/half-duplex) 1000 Mb (full-duplex) Environmental Operating temperature 0° C to 85° C (32° F to 185° F) Operating humidity 20% to 80% (non-condensing) Operating System Driver Support Windows XP 32-Bit, Windows Vista 32-bit, Windows Vista 64-bit, Win7 32-bit, Win7 64Bit. Manageability (examples WOL, PXE..) WOL, PXE 2.1 Management Capabilities Alerting (examples ASF 2.0 AMT…) DASH 1.1/ ASF 2.0 1 This term does not connote an actual operating speed of 1 Gb/sec. For high speed transmission, connection to a Gigabit Ethernet server and network infrastructure is required. OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 24 Communications – Networking Card NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile card. Broadcom 5722 NetXtreme 10/100/1000 PCIe Gigabit1 Networking Card MT DT SFF Connector Type RJ45 Data Rates supported 10/100/1000 Mbps Half/Full duplex Controller Details Controller bus architecture (example PCIe 1.0a x1) PCIe 1.0a x1 Integrated memory 40KB Data transfer mode (example Bus-Master DMA) Bus-Master DMA Power consumption (full operation per data rate connection speed) 1.41W (427mA @ +3.3V) Power consumption (standby operation) Less than 300mW IEEE standards compliance (example 802.1P) 802.3z, 802.3x, Dynamic 802.3ad, 802.3 p, 802.1Q Hardware Certifications (example FCC, B, GS mark…) FCC B, VCCI B, CE Boot ROM Support No Network Transfer Mode (example Full Duplex, Half Duplex) Full Duplex/Half Duplex Network Transfer Rate (example 10BASE-T (half-duplex) 10 Mbps 10BASE-T (full-duplex) 20 Mbps 100BASE-TX (half-duplex) 100 Mbps 100BASE-TX (full-duplex) 200 Mbps 1000BASE-T (full-duplex) 2000 Mbps 10BASE-T (full-duplex - 20Mbps, half-duplex – 10Mbps)* 100BASE-T (full-duplex – 200Mbps, half-duplex - 100Mbps)* 1000BASE-T (full-duplex - 2000Mbps, half-duplex – 1000Mbps)* * Depends on the system environment. Environmental Operating temperature 0° C to 55° C (32° F to 131° F) Operating humidity 5% ~ 85% (non-condensing) Operating System Driver Support Windows XP 32-bit, Windows Vista 32-bit, Windows Vista 64-bit, Win7 32-bit, Win7 64Bit. Manageability (examples WOL, PXE..) WOL, PXE2.1, ACPI, CIM, SNMP Management Capabilities Alerting (examples ASF 2.0 AMT…) None 1 This term does not connote an actual operating speed of 1 Gb/sec. For high speed transmission, connection to a Gigabit Ethernet server and network infrastructure is required. OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 25 Communications – Wireless NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile card. Broadcom® 1505 PCIe WLAN card (802.11 N) MT DT SFF External Connector Type ? Controller Details Controller bus architecture PCIe 1.1 x1 WLAN standards supported 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n 802.11b Data Rates supported 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps 802.11a Data Rates supported 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 802.11g Data Rates supported 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 802.11n Data Rates supported 300, 270, 243, 240, 180, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Mbps Security 802.1x, WEP, WPA/WPA2, TKIP, CCX v1, CCX v2, CCX v3, CCX v4, and CCX v5 128-bit OCB mode AES, 802.11i Operating temperature 0 - 70°C Operating humidity 85% maximum non-condensing Operating System Driver Support Windows XP 32-bit, Windows Vista 32-bit, Windows Vista 64-bit, Win7 32-bit, Win7 64Bit. Graphics/Video Controller NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile card. Integrated ATI Radeon HD 4200 Graphics MT DT SFF Bus Type Integrated GPU core clock 350 MHz Integrated 24 bit RAMDAC Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed XP: Up to 1GB shared system memory with 2GB system memory Vista and Win7: Up to 1.4GB shared system memory with 4GB or more system memory Overlay Planes Yes OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 26 Maximum Color Depth 32 bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85 Hz Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support OpenGL 2.0/DirectX 10.1 Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Up to 2560x11600 @ 60Hz (DP) Up to 1920x1200 @ 60Hz (DVI & VGA) Up to 1600x1200 @ 85Hz (VGA only) External connectors VGA, DisplayPort Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 0° C to 70° C (32° F to 158° F) Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% (non-condensing) Display Port Bus Type AUX 1, 2, 4 lanes Maximum supported resolution Up to 2560x1600 @ 60Hz Maximum power consumption N/A External connectors Display Port Dongle Supported Display Port to DVI Display Port to VGA 1 Up to 1.7 GB of system memory may be allocated to support integrated graphics, depending on operating system, system memory size and other factors. 2 The Display Port controller does not support multi-monitor display in DOS, but it does in the OS after the driver is loaded. 256MB AMD Radeon™ HD 3450 Graphics dual DVI or VGA and TV Out MT DT SFF Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16 GPU core clock 600Mhz Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 500Mhz Maximum power consumption 22W Overlay Planes Yes Maximum Color Depth 32-bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85Hz Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support D3D and OpenGL Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 1920x1440/32bpp @ 75Hz OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 27 256MB AMD Radeon™ HD 3450 Graphics dual DVI or VGA and TV Out MT DT SFF Min : 640x480/8bpp @ 60Hz External connectors DMS-591 and S-video Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x 120mm 167.64mm x 120mm Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x 85mm Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft. 1 DMS-59 to VGA or DMS-59 to DVI adaptors required. 256MB nVidia 9300GE Graphics, dual DVI or VGA and TV Out MT DT SFF Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16 GPU core clock 540Mhz Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 500Mhz Maximum power consumption 25W Overlay Planes No Maximum Color Depth 32-bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 120Hz for 1024x768 and lower Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support DirectX 10.0 and OpenGL 3.1 Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Analog 1920x1200x32bpp @ 60Hz Digital - 1600x1200@60Hz w/o reduced blanking, or 1920x1200@60Hz w/reduced blanking External connectors DMS-591 and S-video Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x 120mm 167.64mm x 120mm Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x 85mm Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 28 256MB nVidia 9300GE Graphics, dual DVI or VGA and TV Out MT DT SFF Operating Temperature Range -10°-55° C Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft. 1 DMS-59 to VGA or DMS-59 to DVI adaptors required. 256MB AMD Radeon™ HD 3470 Graphics, dual DP MT DT SFF Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16 GPU core clock 750Mhz Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 500Mhz Maximum power consumption 18W Overlay Planes Yes Maximum Color Depth 32-bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85Hz Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support D3D and OpenGL Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 1920x1440/32bpp @ 75Hz Min : 640x480/8bpp @ 60Hz External connectors 2 Display Port Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x 120mm 167.64mm x 120mm Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x 85mm Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft. 512MB AMD Radeon™ HD 4550 Graphics, dual DP MT DT SFF Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16 GPU core clock 750Mhz Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 800Mhz Maximum power consumption 25W OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 29 512MB AMD Radeon™ HD 4550 Graphics, dual DP MT DT SFF Overlay Planes Yes Maximum Color Depth 32-bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85Hz Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support D3D and OpenGL Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 1920x1440/32bpp @ 75Hz Min : 640x480/8bpp @ 60Hz External connectors 2 Display Port(1) Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x 120mm 167.64mm x 120mm Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x 85mm Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft. (1) Dongles Supported: DP-VGA (RN699), DP-DVI (23NVR), DP-DL DVI (XT625), DP-HDMI(TK041) 512MB nVidia NVS 420 Graphics, quad DP or DVI SFF Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16 GPU core clock 540Mhz Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 700Mhz Maximum power consumption 40W Overlay Planes No Maximum Color Depth 32-bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 240Hz for 1024x768 and below Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support DirectX 10.0 and OpenGL 3.0 Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) DP - 2560x1600@60Hz DVI - 1600x1200@60Hz w/o reduced blanking, or 1920x1200@60Hz w/reduced blanking External connectors VHDCI (1) Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x 120mm 167.64mm x 120mm OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 30 512MB nVidia NVS 420 Graphics, quad DP or DVI SFF Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x 85mm Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range -10°-55° C Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft. (1) Dongles supported: VHDCI-DP (J772M), VHDCI-DVI-D (F908M), DP-VGA (RN699) Hard Drives1 3.5” 160GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 160,041,885,696 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 8 MB Average Seek Time 8.5 ms Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 312,581,808 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 50 C to 600 C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400 C to 650 C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 31 3.5” 250GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 250,059,350,016 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 8 MB Average Seek Time 8.5 ms Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 488,397,168 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 50 C to 600 C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400 C to 650 C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft 3.5” 320GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 320,072,933,376 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 8.5 ms Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 625,142,448 OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 32 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 50 C to 600 C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400 C to 650 C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft 3.5” 500GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 500,107,862,016 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 8.5 ms Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 976,773,168 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 50 C to 600 C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 33 Temperature Range -400 C to 650 C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft 3.5” 160GB SATA 10000 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 160,041,885,696 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.787 x 4 x 1 (includes sled) Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 4.2 ms (average read) Rotational Speed 10000 rpm Logical Blocks 312,581,808 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W DC Current 5V (.275A) and 12V (.585A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 50 C to 600 C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290 C Altitude Range -1000 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400 C to 700 C Relative Humidity Range 5% to 95% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380 C Altitude Range -1000 ft to 40000 ft 2.5” 160GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 160,144,285,696 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) Approximately (3.93 x 2.75 x 0.374 inches) Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 34 Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 12 ms (Read) Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 312,581,808 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 1.0W, Active 3.25W DC Current 5V (.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 50 C to 600 C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400 C to 650 C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft 2.5” 250GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 250,059,350,016 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) Approximately (3.93 x 2.75 x 0.374 inches) Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 12 ms (Read) Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 488,397,168 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 1.0W, Active 3.25W DC Current 5V (.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 50 C to 600 C OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 35 Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400 C to 650 C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft 2.5” 320GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 320,072,933,376 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) Approximately (3.93 x 2.75 x 0.374 inches) Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 12 ms (Read) Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 625,142,448 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 1.0W, Active 3.25W DC Current 5V (.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 50 C to 600 C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400 C to 650 C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 36 2.5” 64GB SATA Solid State HDD Capacity (bytes) 64,023,257,088 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 2.106 x 3.059 x 0.134 Interface type and Maximum speed SATA 3.0 Gbps Internal buffer size 128 MB Average Seek Time NA Rotational Speed NA Logical Blocks 125,045,424 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 0.125W, Active 0.135W *Based on MobileMark 2007 scenario DC Current 5.0V (0.35A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 0 to 70 C Relative Humidity Range 10 to 90 % Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29 C Altitude Range -200 to 5000 m Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -55 to 95 C Relative Humidity Range 5 to 95 % Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38 C Altitude Range -200 to 10,600 m 2.5” 128GB Solid State SATA HDD Capacity (bytes) 128,035,676,160 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 2.106 x 3.059 x 0.134 Interface type and Maximum speed SATA 3.0 Gbps Internal buffer size 128 MB Average Seek Time N/A Rotational Speed N/A Logical Blocks 250,069,680 OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 37 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 0.112W, Active 0.125W * Based on MobileMark 2007 scenario DC Current 3.3V (0.6A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 0 to 70 C Relative Humidity Range 10 to 90 % Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29 C Altitude Range -200 to 5000 m Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -55 to 95 C Relative Humidity Range 0 C to 55 C / 90~98% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38 C Altitude Range -200 to 10,600 m 1 For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes and TB equals 1 trillion bytes; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less. Optical Drives DVD +/- RW1 MT DT SFF External Dimensions inches/centimeters (With Bezel – W x H x D) 149mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 149mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 128.0 mm (5.04)/ 12.7mm (0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in) Weight (max) pounds/kilograms 730g 730g 170g Interface type and speed SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s Disc Capacity Standard Standard Standard Internal buffer size 2MB 2MB 1MB Access Times (typical) (1/3 stroke) 130ms (1/3 stroke) 130ms (1/3 stroke) 150ms Maximum Data Transfer Rates Writes 16x DVD/48x CD 16x DVD/48x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD Reads 16x DVD/48x CD 16x DVD/48x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD Power Source DC Power Requirements 12V, 5V 12V, 5V 5V DC Current 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 1000mA OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 38 DVD +/- RW1 MT DT SFF Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29C 29C 29C Altitude Range -200 to 3048 -200 to 3048 -200 to 3048 Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C Relative Humidity Range 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38C 38C 38C Altitude Range -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m 1 Discs burned with this drive may not be compatible with some existing drives and players; using DVD+R media provides maximum compatibility. DVD-ROM MT DT SFF External Dimensions inches/centimeters (With Bezel – W x H x D) 149mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 149mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 128.0 mm (5.04)/ 12.7mm (0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in) Weight (max) pounds/kilograms 730g 730g 165g Interface type and speed SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s Disc Capacity Standard Standard Standard Internal buffer size 2MB 2MB 1MB Access Times (typical) (1/3 stroke) 130ms (1/3 stroke) 130ms (1/3 stroke) 150ms Maximum Data Transfer Rates Writes N/A N/A N/A Reads 16x DVD/48x CD 16x DVD/48x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD Power Source DC Power Requirements 12V, 5V 12V, 5V 5V DC Current 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 800mA Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29C 29C 29C OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 39 DVD-ROM MT DT SFF Altitude Range -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C Relative Humidity Range 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38C 38C 38C Altitude Range -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m 1 DVD-ROM drives may have write-capable hardware that has been disabled via firmware modifications. DVD+/-RW with Blu-Ray-ROM MT DT SFF External Dimensions inches/centimeters (With Bezel – W x H x D) 149mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 149mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 128.0 mm (5.04)/ 12.7mm (0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in) Weight (max) pounds/kilograms 830g 7830g 190g Interface type and speed SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s Disc Capacity Standard Standard Standard Internal buffer size 4MB 4MB 2MB Access Times (typical) (1/3 stroke) 160ms (1/3 stroke) 160ms (1/3 stroke) 180ms Maximum Data Transfer Rates Writes 16x DVD/ 40x CD 16x DVD/ 40x CD 8x DVD / 24x CD Reads 6x BD/16x DVD/40x CD 6x BD/16x DVD/40x CD 4x BD/8x DVD/ 24x CD Power Source DC Power Requirements 12V, 5V 12V, 5V 5V DC Current 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 900mA Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29C 29C 29C Altitude Range -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C Relative Humidity Range 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 40 DVD+/-RW with Blu-Ray-ROM MT DT SFF Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38C 38C 38C Altitude Range -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m More details for optical drives can be found at: http://support.dell.com/support/systemsinfo/documentation.aspx?c=us&l=en&s=gen&~cat=7 BIOS Defaults Boot Fast Boot On Numlock Key On Wait For 'F1' If Error Enabled POST Hotkeys Setup & Boot Menu Keyboard Error Report Enabled 1st Boot Device Diskette Drive 2nd Boot Device Hard Drive 3rd Boot Device Optical Drive 4th Boot Device Integrated NIC Power AC Recovery Off Auto Power On Off Remote Wake Up On Low Power Mode On Suspend Mode S3 (STR) Security Password Lock Lock Chassis Intrusion On No Execute On TPM Security Off CPU Information C1E Function Enable Cool & Quiet Enabled Virtualization Enabled OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 41 Onboard Devices GFX/Display Port X16 Integrated NIC On Integrated Audio On Video Memory Size Auto Serial Port #1 3F8/IRQ4 LPT Port Mode PS/2 LPT Port Address 378h USB Controller On Front Dual USB On Rear Dual USB On Rear Quad USB On SATA Configuration SATA Operation AHCI HDD Acoustic Mode Bypass SATA-0 Not Detected SATA-1 Not Detected SATA-2 Not Detected SATA-3 Not Detected External SATA Not Detected System Management DASH/ASF Configuration Disabled Text Console Redirection Disabled Computrace Configuration Computrace Operation Deactivate Chassis Enclosure & Ventilation Requirements Enclosure Ventilation If your enclosure has doors, they need to be of a type that allows at least 30% airflow through the enclosure (front and back). Enclosure Minimum Clearance Leave a 10.2 cm (4 in.) minimum clearance on all vented sides of the computer to permit the airflow required for proper ventilation. OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 42 Recommended Enclosure Do not install your computer in an enclosure that does not allow airflow. This restricts the airflow and impacts your computer’s performance, possibly causing it to overheat. Open Desk Minimum Clearance If your computer is installed in a corner, on a desk, or under a desk, leave at least 5.1 cm (2 in.) clearance from the back of the computer to the wall to permit the airflow required for proper ventilation. OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 43 Regulatory Compliance and Environmental Product related conformity assessment and regulatory authorizations including Product Safety, Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Ergonomics, Communication Devices relevant to this product, along with additional product related conformity assessment, and information encompassing Environmental, Energy Consumption, Noise Emissions, Product Materials Information, Packaging, Batteries, and Recycling relevant to this product may be viewed in the Regulatory and Environmental Datasheet for this product is located at: http://www.dell.com/content/topics/global.aspx/about_dell/values/regulatory_compliance/dec_conform?c=us&l=en&s=corp&~c k=anavml Details of Dell's environmental stewardship program to conserve product energy consumption, reduce or eliminate materials for disposal, prolong product life span and provide effective and convenient equipment recovery solutions may be viewed at www.dell.com/earth by clicking the Design for Environment link on the webpage. OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 44 Acoustic Noise Emission Information Optiplex 580 MT Component Typical Configuration CPU Phenom II X2 B24 65W Memory 1 GB DDRIII 1333 MHz HDD (#, capacity) 160 GB 7200 RPM SATA RMSD DVD ROM Graphics Adapter AMD Radeon HD3470 256MB The Declared Noise Emission in accordance with ISO 9296 for the Dell Optiplex 580 MT is as follows1 : (all values LWAd expressed in bels2 ; 1 bel=10 decibels, re 10-12 Watts; all values LpA expressed in decibels3 , re 2x10-5 Pa) Sound Power Sound Pressure at Operator Position 1 All tests are conducted according to ISO 7779 and declared according to ISO 9296 except 90% CPU. For this mode, the system CPU was stressed at 90% utilization with no other peripheral device actively seeking. This test mode is not specified in ISO 7779, but was measured using the same microphone distances and measurement techniques defined for the other reported operating modes. 2 Declared Sound Power rounded to the nearest tenth of a bel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.2 3 Declared Sound Pressure rounded to the nearest whole decibel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.4 Operating Mode Typical Configuration Declared Sound Power (LWAd) Idle 3.6 HDD Operating 3.6 ODD Operating 5.1 90% CPU 3.6 Operating Mode Typical Configuration Sound Pressure at Operator Position (LpA) Desktop Desk side Idle 27.0 21.0 HDD Operating 27.1 21.2 ODD Operating 42.4 36.8 90% CPU 26.7 21.2 OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 45 Sound Pressure at Bystander Position Optiplex 580 DT Component Typical Configuration CPU Athlon II X2 B22 65W Memory 1 GB DDRIII 1333 MHz HDD (#, capacity) 160 GB 7200 RPM SATA RMSD DVD ROM Graphics Adapter AMD Radeon HD3470 256MB The Declared Noise Emission in accordance with ISO 9296 for the Dell Optiplex 580 DT is as follows3 : (all values LWAd expressed in bels4 ; 1 bel=10 decibels, re 10-12 Watts; all values LpA expressed in decibels3 , re 2x10-5 Pa) Sound Power 3 All tests are conducted according to IS 7779 and declared according to ISO 9296 except 90% CPU. For this mode, the system CPU was stressed at 90% utilization with no other peripheral device actively seeking. This test mode is not specified in ISO 7779, but was measured using the same microphone distances and measurement techniques defined for the other reported operating modes. 4 Declared Sound Power rounded to the nearest tenth of a bel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.2 3 Declared Sound Pressure rounded to the nearest whole decibel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.4 Operating Mode Typical Configuration Sound Pressure at Bystander Position (LpA) Desktop Desk side Idle 22.0 19.7 HDD Operating 22.0 20.0 ODD Operating 37.4 35.8 90% CPU 21.7 19.7 Operating Mode Typical Configuration Declared Sound Power (LWAd) Idle 3.8 HDD Operating 3.8 ODD Operating 5.2 90% CPU 3.8 OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 46 Sound Pressure at Operator Position Sound Pressure at Bystander Position Optiplex 580 SFF Component Typical Configuration CPU Athlon II X2 B22 65W Memory 1 GB DDRIII 1333 MHz HDD (#, capacity) 160 GB 7200 RPM SATA RMSD Slim DVD +/-RW Graphics Adapter AMD Radeon HD3470 256MB The Declared Noise Emission in accordance with ISO 9296 for the Dell Optiplex 580 SSF is as follows5 : (all values LWAd expressed in bels6 ; 1 bel=10 decibels, re 10-12 Watts; all values LpA expressed in decibels3 , re 2x10-5 Pa) 5 All tests are conducted according to ISO 7779 and declared according to ISO 9296 except 90% CPU. For this mode, the system CPU was stressed at 90% utilization with no other peripheral device actively seeking. This test mode is not specified in ISO 7779, but was measured using the same microphone distances and measurement techniques defined for the other reported operating modes. 6 Declared Sound Power rounded to the nearest tenth of a bel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.2 3 Declared Sound Pressure rounded to the nearest whole decibel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.4 Operating Mode Typical Configuration Sound Pressure at Operator Position (LpA) Desktop Desk side Idle 27.9 22.4 HDD Operating 28.3 21.6 ODD Operating 42.0 37.0 90% CPU 28.5 21.8 Operating Mode Typical Configuration Sound Pressure at Bystander Position (LpA) Desktop Desk side Idle 23.8 21.7 HDD Operating 24.0 20.7 ODD Operating 36.7 34.0 90% CPU 23.9 20.7 OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 47 Sound Power Sound Pressure at Operator Position Sound Pressure at Bystander Position Operating Mode Typical Configuration Declared Sound Power (LWAd) Idle 3.8 HDD Operating 3.7 ODD Operating 4.9 90% CPU 4.0 Operating Mode Typical Configuration Sound Pressure at Operator Position (LpA) Idle 28.0 HDD Operating 28.1 ODD Operating 39.4 90% CPU 28.6 Operating Mode Typical Configuration Sound Pressure at Bystander Position (LpA) Idle 23.7 HDD Operating 24.0 ODD Operating 33.8 90% CPU 24.1 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook Dell DELLTM POWEREDGETM T710 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK INSIDE THE POWEREDGE T710 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook Dell Table of Contents 1 Product Comparison .........................................................................................................................1 1.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................1 2 New Technologies.............................................................................................................................2 2.1 Overview/Description ................................................................................................................2 2.2 Detailed Information ..................................................................................................................2 2.2.1 Intel Xeon 5500 Series Processors ...................................................................................2 2.2.2 Intel 5520 Chipset .............................................................................................................3 2.2.3 PCIe Generation 2.............................................................................................................3 2.2.4 DDR3 Memory Technology ...............................................................................................3 2.2.5 16-Drive Active Backplane ................................................................................................3 2.2.6 Next Generation Broadcom 5709C LOMs.........................................................................4 2.2.7 Next generation Dell Embedded Server Management......................................................4 3 System Overview ..............................................................................................................................4 3.1 Overview/Description ................................................................................................................4 3.2 T710 Product Features Summary .............................................................................................5 4 Mechanical........................................................................................................................................6 4.1 Chassis Description ..................................................................................................................6 4.2 Dimensions and Weight ............................................................................................................6 4.3 Front Panel View and Features.................................................................................................7 4.4 Back Panel View and Features .................................................................................................7 4.5 Power Supply Indicators ...........................................................................................................8 4.6 Side Views and Features ..........................................................................................................8 4.7 Internal Chassis Views..............................................................................................................9 4.8 Rails and Cable Management...................................................................................................9 4.9 Rack View ...............................................................................................................................10 4.10 Fans ........................................................................................................................................10 4.11 Control Panel/LCD ..................................................................................................................11 4.11.1 Cover Latch.....................................................................................................................12 4.11.2 Bezel ...............................................................................................................................12 4.11.3 Hard Drive .......................................................................................................................13 4.11.4 Trusted Platform Management (TPM).............................................................................13 4.11.5 Power-Off Security ..........................................................................................................13 4.11.6 Intrusion Alert ..................................................................................................................13 4.11.7 Secure Mode...................................................................................................................13 4.12 Persistent Storage...................................................................................................................14 4.12.1 Managed Persistent Storage...........................................................................................14 4.12.2 SD Module (Unmanaged Internal Persistent Storage)....................................................15 4.13 USB Key (Unmanaged Internal Persistent Storage)...............................................................16 4.14 Battery.....................................................................................................................................16 4.15 Field Replaceable Units (FRU) ...............................................................................................16 5 Electrical..........................................................................................................................................16 5.1 Clock Circuitry .........................................................................................................................16 5.2 Volatility...................................................................................................................................16 6 Power, Thermal, and Acoustic ........................................................................................................16 6.1 Power Supplies .......................................................................................................................16 6.2 Power Supply Specifications...................................................................................................17 6.3 Power Efficiency......................................................................................................................18 6.4 Environmental Specifications ..................................................................................................19 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook Dell 6.6 Maximum Input Amps .............................................................................................................20 6.7 EnergySmart Enablement .......................................................................................................20 6.8 Energy Star Compliance .........................................................................................................20 6.9 Acoustics.................................................................................................................................20 7 Block Diagram.................................................................................................................................22 8 Processors ......................................................................................................................................22 8.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................22 8.2 Features ..................................................................................................................................23 8.3 Supported Processors.............................................................................................................23 8.4 Processor Configurations........................................................................................................24 8.5 Additional Processor Information ............................................................................................24 9 Memory ...........................................................................................................................................24 9.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................24 9.2 DIMMs Supported ...................................................................................................................24 9.3 Memory Population Scenarios ................................................................................................24 9.4 Slots/Risers .............................................................................................................................25 9.5 Speed/Memory Features.........................................................................................................25 9.6 Memory Population .................................................................................................................26 9.7 Memory Speed Limitations......................................................................................................26 9.8 Mirroring ..................................................................................................................................27 10 Chipset............................................................................................................................................27 10.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................27 10.2 Intel 5500 Chipset Dual I/O Hub (IOH)....................................................................................27 10.3 Intel Quickpath Architecture ....................................................................................................28 10.4 PCI Express Generation 2 ......................................................................................................28 10.5 Intel Direct Media Interface (DMI) ...........................................................................................28 10.6 Super I/O Controller ................................................................................................................29 11 BIOS................................................................................................................................................29 11.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................29 11.2 Supported ACPI States ...........................................................................................................29 12 Embedded NICs/LAN on Motherboard (LOM) ................................................................................29 12.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................29 13 I/O Slots ..........................................................................................................................................30 13.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................30 13.2 X16 Express Card Specifications............................................................................................30 13.3 Available PCIe Cards ..............................................................................................................31 13.4 Boot Order...............................................................................................................................32 14 Storage............................................................................................................................................32 14.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................32 14.2 3.5” X8 HDD Backplane ..........................................................................................................33 14.3 2.5” X16 HDD Backplane ........................................................................................................33 14.4 Storage Card Support Matrix ..................................................................................................33 14.5 Available Drives ......................................................................................................................34 14.6 RAID Configurations ...............................................................................................................35 14.7 Internal Storage Controllers ....................................................................................................42 14.8 LED Indicators.........................................................................................................................42 14.9 Optical Drives..........................................................................................................................42 14.10 Tape Drives.............................................................................................................................42 15 Video...............................................................................................................................................42 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook Dell 15.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................42 16 Audio...............................................................................................................................................43 17 Rack Information.............................................................................................................................43 17.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................43 17.2 Cable Management Arm (CMA)..............................................................................................43 17.3 Rack Configuration..................................................................................................................43 17.4 Rails ........................................................................................................................................44 18 Operating Systems..........................................................................................................................45 18.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................45 18.2 Operating Systems Supported ................................................................................................45 19 Virtualization....................................................................................................................................46 19.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................46 19.2 Virtualization Options Supported.............................................................................................46 20 Systems Management ....................................................................................................................47 20.1 Overview/Description ..............................................................................................................47 20.2 Server Management................................................................................................................47 20.3 Embedded Server Management .............................................................................................48 20.4 Lifecycle Controller and Unified Server Configurator..............................................................48 20.5 Optional iDRAC Express.........................................................................................................49 20.6 iDRAC6 Enterprise..................................................................................................................49 21 Peripherals......................................................................................................................................51 21.1 USB peripherals ......................................................................................................................51 21.2 External Storage .....................................................................................................................51 22 Packaging Options..........................................................................................................................51 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 1 DELL 1 Product Comparison 1.1 Overview The PowerEdge T710 is the flagship of the Dell tower servers positioned above the PowerEdge T610 and replacing the PowerEdge 2900III. Table 1 shows a comparison between these versions. Table 1. Comparison of T710 to PE2900-III and T610 Feature/Spec PE2900-III (predecessor) T710 T610 Processor Quad-Core Intel® Xeon® Processor 5400 Series, Intel Xeon 5200 Series Intel Xeon 5500 Series Intel Xeon 5500 Series Front Side Bus 1066/1333 MHz QPI 4.8 – 6.4 GT/s QPI 4.8 – 6.4 GT/s # Processors 1 or 2 1 or 2 1 or 2 # Cores 2 or 4 per proc 2 or 4 per proc 2 or 4 per proc L2/L3 Cache 2 X 3MB or 2 X 6MB shared L2 256K L2 per core/4MB or 8MB shared L3 256K L2 per core/4MB or 8MB shared L3 Chipset Intel 5000X chipset Intel 5520 chipset Intel 5520 chipset DIMMs 12 18 12 Min/Max RAM 1GB/48GB 1GB/144GB 1GB/96GB HD Bays 8 or 10 X 3.5” 8 X 3.5” or 16 X 2.5” 8 X 3.5” or 2.5” HD Types SAS, SATA SSD, SAS, SATA SSD, SAS, SATA Ext Drive Bay(s) 2 X HH Perhiperal Bays 2 X HH Perhiperal Bays 2 X HH Perhiperal Bays Int. HD Controller None None None Opt. HD Controller Perc 5/i, Perc 6/i, SAS 6/iR, SAS 5/i Perc 6/i, SAS 6/iR Perc 6/i, SAS 6/iR Availability Hot Swap HDD, Hot Swap Redundant Fans, Hot Swap Redundant PS Hot Swap HDD, Hot Swap Redundant Fans, Hot Swap Redundant PS Hot Swap HDD, Optional Hot Swap Redundant Fans, Hot Swap Redundant PS Server Mgt. BMC, Optional DRAC5 iDRAC6 Express, Optional iDRAC6 Enterprise, Optional VFlash iDRAC6 Express, Optional iDRAC6 Enterprise, Optional VFlash I/O Slots 6 + Storage Controller Slot 6 + Storage Controller Slot 5 + Storage Controller Slot RAID 0, 1, 5, 6, 10 See RAID Configurations 0, 1, 5, 6, 10 NIC/LOM 2 X TOE/iSCSI 4 X TOE/iSCSI 2 X TOE/iSCSI USB 2 Front, 4 Rear, 1 Internal 2 Front, 6 Rear, 1 Internal 2 Front, 6 Rear, 1 Internal Power Supplies 930 W Redundant 1100 W Redundant 598 W Redundant Fans Hot plug Redundant Hot plug Redundant Cabled, Optional Hot plug Redundant Chassis 5U Rackable Tower 5U Rackable Tower 5U Rackable Tower PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 2 DELL Feature/Spec PE2900-III (predecessor) T710 T610 Unmanaged Internal Storage Internal USB key SD card for virtualization solutions SD card for virtualization solutions 2 New Technologies 2.1 Overview/Description The T710 utilizes the following new technologies common to other Dell 11G servers: • Intel Xeon 5520 Series processors o New architecture with memory controller within each processor o Dual and quad core o Intel turbo mode allows increased processor speed o Hyperthreading technology o Quick Path Interconnect • Intel 5520 chipset o Dual IOH for maximum I/O capability • PCIe Generation 2 • DDR3 memory technology • 16-drive active backplane with expander • Next generation Broadcom 5709C LOMs • Next generation Dell embedded server management o iDRAC express with Lifecycle Controller and Unified Server Configurator o Optional iDRAC enterprise o Optional v-flash 2.2 Detailed Information 2.2.1 Intel Xeon 5500 Series Processors Intel Xeon 5500 series processors are the latest generation Intel processors for two-socket servers. They are based on a new 45nm die technology and utilize integrated memory controllers on the processor itself rather than a separate memory controller. QuickPath interconnect technology, the speed of which varies with the processor model, replaces the familiar front-side-bus. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 3 DELL Figure 1. Intel Xeon 5500 Series Processors • Intel Hyper-Threading Technology: enables more software threads to be running simultaneously • Intel Intelligent Power Technologies: scales server power consumption to performance needs • Intel Turbo Boost Technology: boosts frequency for active cores by up to 400 MHz for during peak demand periods See Section 8 “Processors” for more detail. 2.2.2 Intel 5520 Chipset The Intel 5520 chipset is the companion to the new Intel Xeon 5500 series processor. It supports the QuickPath interconnect technology and provides PCI Express Gen 2 capability for I/O. The T710 system is designed around dual Intel 5520 chipset I/O HUBs 36-D (IOH). See Section 27 “Chipset”. 2.2.3 PCIe Generation 2 PCIe Gen 2 provides the next generation of I/O bandwidth to the system. PCIe Gen2 doubles the signaling bit rate of each lane from 2.5 Gb/s to 5 Gb/s. 2.2.4 DDR3 Memory Technology Intel Xeon 5500 series processors support new DDR3 memory technology that replaces fully-buffered DIMMs in the new Intel architecture. Native DDR3 memory capability improves memory access speed, lowers latency, and allows more memory capacity (up to 18 DIMMs per two-socket platform). See Section 9 “Memory”. 2.2.5 16-Drive Active Backplane T710 includes an optional 16-drive active backplane that allows one controller to address all 16 drives. See Section 14.3 “2.5” X16 HDD BACKPLANE”. PCI Express Gen 2 Intel Xeon 5500 Intel Xeon 5500 QPI QPI up to 25.6 GB/sec bandwidth per link DDR3 Memory Up to 18 slots PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 4 DELL 2.2.6 Next Generation Broadcom 5709C LOMs The Broadcom 5709C LOMs are the latest 1GBe offering. Two dual-port devices provide a total of four LOM ports for the T710. They are TOE enabled, with iSCSI offload available as an option. See Section 12 “Embedded NICs/LAN on Motherboard (LOM)”. 2.2.7 Next generation Dell Embedded Server Management The chart below shows the components of the new embedded server management capability. As a 700-series enterprise product, T710 comes standard with BMC and iDRAC Express. The iDRAC Express hosts the Lifecycle Controller and Unified Server Configurator. Optional iDRAC Enterprise provides out-of-band management capabilities and enables the optional V-Flash. See Section 20.2 “Embedded Server Management”. Figure 2. Embedded Server Management Capability 3 System Overview 3.1 Overview/Description • Customer driven product priorities o Best performance and availability in a two-socket tower o Large Storage footprint, best I/O capability • Product Positioning o Industry leading performance and availability in a two-socket tower o In direct competition with the HP ML370, IBM x3500 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 5 DELL • Target Market o Corporate workgroups in remote sites running critical apps requiring 24 x 7 uptime o Supports applications across Data Access and Data Processing o Virtualization o Retail space, Digital signage, TV walls • Key Features o Dual IOH, up to 16 drives in one volume, 18 DIMMS, 4x LOMs, all HA in base, 4 x 25 W PCI 3.2 T710 Product Features Summary Table 2. PowerEdge T710 Features and Descriptions Feature Details Processor Intel Xeon 5500 Series,1,86GHz – 2.93GHz, 60W, 80W, 95W, See Section 8.3 “Supported Processors”. Front Side Bus Intel Quick Path Interconnect (QPI) 4.8 – 6.4 GT/s # Processors 1 or 2 # Cores 2 or 4 L2/L3 Cache 256 K per core L2, 4MB – 8MB shared L3 Chipset Intel 5520 chipset DIMMs/Speed 1, 2, 4, 8 GB UDIMM and RDIMM @ 1066 and 1333 MHz Certain memory configurations clock down to 800 MHz Min/Max RAM 1GB/144 GB HD Bays 8 X 3.5” or 16 X 2.5”, 3Gb SAS HD Types SSD, SAS, SATA are supported Ext Drive Bay(s) Two full height peripheral bays Int. HD Controller None Opt. HD Controller Perc 6/i or SAS 6/iR in dedicated storage slot BIOS Dell BIOS core 11G implementation. See Section 11 “BIOS”. Video Integrated Matrox G200 with iDRAC6 Availability Hot swap HDD, hot swap redundant power supplies, hot swap redundant fans Server Mgt. iDRAC6 Express, Optional iDRAC6 Enterprise, Optional VFlash I/O Slots 6 PCIe Gen 2 expansion slots + 1 dedicated controller slot RAID 0, 1, 5, 10, 50, 60. See Section 14.6 “RAID Configurations”. NIC/LOM 2 X Broadcom 5709 1GBe LOMs (4 ports total). TOE enabled, Optional iSCSI offload USB Two front, six rear, one internal Power Supplies Optional redundant 1100 W. Climate Saver Gold Front Panel Active LCD, rotates 90 degrees for rack mounting System ID System ID for PR T710:: 0x029B PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 6 DELL Feature Details Fans 4 X hot swap redundant Chassis 5U rackable tower 4 Mechanical 4.1 Chassis Description The T710 system uses a tower or rack mount 5U chassis. It is classified by Dell as a rackable tower, meaning it is optimized for tower operation 4.2 Dimensions and Weight Figure 3. T710 Dimensions Table 3. Detailed Dimensions Xa Xb Ya Yb Yc Za with bezel Za without bezel Zb Zc 217.9 mm 304.4 mm 431.3 mm 466.3 mm 471.3 mm 37 mm 35 mm 659.6 mm 694.8 mm 8.6 in 12.0 in 17.0 in 18.4 in 18.6 in 1.5 in 1.4 in 26.0 in 27.4 in Weight (maximum configuration) 35.3 kg (78 lb) PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 7 DELL 4.3 Front Panel View and Features Figure 4. Front Panel View and Features 4.4 Back Panel View and Features Figure 5. Back Panel View and Features PCIe Slots iDRAC Enterprise USB LOMs Control Panel and LCD Front USB (2) Peripheral Bays, 2HH PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 8 DELL 4.5 Power Supply Indicators T710 power supplies have embedded cooling fans and one bi-colored status LED. Status States: • Off – LED is dark • AC source applied – solid green LED • Fault of any kind – solid amber LED • DC enable applied – solid green LED (no change from AC applied) 4.6 Side Views and Features Figure 6. Side Views and Features Figure 7. Fold-out Feet Add Additional Stability PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 9 DELL 4.7 Internal Chassis Views Figure 8. Internal Chassis Overview Figure 9. Internal Chassis Detailed View 4.8 Rails and Cable Management The T710 Rack Kit has rack installation components, such as rails. The rack installation components consist of sliding rack mount rails with the latest generation Cable Management Arm (CMA). T710 features slam latches to offer easier removal from the rack. Processors Backplane Backplane Cables DIMM Slots Controller Slot PCIe Slots PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 10 DELL Figure 10. New Cable Management Arm • All steel construction – eliminates creep/sag • More open area for air flow When the system is installed in a rack, please observe the following guidelines: • Nothing should be located within 12” of the front of the unit that could restrict the air flow into the system. • Nothing should be mounted or placed behind the chassis that would restrict airflow from exiting the system. Only Dell approved CMAs can be placed behind the chassis. All other objects should be located at least 24” away from the rear of the chassis. • When two systems are placed back-to-back, the separation between the units should be at least 24” if the exit airflow is equivalent for the two chassis. This allows exit air to escape without creating an extreme back pressure at the rear of one of the chassis. 4.9 Rack View Figure 11. T710 Rack View For more rack, rail, and CMA information see Section 17 “Rack Information”. 4.10 Fans Four 92mm single-rotor hot-pluggable fans are mounted in the rear of the cooling shroud. Each fan has a single-wire harness that plugs into the planar fan connectors (FAN1 through FAN4). PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 11 DELL Figure 12. Fans The Embedded Server Management logic in the system controls and monitors the speed of the fans. A fan speed fault or over-temperature condition results in a notification by ESM. T710 Power Supply Units have integrated fans. The system requires a blank module in place of the empty power supply slot. System fan speed is pulse-width modulated. Optional redundant cooling is supported with only one rotor failing at a time (system may throttle when a rotor fails). Note Do not place any physical obstructions in the front (at least 12”) or rear (at least 24”) of the T710 chassis. This may cause a decrease in airflow, resulting in an over-temperature condition. Placement of non-redundant fans must be at the rearmost section of the shroud. Do not operate the system without the cooling shroud installed. 4.11 Control Panel/LCD The system control panel is located on the front of the system chassis to provide user access to buttons, display, and I/O interfaces. Figure 13. Control Panel/LCD View PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 12 DELL Features of the system control panel include: • 128x20 pixel LCD panel with controls o Two navigation buttons o One select button o One system ID button • ACPI-compliant power button with an integrated green power LED • Non-Maskable Interrupt (NMI) button (recessed) • Ambient temperature sensor • LCD panel can rotate 90 degrees for optional rack mounting of the server • Two external USB 2.0 connectors The LCD panel is a graphics display controlled by the iDRAC, unlike the 9G panel that had its own CPLD. Error codes can be sent to the display by either ESM or BIOS. BIOS has the ability to enter a “Secure Mode” through setup, which locks the power and NMI buttons. When in this mode, pressing either button has no effect and does not mask other sources of NMI and power control. 4.11.1 Cover Latch A tool-less latch is integrated in the side cover to secure it to the tower chassis. It is lockable. Figure 14. Cover Latch 4.11.2 Bezel A metal bezel is mounted to the chassis front to provide the Dell ID. A lock on the bezel prevents unauthorized access to system HDD(s). System status (via the LCD) is viewable when the bezel is installed. The bezel is standard for the T710 system. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 13 DELL Figure 15. T710 Bezel 4.11.3 Hard Drive The front bezel of the system contains a lock. A locked bezel secures the system hard drives. 4.11.4 Trusted Platform Management (TPM) The TPM generates/stores keys, protects/authenticates passwords, and creates/stores digital certificates. TPM can also enable the BitLocker™ hard drive encryption feature in Windows Server 2008. TPM is enabled through a BIOS option and uses HMAC-SHA1-160 for binding. There are different planar PWA part numbers to accommodate the different TPM solutions. The Rest of World (ROW) version has the TPM soldered onto the planar. The other version of the planar has a connector for a plug-in module (Factory Install Only). China TPM (TCM) is a post-RTS feature. Until China TCM is available, T710 units shipped to customers in China contain a no TPM motherboard. 4.11.5 Power-Off Security BIOS has the ability to disable the power button function. 4.11.6 Intrusion Alert A switch mounted on the cooling shroud detects chassis intrusion. When the cover is opened, the switch circuit closes to indicate intrusion to ESM. When enabled, the software provides notification that the cover has been opened. 4.11.7 Secure Mode BIOS has the ability to enter a secure boot mode via Setup. This mode includes the option to lock out the power and NMI switches on the control panel or set up a system password. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 14 DELL 4.12 Persistent Storage T710 offers two types of persistent storage: managed (iDRAC6 Express/iDRAC6 Enterprise) and unmanaged internal persistent storage. One of the unmanaged ports is for an optional SD card and the other is for a USB key. Figure 16. Persistent Storage Block Diagram 4.12.1 Managed Persistent Storage iDRAC6 Express is a managed persistent storage space for server provisioning data. The base iDRAC6 express consists of 1 GB flash, and the optional Vflash is an external SD card on the optional iDRAC6 Enterprise. The optional vflash offers the hot-plug portability and increased storage capacity benefits of SD while managed by the system. iDRAC6 is currently configured to support the following applications: • Unified Server Configurator Browser and System Services Module (SSM) (25 MB): the UEFI browser provides a consistent graphical user interface for bare metal deployment and is ideal for one-to-one deployment. The SSM supports automatic one-to-N deployment. • Service Diagnostics (15 MB): formerly on the hard drive as the Utility Partition, this is a bootable FAT16 partition for Service Diagnostics • Deployment OS Embedded Linux (100 MB): storage space to hold Embedded Linux • Online Diagnostics (35 MB): non-bootable FAT32 partition for Online Diagnostics. • Deployment OS WinPE (200 MB): storage space to hold Windows Pre-installation Environment • Driver Store (150 MB): holds all files required for OS deployment. • iDRAC firmware (120 MB): holds the two most recent versions of iDRAC firmware PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 15 DELL • Firmware Images (160 MB): holds the two most recent versions of BIOS, RAID, LOM, power supplies and hard drive firmware. This partition also holds the BIOS and option ROM configuration data. • Life Cycle Log (2 MB): stores initial factory configuration as well as all detectable hardware and firmware changes to the server since its deployment. The Life Cycle Log is stored on the BMC SPI flash. Approximately 20 percent of the flash space is reserved for wear leveling on the NAND flash. Wear leveling extends the life of the NAND flash by balancing the use cycles on the flash’s blocks. 4.12.2 SD Module (Unmanaged Internal Persistent Storage) The optional Internal SD module is a dedicated port for an SD flash card for embedded Hypervisor for virtualization. The SD flash card contains a bootable OS image for virtualized platforms. Figure 17. T710 SD Module Figure 18. SD Diagram PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 16 DELL 4.13 USB Key (Unmanaged Internal Persistent Storage) T710 has one internal USB port on the motherboard for any USB key based security or license application. Some possible applications of the USB key: • User custom boot and pre-boot OS for ease of deployment or diskless environments • USB license keys for software applications like eToken™ or Sentinel Hardware Keys • Storage of custom logs or scratch pad for portable user defined information (not hot-pluggable) 4.14 Battery A replaceable coin cell CR2032 3V battery mounted on the planar provides backup power for the RealTime Clock and CMOS RAM on the ICH. The battery is located under the fan assembly at the rear of the motherboard, near the rear USB ports. 4.15 Field Replaceable Units (FRU) Hot swap HDD and SSD, fans, and power supplies are the primary field replaceable units on T710. The planar contains a serial EEPROM to store FRU information including Dell part number, part revision level, and serial number. The Advanced Management Enablement Adapter (AMEA) contains a FRU EEPROM. The backplane SEP and the power supply microcontroller are also used to store FRU data. 5 Electrical 5.1 Clock Circuitry System clock circuitry is based on Intel CK410B+ synthesizer and DB1200/DB900 driver specification. A clock synthesizer device is a single chip solution. The CK410B+ synthesizes and distributes a multitude of clock outputs at various frequencies, timings and drive levels using a single 14.318 MHz crystal. • PCI Express Gen2 support • Host clock support (133 MHz) • Spread spectrum support • 33 MHz, 48 MHz, 100 MHz clock support • 14.318 MHz clock support 5.2 Volatility See your Dell Representative for the current T710 Statement of Volatility. 6 Power, Thermal, and Acoustic 6.1 Power Supplies The power supply subsystem consists of one or two AC-DC power supplies (1+1 redundant configuration) connected to the planar through the PDB. The power supply only provides +12V and +12Vaux. There are several voltage regulators in the system to supply different voltage levels needed by different logic devices. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 17 DELL 6.2 Power Supply Specifications The T710 power supply is rated at 1100 W. It operates on input voltages ranging from 90 – 264 V, autoswitching to the sensed line level. • EMC classification is Light Industry • FCC classification is Class A Table 4. Power Supply Specifications Minimum Typical Maximum Vin (Voltage first range) 90 V 115/230 264 V Vin (frequency) 47 Hz 50/60 Hz 63 Hz Iin (90 VAC) – – 13.5 A Iin(100 VAC) – – 12.0 A Iin (180 VAC) – – 7.0 A Initial In-rush Current – – 55 A Secondary In-rush Current – – 35 A The base redundant system consists of two hot-plug 1100 W power supplies in a 1+1 configuration. The power supplies connect indirectly to the planar via the Power Distribution Board (PDB). Two power cables connect between the PDB and the backplane. Another multi-drop cable also connects the PDB to the optical and/or tape drives. The PS bay sheet metal prevents unsupported power supplies from being installed in a T710 system. T710 power supplies have embedded cooling fans and one bi-colored status LED. Status States: • Off – No LED • AC source applied – Solid Green LED • Fault of any kind – Solid Amber LED • DC enable applied – Solid Green LED (no change from AC applied) Starting with 11G, the power supplies no longer have a FRU EEPROM; FRU data is now stored in the memory of the PSU Microcontroller. Additionally, the PSU Firmware can now be updated by iDRAC over the PMBus. Power is soft-switched, allowing power cycling via a switch on the front of the system enclosure or via software control (through server management functions). The power system is compatible with industry standards, such as ACPI and the Microsoft Windows Server H/W Design Guide. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 18 DELL Figure 19. T710 Power Supply If using only one power supply, the single PSU should be installed in the PS1 bay and a PSU Close Out (metal cover) is installed in the PS2 bay. The use of the PS1 bay for the single PSU configuration is done for consistency only. Nothing prevents the use of the PS2 bay in a single PSU configuration. 6.3 Power Efficiency Table 5. T710 Power Supply Efficiency Efficiency at 115 V Input Voltage 20% Loading 87% 50% Loading 90% 100% Loading 87% Efficiency at 230 V Input Voltage 10% Loading 80% 20% Loading 88% 50% Loading 92% 100% Loading 88% One of the main features of the latest family of Dell servers is enhanced power efficiency. T710 achieves higher power efficiency by implementing the following features: • User-selectable power cap (subsystems will throttle to maintain the specified power cap) • Improved power budgeting • Larger heat sinks for processors and IOH • Accurate inlet temperature • PSU/VR efficiency improvements • Switching regulators instead of linear regulators • Closed loop thermal throttling • Increased rear venting/3D venting • PWM fans with an increased number of fan zones and configuration-dependent fan speeds • Use of DDR3 memory (lower voltage, UDIMM support) • CPU VR dynamic phase shedding • Memory VR static phase shedding PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 19 DELL • Random time interval for system start • Allows an entire rack to power on without exceeding the available power • BIOS Power/Performance options page • BIOS-based CPU P-state manager (power management in a virtualized environment) • Ability to slow down or power down memory • Ability to disable a CPU core • Ability to turn off items not being used (i.e. USB ports, LOMs, PCIe slots, etc.) • Option to run PCIe at Gen1 speeds instead of Gen2 (BIOS setup option) 6.4 Environmental Specifications Table 6. Environmental Specifications Temperature Operating 10° to 35°C (50° to 95°F) with a maximum temperature gradation of 10°C per hour Note: For altitudes above 2950 feet, the maximum operating temperature is de-rated 1°F/550 ft. Storage -40° to 65°C (-40° to 149°F) with a maximum temperature gradation of 20°C per hour Relative Humidity Operating 20% to 80% (non-condensing) with a maximum humidity gradation of 10% per hour Storage 5% to 95% (non-condensing) with a maximum humidity gradation of 10% per hour Maximum Vibration Operating 0.26 Grms at 5 – 350 Hz in operational orientations Storage 1.54 Grms at 10 – 250 Hz in all orientations Maximum Shock Operating Half-sine shock in all operational orientations of 31 G ± 5% with a pulse duration of 2.6 ms ± 10% Storage Half-sine shock on all six sides of 71 G ± 5% with a pulse duration of 2 ms ± 10% Square wave shock on all six sides of 27 G with velocity change @ 235 in/sec or greater Altitude Operating -16 to 3048 m (-50 to 10,000 ft) Note: For altitudes above 2950 feet, the maximum operating temperature is de-rated 1°F/550 ft. Storage -16 to 10,600 m (-50 to 35,000 ft) PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 20 DELL 6.6 Maximum Input Amps The T710 system exhibits the following maximum current draw at the stated voltages: • 13.7A maximum at 90 VAC • 12.0A maximum at 100 VAC • 10.4A maximum at 115 VAC • 5.75A maximum at 208 VAC • 5.45A maximum at 220 VAC • 5.2A maximum at 230 VAC 6.7 EnergySmart Enablement T710 does not support a separate EnergySmart configuration as was offered with certain 10 G servers. A 750 W EnergySmart power supply option is under investigation, but will not be available at RTS. Certain other EnergySmart options may be made available in the future. 6.8 Energy Star Compliance The final Energy Star specification for servers was issued in mid-May, 2009. Work is underway to determine which configurations of T710 will be Energy Star compliant. This section will be updated accordingly. 6.9 Acoustics The acoustical design of the PowerEdge T710 reflects: • Adherence to Dell’s high sound quality standards. Sound quality is different from sound power level and sound pressure level in that it describes how humans respond to annoyances in sound, like whistles, hums, etc. One of the sound quality metrics in the Dell specification is prominence ratio of a tone, and this is listed in the table below. • Office environment acoustics. Compare the values for LpA in Table 7 to see that they are lower than ambient noise levels of typical office environments. • Hardware configurations affect system noise levels. Dell’s advanced thermal control provides for optimized cooling with varying hardware configurations. Some of the perhaps less intuitive but potentially important decision-making configuration examples are listed below. o Most typical configurations perform as listed in Table 7. o However, some less typical configurations and components can result in higher noise levels. Examples of acoustical performance for non-typical hardware configurations are shown in Table 7. o The dBA values are not additive, e.g., incorporating a change for 2 dBA reduction and another change for 3 dBA does not generally produce a 5 dBA reduction. • Noise ramp and descent at Boot-up. Fan speed noise levels ramp during the boot process to add a layer of protection for component cooling if the system does not boot properly. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 21 DELL Table 7. T710’s Prominence Ratio to Tone Operating Mode LwA-UL, bels LpA, dBA Tones PowerEdge T710 3.5” HDD System Typical: 4x Y847J fans, 2x 80 W M399F CPUs, 5x GX198 146 GB 15 KRPM HDDs, 6x 2-GB D841D DIMMs, 2x 1100-W Y613G Power Supplies, PERC6/i YK838 card, 2x X3959 NIC PCI cards, 1x DVD Drive at 23° C Standby 2.7 13 No prominent tones Idle 5.9 40 No prominent tones Active Hard Disk Drives 6.0 42 No prominent tones Stressed Processor, SPECPower at 50% loading 5.9 40 No prominent tones Non-Typical Hardware Configurations; Same as Above Except with Following PCI cards 10 Gb NIC, Idle 6.0 42 No prominent tones PERC6/E, Idle 6.0 42 No prominent tones 4+ PCI cards installed 6.2 44 No prominent tones PowerEdge T710 2.5” HDD System Typical: 4x Y847J fans, 2x 80 W M399F CPUs, 5x 2.5” 73 GB 15 KRPM SAS HDDs, 6x 2-GB D841D DIMMs, 2x 1100-W Y613G Power Supplies, PERC6/i YK838 card, 2x X3959 NIC PCI cards, 1xDVD Drive at 23° C Standby 2.7 13 No prominent tones Idle 5.7 38 No prominent tones Active Hard Disk Drives 5.7 39 No prominent tones Stressed Processor, SPECPower at 50% loading 5.7 38 No prominent tones PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 22 DELL 7 Block Diagram Figure 20. T710 Block Diagram 8 Processors 8.1 Overview The Intel 5500 two-socket processor is the IA-32 microprocessor designed specifically for servers and workstation applications. The processor is based on new Core micro-architecture; however, it is 100 percent compatible with existing IA-32 software. Selective Intel Xeon 5500 series two-socket SKUs also support Turbo Mode. Turbo Mode is an OS-controlled operation that automatically allows the processor to run faster than the marked frequency if the CPU is operating below power, temperature, and current limits. The Intel Xeon 5500 series two-socket processor utilizes a 1366-contact Flip-Chip Land Grid Array (FCLGA) package that plugs into a surface mount socket. Table 8. Intel Xeon 5500 Series Features Intel Xeon 5500 series Two-Socket Processor Features Cache size 32 KB instruction 32 KB data 4 or 8 MB (shared) Multi-processor support 1-2 CPUs Package LGA1366 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 23 DELL 8.2 Features The Intel 5500 two-socket processor supports all Streaming SIMD Extensions (including SSE2, SSE3, and SSE4) and Intel 64 instructions. Key features: • Four or two cores per processor • Two point-to-point QPI links at 6.4 GT/s • 1366-land FC-LGA package • No termination required for non-populated CPUs (must populate CPU socket 1 first) • Integrated QuickPath DDR3 memory controller • 64-byte cache line size • RISC/CISC hybrid architecture • Compatible with existing x86 code base • Optimized for 32-bit code • MMX support • Execute Disable Bit • Intel Wide Dynamic Execution o Executes up to four instructions per clock cycle • Simultaneous Multi-Threading (SMT) capability • Support for CPU Turbo Mode (on certain SKUs) o Increases CPU frequency if operating below thermal, power, and current limits • Streaming SIMD (Single Instruction, Multiple Data) Extension 4 • Intel 64 Technology • Intel VT-x and VT-d Technology for virtualization support • Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology • Demand-based switching for active CPU power management as well as support for ACPI PStates, C-States, and T-States 8.3 Supported Processors All processors are branded as Intel Xeon and a 256K L2 cache per core. Please go to Dell.com or contact your Dell representative for the most up-to-date offering. Table 9. Supported Processors and Descriptions Model Speed Power QPI L3 Cache Features Cores X5570 2.93 GHz 95 W 6.4 GT/s 8 M Turbo +3, HT 4 X5560 2.80 GHz 95 W 6.4 GT/s 8 M Turbo +3, HT 4 X5550 2.66 GHz 95 W 6.4 GT/s 8 M Turbo +3, HT 4 E5540 2.53 GHz 80 W 5.86 GT/s 8 M Turbo +2, HT 4 E5530 2.40 GHz 80 W 5.86 GT/s 8 M Turbo +2, HT 4 E5520 2.26 GHz 80 W 5.86 GT/s 8 M Turbo +2, HT 4 L5520 2.26 GHz 60 W 5.86 GT/s 8 M Turbo +2, HT 4 E5506 2.13 GHz 80 W 4.8 GT/s 4 M – 4 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 24 DELL Model Speed Power QPI L3 Cache Features Cores E5504 2.00 GHz 80 W 4.8 GT/s 4 M – 4 E5502 1.86 GHz 80 W 4.8 GT/s 4 M – 2 8.4 Processor Configurations T710 provides support for up to two Intel 5500 two-socket processors. A single processor placed in the CPU1 socket functions normally; however, T710 systems require a CPU blank in the CPU2 socket for thermal reasons. The system is held in reset if a single processor is placed in the CPU2 socket. 8.5 Additional Processor Information Voltage regulation to the Intel 5500 two-socket processor is provided by EVRD (Enterprise Voltage Regulator-Down). EVRDs are embedded on the planar. CPU core voltage is not shared between processors. EVRDs support static phase shedding and power management via the PMBus. 9 Memory 9.1 Overview T710 utilizes DDR3 memory providing a high performance, high-speed memory interface capable of low-latency response and high throughput. T710 supports Registered ECC DDR3 DIMMs (RDIMM) or Unbuffered ECC DDR3 DIMMs (UDIMM). The DDR3 memory interface consists of three channels. The maximum number of supported DIMMs is dependent on the type of DIMM used Table 10. DIMM Configurations DIMM Type Maximum Configuration Single or dual rank RDIMM 3 per channel per processor (18 total) Quad rank RDIMM 2 per channel per processor (12 total) Single or dual rank UDIMM 2 per channel per processor (12 total) 9.2 DIMMs Supported T710’s DDR3 interface supports 2, 4, 8, or 16 GB RDIMMs and 1 GB or 2 GB UDIMMs. 9.3 Memory Population Scenarios The memory mode is dependent on how the memory is populated in the system. • Three channels populated per CPU o Typically, the system runs in Independent Channel mode in this configuration. This mode offers the most DIMM population flexibility and system memory capacity, but offers the least number of RAS (reliability, availability, service) features. o All three channels must be populated identically. o Maximum memory bus speed is 800 MHz • Two channels (CH 2 and CH 1) are populated identically per CPU; third channel is unused. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 25 DELL o When mirroring is enabled, the memory image in Channel 2 is maintained the same as Channel 1. o Typically, two channels operate in Advanced ECC (Lockstep) mode with each other by having the cache line split across both channels. This mode provides improved RAS features (SDDC support for x8-based memory). o For memory mirroring, the two channels operate as mirrors of each other – writes go to both channels and reads alternate between the two channels. The channels are no longer in lockstep mode. • One channel is populated per CPU o This is a simple Memory Optimized (Independent) mode. Mirroring is not supported. The T710 memory interface supports memory demand and patrol scrubbing, single-bit correction, and multi-bit error detection. Correction of a x4 or x8 device failure is also possible through the lockstep channel mode and the SDDC code. Additionally, correction of a x4 device failure is possible through the independent channel mode. 9.4 Slots/Risers The T710 has 18 DIMM slots on the motherboard. No memory risers are utilized. Nine DIMM slots are associated with each processor. Both processors must be populated to utilize all 18 DIMM slots. Figure 21. T710 Motherboard 9.5 Speed/Memory Features Key features of the T710 memory system include: • Registered (RDIMM) and Unbuffered (UDIMM) ECC DDR3 technology • Each channel carries 64 data and eight ECC bits • Support for up to 144 GB of RDIMM memory (with 18 x 8 GB RDIMMs) • Support for up to 24 GB of UDIMM memory (with 12 x 2 GB UDIMMs) • Support for 1066/1333 MHz single and dual rank DIMMs • Support for 1066 MHz quad rank DIMMs • 800 MHz DIMMs are only used in testing • Single DIMM configuration only with 1 GB DIMM at socket DIMM A1 • Support ODT (On Die Termination) • Clock gating (CKE) to conserve power when DIMMs are not accessed • DIMMs enter a low power self-refresh mode PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 26 DELL • I2C access to SPD EEPROM for access to RDIMM thermal sensors • Single Bit Error Correction • SDDC (Single Device Data Correction – x4 or x8 devices) • Support for Closed Loop Thermal Management • Multi Bit Error Detection • Support for Memory Optimized Mode • Support for Memory Mirroring • Support for Independent channel mode 9.6 Memory Population Across CPU sockets, DIMM populations can be different as long as the population rules for each socket are followed. Additionally, both CPU sockets operate in the same RAS mode and are set up with the same memory timing parameters. • If DIMMs of different speeds are mixed, all channels operate at the fastest common frequency. • RDIMMs and UDIMMs cannot be mixed. • The first DIMM slot in each channel is color-coded with white ejection tabs for ease of identification. • The first DIMM slot in each channel is color-coded with white ejection tabs for ease of installation. • The DIMM sockets are placed 450 mils (11.43 mm) apart, center-to-center in order to provide enough space for sufficient airflow to cool stacked DIMMs. • The T710 memory subsystem supports up to 18 DIMMs. DIMMs must be installed in each channel starting with the DIMM farthest from the processor. Population order will be identified by the silkscreen designator and the System Information Label (SIL) located on the chassis cover. See the figure below for DIMM naming and numbering. o Memory Optimized (Independent): {1, 2, 3}, {4, 5, 6}, {7, 8, 9} o Advanced ECC (Lockstep) or Mirrored: {2,3}, {5, 6}, {8, 9} o Quad Rank or UDIMM: {1, 2, 3}, {4, 5, 6} 9.7 Memory Speed Limitations The memory frequency is determined by a variety of inputs: • Speed of the DIMMs • Speed supported by the CPU • Configuration of the DIMMs Table 10 shows the memory populations and the maximum frequency achievable for that configuration. Note For Quad Rank DIMMs mixed with Single or Dual Rank DIMMs, the QR DIMM needs to be in the slot with the white ejection tabs (the first DIMM slot in each channel). There is no requirement for the order of SR and DR DIMMs. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 27 DELL Table 11. DIMM Population and Maximum Achievable Frequency DIMM Type DIMM 0 DIMM 1 DIMM 2 # of DIMMs 800 1066 1333 UDIMM SR – – 1    DR – – 1    SR SR – 2    SR DR – 2    DR DR – 2    RDIMM SR – – 1    DR – – 1    QR – – 1    SR SR – 2    SR DR – 2    DR DR – 2    QR SR – 2    QR DR – 2    QR QR – 2    SR SR SR 3    SR SR DR 3    SR DR DR 3    DR DR DR 3    9.8 Mirroring Memory mirroring is supported on memory configurations 29 (64GB) and 35 (32GB). 10 Chipset 10.1 Overview The T710 motherboard incorporates the Intel 5500-EP chipset for I/O and processor interfacing. The Intel 5500 chipset supports Intel’s 5500 two-socket processor family, QPI interconnect, DDR3 memory technology, and PCI Express Generation 2. The Intel 5500 chipset consists of the Intel-5500 36D Dual IOH and ICH9. 10.2 Intel 5500 Chipset Dual I/O Hub (IOH) The T710 motherboard incorporates the Intel 5500 chipset 36D Dual IOH to provide a link between the Intel 5500 two-socket processors and I/O components. The main components of the IOH consist of two full-width QPI links (one to each processor), 72 lanes of PCIe Gen2, and a x4 ESI link to connect directly to the South Bridge. The IOH supports a special mode to work with DP processors that allow two IOHs to appear as a single IOH to the processors in the system. This mode results in special behavior in the link and protocol PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 28 DELL layers. Each IOH has a unique NodeID for communication between each other, but only the legacy IOH’s NodeID are exposed to the CPU. 10.3 Intel Quickpath Architecture The QuickPath Architecture consists of serial point-to-point interconnects for the processors and the IOH. T710 has a total of four QuickPath Interconnect (QPI) links including one link connecting the processors and links connecting both processors with the IOH and links connecting both IOHs. Each link consists of 20 lanes (full-width) in each direction with a link speed of 6.4 GT/s. An additional lane is reserved for a forwarded clock. Data is sent over the QPI links as packets. The QuickPath Architecture implemented in the Intel 5500 chipset features four layers. The Physical layer consists of the actual connection between components. It supports Polarity Inversion and Lane Reversal for optimizing component placement and routing. The Link layer is responsible for flow control and the reliable transmission of data. The Routing layer is responsible for the routing of QPI data packets. Finally, the Protocol layer is responsible for high-level protocol communications, including the implementation of a MESIF (Modify, Exclusive, Shared, Invalid, Forward) cache coherence protocol. 10.4 PCI Express Generation 2 PCI Express is a serial point-to-point interconnects for I/O devices. PCIe Gen2 doubles the signaling bit rate of each lane from 2.5 Gb/s to 5 Gb/s. Each of the PCIe Gen2 ports are backwards-compatible with Gen1 transfer rates. 10.5 Intel Direct Media Interface (DMI) The DMI (previously called the Enterprise Southbridge Interface) connects the Intel 5500 chipset IOH with the Intel I/O Controller Hub (ICH). The DMI is equivalent to a x4 PCIe Gen1 link with a transfer rate of 1 GB/s in each direction. Intel controller Hub 9/10 is a highly integrated I/O controller, supporting the following functions: • Six x1 PCIe Gen1 ports, with the capability of combining ports 1-4 as a x4 link o These ports are unused on T710 • PCI Bus 32-bit Interface Rev 2.3 running at 33 MHz • Up to six Serial ATA (SATA) ports with transfer rates up to 300 MB/s o T710 features two SATA ports for optional internal optical drive or tape backup • Six UHCI and two EHCI (High-Speed 2.0) USB host controllers, with up to twelve USB ports o T710 has eight external USB ports and two internal ports dedicated for UIPS and embedded storage • Power management interface (ACPI 3.0b compliant) • Platform Environmental Control Interface (PECI) • Intel Dynamic Power Mode Manager • I/O interrupt controller • SMBus 2.0 controller • Low-Pin Count (LPC) interface to Super I/O, Trusted Platform Module (TPM), and SuperVU • Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) support for up to two devices o T710 BIOS is connected to the ICH using SPI PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 29 DELL 10.6 Super I/O Controller The T710 system planar incorporates a SMSC LPC47M534 Super I/O controller to provide support for the serial port and the keyboard controller. The LPC47M534 is a plug and play compatible device that interfaces directly to the ICH through an embedded LPC bus. 11 BIOS 11.1 Overview The T710 BIOS is based on the Dell BIOS core and supports: • IA-32 Intel 5500 Two-Socket Support • Simultaneous Multi-Threading (SMT) support • CPU Turbo Mode support • PCI 2.3 compliant • Plug n’ Play 1.0a compliant • MP (Multiprocessor) 1.4 compliant • Boot from hard drive, optical drive, iSCSI drive, USB key, and SD card • ACPI support • Direct Media Interface (DMI) support • PXE and WOL support for on-board NICs • Memory mirroring • SETUP access through key at end of POST • USB 2.0 (USB boot code is 1.1 compliant) • F1/F2 error logging in CMOS • Virtual KVM, CD, and floppy support • UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) 2.1 support The T710 BIOS does not support: • Embedded diagnostics • BIOS language localization • BIOS recovery after bad flash (but can be recovered via iDRAC Express) 11.2 Supported ACPI States PE T710 conforms to Advance Configuration and Power Interface Specification, v2.0c. and provides support for ACPI P-States, C-States, and T-States. 12 Embedded NICs/LAN on Motherboard (LOM) 12.1 Overview Two dual-port LAN controllers with support circuitry are embedded on the T710 system board as independent Ethernet interface device. This provides four LOM ports at the rear of the server. Both controllers are TOE enabled, with optional iSCSI offload engine. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 30 DELL The device is Broadcom 5709C Gigabit Ethernet controller. The following information details the features of the LAN device: • x4 PCI Express Gen2 capable interface o T710 operates dual-port controllers at Gen1 speed • MAC and PHY integrated • 3072x18 Byte context memory • 64 KB receive buffer • TOE (TCP Offload Engine) • iSCSI controller (enabled through an optional hardware key) • RDMA controller (RNIC) (enabled through an optional hardware key) • NC-SI (Network Controller-Sideband Interface) connection • Wake-On-LAN (WOL) • PXE 2.0 remote boot • iSCSI boot • IPv4 and IPv6 support • Bare metal deployment support 13 I/O Slots 13.1 Overview The T710 comes standard with six PCIe (gen 2) expansion slots on the motherboard. A separate dedicated slot is provided on the motherboard for the HDD controller. All PCIe slots are x8 connectors, except the x16 slot. Slot specifications are shown below. See the motherboard diagram for slot locations. • Slot 1 = half length, full height PCIe x4 link • Slot 2 = Full length, full height PCIe x16 link • Slot 3 = Full length, full height PCIe x8 link • Slot 4 = Half length, full height PCIe x8 link • Slot 5 = Half length, full height PCIe x8 link • Slot 6 = Half length, full height PCIe x8 link • Storage slot = PCIe x8 link 13.2 X16 Express Card Specifications T710 supports x16 cards that meet the following requirements: • Standard height (4.376”) • Full length (12.283”) • Support for full bandwidth of x16 Gen2 link • No support for hot-plug or hot-removal • Maximum power of 25W • T710 provides +12V, +3.3V, and +3.3Vaux in accordance with Power Supply Rail Requirements • x16 slot is not compliant with the PCI Express x16 Graphics 150W-ATX Specification • x16 cards must be compliant with the PCI Express Card Electromechanical Specification Rev 2.0 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 31 DELL • x16 cards must only occupy the space of one slot. Cards that occupy the space of two slots are not supported • x16 card is limited to 25 W initial start-up power until it is configured as a high-power device. If no value is set for the Slot Power Limit, the card is limited to 25 W. The card must then scale down to 25 W or disable operation per PCI Express Base Spec Rev 2.0 • x16 card must be able to support a maximum operating temperature of 55°C as defined in the Dell PCI Environmental Spec and the PCI Express Card Electromechanical Spec. T710 provides a minimum transverse air velocity of x LFM (linear feet per minute) to the x16 card. 13.3 Available PCIe Cards T710 supports the following cards. Maximum supported and slot priorities shown. Table 12. T710 Supported PCIe Cards and Descriptions1 Category Card Priority Description Width Slot Priority2 Maximum Cards Internal Storage (Integrated Slot) 100 Dell PERC 6/i Integrated (No Sled) x8 Gen1 Integrated 1 200 Dell SAS 6/iR Integrated (No Sled) x8 Gen1 Integrated 1 External Controllers 300 Dell SAS 5/E x8 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 2#3 400 Dell PERC 6/E 512 x8 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 2#3 500 Dell PERC 6/E 256 x8 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 2#3 10 GB NICs 600 Intel 10G Base-DA SFP+ Dual Port Adapter x8 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 4 700 Intel 10G Base-T Single Port NIC x8 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 43 800 Broadcom® NetXtreme II® 57710 Single Port 10G Base-T Ethernet PCIExpress Network Interface Card with TOE and iSCSI Offload x8 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 43 900 Intel 10G Base-SR Optical Single Port NIC x8 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 4 Internal Storage 1000 Dell SAS 5/iR x8 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 2#3 FC8 HBA Single Port 1100 Qlogic QLE2562 8Gbps FC HBA, Dual Port x8 Gen1/x4 Gen2 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5 1200 Emulex LPe12002 8Gbps FC HBA, Dual Port x8 Gen1/x4 Gen2 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5 1300 Qlogic QLE2560 8Gbps FC HBA, Single Port x8 Gen1/x4 Gen2 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 32 DELL Category Card Priority Description Width Slot Priority2 Maximum Cards 1400 Emulex LPe12000 8Gbps FC HBA, Single Port x8 Gen1/x4 Gen2 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5 FC4 HBA 1500 Qlogic QLE2462 FC4 HBA, Dual Port x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5 1600 Qlogic QLE2460 FC4 HBA, Single Port x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5 1700 Qlogic QLE220 FC4 HBA, Single Port x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5 1800 Emulex LPe11002 FC4 HBA, Dual Port x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5 1900 Emulex LPe1150 FC4 HBA, Single Port x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5 SCSI HBA 2000 LSI2032 PCIe SCSI HBA x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 2 1 GB NICs 2100 Intel PRO/1000VT 1G Cu Quad Port NIC x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5 2200 Intel PRO/1000PT 1G Cu Dual Port NIC x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3,1 6 2300 Broadcom 5709 IPV6 1G CU Dual Port NIC TOE/iSOE x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3,1 6 2400 Broadcom 5709 IPv6 1G Cu Dual Port NIC TOE x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3,1 6 1. For optimal performance, it is best to alternate slot population as Slot 6, 4, and 2, before starting Slot 5,3, and1. 2. Slot 1 should be used for 1G NIC's only preferably. 3. T710 supports up to four 25 W maximum power each (excluding internal storage slot) and up to two 15 W for the remainder PCI-e cards regardless of which slots are populated. This restriction applies to any PCIe cards with a maximum power over 15 W. 13.4 Boot Order System boot order is settable in the BIOS 14 Storage 14.1 Overview T710 supports a 16-drive backplane for 2.5” drives and an eight-drive backplane for 3.5” drives. There are sixteen 2.5” or eight 3.5” hot-plug capable Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or Serial ATA (SATA) slots with two LED indicators per slot, two Mini-SAS cable connectors for connecting the backplane to the integrated SAS 6/iR or PERC 6/i, a 10-pin planar signal connector, and an 8-pin PDB power connector. SAS 6/iR is only supported on the 3.5” HDD backplane. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 33 DELL 14.2 3.5” X8 HDD Backplane The 3.5” HDD backplane has: • 3.5” HDD are supported in this configuration • 2.5” SSD in 3.5” carrier. Also max of 2x 2.5” SAS HDD in 3.5” carrier for entry SAS HDD price point • Two Mini-SAS cables are used to connect both channels of the integrated SAS 6/iR or PERC 6/i card to the eight-drive backplane. • For SATA/SAS mixing, two SAS drives are supported. In this configuration, one pair of drives will be SAS and the remaining six drives will be SATA. 14.3 2.5” X16 HDD Backplane The 2.5” HDD backplane has: • Only 2.5” HDD are supported in this configuration • One Mini-SAS cable is used to connect one channel of the integrated PERC 6/I (only) card to the sixteen-drive backplane. • A SAS expander is used to map 16 HDD to the PERC (x4) controller • For SATA/SAS mixing, two SAS drives are supported. In this configuration, one pair of drives will be SAS and the remaining fourteen drives will be SATA. 14.4 Storage Card Support Matrix Table 13. Storage Card Support Matrix SKU Product Usage T710 Support Slot PCIe Con PCI Bracket I/O Con RAID BBU PERC SAS/SATA PERC 6/i Integrated Internal Backplane Storage (HDD, SSD) Yes – Max 1 Storage slot x8 No x4 int 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, 60 BBU PERC 6/E Adapter External SAS/SATA Storage Yes – Max 2 (MD1000 Pompano and MD1020 Ridgeback) PCIe slot x8 Yes x4 ext x4 ext 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, 60 TBBU PERC 5/E Adapter External Legacy Storage Yes – Max 2 (MD1000 Pompano only) PCIe slot x8 Yes x4 ext x4 ext 0, 1, 5, 10, 50 TBBU SAS HBA SAS/SATA SAS 6/iR Integrated Internal Backplane Storage (No tape or SSD support) Yes – Max 1 Storage slot x8 No x4 int x4 int 0, 1 No SAS 5/iR Adapter Internal SAS Tape Yes – Max 1 PCIe slot x8 Yes x4 int N/A No PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 34 DELL SKU Product Usage T710 Support Slot PCIe Con PCI Bracket I/O Con RAID BBU SAS 5/E Adapter External SAS (DAS, Tape) Yes – Max 2 PCIe slot x8 Yes x4 ext x4 ext None No ICH SATA On Planar via chipset Internal SATA Optical and/or Tape (No HDD) Yes - 2 ports for Optical and/or Tape N/A N/A N/A x1 int N/A N/A LSI 2032 SCSI LSI 2032 Adapter Internal/Extern al SCSI Tape or External legacy SCSI storage Yes - Max 2 PCIe slot x4 Yes SCSI(i nt) SCSI (ext) N/A N/A 14.5 Available Drives Table 14. T710 Available Drives and Descriptions Form Factor Capacity Speed Type 2.5” 25 GB N/A SATA SSD 2.5” 50 GB N/A SATA SSD 2.5” 100 GB N/A SATA SSD 2.5” 73 GB 15 k SAS HDD 2.5” 146 GB 15 k SAS HDD 2.5” 146 GB 10 k SAS HDD 2.5” 300 GB 10 k SAS HDD 2.5” 160 GB 7.2 k SATA HDD 2.5” 250 GB 7.2 k SATA HDD 2.5” 500 GB 7.2 k NL SAS HDD 3.5” 146 GB 15 k SAS HDD 3.5” 300 GB 15 k SAS HDD 3.5” 450 GB 15 k SAS HDD 3.5” 600 GB 10 k SAS HDD 3.5” 160 GB 7.2 k SATA HDD 3.5” 250 GB 7.2 k SATA HDD 3.5” 500 GB 7.2 k SATA HDD 3.5” 750 GB 7.2 k SATA HDD 3.5” 1000 GB 7.2 k SATA HDD 3.5” 500 GB 7.2 k NL SAS HDD 3.5” 750 GB 7.2 k NL SAS HDD 3.5” 1000 GB 7.2 k NL SAS HDD PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 35 DELL 14.6 RAID Configurations T710 offers a wide array or RAID configurations from the factory to support the large drive capacity and the mixing of SSD, SAS, and SATA drives. All configurations use the back plane connection type. Table 15. T710 RAID Configurations Configuration Type Configurations Description Non-Mixed drives, all SATA, or all SAS, or all SSD Mixed SAS/ SATA Non-RAID mix of SSD with SAS/SATA not supported Min 2xSAS+1xSATA 2.5” (2.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 14xSATA 2.5” (3.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA 3.5”: Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/3.5” chassis Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/ 3.5” chassis SAS/SATA – No RAID 0 MSS Integrated SAS/SATA No RAID (SAS 6/iR) 2.5” = not valid 3.5” = 1 2.5” SSD = not valid 2.5” = not valid 3.5” = 8 2.5” SSD = not valid 2.5” = not valid 2.5” = not valid 3.5” = 3 3.5” = 8 2.5” SSD = not valid 2.5” SSD = not valid PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 36 DELL Configuration Type Configurations Description Non-Mixed drives, all SATA, or all SAS, or all SSD Mixed SAS/ SATA Non-RAID mix of SSD with SAS/SATA not supported Min 2xSAS+1xSATA 2.5” (2.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 14xSATA 2.5” (3.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA 3.5”: Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/3.5” chassis Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/ 3.5” chassis SAS/SATA - RAID 1 MSSR0 Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 0 (SAS 6/iR) Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 0 (PERC6iI) 2.5” = not valid 3.5” = 2 2.5” = 2 3.5” = 2 2.5” = not valid 3.5” = 8 2.5” = 16/8 3.5” = 8 N/A SAS/SATA - RAID 2 MSSR1 Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 1 (SAS 6/iR) Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 1 (PERC6/i) 2.5” = not valid 3.5” = 2 2.5” = 2 3.5” = 2 2.5” = not valid 3.5” = 2 2.5” = 2 3.5” = 2 N/A SAS/SATA - RAID 3 MSSR5 Integrated SSD/ SAS/SATA RAID 5 (PERC 6/i ) 2.5” = 3 3.5” = 3 2.5” = 16/8 3.5” = 8 N/A SAS/SATA - RAID 4 MSSR6 Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 6 (PERC 6/i) 2.5” = 4 3.5” = 4 2.5” = 16/8 3.5” = 8 N/A SAS/SATA - RAID 5 MSSR10 Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 10 (PERC 6/i ) 2.5” = 4 3.5” = 4 2.5” = 16/8 3.5” = 8 N/A PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 37 DELL Configuration Type Configurations Description Non-Mixed drives, all SATA, or all SAS, or all SSD Mixed SAS/ SATA Non-RAID mix of SSD with SAS/SATA not supported Min 2xSAS+1xSATA 2.5” (2.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 14xSATA 2.5” (3.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA 3.5”: Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/3.5” chassis Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/ 3.5” chassis SAS/SATA - RAID 6 MSSR50 Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 50 (PERC 6/i ) 2.5” = 6 3.5” = 6 2.5” = 16/8 3.5” = 8 N/A SAS/SATA - RAID 7 MSSR60 Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 60 (PERC 6/i ) 2.5” = 8 3.5” = 8 2.5” = 16/8 3.5” = 8 N/A SAS/SATA - RAID 8 MSSR1R1 Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 1/RAID 1 (SAS 6/iR, PERC 6/i) 2.5” = 2+2 3.5” = 2+2 2.5” = 2+2 3.5” = 2+2 N/A SAS/SATA - RAID 9 MSSR1R5 Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 1/RAID 5 (PERC 6/i) 2.5” = 2 + 3 3.5” = 2 + 3 2.5” = 2+14/6 3.5” = 2+ 6 N/A SAS/SATA - RAID 13 MSSR1R6 Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 1/RAID 6 (PERC 6/i) 2.5” = 2 + 3 3.5” = 2 + 3 2.5” = 2+14/6 3.5” = 2+ 6 N/A SAS/SATA – No RAID 10 MSS-X Integrated SAS/SATA No RAID (SAS 6/iR) – – 2.5” = not valid 3.5” = 3 2.5” = not valid 3.5” = 2+2 2.5”= not valid 3.5”=6 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 38 DELL Configuration Type Configurations Description Non-Mixed drives, all SATA, or all SAS, or all SSD Mixed SAS/ SATA Non-RAID mix of SSD with SAS/SATA not supported Min 2xSAS+1xSATA 2.5” (2.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 14xSATA 2.5” (3.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA 3.5”: Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/3.5” chassis Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/ 3.5” chassis SAS/SATA - RAID 11 MSSR1R1-X Integrated SAS/SATA RAID 1/RAID 1 (SAS 6/iR) Integrated SAS/SATA RAID 1/RAID 1 (PERC 6/i) – – – 2.5” = not valid 3.5” = 2+2 2.5” = 2+2 3.5” = 2+2 SAS/SATA - RAID 12 MSSR1R5-X Integrated SAS/SATA RAID 1/RAID 5 (PERC 6/i) – – – 2.5” = 2 + 14/6 3.5” = 2 + 6 SSD/SAS - RAID 14 MSSR0R1-X Integrated SSD/SAS RAID 0/RAID 1 (PERC 6/i) RAID 0 set is SSD, RAID 1 set is SAS – – 2.5” = 1 + 2 2.5” = 14 + 2 3.5” = 1 + 2 3.5” = 6 + 2 SSD/SAS - RAID 15 MSSR1R1-X Integrated SSD/SAS RAID 1/RAID 1 (PERC 6/i) RAID 1 set is SSD, second RAID 1 set is SAS – – 2.5” = 2 + 2 2.5” = 2 + 2 3.5” = 2 + 2 3.5” = 2 + 2 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 39 DELL Configuration Type Configurations Description Non-Mixed drives, all SATA, or all SAS, or all SSD Mixed SAS/ SATA Non-RAID mix of SSD with SAS/SATA not supported Min 2xSAS+1xSATA 2.5” (2.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 14xSATA 2.5” (3.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA 3.5”: Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/3.5” chassis Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/ 3.5” chassis SSD/SAS - RAID 16 MSSR1R5-X Integrated SSD/SAS RAID 1/RAID 5 (PERC 6/i) RAID 1 set is SSD, RAID 5 set is SAS – – 2.5” = 2 + 3 2.5” = 2 + 14 3.5” = 2 + 3 3.5” = 2 + 6 SSD/SAS - RAID 17 MSSR1R10-X Integrated SSD/SAS RAID 1/RAID 10 (PERC 6/i) RAID 1 set is SSD, RAID 10 set is SAS – – 2.5” = 2 + 4 2.5” = 2 + 14 3.5” = 2 + 4 3.5” = 2 + 4 SSD/SAS - RAID 18 MSSR1R50-X Integrated SSD/SAS RAID 1/RAID 50 (PERC 6/i) RAID 1 set is SSD, RAID 50 set is SAS – – 2.5” = 2 + 6 2.5” = 2 + 14 3.5” = 2 + 6 3.5” = 2 + 6 SSD/SAS - RAID 19 MSSR10R50-X Integrated SSD/SAS RAID 10/RAID 50 (PERC 6/i) RAID 10 set is SSD, RAID 50 set is SAS – – 2.5” = 4 + 6 2.5” = 8 + 8 3.5” = not valid 3.5” = not valid PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 40 DELL Configuration Type Configurations Description Non-Mixed drives, all SATA, or all SAS, or all SSD Mixed SAS/ SATA Non-RAID mix of SSD with SAS/SATA not supported Min 2xSAS+1xSATA 2.5” (2.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 14xSATA 2.5” (3.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA 3.5”: Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/3.5” chassis Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/ 3.5” chassis SSD/SAS/ SATA RAID 20 MSSR0R1R5-X Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 0/RAID 1/RAID 5 (PERC 6/i) RAID 0 set is SSD, RAID 1 set is SAS, RAID 5 set is SATA – – 2.5” = 1 + 2 + 3 2.5” = 4 + 2 + 10 3.5” = 1 + 2 + 3 3.5” = 2 + 2 + 4 SSD/SAS/ SATA RAID 21 MSSR1R1R5-X Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 1/RAID 1/RAID 5 (PERC 6/i) RAID 1 set is SSD, second RAID 1 set is SAS, RAID 5 set is SATA – – 2.5” = 2 + 2 + 3 2.5” = 2 + 2 + 12 3.5” = 2 + 2 + 3 3.5” = 2 + 2 + 4 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 41 DELL Configuration Type Configurations Description Non-Mixed drives, all SATA, or all SAS, or all SSD Mixed SAS/ SATA Non-RAID mix of SSD with SAS/SATA not supported Min 2xSAS+1xSATA 2.5” (2.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 14xSATA 2.5” (3.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA 3.5”: Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/3.5” chassis Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/ 3.5” chassis SSD/SAS/ SATA RAID 22 MSSR10R1R5- X Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 10/RAID 1/RAID 5 (PERC 6/i) RAID 10 set is SSD, RAID 1 set is SAS, RAID 5 set is SATA – – 2.5” = 4 +2 + 3 2.5” = 8 + 2 + 6 or 2.5” = 4 + 2 + 10 3.5” = not valid 3.5” = not valid PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 42 DELL 14.7 Internal Storage Controllers T710 supports a choice of two internal 3GB SAS HDD controllers. The internal controller is placed in the dedicated storage slot on the motherboard. 14.8 LED Indicators Each disk drive carrier has two LED indicators visible from the front of the system. One is a green LED for disk activity and the other is a bicolor (Green/Amber) LED for status information. The activity LED is driven by the disk drive during normal operation. The bicolor LED is controlled by the SEP device on the backplane. Both LEDs indicate certain conditions under direction of a storage controller. 14.9 Optical Drives SATA optical drives are optional and connect to the planar via a SATA interface. IDE optical drives are no longer supported. The following optical drives are available on T710: DVD-ROM and DVD+RW. If the optical drive is not ordered with the system, a blank is installed in its place. In the absence of tape drive, an optional second SATA optical drive is installed in the bay adjacent to the first optical drive. 14.10 Tape Drives Tape drives are optional and connect to the planar via SATA/SCSI controller card/SAS controller card. IDE tape drive is no longer supported. The following tape drives are available for usage on T710: internal SATA, SCSI, and SAS drives; external SCSI and SAS drives. If the tape drive is not ordered with the system, a blank is installed in its place. T710 supports a number of internal tape backup options, plus the RD1000 disk backup unit. Only halfheight backup options are supported. 15 Video 15.1 Overview The T710 system Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller (iDRAC6) incorporates an integrated video subsystem, connected to the 32-bit PCI interface of the ICH. This logic is based on the Matrox G200. The device only supports 2D graphics. The integrated video core shares its video memory with the iDRAC’s 128 MB DDR2 application space memory. This memory is also used for the KVM buffer. The T710 system supports the following 2D graphics video modes: Table 16. Video Descriptions Resolution Refresh Rate (Hz) Color Depth (bit) 640 x 480 60, 72, 75, 85 8, 16, 32 800 x 600 56, 60, 72, 75, 85 8, 16, 32 1024 x 768 60, 72, 75, 85 8, 16, 32 1152 x 864 75 8, 16, 32 1280 x 1024 60, 75, 85 8, 16 1280 x 1024 60 32 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 43 DELL 16 Audio T710 does not support audio (sound card or speakers) as a system feature. 17 Rack Information 17.1 Overview T710 shares the same rail kit and CMA as T610. The rails and CMA are 3U tall, but accommodate systems that are 3U or greater in height such as T710 and T610 (both 5U). The rack kit includes ears that bolt on the chassis and engage the rail latches. 17.2 Cable Management Arm (CMA) The 3U CMA for T710 contains the following cables. Table 17. Cable Types and Amount Containable Cable Type # of Cables Power 2 SAS 10 CAT6 2 Status LED 1 KVM dongle 1 Total 16 See Section 4.8 “Rails and Cable Management” for a picture of the new CMA. 17.3 Rack Configuration In the rack configuration, the top painted panel is removed and two ears are bolted to the chassis. The ears contain the slam latches that engage the rail latches. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 44 DELL Figure 22. T710 Rack Ears 17.4 Rails Sliding ReadyRails™ for 4-post Racks: Figure 23. T710 Sliding ReadyRails • Support for tool-less installation in 19” CEA-310-E compliant square hole 4-post racks including: • Support for Dell Clydesdale Racks (4220, 2420) • Support for Dell R2K Racks (4210, 2410) • Support for Dell Marconi Racks (4200, 2400) • Support for HP/Compaq 9xxx and 10xxx series racks • Support for HP/Compaq 7xxx series racks without the CMA • Support for tool-less installation in 19” CEA-310-E compliant round hole 4-post racks Ears bolt to chassis for rack configuration Ears Include slam latches to secure server in rack PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 45 DELL • Support for full extension of the system out of the rack to allow serviceability of key internal components • Support for optional cable management arm (CMA) • Rail depth without the CMA: 760 mm • Rail depth with the CMA: 840 mm • Square-hole rack adjustment range: 692-756 mm • Round-hole rack adjustment range: 678-749 mm 18 Operating Systems 18.1 Overview T710 supports all major enterprise server operating systems consistent with the Dell 11G server portfolio. 18.2 Operating Systems Supported Table 18. Microsoft Operating System Operating Systems Installation Factory Install Logo/Certification Schedule Small Business Server 2008 X64 Standard Premium FI FI WHQL RTS Small Business Server 2003 R2 32-bit x86 Standard Premium FI WHQL RTS Windows Server® 2008 and Windows Server 2008 SP2 32-bit x86 Standard FI WHQL RTS Enterprise FI RTS x64 Standard FI WHQL RTS Enterprise Datacenter FI FI RTS RTS Windows Server 2003 32-bit x86 Standard No WHQL RTS Enterprise No RTS x64 Standard No WHQL RTS Enterprise No RTS Windows Server 2003 R2 32-bit x86 Standard FI WHQL RTS Enterprise FI RTS x64 Standard FI WHQL RTS Enterprise FI RTS Datacenter DIB RTS PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 46 DELL Table 19. Linux Operating System Operating Systems Installation Factory Install Logo/Certification Schedule Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® 4.7 ES/AS x86-64 DIB, NFI Yes RTS RTS ES/AS x86 DIB, NFI Yes RTS RTS Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.3 x86-64 FI Yes RTS RTS x86 DIB, NFI Yes RTS RTS SUSETM Linux Enterprise Server 10 x86-64 SP2 X86-64 FI (may change) Yes RTS SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 11 x86-64 FI Yes RTS Table 20. Solaris Operating System Operating Systems Installation Factory Install Logo/Certification Schedule Solaris 10 (latest update) – DIB, NFI Yes Post RTS 19 Virtualization 19.1 Overview T710 has a primary mission as a virtualization platform for remote locations. Accordingly, the T710 supports all major virtualization options available from Dell, including VMware, Citrix XenServer and Microsoft Hyper-V Server. Embedded options are available for VMware and Citrix XenServer. Embedded options require the optional SD card module to be installed. 19.2 Virtualization Options Supported Table 21. Virtualization Options Supported Operating Systems Factory Install Logo/ Certification Schedule Support for VMware ESX TM 3.5 update 4 and ESX 4.0 FI Yes RTS Support for Microsoft Hyper-V (Viridian) TM FI Yes RTS Support for VMware ESXi TM 3.5 update 4 and ESXi 4.0 (embedded) FI Yes RTS Support for Citrix XenServer Enterprise® 5.x (embedded) FI Yes RTS Support for Microsoft Hyper-V server (VSKU) (standalone) FI Yes RTS PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 47 DELL 20 Systems Management 20.1 Overview/Description Dell aims on delivering open, flexible, and integrated solutions that help you reduce the complexity of managing disparate IT assets by building comprehensive IT management solutions. Combining Dell PowerEdge Servers with a wide selection of Dell-developed management solutions gives you choice and flexibility, so you can simplify and save in environments of any size. To help you meet your server performance demands, Dell offers Dell OpenManage™ systems management solutions for: • Deployment of one or many servers from a single console • Monitoring of server and storage health and maintenance • Update of system, operating system, and application software Dell offers IT management solutions for organizations of all sizes – priced, sized, and supported right. 20.2 Server Management A Dell Systems Management and Documentation DVD and a Dell Management Console DVD are included with the product. ISO images are also available. A brief description of available content: • Dell Systems Build and Update Utility: Dell Systems Build and Update Utility assists in OS install and pre-OS hardware configuration and updates. • OpenManage Server Administrator: The OpenManage Server Administrator (OMSA) tool provides a comprehensive, one-to-one systems management solution, designed for system administrators to manage systems locally and remotely on a network. OMSA allows system administrators to focus on managing their entire network by providing comprehensive one-toone systems management. • Management Console: Our legacy IT Assistant console is also included, as well as tools to allow access to our remote management products. These tools are Remote Access Service, for iDRAC, and the BMC Management Utility. • Active Directory Snap-in Utility: The Active Directory Snap-in Utility provides an extension snapin to the Microsoft Active Directory. This allows you to manage Dell specific Active Directory objects. The Dell-specific schema class definitions and their installation are also included on the DVD. • Dell Systems Service Diagnostics Tools: Dell Systems Service and Diagnostics tools deliver the latest Dell optimized drivers, utilities, and operating system-based diagnostics that you can use to update your system. • eDocs: The section includes Acrobat files for PowerEdge systems, storage peripheral, and OpenManage software. • Dell Management Console DVD: The Dell Management Console is a Web-based systems management software that enables you to discover and inventory devices on your network. It also provides advanced functions, such as health and performance monitoring of networked devices and patch management capabilities for Dell systems. • Server Update Utility: In addition to the Systems Management Tools and Documentation and Dell Management Console DVDs, customers have the option to obtain Server Update Utility DVD. This DVD has an inventory tool for managing updates to firmware, BIOS and drivers for either Linux or Windows varieties. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 48 DELL 20.3 Embedded Server Management The PowerEdge T710 implements circuitry for the next generation of Embedded Server Management. It is Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) v2.0 compliant. The optional iDRAC (Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller) is responsible for acting as an interface between the host system and its management software and the periphery devices. These periphery devices consist of the PSUs, the storage backplane, integrated SAS HBA or PERC 6/I, and control panel with display. The optional upgrade to iDRAC6 provides features for managing the server remotely or in data center lights-out environments. Advanced iDRAC features require the installation of the optional iDRAC6 Enterprise card. 20.4 Lifecycle Controller and Unified Server Configurator Embedded management is comprised of several interdependent pieces: • Lifecycle Controller • Unified Server Configurator • iDRAC6 • vFlash Lifecycle controller powers the embedded management features. It is integrated and tamperproof storage for system-management tools and enablement utilities (firmware, drivers, etc.). It is flash partitioned to support multiple, future-use cases. Dell Unified Server Configurator (USC) is a local 1:1 graphical user interface embedded on Lifecycle Controller that aids in local server provisioning in a pre-OS environment. For servers with iDRAC Express, the Lifecycle Controller offers OS install, platform updates, platform configuration, and diagnostics capabilities. For servers without iDRAC Express, this utility has limited functionality and offers OS install and diagnostics capabilities only. To access the Unified Server Configurator, press the key within 10 seconds of the Dell logo’s appearance during the system boot process. Current functionality enabled by the Unified Server Configurator includes: Table 22. Unified Server Configurator Features and Description Feature Description Faster O/S Installation Drivers and the installation utility are embedded on system, so no need to scour DELL.COM Faster System Updates Integration with Dell support automatically directed to latest versions of the Unified Server Configurator, iDRAC, RAID, BIOS, NIC, and Power Supply Update Rollback Ability to recover to previous “known good state” for all updatable components More Comprehensive Diagnostics Diagnostic utilities are embedded on system Simplified Hardware Configuration Detects RAID controller and allows user to configure virtual disk and choose virtual disk as boot device, eliminating the need to launch a separate utility. Also provides configuration for iDRAC, BIOS, and NIC/LOM. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 49 DELL 20.5 Optional iDRAC Express The optional iDRAC Express is the first tier of iDRAC6 upgrades. In addition to upgrading the system with a Lifecycle Controller, the iDRAC6 Express offers the following key features: • Graphical web interface • Standard-based interfaces • Server Sensor monitoring and fault alerting • Secure operation of remote access functions including authentication, authorization, and encryption • Power control and management with the ability to limit server power consumption and remotely control server power states • Advanced troubleshooting capabilities For more information on iDRAC6 Express features see table below. 20.6 iDRAC6 Enterprise The optional iDRAC6 Enterprise card provides access to advanced iDRAC6 features. The iDRAC6 Enterprise connects directly to the T710 planar and is mounted parallel to the planar with stand-offs. Key features for the iDRAC6 Enterprise include: • Scripting capability with Dell’s Racadm command-line • Remote video, keyboard, and mouse control with Virtual Console • Remote media access with Virtual Media • Dedicated network interface Additionally, the iDRAC6 Enterprise can be upgraded by adding the vFlash Media card. This is a 1 GB Dell branded SD card that enables a persistent 256 MB virtual flash partition. In the future, vFlash will be expanded to include additional features. A more detailed feature list for iDRAC6 Enterprise and vFlash is included in the table below. Table 23. Features List for BMC, iDrac, and vFlash Feature BMC iDRAC 6 Express iDRAC6 Enterprise vFlash Media Interface and Standards Support IPMI 2.0     Web-based GUI    SNMP    WSMAN    SMASH-CLP    Racadm commandline   Conductivity Shared/Failover Network Modes     IPv4     VLAN Tagging     PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 50 DELL Feature BMC iDRAC 6 Express iDRAC6 Enterprise vFlash Media IPv6    Dynamic DNS    Dedicated NIC   Security and Authentication Role-based Authority     Local Users     Active Directory    SSL Encryption    Remote Management and Remediation Remote Firmware Update     Server power control     Serial-over-LAN (with proxy)     Serial-over-LAN (no proxy)    Power capping    Last crash screen capture    Boot capture    Serial-over-LAN    Virtual media   Virtual console   Virtual console sharing   Virtual flash  Monitoring Sensor Monitoring and Alerting     Real-time Power Monitoring    Real-time Power Graphing    Historical Power Counters    Logging Features System Event Log     PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 51 DELL Feature BMC iDRAC 6 Express iDRAC6 Enterprise vFlash Media RAC Log    Trace Log   21 Peripherals 21.1 USB peripherals The T710 system supports the following USB devices: • DVD-ROM (bootable; requires two USB ports) • USB Key (bootable) • Keyboard (only one USB keyboard is supported) • Mouse (only one USB mouse is supported) 21.2 External Storage 22 Packaging Options The T710 is only available in a single system package. Multipack options are not available. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 52 DELL Appendix A. T710 Volatility Table Table 24. T710 Volatility Table NonVolatile RAM Volatile RAM Reference Designator Qty Planar, PE T710 System BIOS SPI Flash Y U55 1 Ethernet Controller Config Data Y TBD 2 ESM Firmware Y U18 1 System CPLD Y U53 1 MASER Daughtercard Internal Flash Y U_EMMC 1 MASER Daughtercard FRU Y U_FRU 1 TPM ID EEPROM (on TPM board) Y U_SEEPROM 1 TPM Binding EEPROM (on planar) Y U116 1 ESM SDRAM Y U13 1 ESM SEL/FRU Y U5 1 ESM Boot Flash Y U9 1 System RAM Y J40-48; J55-63 18 Control Panel System Identification EEPROM Y U_SYS_ID 1 Backplane 2.5”/3.5” PSOC Embedded Flash Y U_SEP 2/1 Power Supply PSU Microcontroller Y TBD 1 PERC 6/i Integrated ROMB NVSRAM Config Data Y U23 1 ROMB Firmware Y U24 1 ROMB Cache RAM Y U58-61 4 FRU Y U40 1 CPLD Y U_CPLD 1 SAS 6/iR Integrated SCSI Controller Configuration Data Y U3 1 FRU Y U4 1 Integrated Mirroring NVSRAM Y U1 1 AMEA SD Card Y J_SD 1 FRU Y U_FRU 1 PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide The M1000e chassis provides flexibility, power and thermal efficiency with scalability for future needs. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 1 This document is for informational purposes only. Dell reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any products herein. The content provided is as is and without express or implied warranties of any kind. Dell, PowerEdge, PowerConnect, RapidRails, VersaRails, FlexAddress, and OpenManage are trademarks of Dell, Inc. Avocent is a registered trademark of Avocent Corporation or its subsidiaries. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Brocade is a registered trademark of Brocade Communications Systems, Inc., in the United States and/or in other countries. Cisco and Catalyst are registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and certain other countries. Citrix® and XenServer™ are trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. and/or one or more of its subsidiaries, and may be registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. Egenera registered trademarks of Egenera, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. InfiniBand is a registered trademark and service mark of the InfiniBand Trade Association. Intel and Xeon are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Mellanox is a registered trademark of Mellanox Technologies, Inc. Microsoft, Windows Server, Active Directory, and Hyper-V are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Platespin and PowerConvert are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc., in the United States and other countries. Velcro is a registered trademark of Velcro Industries B.V. VMware is a registered trademark and vCenter is a trademark of VMware, Inc. in the United States and/or other jurisdictions. Dell disclaims proprietary interest in the marks and names of others. ©Copyright 2010 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction or translation of any part of this work beyond that permitted by U.S. copyright laws without the written permission of Dell Inc. is unlawful and strictly forbidden. Initial Release June 2010 Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 2 Table of Contents 1 Product Comparison ...........................................................................................5 2 New Technologies..............................................................................................7 2.1 Overview ..................................................................................................7 2.2 Detailed Information ....................................................................................7 3 System Information ............................................................................................9 3.1 Overview ..................................................................................................9 3.2 Product Features Summary .............................................................................9 4 Mechanical.................................................................................................... 10 4.1 Chassis Description..................................................................................... 10 4.2 Dimensions and Weight................................................................................ 10 4.3 Front Panel View and Features ...................................................................... 10 4.4 Back Panel Features ................................................................................... 12 4.5 Power Supply Indicators............................................................................... 12 4.6 Rails and Cable Management......................................................................... 13 4.7 Rack Support............................................................................................ 16 4.8 Rack View ............................................................................................... 16 4.9 Fans ...................................................................................................... 17 4.10 Cabling................................................................................................... 21 4.11 Control Panel/LCD ..................................................................................... 22 4.12 Security.................................................................................................. 24 5 Power, Thermal, Acoustic .................................................................................. 26 5.1 Power Supplies ......................................................................................... 26 5.1.1 Supported Voltages .............................................................................. 27 5.1.2 Redundancy ....................................................................................... 27 5.1.3 Power Management .............................................................................. 29 5.2 Power Supply Specifications.......................................................................... 30 5.3 Heat Dissipation ........................................................................................ 30 5.4 Environmental Specifications......................................................................... 33 5.5 Power Consumption.................................................................................... 33 5.6 Maximum Input Amps .................................................................................. 33 5.7 Power-Up Sequence ................................................................................... 33 5.8 Acoustics ................................................................................................ 33 6 Processors and Memory ..................................................................................... 35 7 Midplane....................................................................................................... 36 8 Embedded NICs/LAN on Motherboard (LOM)............................................................. 39 9 I/O ............................................................................................................. 40 9.1 Overview ................................................................................................ 40 9.2 Quantities and Priorities .............................................................................. 41 9.3 Supported Mezzanine Cards and Switches .......................................................... 44 9.4 I/O Module Installation................................................................................ 45 9.5 FlexAddress ............................................................................................. 45 10 Storage ........................................................................................................ 51 11 Video........................................................................................................... 52 12 Rack Information............................................................................................. 53 Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 3 12.1 Overview ................................................................................................ 53 12.2 Rails ...................................................................................................... 53 12.3 Cable Management Arm (CMA)....................................................................... 54 12.4 Rack View ............................................................................................... 55 13 Virtualization ................................................................................................. 57 14 Systems Management........................................................................................ 59 14.1 Overview ................................................................................................ 59 14.2 Server Management.................................................................................... 60 14.3 Enclosure Management................................................................................ 61 14.4 Integrated Keyboard and Mouse Controller (iKVM)................................................ 65 15 Peripherals .................................................................................................... 68 16 Packaging Options ........................................................................................... 69 Tables Table 1. Comparison of PowerEdge 1855/1955 Chassis and M1000e Chassis ............................5 Table 2. Rack vs. Blade Server Rack-Level Specification Comparison ...................................6 Table 3. Feature Summary .....................................................................................9 Table 4. Dimensions ........................................................................................... 10 Table 5. Typical Modular Server System Rack Height and Cable Reduction........................... 13 Table 6. Fabric Specifications................................................................................ 43 Table 7. FlexAddress Features and Benefits ............................................................... 47 Figures Figure 1. Server Density Comparison ..........................................................................5 Figure 2. M1000e Front View.................................................................................. 10 Figure 3. Possible Server Module Sizes, Front Panel View ................................................ 11 Figure 4. Example Server Module Configurations .......................................................... 11 Figure 5. Power Supply Indicators............................................................................ 12 Figure 6. Rack Cabling ......................................................................................... 14 Figure 7. RapidRails Rack Kit Contents ...................................................................... 15 Figure 8. VersaRails Rack Kit Contents ...................................................................... 15 Figure 9. M1000e in a Rack.................................................................................... 16 Figure 10. Rear View Showing Fans......................................................................... 17 Figure 11. Blades, Blanks, and 1 Open Slot Needing to be Filled ...................................... 18 Figure 12. Power Supply, Power Supply Blanks, and Open Slot Needing to be Filled ............... 18 Figure 13. I/O Module and Open Slot Needing to be Filled ............................................. 19 Figure 14. Installed CMC, I/O Module, and Power Supply Blanks ...................................... 20 Figure 15. Installed iKVM Blank ............................................................................. 20 Figure 16. Power Supply, CMC, and I/O Module Blanks.................................................. 21 Figure 17. Simplified Cabling................................................................................ 22 Figure 18. M1000e LCD Panel Recessed Position ......................................................... 23 Figure 19. M1000e LCD Panel During Usage ............................................................... 23 Figure 20. LCD Panel Capabilities........................................................................... 24 Figure 21. Power Supplies in M1000e....................................................................... 26 Figure 22. M1000e Power Supply Rear View............................................................... 27 Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 4 Figure 23. Power Architecture .............................................................................. 28 Figure 24. PMBus Communication Channels ............................................................... 30 Figure 25. Server Cooling Air Profile ....................................................................... 31 Figure 26. I/O Module Inlet and IOM Locations ........................................................... 31 Figure 27. I/O Cooling Air Profile........................................................................... 32 Figure 28. Power Supply Inlet and Cooling Air Profile ................................................... 32 Figure 29. Midplane........................................................................................... 36 Figure 30. M1000e Midplane Front View ................................................................... 37 Figure 31. M1000e Midplane Rear View .................................................................... 38 Figure 32. M1000e I/O Modules ............................................................................. 40 Figure 33. High Speed I/O Architecture ................................................................... 42 Figure 34. Ethernet Growth Path ........................................................................... 43 Figure 35. Difference Between Passthroughs and Switch Modules ..................................... 44 Figure 36. FlexAddress Addresses........................................................................... 46 Figure 37. FlexAddress Screen in the CMC................................................................. 47 Figure 38. FlexAddress SD Card ............................................................................. 48 Figure 39. SD Slot on bottom of CMC....................................................................... 48 Figure 40. CMC FlexAddress Summary Screen............................................................. 49 Figure 41. CMC FlexAddress Server Detail Screen ........................................................ 50 Figure 42. Examples of Major Storage Platforms Supported ............................................ 51 Figure 43. M1000e RapidRails Static Rails ................................................................. 53 Figure 44. M1000e VersaRails Static Rails ................................................................. 54 Figure 45. M1000e Strain Relief Bar and Cable Enumerator Clip (12 Per Kit) ........................ 55 Figure 46. M1000e Mounted in the Rack ................................................................... 55 Figure 47. M1000e Strain Relief Bar and Cable Enumerator Clips...................................... 56 Figure 48. Examples of Major Virtualization Platforms Supported..................................... 57 Figure 49. Examples of I/O modules Recommended for Use in Virtualized Environments ......... 58 Figure 50. System Management Architecture Simplified Block Diagram .............................. 60 Figure 51. Chassis Management Controller................................................................ 63 Figure 52. CMC Module Features ............................................................................ 64 Figure 53. M1000e iKVM ...................................................................................... 65 Figure 54. Rear iKVM interface Panel ...................................................................... 66 Figure 55. Front Keyboard/Video Ports .................................................................... 66 Figure 56. Enclosure After Unpacking...................................................................... 69 Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 5 1 Product Comparison The Dell™ PowerEdge™ M1000e offers significant enhancements over its predecessor, the 1955, as can be seen in the following table: Table 1. Comparison of PowerEdge 1855/1955 Chassis and M1000e Chassis Feature 1855/1955 Chassis M1000e Chassis Blade Compatibility PowerEdge 1855/1955 PowerEdge M600/M605 11G and beyond Form Factor 7U 10U No. of Blades 10 16 I/O Module Bay 4 6 Fabric Types Supported 1 x Dual GbE 1 x Dual Xaui 1 Lane – GbE, FC2 4 Lane – 4 x IB 2 x 2 Lane to support: GbE2 x 4 2 X 4 Lane to support: 1 Lane – GbE, 10GbE serial/KR, FC8/4/2/1 4 Lane – IB, 10GbE (Xaui. KR), 40GbE Power Supplies 2 x (non-redundant) or 4 x 2100W PSUs 3 x non-redundant) or 6 x 2360W PSUs Management Modules 1 (std) 2nd(optional) 1 (std) 2nd(optional) KVM options 1 x Avocent® Analog or Digital KVM 1 x Avocent® Analog KVM (optional) Putting 16 half-height blades in the PowerEdge M1000e is 60% more dense than using 1U servers. Figure 1. Server Density Comparison Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 6 Greater density means: • Smaller Footprint • More Processing Performance • More RAM capacity • Lower Power Consumption per unit • Easier Manageability Dell’s blade server platform offers superior feature density over comparable rack servers, as can be seen from 0. (Darker blue shading indicates increased memory density.) Table 2. Rack vs. Blade Server Rack-Level Specification Comparison1 R410 R510 R610 R710 R810 R815 R905 R910 M605 M610 M710 M805 M905 M910 Form Factor Rack2 Rack Rack Rack Rack Rack Rack Rack 1/2 Blade 1/2 Blade Full Blade Full Blade Full Blade Full Blade Processors Manufacturer Intel Intel Intel Intel Intel AMD AMD Intel AMD Intel Intel AMD AMD Intel Sockets 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 4 4 Max Cores per 42U Rack 504 252 504 252 672 1,008 240 320 768 768 384 384 768 1,024 Memory Max RAM per rack, in TB 5 3 8 4 11 5 3 10 4 12 6 4 6 16 I/O Max 1GB Ethernet Ports per 42U Rack 252 378 504 420 588 588 320 440 512 640 576 512 512 640 Max 10GbE, DDR IB, or FC network ports per rack 84 168 168 84 252 252 140 220 256 256 256 256 256 256 Internal Storage3 Drives per 42U rack 168 252 252 168 126 126 50 160 128 128 128 64 64 64 Max 7.2k or 10k rpm internal storage per rack 336 504 151 252 76 76 50 96 77 77 77 38 38 38 Max 15k rpm internal storage per 42U rack 101 151 37 76 18 18 15 23 19 19 19 9 9 9 Max SSD internal storage per 42U rack 17 25 25 17 13 13 0 16 13 13 13 6 6 6 1 This rack-level physical capacity specification summary does not factor in power and cooling. 2 42U is the most common rack size. 3 Storage measurements provided in Terabytes. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 7 2 New Technologies 2.1 Overview The PowerEdge M1000e is designed to help customers be more efficient with time, power and cooling, investment, and system performance. It is a breakthrough Dell engineered and patentpending design that maximizes flexibility, power and thermal efficiency, system-wide availability, performance, and manageability. The chassis integrates the latest in management, I/O, power and cooling technologies in a modular, easy-to-use package. Designed from the ground up to support current and future generations of server, storage, networking, and management technologies, the PowerEdge M1000e includes the headroom necessary to scale for the future. Dell optimized the PowerEdge M1000e Modular Server Enclosure and Server Modules to: • Maximize flexibility—modular I/O, power, cooling, and management architecture. • Maximize longevity—optimized power and cooling design supports current and future generations of server modules and I/O. I/O bandwidth to support not only today’s generation of 10Gb Ethernet, 20Gbps InfiniBand and 4Gbps Fibre Channel, but up to 40Gbps QDR InfiniBand, 10Gbps Serial Ethernet, and 8Gbps Fibre Channel. • Lower total cost of ownership (TCO)—lower cost than rack-mount servers with equivalent features. Best in class power and cooling efficiency. The PowerEdge M1000e Modular Server Enclosure solution supports server modules, network, storage, and cluster interconnect modules (switches and passthrough modules), a high-performance and highly available passive midplane that connects server modules to the infrastructure components, power supplies, fans, integrated KVM and Chassis Management Controllers (CMC). The PowerEdge M1000e uses redundant and hot‐pluggable components throughout to provide maximum uptime. The M1000e provides identical and symmetric fabric options B and C for each modular server. Ethernet I/O switches support I/O sub-modules that provide external I/O flexibility of stacking ports, 10GE copper ports, or 10GE optical ports. True modularity at the system and subsystem level provides simplicity of extension and enhancement, now and in the future. The main benefits to customers of these features include improved: • Data center density • Power & cooling efficiency • Flexibility • Scalability • Virtualization capability • Ease of deployment • Manageability Together, these factors enable customers to do more with their server investment. 2.2 Detailed Information Virtually unlimited in scalability, the PowerEdge M1000e chassis provides ultimate flexibility in server processor and chipset architectures. Both Intel and AMD server architectures can be supported simultaneously by the M1000e infrastructure, while cutting-edge mechanical, electrical, and software interface definitions enable multi‐generational server support and expansion. The chassis features: Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 8 • A high-speed passive midplane that connects the server modules in the front and power, I/O, and management infrastructure in the rear of the enclosure. • Comprehensive I/O options to support dual links of 40 Gigabits per second today (with 4x QDR InfiniBand®) with future support of even higher bandwidth I/O devices when those technologies become available. This provides high‐speed server module connectivity to the network and storage now and well into the future. • Thorough power-management capabilities including delivering shared power to ensure full capacity of the power supplies available to all server modules. • Broad management ability including private Ethernet, serial, USB, and low-level management connectivity between the Chassis Management Controller (CMC), Keyboard/Video/Mouse (KVM) switch, and server modules. • Up to two Chassis Management Controllers (CMC‐1 is standard, CMC-2 provides optional redundancy) and 1 optional integrated Keyboard/Video/Mouse (iKVM) switch. • Up to 6 hot-pluggable, redundant Power Supplies and 9 hot-pluggable, N+1 redundant fan modules. • System Front Control panel w/ LCD panel and two USB Keyboard/Mouse and one Video ―crash cart‖ connections. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 9 3 System Information 3.1 Overview The Dell PowerEdge M1000e Modular Server Enclosure is a breakthrough in enterprise server architecture. The enclosure and its components spring from a revolutionary, ground-up design incorporating the latest advances in power, cooling, I/O, and management technologies. These technologies are packed into a highly available rack dense package that integrates into standard Dell and third-party 2000mm depth racks. 3.2 Product Features Summary Table 3. Feature Summary Feature Parameter Chassis Size 10U high rack mount Blades per Chassis 16 Half Height, 8 Full Height Total Blades in a 42U Rack 64 Half Height, 32 Full Height Total I/O Module Bays 6 (3 redundant or dual fabrics) Total Power Supplies 6 (3+3 redundant) Total Fan Modules 9 (8+1 redundant) Management Modules and Interfaces 2 CMCs (1+1 redundant), 1 iKVM, Front Control Panel, Graphical LCD Control Panel AC Redundancy 3+3 2+2 1+1 Each requires power supplies in slots 1, 2, and 3 to be connected to a different grid as compared to those in slots 4, 5, and 6. DC Redundancy 1+1 2+1 3+1 4+1 5+1 Each with one extra power supply that comes online if one of the existing power supplies fails. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 10 4 Mechanical 4.1 Chassis Description The Dell M1000e supports up to sixteen half-height or 8 full-height server modules. The chassis guide and retention features are designed such that alternative module form factors are possible. The chassis architecture is flexible enough that server, storage, or other types of front-loading modules are possible. 4.2 Dimensions and Weight Table 4. Dimensions Dimension Measurement Width, not including rack ears 447.5 mm Height 440.5 mm Depth, Rear of EIA Flange to Rear of Chassis 753.6 mm Total System Depth (Front Bezel to PS Latch) 835.99 mm 4.3 Front Panel View and Features Figure 2. M1000e Front View The M1000e enclosure supports up to 16 half‐height or 8 full-height server modules, each occupying a slot accessible in the front of the enclosure. The enclosure has also been designed to accommodate other form factors, including dual-width modules. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 11 Figure 3. Possible Server Module Sizes, Front Panel View Server Modules can be freely located within each 2 x 2 half-height quadrant. The mechanical design of the M1000e has support structures for half-height server modules above or below double-width server modules, and for half-height server modules side-by-side with full-height server modules. Figure 4. Example Server Module Configurations Server modules are accessible from the front of the M1000e enclosure. At the bottom of the enclosure is a flip-out multiple angle LCD screen for local systems management configuration, system information, and status. The front of the enclosure also contains two USB connections for USB keyboard and mouse, a video connection and the system power button. The front control panel’s USB and video ports work only when the iKVM module is installed, as the iKVM provides the capability to switch the KVM between the blades. For more information, see System Control Panel Features in the Hardware Owner’s Manual. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 12 Fresh air plenums are at both top and bottom of the chassis. The bottom fresh air plenum provides non‐preheated air to the M1000e power supplies. The top fresh air plenum provides non‐preheated air to the CMC, iKVM and I/O modules. 4.4 Back Panel Features The rear of the M1000e Enclosure contains system management, cooling, power and I/O components. At the top of the enclosure are slots for two Chassis Management Cards and one integrated KVM switch. The enclosure ships by default with a single CMC, with the option of adding a second CMC to provide a fully redundant, active‐standby fault-tolerant solution for management access and control. Interleaved in the center of the chassis are fans and I/O modules. This arrangement optimizes the balance of airflow through the system, allowing lower pressure build-up in the system and resulting in lower airflow requirements for the fans. For more information, see Back-Panel Features in the Hardware Owner’s Manual. 4.5 Power Supply Indicators Figure 5 shows the power supply indicators. For more information, see Back-Panel Features in the Hardware Owner’s Manual. Figure 5. Power Supply Indicators Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 13 4.6 Rails and Cable Management RapidRailsTM Static Rails for Square Hole Racks:  Supports toolless installation in 19‖ EIA-310-E compliant square hole 4-post racks including all generations of Dell racks except for the 4200 & 2400 series  Has a minimum rail depth of 703 mm  Provides a square-hole rack adjustment range of 712-755 mm  Includes strain relief bar and cable enumerators for managing and securing cables VersaRailsTM Static Rails for Square or Round Hole Racks:  Supports tooled installation in 19‖ EIA-310-E compliant square or unthreaded round hole 4- post racks  Has a minimum rail depth of 703 mm  Provides a square-hole rack adjustment range of 706-755 mm  Provides a round-hole rack adjustment range of 706-755 mm  Includes strain relief bar and cable enumerators for managing and securing cables One of the advantages of a modular server system is the reduction in cable management needs within a rack system. The inclusion of fabric switches, integrated KVM and system management aggregation at the CMCs provides six‐fold or better cable reduction. The following table shows a comparison of a typical reduction available when using the M1000e Modular system with integrated switches, compared to traditional ―rack and stack‖ components. The configuration in the table assumes a server with four Ethernet ports and two Fibre Channel ports. In support of the M1000e, Dell offers a modular system cable management system to ease system installation in Dell or other industry-standard racks. Table 5. Typical Modular Server System Rack Height and Cable Reduction Component Rack Height AC power cables Ethernet Cables FC Cables KVM Cables 2 socket server 1Ux16 2x16 4x16 2x16 USBx16 + VGAx16 KVM 1U 1 ‐ ‐ USBx1 + VGAx1 Ethernet Switches 1Ux4 1x4 4x4 ‐ ‐ FC Switches 1Ux2 1x2 ‐ 2x2 ‐ Total Rack 23U height 39 AC cables 72 Ethernet Cables 36 FC Cables USBx17 + VGAx17 M1000e Equivalent 10U height 6 AC cables 16 Ethernet Cables 4 FC Cables USBx1 + VGAx1 Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 14 Figure 6. Rack Cabling RapidRailsTM Static Rails for Square Hole Racks supports toolless installation in 19‖ EIA-310-E compliant square hole 4-post racks including all generations of Dell racks except for the 4200 & 2400 series. Minimum rail depth is 703 mm. Square-hole rack adjustment range is 712–755 mm. The rail system includes a strain relief bar and cable enumerators for managing and securing cables. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 15 Figure 7. RapidRails Rack Kit Contents Figure 8. VersaRails Rack Kit Contents See Section 12 for more details. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 16 4.7 Rack Support The M1000e chassis offers the following options for rack support: • RapidRails™ static rails for toolless mounting in 4-post racks with square holes • VersaRails™ static rails for tooled mounting in 4-post racks with square or unthreaded round holes See Section 12 for more details. 4.8 Rack View Figure 9. M1000e in a Rack Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 17 4.9 Fans ` Figure 10. Rear View Showing Fans The PowerEdge M1000e chassis comes standard with 9 hot-swappable, redundant fan modules that are distributed evenly across the enclosure. The speed of each fan is individually managed by the CMC. Together, these design innovations can provide: • Significant power savings as compared to older servers • Less airflow required as compared to the same number of similarly configured 1U servers • A similar acoustic profile as compared to previous servers Fans are N+1 redundant, meaning that any single fan can fail without impacting system uptime or reliability. In the event of a fan failure, system behavior is dependent on the resultant temperatures of the system, as monitored by the Server Module iDRAC and I/O Modules. The CMC continues to interpret the airflow needs of each server and I/O module to control the fan speeds appropriately. The system will not ramp the fans to full speed in the event of a fan failure unless deemed necessary by on‐board monitoring. Failure of more than one fan will not automatically result in shutting down of blade servers. This is because the blade servers have their own self-protection mechanisms to prevent them from running too hot. The result of a failure of multiple fans would depend on the configuration, ambient temperature, and workload being run. For example, the processors within a blade are automatically throttled back by that server if they reach a thermal threshold and then shut down if a critical over-temperature threshold is met. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 18 Note: The blank blade, hard drive, and server I/O fillers for every blank slot are required for cooling/airflow reasons. Figure 11. Blades, Blanks, and 1 Open Slot Needing to be Filled Figure 12. Power Supply, Power Supply Blanks, and Open Slot Needing to be Filled Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 19 Figure 13. I/O Module and Open Slot Needing to be Filled Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 20 Figure 14. Installed CMC, I/O Module, and Power Supply Blanks Figure 15. Installed iKVM Blank Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 21 Figure 16. Power Supply, CMC, and I/O Module Blanks 4.10 Cabling There are two types of external cabling simplification features offered: • Stacked Ethernet Switching o Internal switches have optional 10GbE uplinks and/or stacking connectors o Manage/configure multiple switches as one with stacking o Consolidate uplinks from multiple chassis into 2-4 x 10GbE ports • Stacked CMCs o CMC has a 2nd Ethernet port for connection to other CMCs in the rack o CMC connects to the management network to manage all blade servers o Saves port consumption on external switches Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 22 Figure 17. Simplified Cabling 4.11 Control Panel/LCD The control panel contains the local user interface. Functions include chassis level diagnostic LEDs, LCD panel, and power button. This device is hot-pluggable and is always powered, even in chassis standby mode. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 23 Figure 18. M1000e LCD Panel Recessed Position Figure 19. M1000e LCD Panel During Usage The M1000e chassis LCD shows extensive information about the status of each hardware module, network information for the CMC and each iDRAC, and status messages with detailed explanations in plain language. Users may access a wide variety of information about modules via the panel, including their type, user-defined name, configurations, service tag numbers, and IP address Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 24 information. The LCD panel can be retracted into the chassis body, or extended and angled once deployed for full visibility no matter where the M1000e is mounted in the rack. The LCD panel can be used as a diagnostic source and as a place to configure parameters of certain chassis components as well as the server’s iDRAC network configuration. Figure 20 shows some of the capabilities of the LCD control panel. Figure 20. LCD Panel Capabilities The primary function of the LCD panel is to provide real-time information on the health and status of the modules in the enclosure. LCD panel features include: • A deployment setup wizard that allows you to configure the CMC module’s network settings during initial system set up • Menus to configure the iDRAC in each blade • Status information screens for each blade • Status information screens for the modules installed in the back of the enclosure, including the IO modules, fans, CMC, iKVM, and power supplies • A network summary screen listing the IP addresses of all components in the system • Real time power consumption statistics, including high and low values and average power consumption • Ambient temperature values • AC power information • Critical failure alerts and warnings See the M1000e Configuration Guide and the CMC Administrator Reference Guide for more details on the capabilities of the LCD panel. 4.12 Security The M1000e offers many security features, including the ability to: • Assign one admin per blade or one admin per multiple blades • Grant permissions to some blades but not to others • Customize administrative access for CMC, iDRAC, and I/O Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 25 Most of the security capabilities are driven by the CMC, which provides a mechanism for centralized configuration of the M1000e enclosure’s security settings and user access. It is secured by a usermodifiable password. The CMC’s security features include: • User authentication through optional Active Directory and LDAP services or hardware-stored user IDs and passwords • Role-based authority, which enables an administrator to configure specific privileges for each user • User ID and password configuration through the Web interface • Web interface supports 128-bit SSL 3.0 encryption and 40-bit SSL 3.0 encryption (for countries where 128-bit is not acceptable) • Configurable IP ports (where applicable) • Login failure limits per IP address, with login blocking from the IP address when the limit is exceeded • Configurable session auto time out and number of simultaneous sessions • Limited IP address range for clients connecting to the CMC • Secure Shell (SSH), which uses an encrypted layer for higher security • Single Sign-on, Two-Factor Authentication, and Public Key Authentication • Disabling front panel access Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 26 5 Power, Thermal, Acoustic Built on Dell Energy Smart technology, the M1000e is one of the most power-efficient blade solutions on the market. The M1000e enclosure takes advantage of Energy Smart thermal design efficiencies, such as ultra-efficient power supplies and dynamic power-efficient fans with optimized airflow design to efficiently cool the chassis and enable better performance in a lower power envelope. A modular system has many advantages over standard rack mount servers in terms of power optimization, and this aspect was a focal point throughout the M1000e’s conceptualization and development. The key areas of interest are power delivery and power management. The M1000e provides industry-leading power efficiency and density, accomplished through highly efficient components, improved design techniques, and a fresh air plenum that reduces the air temperature to the power supply components. Lower operating temperature equates to higher power density for the power supply (exceeding 21 Watts per cubic inch) and higher power efficiency (better than 87% at 20% load and higher at heavier loads, approaching 91% efficiency under normal operating conditions). Power efficiency in the M1000e does not stop with the power supply. Every aspect of efficiency has been tweaked and improved from previous designs—adding more copper to PC board power planes to reduce I2R losses, improving inductors and other components, increasing efficiencies of DC‐DC converters, and replacing some linear voltage regulators with more-efficient switching regulators. See Section 15 for more information on external power connection accessories. 5.1 Power Supplies The power distribution inside the M1000e Modular Server System consists of a power supply system located in the rear bottom of the chassis. Figure 21. Power Supplies in M1000e Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 27 Figure 22. M1000e Power Supply Rear View The Dell power supplies utilize output Oring FETs to isolate the power supply from the 12V system bus. If a single power supply fails its output Oring FET for that power supply will turn off removing itself from the bus. Think of it as an electrical switch that turns off when the power supply fails. 5.1.1 Supported Voltages Dell currently offers a power supply rated at 2360W 230V. With current sharing between power supplies, total system redundant power is approximately 7080W in a 3+3 power supply configuration. 5.1.2 Redundancy Power redundancy in the M1000e supports any necessary usage model, though the M1000e requires three power supplies to power a fully populated system or six power supplies in a fully redundant system. AC redundancy is supported in the following configurations, each of which requires the power supplies in slots 1, 2, and 3 to be connected to a different grid as compared to those in slots 4, 5, and 6. • 3+3 • 2+2 • 1+1 DC redundancy is supported in the following configurations, each with one extra power supply that comes online if one of the existing power supplies fails: Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 28 • 1+1 • 2+1 • 3+1 • 4+1 • 5+1 When Dynamic Power Supply Engagement (DPSE) is enabled, the PSU units move between On and Off states depending upon actual power draw conditions to achieve high power efficiency by driving fewer supplies to maximum versus all with partial and less-efficient loading. In the N+N power supply configuration, the system will provide protection against AC grid loss or power supply failures. If one power grid fails, three power supplies lose their AC source, and the three power supplies on the other grid remain powered, providing sufficient power for the system to continue running. In the N+1 configuration only power supply failures are protected, not grid failures. The likelihood of multiple power supplies failing at the same time is remote. In the N+0 configuration there is no power protection and any protection must be provided at the node or chassis level. Typically this case is an HPCC or other clustered environment where redundant power is not a concern, since the parallelism of the processing nodes across multiple system chassis provides all the redundancy that is necessary. The midplane carries all 12 Volt DC power for the system, both main power and standby power. The CMCs, LCD and Control Panel are powered solely by 12 Volt Standby power, insuring that chassis level management is operational in the chassis standby state, whenever AC power is present. The server modules, I/O Modules, Fans, and iKVM are powered solely by 12 Volt Main power. Figure 23. Power Architecture Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 29 5.1.3 Power Management Power is no longer just about power delivery, it is also about power management. The M1000e System offers many advanced power management features. Most of these features operate transparently to the user, while others require only a one time selection of desired operating modes. Shared power takes advantage of the large number of resources in the modular server, distributing power across the system without the excess margin required in dedicated rack mount servers and switches. The M1000e has an advanced power budgeting feature, controlled by the CMC and negotiated in conjunction with the iDRAC on every server module. Prior to any server module powering up, through any of its power up mechanisms such as AC recovery, WOL or a simple power button press, the server module iDRAC performs a sophisticated power budget inventory for the server module, based upon its configuration of CPUs, memory, I/O and local storage. Once this number is generated, the iDRAC communicates the power budget inventory to the CMC, which confirms the availability of power from the system level, based upon a total chassis power inventory, including power supplies, iKVM, I/O Modules, fans and server modules. Since the CMC controls when every modular system element powers on, it can set power policies on a system level. In coordination with the CMC, iDRAC hardware constantly monitors actual power consumption at each server module. This power measurement is used locally by the server module to insure that its instantaneous power consumption never exceeds the budgeted amount. While the system administrator may never notice these features in action, what they enable is a more aggressive utilization of the shared system power resources. Thus the system is never ―flying blind‖ in regards to power consumption, and there is no danger of exceeding power capacity availability, which could result in a spontaneous activation of power supply over current protection without these features. The system administrator can also set priorities for each server module. The priority works in conjunction with the CMC power budgeting and iDRAC power monitoring to insure that the lowest priority blades are the first to enter any power optimization mode, should conditions warrant the activation of this feature. Power capping is set at the chassis level for our blade servers and not at the blade server level, so components like processer, memory can throttle down when necessary on lower priority blade servers. An allocation is taken out for the infrastructure (fans, IO modules) and then the remainder is applied to the blades, and then throttling is applied if required to get under the cap. If all the blades are setup with the same priority, then it will start throttling down processor, memory, and so on. A variety of BIOS settings will throttle the processor or not depending on load: If power consumption demands exceed available power, the enclosure ―throttles‖ back the power supplied to blades as prioritized in the CMC. The blades will not shut down; rather they will slow down if necessary; Dell designed the system this way on purpose, in response to customer feedback that they did not want the blades to shut themselves down under any condition. I/O modules, on the other hand, will shut down prior to permanent damage, as they are less tolerant to power variation than the blade server hardware. The M1000e is compliant with the PMBus Specification 1.1, using this power management standard for status, measurement and control. The M1000e power supplies continuously monitor AC input current, voltage and power, enabling exposure of data to Dell™ OpenManage™ IT Assistant or to other enterprise-level management tools. Real time power consumption is viewable per system. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 30 Figure 24. PMBus Communication Channels All VMware® products include consuming the "current power consumption" and "current power cap/limit" retrieval via Dell specific IPMI commands using iDRAC. They are using this to report the total power consumed by the server and also using this as part of their calculations to determine/approximate the VM-level power. The Power Management chapter in the Dell Chassis Management Controller (CMC) User Guide provides extensive information on power management. 5.2 Power Supply Specifications Each power supply offers: • 91%+ AC/DC Conversion Efficiency • Dynamic Power Supply Engagement which automatically engages the minimum number of supplies required to power a given configuration, maximizing power supply efficiency The following are the PowerEdge M-1000e chassis power supply capabilities: • 2360 watts maximum for each PSU • 220 VAC (Volts Alternate Current) input (a single PSU runs between 180V and 260V AC) • 50Hz or 60Hz input • 14A maximum input • 192A (Amps) @ + 12 Volts DC ( Direct Current) output Operational • 4.5A @ +12 Volt output Standby • 3 or 6 PSU configurations available • PSUs are hot-swappable 5.3 Heat Dissipation The cooling strategy for the M1000e supports a low‐impedance, high‐efficiency design philosophy. Driving lower airflow impedance allows the M1000e to draw air through the system at a lower operating pressure and reduces the system fan power consumed to meet the airflow requirements of the system. The low impedance design is coupled with a high‐efficiency air-moving device designed explicitly for the PowerEdge M1000e chassis. The efficiency of an air-moving device is defined as the work output Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 31 of the fan as compared to the electrical power required to run the fan. The M1000e fan operates at extreme efficiencies which correlates directly into savings in the customer’s required power‐to‐cool. The high‐efficiency design philosophy also extends into the layout of the subsystems within the M1000e. The Server Modules, I/O Modules, and Power Supplies are incorporated into the system with independent airflow paths. This isolates these components from pre‐heated air, reducing the required airflow consumptions of each module. Figure 25. Server Cooling Air Profile The Server Modules are cooled with traditional front‐to‐back cooling. As shown in the figure, the front of the system is dominated by inlet area for the individual server modules. The air passes through the server modules, through venting holes in the midplane, and is then drawn into the fans which exhaust the air from the chassis. There are plenums both upstream of the midplane, between the midplane and the blades, and downstream of the midplane, between the midplane and the fans, to more evenly distribute the cooling potential from the three columns of fans across the server modules. Figure 26. I/O Module Inlet and IOM Locations Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 32 Figure 27. I/O Cooling Air Profile The I/O Modules use a bypass duct to draw ambient air from the front of the system to the I/O Module inlet, as seen in the figure. This duct is located above the server modules. This cool air is then drawn down through the I/O Modules in a top to bottom flow path and into the plenum between the midplane and fans, from where it is exhausted from the system. Figure 28. Power Supply Inlet and Cooling Air Profile The Power Supplies, located in the rear of the system, use basic front‐to‐back cooling, but draw their inlet air from a duct located beneath the server modules, as seen in the figure above. This insures that the power supplies receive ambient temperature air. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 33 This hardware design is coupled with a thermal cooling algorithm that incorporates the following: • Server module level thermal monitoring by the iDRAC • I/O module thermal health monitors • Fan control and monitoring by the CMC The iDRAC on each server module calculates the amount of airflow required on an individual server module level and sends a request to the CMC. This request is based on temperature conditions on the server module, as well as passive requirements due to hardware configuration. Concurrently, each IOM can send a request to the CMC to increase or decrease cooling to the I/O subsystem. The CMC interprets these requests, and can control the fans as required to maintain Server and I/O Module airflow at optimal levels. 5.4 Environmental Specifications See the Getting Started Guide on support.dell.com. 5.5 Power Consumption Use the Dell Energy Smart Solution Advisor (ESSA) to see requirements for a specific chassis configuration. 5.6 Maximum Input Amps See Power Distribution Systems for the Dell M1000e Modular Server Enclosure – Selection and Installation. 5.7 Power-Up Sequence The following steps detail how and in what order the M1000e components are powered up: 1. The first power supply provides a small amount of electricity which starts up the first CMC. 2. CMC begins to boot and power up the power supply units. 3. Active and Standby CMC boot up Linux® operating system. 4. Active CMC powers up all remaining PSUs. 5. All six PSUs are powered up. 6. Server iDRAC are powered up. (In slot priority order from 1–9; i.e., highest priority 1 slots first, then priority 2, etc. If all same priority, goes in slot order 1–16. Each one is spaced apart by 500ms.) 7. iKVM is powered up. 8. IOM modules are powered up. 9. Depending upon Blade BIOS power setting (last power state, always on or always off), blade iDRAC requests power up from CMC first come/first served in order from #6. 10. CMC powers up blades. For full configuration, booting the enclosure takes between 2–4 minutes, followed by 1–4 minutes for each blade. 5.8 Acoustics The M1000e is engineered for sound quality in accordance with the Dell Enterprise acoustical specification. Compared to previous generations of products, the fans have more levels of control and finer tuning of the fan behavior. Firmware is optimized to choose the lowest fan speeds and Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 34 therefore the lowest acoustical output for any configuration (components installed), operating condition (applications being run), and ambient temperature. Because acoustical output is dependent and indeed minimized for each combination of these variables, no single acoustical level (sound pressure level or sound power level) represents the M1000e, and instead boundaries on sound power level are provided below: • Lowest Fan Speed: Upper Limit A-weighted Sound Power Level, LwA-UL, is 7.5 bels • Full Fan Speed: Upper Limit A-weighted Sound Power Level, LwA-UL, is 9.7 bels • LwA-UL is the upper limit sound power level (LwA) calculated per section 4.4.2 of ISO 9296 (1988) and measured in accordance to ISO 7779 (1999) • Acoustical models have been provided to predict performance between these bounds in the ESSA tool: http://solutions.dell.com/DellStarOnline/Launch.aspx/ESSA A few things to be aware of: • Fans are loud when running at full speed. It is rare that fans need to run at full speed. Please ensure that components are operating properly if fans remain at full speed. • The CMC will automatically raise and lower the fan speed to a setting that is appropriate to keep all modules cool. • If a single fan is removed, all fans will be set to 50% speed if the enclosure is in Standby mode; if the enclosure is powered on, removal of a single fan is treated like a failure (nothing happens). • Re-installation of a fan will cause the rest of the fans to settle back to a quieter state. • Whenever communication to the CMC or iDRAC is lost such as during firmware update, the fan speed will increase and create more noise. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 35 6 Processors and Memory With the addition of the PowerEdge M910 server to the PowerEdge portfolio, the M1000e is now scalable to 256 cores & 4TB of RAM: 4 sockets x 8 cores x 8 blades = 256 Cores; 32 DIMM sockets x 16GB DIMMs x 8 Blades = 4096GB or 4TB RAM. See the Technical Guide for each of the compatible blade servers offered for more details on processors and memory offered. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 36 7 Midplane Though hidden from view in an actively running system, the midplane is the focal point for all connectivity within the M1000e Modular System. The midplane is a large printed circuit board providing power distribution, fabric connectivity, and system management infrastructure. Additionally it allows airflow paths for the front-to-back cooling system through ventilation holes. Figure 29. Midplane As is requisite for fault-tolerant systems, the M1000e midplane is completely passive, with no hidden stacking midplanes or interposers with active components. I/O fabrics and system management are fully redundant from each hot pluggable item. The system management Ethernet fabric is fully redundant when two CMCs are installed, with two point-to-point connections from each server module. The midplane serves as transport for a patent-pending, time-division–multiplexed serial bus for general purpose I/O reduction. This serial bus contributes greatly to the midplane’s I/O lane count reduction, which is typically burdened with a significant I/O pin and routing channel count of largely static or low-speed functions. For instance, all Fibre Channel I/O Passthrough module LED and SFP status information is carried over this bus, which alone eliminates over one hundred point-to-point connections that would otherwise be required. The time division multiplexed serial bus is fully redundant, with health monitoring, separate links per CMC and error checking across all data. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 37 Figure 30. M1000e Midplane Front View The system is designed for receptacles on all midplane connectors and pins on all pluggable components, so any potential for bent pins is limited to the pluggable field replaceable unit, not to the system. This contributes to the high reliability and uptime of the M1000e modular system. The midplane is physically attached to the enclosure front structural element. It is aligned by guide‐pins and edges in all 3 axes. This provides close tolerance alignment between the server modules and their midplane connections. The midplane has been carefully designed to minimize the impact to the overall system airflow. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 38 Figure 31. M1000e Midplane Rear View All M1000e midplane routing is fully isolated, supporting all chassis power, fabric, system management, and fault-tolerance requirements. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 39 8 Embedded NICs/LAN on Motherboard (LOM) See the Technical Guide for each of the compatible blade servers. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 40 9 I/O 9.1 Overview Dell M-series provides complete, snap-in FlexI/O scalability down to the switch interconnects. Flex I/O technology is the foundation of the M1000e I/O subsystem. Customers may mix and match I/O modules, including Cisco®, Dell™ PowerConnect™, Fibre Channel, and InfiniBand options. The I/O modules may be installed singly or in redundant pairs. See I/O Connectivity in the Hardware Owner’s Manual for detailed information. Figure 32. M1000e I/O Modules These I/O modules are connected to the blades through three redundant I/O fabrics. The enclosure was designed for 5+ years of I/O bandwidth and technology. The I/O system offers customers a wide variety of options to meet nearly any network need: • Complete, on-demand switch design • Easily scale to provide additional uplink and stacking functionality • No need to waste your current investment with a ―rip and replace‖ upgrade • Flexibility to scale Ethernet stacking and throughput • Partnered Solutions with Cisco, Emulex and Brocade • Quad Data Rate InfiniBand Switch options available for HPCC • Up to 8 high-speed ports Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 41 • Cisco® Virtual Blade Switch capability • Ethernet Port Aggregator • Virtualization of Ethernet ports for integration into any Ethernet fabric • Fibre Channel products from Brocade and Emulex offering powerful connectivity to Dell/EMC SAN fabrics • High-availability clustering inside a single enclosure or between two enclosures Each server module connects to traditional network topologies while providing sufficient bandwidth for multi‐generational product lifecycle upgrades. I/O fabric integration encompasses networking, storage, and interprocessor communications (IPC). 9.2 Quantities and Priorities There are three supported high-speed fabrics per M1000e half‐height server module, with two flexible fabrics using optional plug-in mezzanine cards on the server, and one connected to the LOMs on the server. The ports on the server module connect via the midplane to the associated I/O Modules (IOM) in the rear of the enclosure, which then connect to the customer’s LAN/SAN/IPC networks. The optional mezzanine cards are designed to connect via 8-lane PCIe to the server module’s chipset in most cases. Mezzanine cards may have either one dual port ASIC with 4- or 8-lane PCIe interfaces or dual ASICs, each with 4-lane PCIe interfaces. External fabrics are routed through high-speed, 10- Gigabit-per-second–capable air dielectric connector pins through the planar and midplane. For best signal integrity, the signals isolate transmit and receive signals for minimum crosstalk. Differential pairs are isolated with ground pins and signal connector columns are staggered to minimize signal coupling. The M1000e system management hardware and software includes Fabric Consistency Checking, preventing the accidental activation of any misconfigured fabric device on a server module. The system will automatically detect this misconfiguration and alert the user of the error. No damage occurs to the system, and the user will have the ability to reconfigure the faulted module. M1000e I/O is fully scalable to current and future generations of server modules and I/O Modules. There are three redundant multi‐lane fabrics in the system, as illustrated in Figure 33. In its original configuration, the M1000e midplane is enabled to support up to four Gigabit Ethernet links per server module on Fabric A. Thus, potential data bandwidth for Fabric A is 4 Gbps per halfheight server module. A future midplane upgrade may enable higher bandwidth on Fabric A. The M1000e provides full 10/100/1000M Ethernet support when using Ethernet passthrough modules enabling you to connect to any legacy infrastructure whether using Ethernet passthrough or switch technology. This technical advance uses in-band signaling on 1000BASE‐KX transport and requires no user interaction for enablement. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 42 Figure 33. High Speed I/O Architecture Fabric B and C are identical, fully customizable fabrics, routed as two sets of four lanes from mezzanine cards on the server modules to the I/O Modules in the rear of the chassis. Supported bandwidth ranges from 1 to 10 Gbps per lane depending on the fabric type used. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 43 Table 6. Fabric Specifications Fabric Encoding Symbol Rate Per Lane (Gbps) Data Rate Per Lane (Gbps) Data Rate Per Link (Gbps) Lanes Per Link Per Industry Specification PCIe Gen1 8B/10B 2.5 2 8 (4 lane) 1,2,4,8,12,16,32 PCIe Gen2 8B/10B 5 4 16 (4 lane) 1,2,4,8,12,16,32 SATA 3Gbps 8B/10B 3 2.4 2.4 1 SATA 6Gbps 8B/10B 6 4.8 4.8 1 SAS 3Gbps 8B/10B 3 2.4 2.4 1-Any SAS 6Gbps 8B/10B 6 4.8 4.8 1-Any FC 4Gbps 8B/10B 4.25 3.4 3.4 1 FC 8bps 8B/10B 8.5 6.8 6.8 1 IB SDR 8B/10B 2.5 2 8 (4 lane) 4,12 IB DDR 8B/10B 5 4 16 (4 lane) 4,12 IB QDR 8B/10B 10 8 32 (4 lane) 4,12 GbE: 1000BASEKX 8B/10B 1.25 1 1 1 10GbE: 10GBASE-KX4 8B/10B 3.125 2.5 10 (4 lane) 4 10GbE: 10GBASE-KR 64B/66B 10.3125 10 10 1 Figure 34. Ethernet Growth Path The M1000e is designed for full support of all near-, medium- and long-term I/O infrastructure needs. While the M1000e system’s bandwidth capabilities lead the industry, the M1000e is also intelligently designed for maximum cost, flexibility and performance benefit. While Fabric A is dedicated to the server module LOMs, requiring Ethernet switch or passthrough modules for I/O slots A1 and A2, Fabrics B and C can be populated with Ethernet, Fibre Channel, or InfiniBand solutions. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 44 I/O Modules are used as pairs, with two modules servicing each server module fabric providing a fully redundant solution. I/O Modules may be passthroughs or switches. Passthrough modules provide direct 1:1 connectivity from each LOM/mezzanine card port on each server module to the external network. Switches provide an efficient way to consolidate links from the LOM or Mezzanine cards on the server modules to uplinks into the customer’s network. Figure 35. Difference Between Passthroughs and Switch Modules For more information on the I/O module options, see the PowerEdge M-Series Blades I/O Guide. 9.3 Supported Mezzanine Cards and Switches Dell supports one mezzanine design standard and one I/O Module design standard for true modular computing. The currently supported I/O modules include: • PowerConnect M6220 Switch; GbE + 10GbE uplinks & stacking • PowerConnect M6348 Switch; 48 1GbE ports + 10GbE uplinks • PowerConnect M8024 10Gb Ethernet Switch (SFP+, CX4, & 10Gbase-T uplink module options) • Cisco® Catalyst® 3032 switch; All 1GbE • Cisco Catalyst 3130g Switch; All 1GbE + stacking • Cisco Catalyst 3130x Switch; 1GbE+ 10GbE uplinks & stacking • Cisco 3130g & 3130x switches can be combined in a stack • 1Gb Ethernet Pass-Through Module • 10Gb Ethernet Pass-Through Module (SFP+) • Brocade® 8Gb Fibre Channel Switch Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 45 • 4Gb Fibre Channel Pass-Through • Mellanox® DDR (20Gb) InfiniBand Switch • Mellanox QDR (40Gb) InfiniBand Switch See the Ethernet I/O Cards page on Dell.com for supported I/O hardware. 9.4 I/O Module Installation For detailed information on installing the I/O modules in your system, see the I/O Modules section in the Hardware Owner’s Manual for your specific PowerEdge server. 9.5 FlexAddress FlexAddress™ delivers persistent storage and network identities, equipping a data center to handle predictable or even unplanned changes—increase, upgrade, or replace servers without affecting the network or storage and minimizing downtime. Dell’s patent-pending FlexAddress technology allows any M-Series blade enclosure to lock the World Wide Name (WWN) of the Fibre Channel controller and Media Access Control (MAC) of the Ethernet and iSCSI controller into a blade slot, instead of to the blade’s hardware as was done in the past. By removing the network and storage identity from the server hardware, customers are now able to upgrade and replace components or the entire server without changing the identity on the network. This technology works with any vendor’s installed I/O module as well as with Dell PowerConnect™ products. FlexAddress delivers the ability to: • Service a blade or IO Mezzanine card, upgrade the IO mezzanine cards to newer technology, or upgrade the entire server with new technology while maintaining the mapping to Ethernet and storage fabrics. This capability allows quick, painless connection and reduces downtime. This capability is especially powerful when operating in a boot from SAN environment. • Quickly obtain a list of all MAC/WWNs in the chassis by slot and be assured these will never change • Efficiently integrate into existing management and network infrastructure Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 46 Figure 36. FlexAddress Addresses FlexAddress replaces the factory-assigned World Wide Name/Media Access Control (WWN/MAC) IDs on a blade with WWN/MAC IDs from the FlexAddress SD card associated with that slot. This userconfigurable feature enables a choice of iSCSI MAC, Ethernet MAC, and/or WWN persistence, and thus allows blades to be swapped without affecting SAN Zoning, iSCSI zoning, or any MAC-dependent functions. The write-protected FlexAddress SD card comes provisioned with unique pool of 208 MACs and 64 WWNs. Other types of SD cards inserted into the CMC’s SD card slot are ignored. FlexAddress can be ordered with a new enclosure or implemented on one already owned by a customer through the purchase of a customer kit. If FlexAddress is purchased with the chassis, it will be installed and active when the system is powered up. In the case of an existing enclosure, FlexAddress requires the addition of one FlexAddress SD card to a CMC and an upgrade to the iDRAC firmware, Ethernet and Fibre Channel controllers’ firmware, server BIOS, and CMC firmware. All blades and CMC MUST have the correct versions of firmware to properly support this feature. When redundant CMCs are installed, it is not necessary to put such an SD card in both CMCs, since the WWN/MAC addresses are pushed to the chassis Control Panel upon enablement for redundancy; if one CMC becomes inoperable, the other CMC still has access to the WWN/MAC addresses in the Control Panel. Blades that are up and running are not affected as they already have their WWN/MACs programmed into their controllers. If a replacement of the control panel is required, the SD card will push the WWN/MACs back to it. It is important to note that the chassis Control Panel also stores CMC configuration information, so it is advisable that customers keep a backup of the CMC configuration file. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 47 The CMC manages the following functions specific to FlexAddress: • Provides user interface for enabling or disabling the FlexAddress feature—on a per-blade-slot basis, a per-fabric basis, or both • Identifies and reports device information for each of the supported fabric types—LOMs, Ethernet, and Fibre Channel mezzanine cards • Validates all the components of the FlexAddress feature—SD card validation, System BIOS, IO controller firmware, CMC firmware, and, iDRAC firmware versions • Reports FlexAddress feature status for each of the blade slots • Provides information for both server-assigned (factory-programmed) and chassis-assigned (FlexAddress) addresses on each supported device • Logs any system-level errors that may prevent the FlexAddress feature from being used on the chassis or on a given device. Figure 37. FlexAddress Screen in the CMC Table 7. FlexAddress Features and Benefits Features Benefits Lock the World Wide Name (WWN) of the Fibre Channel controller and Media Access Control (MAC) of the Ethernet and iSCSI controller into a blade slot, instead of to the blade’s hardware Easily replace blades without network management effort Service or replace a blade or I/O mezzanine card and maintain all address mapping to Ethernet and storage fabrics Ease of management Easy and highly reliable booting from Ethernet or Fibre Channel based Storage Area Networks (SANs) An almost no-touch blade replacement All MAC/WWN/iSCSIs in the chassis will never change Fewer future address name headaches Fast & Efficient integration into existing network infrastructure No need to learn a new management tool Low cost vs switch-based solution FlexAddress is simple and easy to implement Simple and quick to deploy FlexAddress SD card comes with a unique pool of MAC/WWNs and is able to be enabled on a single enclosure at a given time, until disabled No need for the user to configure No risk of duplicates on your network or SAN Works with all I/O modules including Cisco, Brocade, and Dell PowerConnect switches as well as pass-thru modules Choice is independent of switch or pass-through module Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 48 Wake on LAN (WOL) is enabled after a power down and power up of the enclosure. FlexAddress on Ethernet devices is programmed by the module server BIOS. In order for the blade BIOS to program the address, it needs to be operational which requires the blade to be powered up. Once the powerdown and power-up sequence completes, the FlexAddress feature is available for Wake-On-LAN (WOL) function. Following are the four steps required in order to implement FlexAddress on an M1000e:  A Chassis Management Controller (CMC) receives a FlexAddress feature card provisioned with a unique pool of: 208 MACs and 64 WWNs. Figure 38. FlexAddress SD Card  The FlexAddress card is inserted at factory or to an already installed chassis in an customer location (note: to Enable FlexAddress on an existing chassis, blade BIOS, iDRAC firmware, HBA and Ethernet controller firmware, and CMC firmware must be updated to the latest versions) Figure 39. SD Slot on bottom of CMC  Select the slots and fabrics you want FlexAddress enabled on (see figure below). note blades must be powered off and have the latest firmware in order for FlexAddress MAC/WWNs to be deployed to them. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 49 Figure 40. CMC FlexAddress Summary Screen  FlexAddress MAC/WWNs are now deployed. CMC GUI shows users a summary of Server Assigned (hardware based) and chassis assigned (FlexAddress) MAC/WWNs for the entire chassis or per slot (see Figure Figure 41 below). Green Checkmarks denote which identifier is currently being used. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 50 Figure 41. CMC FlexAddress Server Detail Screen For more information, review the FlexAddress chapter of the CMC User’s Guide. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 51 10 Storage The M1000e was designed primarily to support external storage over the network, which is the primary requirement for customers seeking maximum density. Figure 42. Examples of Major Storage Platforms Supported The blade servers also support at least two internal hard drives which can be put into RAID if so desired. For details, see the Technical Guide for each of the compatible blade servers offered. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 52 11 Video The iKVM supports a video display resolution range from 640x480 at 60Hz up to 1280 x 1024 x 65,000 colors (noninterlaced) at 75Hz. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 53 12 Rack Information 12.1 Overview The RapidRails™ static rail system for the M1000e provides tool-less support for racks with square mounting holes including all generations of Dell racks except for the 4200 & 2400 series. Also available are the VersaRails™ static rails, which offer tooled mounting support for racks with square or unthreaded round mounting holes. Both versions include a strain relief bar and cable enumerator clips to help manage and secure the cables exiting the back of the system. 12.2 Rails The RapidRails and VersaRails static rail kits for the M1000e are identical except for their mounting bracket designs. The mounting brackets on the RapidRails static rails have hooks and a lock button for supporting tool-less installation in 4-post racks with square mounting holes. Figure 43. M1000e RapidRails Static Rails The mounting brackets on the VersaRails static rails have threaded clinch nuts rather than hooks and a lock button in order to support tooled installation in 4-post racks with unthreaded round mounting holes. The VersaRails static rails can also be mounted in square hole racks if desired. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 54 Figure 44. M1000e VersaRails Static Rails The VersaRails static rails are not intended to be mounted in threaded hole racks since the rails cannot be fully tightened and secured against the rack mounting flange. Neither the VersaRails nor the RapidRails kits support mounting in 2-post racks. Mounting Interface Rail Type Rack Types Supported Rail Adjustability Range (mm) 4-Post 2-Post Square Round Threaded Square Round Thread Flush Center Min Max Min Max Min Max RapidRails Static √ X X X X 712 755 — — — — VersaRails Static √ √ X X X 706 755 706 755 — — The min-max values listed in the table above represent the allowable distance between the front and rear mounting flanges in the rack. 12.3 Cable Management Arm (CMA) Since the M1000e does not need to be extended out of the rack for service, neither the RapidRails nor the VersaRails static rail systems support a cable management arm. Included instead are a strain relief bar and cable enumerator clips to help manage and secure the potentially large number of cables exiting the back of the system. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 55 Figure 45. M1000e Strain Relief Bar and Cable Enumerator Clip (12 Per Kit) 12.4 Rack View The M1000e is installed on the rails by simply resting the back of the system on the rail ledges, pushing the system forward until it fully seats, and tightening the thumbscrews on the chassis front panel. Figure 46. M1000e Mounted in the Rack The strain relief bar and cable enumerator clips can be used to help manage and secure the power cords and I/O cables exiting the back of the system as indicated below. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 56 Figure 47. M1000e Strain Relief Bar and Cable Enumerator Clips More information can be found in the Rack Installation Guide. Strain Relief Bar Cable Enumerator Clips Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 57 13 Virtualization The M1000e and the blade servers which fit in it have been designed for optimal use with all major virtualization software platforms. Figure 48. Examples of Major Virtualization Platforms Supported The M1000e platform offers many benefits for virtualization: • Data center Consolidation o High Density Form Factor o I/O Bandwidth & Switch Port Savings o Large Memory Capacity • Ease Of Mgmt/Deployment o Management Options o I/O Virtualization o Chassis LCD Display o Embedded Hypervisor • Reduce Downtime o Persistent Addresses o Fully Redundant Power & Cooling o Fully Redundant I/O o Hot-Swappable Drives • Power & Cooling Efficiency o Super Efficient Power Supplies o Optimized Airflow o Best-in-class Fan Technology Many of the I/O modules offered provide significant benefits for use in virtualized environments, such as: Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 58 Figure 49. Examples of I/O modules Recommended for Use in Virtualized Environments Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 59 14 Systems Management 14.1 Overview The M1000e server solution offers a holistic management solution designed to fit into any customer data center. It features: • Dual Redundant Chassis Management Controllers (CMC) o Powerful management for the entire enclosure o Includes: real-time power management and monitoring; flexible security; status/ inventory/ alerting for blades, I/O and chassis • iDRAC o One per blade with full DRAC functionality like other Dell servers including vMedia/KVM o Integrates into CMC or can be used separately • iKVM o Embedded in the chassis for easy KVM infrastructure incorporation allowing one admin per blade o Control Panel on front of M1000e for ―crash cart‖ access • Front LCD o Designed for deployment and local status reporting Onboard graphics and keyboard/mouse USB connect to an optional system level Integrated KVM (iKVM) module for local KVM access. Full USB access is available through the server module front panel. In Figure 50 below, OSCAR (On Screen Configuration and Activity Reporting) is the graphic user interface for the 4161DS or 2161DS-2 console switch used to share a single keyboard/mouse/LCD in a rack with all the servers in the rack Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 60 Figure 50. System Management Architecture Diagram Management connections transfer health and control traffic throughout the chassis. The system management fabric is architected for 100BaseT Ethernet over differential pairs routed to each module. There are two 100BaseT interfaces between CMCs, one switched and one unswitched. All system management Ethernet is routed for 100 Mbps signaling. Every module has a management network link to each CMC, with redundancy provided at the module level. Failure of any individual link will cause failover to the redundant CMC. 14.2 Server Management The server module base management solution includes additional features for efficient deployment and management of servers in a modular server form factor. The base circuit, which integrates the baseboard management controller (BMC) function with hardware support for Virtual KVM (vKVM) and Virtual Media (vMedia), is the integrated Dell Remote Access Controller (iDRAC). iDRAC has two Ethernet connections, one for each CMC, providing system management interface redundancy. Highlights of the iDRAC solution include the following: • Dedicated management interface for high‐performance management functions • vMedia • vKVM • IPMI 2.0 Out-of-Band management • Serial-over-LAN redirection • Systems Management Architecture for Server Hardware (SMASH) Command Line Protocol (CLP) • Blade status and inventory • Active power management Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 61 • Integration with Microsoft® Active Directory® • Security, Local and Active Directory Traditional IPMI-based BMC features like hardware monitoring and power control are supported. The LifeCycle controller on 11th generation servers offers additional features including: • Unified Server Configurator (USC): Consolidated interface for OS install, hardware configuration, updates, and diagnostics o Reduces task time and speed of deployment o Eliminates media for OS drivers during OS install and update o Eliminates multiple control ROM options for hardware configuration o Eases firmware updates with roll-back capability • Embedded Diagnostics • Parts Replacement: Automatically updates RAID/NIC firmware to previous levels after parts replacement. • Persistent Life Cycle Log • Out-of-Band Configuration/Update: With the introduction of Lifecycle Controller (LCC) 1.3, customers and console vendors can initiate and schedule an upgrade to device firmware and pre-OS software out-of-band. This is useful during ―bare metal‖ deployment scenarios or change management in operating systems where firmware updates were not possible in the past (i.e., virtualization). o Updates are staged on the Lifecycle Controller and applied immediately or during a scheduled maintenance window. o Lifecycle controller 1.3 supports updates with BIOS, diagnostics, driver pack, USC, RAID controller firmware, iDRAC6 firmware, and NIC firmware. More information on the iDRAC and Lifecycle Controller can be found on support.dell.com. 14.3 Enclosure Management The CMC provides secure remote management access to the chassis and installed modules. The M1000e must have at least one CMC and supports an optional redundant module, each occupying a slot accessible through the rear of the chassis. Redundancy is provided in an Active—Standby pairing of the modules and failover occurs when the active module has failed or degraded. The CMC interfaces through dual stacking 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports and one serial port. The CMC serial port interface provides common management of up to six I/O modules through a single connection. The CMC provides many features, including:  Deployment o LCD based deployment ―wizard‖ o Single secure interface for inventory, configuration, monitoring, and alerting for server modules, chassis infrastructure and I/O Modules o Centralized configuration for iDRAC, I/O Modules and CMC o 1:Many iDRAC configuration o 1:Many Blade Boot Device Selection o 1:Many vMedia File share o Customized Slot Naming o IO Module Configuration and Launch o WWN/MAC Display & Persistence w/ FlexAddress; Manages FlexAddress Ports o Support for Network Time Protocol (NTP)  Monitoring and Troubleshooting o User interface entry point (web, telnet, SSH, serial) Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 62 o Monitoring and alerting for chassis environmental conditions or component health thresholds. This includes but is not limited to the following:  Real time power consumption  Power supplies  Fans  Power allocation  Temperature  CMC redundancy o I/O fabric consistency o Consolidated Status Reporting & Event Logs  Email & SNMP alerting  Support for Remote Syslog  Blade Events displayed in CMC o Consolidated Chassis/Blade/IO Inventory o ―Virtual Server Reseat‖ simulates blade removal/insertion o Remotely blink LEDs to Identify Components  Updating o Reporting of Firmware versions o 1:Many iDRAC Firmware update o Consolidated CMC and iKVM F/W update o 1:Many update of drivers & Firmware via Remote File Share (w/ Repository Manager) o 2 x 10/100/1000Mb Ethernet ports + 1 serial port  Real Time Power/Thermal Monitoring and Management o Consolidated Chassis/Blade Power Reporting o Power budget management and allocation o Real Time System AC Power Consumption with reset-able peak and minimum values o System level power limiting and slot based power prioritization o Manages Dynamic Power Engagement functionality o Manages fan speed control o Power sequencing of modules in conjunction with the defined chassis power states  Separate management network o Configuration of the embedded management switch, which facilitates external access to manageable modules o Provides connection from management network to iDRAC on each of the blades and the management interfaces on the integrated I/O Modules o 2nd Ethernet port supports daisy chaining of CMCs for improved cable management  Security o Local Authentication &/or AD Integration  OpenLDAP coming in CMC 3.0 o Supports multiple levels of user roles and permissions for control of chassis, IO, &/or server blades, including Microsoft Active Directory o IPv6 Support o VLAN tagging for iDRAC, CMC, and IOMs o Two Factor Authentication w/ SmartCard o Single Sign On using OS credentials (with AD) o Private Key Authentication (PK Auth) o Secure Web (SSL) and CLI (Telnet/SSH) interfaces  Support for Industry-Standard Interfaces o SMASH CLP o WSMAN o CIM XML Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 63 o SNMP The Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller (iDRAC) on each server module is connected to the CMC via dedicated, fully redundant 100 Mbps Ethernet connections wired through the midplane to a dedicated 24‐port Ethernet switch on the CMC, and exposed to the outside world through the CMC’s external Management Ethernet interface (10/100/1000M). This connection is distinct from the three redundant data Fabrics A, B and C. Unlike previous generations of Dell server modules, the iDRAC’s connectivity is independent of, and in addition to, the onboard GbE LOMs on the server module. Each server module’s iDRAC has its own IP address and can be accessed, if security settings allow, directly through a supported browser, telnet, SSH, or IPMI client on the management station. Figure 51. Chassis Management Controller Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 64 Figure 52. CMC Module Features Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 65 14.4 Integrated Keyboard and Mouse Controller (iKVM) Figure 53. M1000e iKVM The modular enclosure supports one optional Integrated KVM (iKVM) module. This module occupies a single slot accessible through the rear of the chassis. The iKVM redirects local server module video, keyboard, and mouse electrical interfaces to either the iKVM local ports or the M1000e front panel ports. The iKVM allows connection to a VGA monitor, USB keyboard, and USB mouse without use of a dongle. The iKVM also has an Analog Console Interface (ACI) compatible RJ45 port that allows the iKVM to tie the interface to a KVM appliance upstream of the iKVM via CAT5 cabling. Designed with Avocent technology, the ACI port reduces cost and complexity by giving access for sixteen servers using only one port on an external KVM Switch. The iKVM contains a ―seventeenth blade‖ feature, connecting the CMC Command Line Interface via the KVM switch and allowing text-based deployment wizards on VGA monitors. iKVM firmware is updated through the CMC. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 66 Figure 54. Rear iKVM interface Panel The front of the enclosure includes two USB connections for a keyboard and mouse, along with a video connection port, both of which require the Avocent iKVM switch to be activated for them to be enabled. These ports are designed for connecting a local front ―crash cart‖ console to be connected to access the blade servers while standing in front of the enclosure. Figure 55. Front Keyboard/Video Ports Dell modular servers also include vKVM as a standard feature, routing the operator’s keyboard output, mouse output and video between the target server module and a console located on the system management IP network. With up to two simultaneous vKVM sessions per blade, remote management now satisfies virtually any usage model. vMedia is also now standard, providing Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 67 emulation of USB DVD‐R/W, USB CD‐R/W, USB Flash Drive, USB ISO image and USB Floppy over an IP interface. Connection to vKVM and vMedia is through the CMC, with encryption available on a per stream basis. It is possible to connect the following Dell\Avocent KVMIP switches to the iKVM card in the M1000e blade enclosure using a CAT5 cable. • Dell: o 2161DS-2 o 4161DS o 2321DS o 180AS o 2160AS • Avocent: o All DSR xx20, xx30, xx35 models o All Mergepoint Unity models For other Avocent branded models, customers need to connect to the card using the USB adapter. More information on the iKVM can be found in the iKVM training material on us.training.dell.com, in the iKVM Module section of the Dell PowerEdge Modular Systems Hardware Owner’s Manual, in the CMC User Guide, and at dell.avocent.com. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 68 15 Peripherals Common peripherals for the M1000e include: • An external USB DVD-ROM Drive is often used for local installation of OS or other software. • A Dell 1U rack console which enables customers to mount a system administrator’s control station directly into a Dell rack without sacrificing rack space needed for servers and other peripherals. It features: o 17" LCD flat-panel monitor with height adjustment o Specially designed keyboard and trackball combination o Twin PS/2 connectors o SVGA video output o 1U rack-mounting kit o Simple installation • Uninterruptible power supplies for racks, which provides a temporary power source to bridge the critical moments after a power failure, allowing: o Time to save and back up the data being processed o Safely power down your servers o Support for up to 5000 VA (3750 watts) • Power distribution units (PDUs): use the Dell Energy Smart Solution Advisor (ESSA) to see what a given chassis configuration will require. o Single phase needs one PDU per chassis  Use 30A for a medium to lightly loaded chassis  Use 60A for a heavily loaded o For 3 phase:  30A 3 phase for a heavily loaded single chassis  50 or 60A 3 phase for multiple chassis. o Generally customers run 2 x 3 phase circuits to the rack via a PDU, then the PDU breaks out single phases to each PSU. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 69 16 Packaging Options Figure 56. Enclosure After Unpacking The M1000e comes from the factory on a pallet with components installed. The components must be taken out before it is installed in a rack. There are cardboard slings under the chassis to enable two people to lift it. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 70 Appendix A. Regulatory Certifications Please see the external Product Safety, EMC, and Environmental Datasheets on dell.com at: http://www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance_datasheets. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 71 Appendix B. Status Messages C.1 LCD Status Messages See the M1000e Configuration Guide and CMC Administrator Reference Guide for details. C.2 System Status Messages See the CMC Administrator Reference Guide for details. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 72 Appendix C. Additional Information Videos highlighting the major M1000e features are available on http://www.dell.com/html/us/products/pedge/poweredge_mseries_blade_videos/poweredge.html The PowerEdge M1000e Configuration Guide, Hardware Owner’s Manual and CMC Administrator Reference Guide each contain a wealth of additional information about the PowerEdge M1000e’s capabilities. The blade training material on dtt.us.dell.comdtt.us.dell.com is also a useful reference. TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK INSIDE THE OPTIPLEX 780 TM TM DELL OPTIPLEX 780 OVERVIEW Mini Tower Computer (MT) View 3 Desktop Computer (DT) View 4 Small Form Factor Computer (SFF) View 5 Ultra Small Form Factor Computer (USFF) View 6 MARKETING SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS Operating System, Chipset 7 Processor 8 Advanced System Manageability Modes, Memory 9 Drives and Removable Storage, System Board Connectors 10-11 Graphics/Video Controller 12 External Ports/Connectors 12 Communications—Network Adapter (NIC), Modem 13 Audio and Speakers, Keyboard and Mouse 13 Security, Service and Support, Software 14 DETAILED ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS System Dimensions (Physical) 15 System Board Connector Maximum Allowable Dimensions 15 System Level Environmental and Operating Conditions 16 Power 17 Audio 18 Communications 18-22 Graphics/Video Controller 23-26 Hard Drives 27-39 Optical Drive 40-42 BIOS Defaults 43-44 Chassis Enclosure and Ventilation Requirements 45 Acoustic Noise Emission Information 46-49 TABLE OF CONTENTS DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 3 FRONT VIEW 1 Optical Drive (optional) 7 Power Button, Power Light 2 Optical Drive Eject Button 8 Diagnostic Lights (4) 3 Optical Drive Bay 9 Headphone Connector 4 Media Card Reader (optional) 10 Microphone Connector 5 USB 2.0 Connectors (2) 11 Network Connectivity Light 6 Hard Drive Activity Light BACK VIEW 1 Power Connector 4 Power-Supply Vent 2 Back-Panel Connectors 5 Chassis Lock Loop 3 Expansion Card Slots (4) 6 Cover Release Latch BACK PANEL CONNECTORS 1 Parallel Connector 7 Line-in Connector 2 Serial Connector 8 USB 2.0 Connectors (6) 3 Link Integrity Light 9 VGA Video Connector 4 Network Connector 10 eSATA Connector 5 Network Activity Light 11 DisplayPort Connector 6 Line-out Connector MINI TOWER COMPUTER (MT) VIEW DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 4 FRONT VIEW 1 Optical Drive (optional) 7 Network Connectivity Light 2 Optical Drive Eject Button 8 Microphone Connector 3 USB 2.0 Connectors (2) 9 Headphone Connector 4 Hard Drive Activity Light 10 Media Card Reader (optional) 5 Power Button, Power Light 6 Diagnostic Lights (4) BACK VIEW 1 Expansion Card Slots (3) 4 Chassis Lock Loop 2 Air Vent 5 Power Connector 3 Cover Release Latch 6 Back-Panel Connectors BACK PANEL CONNECTORS 1 Parallel Connector 7 Line-in Connector 2 Serial Connector 8 USB 2.0 Connectors (6) 3 Link Integrity Light 9 VGA Video Connector 4 Network Connector 10 eSATA Connector 5 Network Activity Light 11 DisplayPort Connector 6 Line-out Connector DESKTOP COMPUTER (DT) VIEW DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 5 FRONT VIEW 1 Optical Drive (optional) 7 Power Button, Power Light 2 Optical Drive Eject Button 8 Microphone Connector 3 USB 2.0 Connectors (2) 9 Headphone Connector 4 Network Connectivity Light 10 Media Card Reader (optional) 5 Diagnostic Lights (4) 6 Hard Drive Activity Light BACK VIEW 1 Chassis Lock Loop 4 Back-Panel Connectors 2 Cover Release Latch 5 Expansion Card Slots (2) 3 Power Connector BACK PANEL CONNECTORS 1 Parallel Connector 7 Line-in Connector 2 Serial Connector 8 USB 2.0 Connectors (6) 3 Link Integrity Light 9 VGA Video Connector 4 Network Connector 10 eSATA Connector 5 Network Activity Light 11 DisplayPort Connector 6 Line-out Connector SMALL FORM FACTOR COMPUTER (SFF) VIEW DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 6 BACK VIEW 1 Network Activity Light 9 Display Port Connector 2 Captive Thumbscrew 10 VGA Video Connector 3 Padlock Ring 11 Serial Connector 4 Security Cable Slot 12 USB Connector 2.0 (5) 5 Power Connector 13 Network Connector 6 Line-Out Connector 14 Link Integrity Light 7 Line-in/ Microphone Connector 15 WiFi Antenna (optional) 8 eSATA Connector FRONT VIEW 1 Optical Drive 7 Headphone Connector 2 Power Button, Power Light 8 Microphone Connector 3 Drive Activity Light 9 USB Connector 2.0 (2) 4 Diagnostic Lights (4) 5 Network Connectivity Light 6 WiFi Activity Light (optional) ULTRA SMALL FORM FACTOR COMPUTER (USFF) VIEW DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 7 MARKETING SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS NOTE: Offerings may vary by region. For more information regarding the configuration of your computer, click Start>Help and Support and select the option to view information about your computer. OPERATING SYSTEM NOTE: One of the follow ing Operating Systems will be preinstalled. MT DT SFF USFF Windows 7® operating system Microsoft® Windows 7® Basic; Microsoft® Windows 7® Home Premium; Microsoft® Windows 7® Professional (32 and 64 bit); Microsoft® Windows 7® Ultimate (32 and 64 bit) Windows Vista® operating system Windows Vista® Business SP2 (32 and 64 bit), Windows Vista® Home Basic SP2 (32 bit), Windows Vista® Business SP2 (32 bit) via Windows 7 Professional Downgrade Rights, Windows Vista® Ultimate SP2 (32 bit) via Windows 7 Ultimate Downgrade Rights, Windows XP® operating system Windows® XP Professional SP3 via Windows Vista® Business or Ultimate Downgrade Rights (32 bit), Windows® XP Professional SP3 via Microsoft® Windows 7® Professional or Microsoft® Windows 7® Ultimate Downgrade Rights (32 bit) Other FreeDOS for (N-series), Ubuntu® Linux (China only) OS Media Support X X X X CHIPSET MT DT SFF USFF Chipset Intel Q45 Express Chipset w/ICH10DO Non-volatile memory on chipset BIOS Configuration SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) 64Mbit (8MB) located at SPI_FLASH on chipset TPM 1.2 Security Device (Trusted Platform Module)1 16KB located at TPM1.2 on chipset TCM (Trusted Computing Module) Available in China only Non-TPM Available in select countries NIC EEPROM LOM configuration contained within SPI_FLASH – no dedicated LOM EEPROM DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 8 PROCESSOR NOTE: Global Standard Products (GSP) are a subset of Dell’s relationship products that are managed for availability and synchronized transitions on a worldwide basis. They ensure the same platform is available for purchase globally. This allows customers to reduce the number of configurations managed on a worldwide basis, thereby reducing their costs. They also enable companies to implement global IT standards by locking in specific product configurations worldwide. The following GSP processors identified below will be made available to Dell customers. NOTE: Processor numbers are not a measure of performance. Processor availability subject to change and may vary by region/ country. MT DT SFF USFF Intel® Core™ 2 Quad Processors Intel® Core™ 2 Quad Q9650/3.00GHz, 12M, 1333FSB X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP Intel® Core™ 2 Quad Q9550/2.83GHz, 12M, 1333FSB X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP Intel® Core™ 2 Quad Q9400/2.66GHz, 6M, 1333FSB X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP Intel® Core™ 2 Quad Q8400/2.66GHz, 4M, 1333FSB X X X Intel® Core™ 2 Quad Q8300/2.50GHz, 4M, 1333FSB X X X Intel® Core™ 2 Duo and Pentium® Dual Core Processors Intel® Core™ 2 Duo E8600/3.33GHz, 6M, 1333FSB X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP Intel® Core™ 2 Duo E8500/3.16GHz, 6M, 1333FSB X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP Intel® Core™ 2 Duo E8400/3.0GHz, 6M, 1333FSB X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP Intel® Core™ 2 Duo E7600/3.06GHz, 3M, 1066FSB X X X X Intel® Core™ 2 Duo E7500/2.93GHz, 3M, 1066FSB X X X X Intel® Pentium® Dual-Core E6700/3.2GHz, 2M, 1066FSB X X X X Intel® Pentium® Dual-Core E6500/2.93GHz, 2M, 1066FSB X X X X Intel® Pentium® Dual-Core E6300/2.8GHz, 2M, 1066FSB X X X X Intel® Pentium® Dual-Core E5500/2.8GHz, 2M, 800FSB X X X X Intel® Pentium® Dual-Core E5400/2.7GHz, 2M, 800FSB X X X X Intel® Pentium® Dual-Core E5300/2.60GHz, 2M, 800FSB X X X X Intel® Celeron® Processors Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core 3300/2.50GHz, 1M, 800FSB X X X X Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core 3200/2.40GHz, 1M, 800FSB X X X X Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core 1600/2.40GHz, 512K, 800FSB X X X X Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core 1500/2.20GHz, 512K, 800FSB X X X X Intel® Celeron® 450/2.20GHz, 512K, 800FSB X X X X DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 9 MEMORY Memory modules should be installed in pairs of matched memory size, speed, and technology. If the memory modules are not installed in matched pairs, a slight reduction in performance may occur. NOTE: This system supports both 1066MHz and 1333MHz DDR3 memory, how ever the memory w ill operate at 1066MHz speed due to chipset specifications . ADVANCED SYSTEM MANAGEABILITY MODES NOTE: Hardware management mode options allow you to select the right systems management feature support for your enterprise. Dell’s innovati ve approach to scalable remote client management offers you a choice of built-in hardware management capabilities across platform offerings. The OptiPlex 780 supports Intel ® vPro™ technology and Intel ® Standard Manageability w hich supports the follow ing features: Asset reporting and inventor y capabilities, Remote troubleshooting and repair, Client System Isolation, Remote patching/ updating Intel® vPro™ technology adds these additional features: Client initialed “Fast Call for Help”/ beyond firew all systems management capability, Microsoft N AP support, Hardened security monitoring, Support for the latest generation of Intel® Core™ 2 Processors MT DT SFF USFF Intel® vPro Technology Enabled* (iAMT 5.x) X X X X Intel® vPro Technology DIsabled * (iAMT 5.x) X X X X Intel® Standard Manageability * X X X X No Out-of-Band Systems Management X X X X MT DT SFF USFF Type: DDR3 Synch DRAM Non-ECC Memory 1066MHz and 1333MHz DIMM Slots 4 4 4 2 DIMM Capacities Up to 4GB Up to 4GB Up to 4GB Up to 4GB Minimum Memory 1GB 1GB 1GB 1GB Maximum System Memory 16GB1 16GB1 16GB1 8GB Memory configurations 16GB1 DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (4 DIMM) X X X 8GB1 DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (2 DIMM) X X X X 8GB1 DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (4 DIMM) X X X 4GB1 DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (4 DIMM) X X X 4GB1 DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (2 DIMM) X X X X 4GB1 DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (1 DIMM) X X X X 3GB DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (3 DIMM) X X X 3GB DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (2 DIMM) X X X X 2GB DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (2 DIMM) X X X X 2GB DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (1 DIMM) X X X X 1GB DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (1 DIMM) X X X X 1 The total amount of available memory will be less than 4GB. The amount less depends on the actual system configuration. To fully utilize 4GB or more of memory requires a 64-bit enabled processor and 64-bit operating system. *The functionality described above requires an appropriate software management console -I nt el vPr o Tec h n ol o g y E n a b l ed : T hi s op ti o n en a bl es f ul l vPr o o u t of b a n d f u nc ti o na l i t y. R e q ui r es a vPr o pr o ce s s or . -I nt el vPr o Tec h n ol o g y D i s ab l ed : T hi s op ti o n di sa bl es vP r o t ec h n ol o gy b u t al l ow s fo r t he l at er ena b l em e nt o f vP r o a s de - s i r e d. R e q ui r es a vPr o pr o ce s s or -I nt el S ta n d ar d M an a ge a bi l i t y: T h i s o p ti on de l i ver s a po r ti on o f b asi c ou t o f ba n d c a p ab i l i ti es ( se e a b o ve) - N o O ut o f Ban d S ys t e m s M a n a ge me n t : Th i s op ti o n d oe s n o t s u p p or t ou t of b a n d m a na g em e nt. C a n n o t be e nab l ed a ft er p o i nt o f sal e. DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 10 DRIVES AND REMOVABLE STORAGE MT DT SFF USFF Bays: 3.5-inch bay (External 19-1 Media Card Reader) 1 1 1 (slim-line) 5.25-inch bay (External Optical) 2 1 1 (slim-line) Hard Drives Supported (Internal and External) 2 2 2 1 Optical Drives Supported 2 1 1 1 Interface: SATA 4 3 3 2 3.5” Hard Drives: 160GB1 SATA 10K RPM HDD X X X 80GB1 SATA 10K RPM HDD X X X 1TB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 500GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 250GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 160GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 2.5” Hard Drives: 320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X X 250GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X X 160GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X X 250GB1 SATA Full Disk Encryption HDD X X X X 160GB1 SATA Full Disk Encryption HDD X X X X 128GB1 SATA Solid State Drive X X X X 64GB1 SATA Solid State Drive X X X X RAID 1 Data Protection: (includes two matching capacity/speed hard drives) 160GB1 SATA 10K RPM HDD (3.5”) X 80GB1 SATA 10K RPM HDD (3.5”) X 1TB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X 500GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X 320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X 250GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X 160GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X 320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (2.5”) X X X 250GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (2.5”) X X X 160GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (2.5”) X X X DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 11 DRIVES AND REMOVABLE STORAGE MT DT SFF USFF RAID 0 Performance: (includes two matching capacity/speed hard drives) 320GB1 SATA 10K RPM HDD (3.5”) X 160GB1 SATA 10K RPM HDD (3.5”) X 2TB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X 1TB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X 640GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X 500GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X 320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X 640GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (2.5”) X X X 500GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (2.5”) X X X 320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (2.5”) X X X Optical Drive: (SFF/USFF require slim-line optical drive) Blu-ray Writer (available in 2H 2010) SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s DVD+/-RW2 SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s DVD-ROM3 SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s Media Card Reader: Dell 19 in 1 Media Card Reader 480Mb/s 1 For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less. 2 Discs burned with this drive may not be compatible with some existing drives and players; using DVD+R media provides maximum compatibility. 3 DVD-ROM drives may have write-capable hardware that has been disabled via firmware modifications. SYSTEM BOARD CONNECTORS NOTE: See Detailed Engineering Specifications for maximum card dimensions. MT DT SFF USFF PCI Slot(s): number of 2 2 1 PCIe x16 Slot: number of 1 1 1 PCIe x1 Slot: number of 1 0 0 Flexbay 1 1 1 Serial ATA (SATA) 4 3 3 2 DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 12 MT DT SFF USFF Integrated Intel GMA 4500 Integrated on system board Enhanced Graphic/Video Options DVI (Digital) Adapter Card Optional card 1GB NVIDIA GeForce GT330 with DVI or VGA and S-Video Out (adapters convert to dual DVI or dual VGA) Optional card 512MB ATI RADEON HD 4550 Graphics with dual DVI or VGA and S-Video Out (adapters convert to dual DVI or dual VGA) Optional card 256MB ATI RADEON HD 3450 Graphics with dual DVI or VGA and S-Video Out (adapters convert to dual DVI or dual VGA) Optional card 256MB ATI RADEON HD 3470 Graphics with Dual DP (adapters convert to dual DVI or dual VGA) Optional card 256MB NVIDIA GeForce 9300 GE with dual DVI or VGA and SVideo Out (adapters convert to dual DVI or dual VGA) Optional card NVIDIA Quadro NVS 420 (adapters covert to quad DVI or DP) Optional card GRAPHICS/VIDEO CONTROLLER NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile card. See chassis diagrams section for port/connector locations MT DT SFF USFF USB 2.0 2 Front, 6 Rear, 1 Internal 2 Front, 5 Rear Serial 1 rear, second port optional via card 1 Rear eSATA 1 Rear 1 Rear Parallel 1 Rear Network Connector (RJ-45) 1 Rear PS/2 Optional via add-in card 1394 Controller Optional via add-in card Video: VGA 1 Rear DVI-I Optional via add-in card DisplayPort 1 Rear Audio: Line in for microphone 1 Front Line in for microphone or stereo 1 Rear Line out for headphones or speakers 1 Front, 1 Rear Risers: (replaces 1 PCI slot and 1 PCIe slot on DT system board) Combo full height riser with 1 PCI and 1 PCIe connector X Dual full height riser with 2 PCI connectors X EXTERNAL PORTS/CONNECTORS NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile card. DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 13 COMMUNICATIONS – MODEM NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. MT DT SFF USFF Intel® 82567LM Gigabit1 Ethernet LAN 10/100/1000 (Remote Wake Up, PXE support and Intel Active Management Technology support) Integrated on system board Broadcom NetXtreme 10/100/1000 PCIe Gigabit Networking Card Optional via add-in card 1 This term does not connote an actual operating speed of 1 Gb/sec. For high speed transmission, connection to a Gigabit Ethernet server and network infrastructure is required. MT DT SFF USFF V.92 Data/Fax Controllerless Modem Optional via add-in card MT DT SFF USFF Dell Wireless 1505 PCIe WLAN card (802.11n) Optional via add-in card Dell Wireless 1510 miniPCIe WLAN card (802.11n) Optional Dell Wireless 1520 miniPCIe WLAN card (802.11n) Optional via add-in card COMMUNICATIONS – WIRELESS MT DT SFF USFF ADI 1984A High Definition Audio Codec Integrated on system board Internal Dell Business Audio Speaker Optional Dell AX210 2.0 Desktop Speakers Optional Dell AX510/AX510PA Flat Panel Soundbar Speakers Optional Dell AY410 30W 2.1 Stereo Speakers with Subwoofer Optional AUDIO AND SPEAKERS MT DT SFF USFF Dell USB Entry Keyboard with optional palmrest Standard Dell QuietKey Keyboard with optional palmrest Optional Dell Multimedia Pro Keyboard Optional Dell Smartcard Keyboard Optional Dell USB Optical Mouse Optional Dell Laser Mouse Optional Dell Logo Mouse Pad Optional KEYBOARD AND MOUSE COMMUNICATIONS - NETWORK ADAPTER (NIC) NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile card. DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 14 SECURITY SERVICE AND SUPPORT NOTE: For more details on Dell Service Plans please to go to: www.dell.com/service/service_plans SOFTWARE MT DT SFF USFF Trusted Platform Module (TPM) 1.21 Integrated on system board Trusted Computing Module (TCM) Integrated on system board (China only) Chassis Intrusion Switch Optional Dell Smartcard Keyboard Optional Chassis lock slot and loop support Standard 1 TPM is not available in all countries. Depending on your country regulations, TCM or No-TPM system boards will be made available. MT DT SFF USFF 3 Year Warranty1 Next Business Day On-site2 (3-3-3) Standard ProSupport Optional 1 For a copy of our guarantees or limited warranties, please write Dell USA L.P., Attn: Warranties, One Dell Way, Round Rock, TX 78682. For more information, visit www.dell.com/warranty. 2 Service may be provided by third-party. Technician will be dispatched if necessary following phone-based troubleshooting. Subject to parts availability, geographical restrictions and terms of service contract. Service timing dependent upon time of day call placed to Dell. U.S. only. MT DT SFF USFF Dell Client Manager Available via Dell.com Dell ControlPoint Standard Norton 2009 Internet Security 30 Day Trial or Optional Subscription McAfee 10 SecurityCenter 30 Day Trial or Optional Subscription DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 15 DETAILED ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS SYSTEM DIMENSIONS (PHYSICAL) NOTE: System Weight and Shipping Weight is based on a typical configuration and may var y based on PC configuration. A typical configuration includes: integrated graphics, one hard drive, one optical drive, and one diskette drive. SYSTEM BOARD CONNECTOR MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE DIMENSIONS MT DT SFF USFF Chassis Volume (liters) 33.0 16.0 10.7 3.7 Chassis Weight (pounds/kilograms) 25.8 / 11.7 18.2 / 8.26 15 / 6.80 7.0/ 3.2 Chassis Dimensions: (HxWxD) Height (inches/centimeters) 16.1 / 40.8 4.5 / 11.4 3.65 / 9.26 9.40/ 23.9 Width (inches/centimeters) 7.4 / 18.7 15.7 / 39.9 12.4 / 31.4 2.60/ 6.50 Depth (inches/centimeters) 17.0 / 43.3 13.9 / 35.3 13.4 / 34 9.30/ 23.6 Shipping Weight (pounds/kilograms - includes packaging materials) 43.5 / 19.73 28 / 12.7 21.3 / 9.66 13.5/ 6.12 Packaging Parameters (HxWxD) Height (inches/centimeters) 22.38/56.85 20.63 / 52.4 20.88/50.04 18.69/47.5 Width (inches/centimeters) 22.25/56.52 20.31/51.59 19.38/49.23 15.75/40.0 Depth (inches/centimeters) 14.25 / 36.2 11.75/29.85 10.63 / 27 7.75/19.7 MT DT SFF USFF PCI Slots 2 2 1 Height (inches/centimeters) 4.376 / 11.115 2.731 / 6.89 Length (inches/centimeters) 7.4 / 18.796* 6.6 / 16.764 PCIe x16 Slots 1 1 1 Height (inches/centimeters) 4.376 / 11.115 2.731 / 6.89 Length (inches/centimeters) 7.4 / 18.796* 6.6 / 16.764 PCIe x1 Slots 1 Height (inches/centimeters) 4.376 / 11.115 Length (inches/centimeters) 7.4 / 18.796* Risers: (replaces 1 PCI slot and 1 PCIe slot on DT system board) Combo Full Height Riser with 1 PCI and 1 PCIe connector (HxL) 1 Height (inches/centimeters) 4.376 / 11.115 Length (inches/centimeters)*, ** 6.6 / 16.764 Dual Full Height Riser with 2 PCI connectors (HxL) 1 Height (inches/centimeters) 4.376 / 11.115 Length (inches/centimeters)*, ** 6.6 / 16.764 * Card length can be longer than standard Half-Length Card but cannot be a Full-Length Card. ** 6.9/17.53 in/cm is longer than the standard Half-Length Card DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 16 SYSTEM LEVEL ENVIRONMENTAL AND OPERATING CONDITIONS MT DT SFF USFF Temperature Operating 10° to 35° C (50° to 95° F) Non-Operating (Storage) -40° to 65° C (-40° to -149° F) Relative Humidity 20% to 80% (non-condensing) Maximum vibration Operating 0.25 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 0.5 octave/min Non-Operating 0.5 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 1 octave/min Maximum Shock Operating Bottom half-sine pulse with a change in velocity of 50.8 cm/sec (20 inches/sec) Non-Operating 27-G faired square wave with a velocity change of 508 cm/sec (200 inches/sec) Maximum Altitude Operating –15.2 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft) Non-Operating –15.2 to 10,668 m (–50 to 35,000 ft) DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 17 POWER NOTE: These form factors utilize a more efficient Active Power Factor Correction (APFC) pow er supply. Dell recommends only Uni versal Pow er Supplies (UPS) based on Sine Wave output for APFC PSUs, not an approximation of a Sine Wave, Square Wave, or quasi -Square Wave. If you have questions, please contact the manufacture to confirm the output type. MT APFC EPA DT APFC EPA SFF APFC EPA USFF EPA Power Supply Wattage 305W 255W High Efficiency 255W 255 W High Efficiency 235W 235W High Efficiency 180W High Efficiency AC input Voltage Range 90 – 264Vac 90 – 264Vac 90 – 264Vac 90 – 264Vac 90 – 264Vac 90 – 264Vac 90 – 264Vac AC input current (low ac range/high AC range) 5.6A / 2.8A 3.6A / 1.8A 5.0A / 2.5A 4.0A / 2.0A 4.5A / 2.25A 3.5A / 1.75A 2.6A / 1.3A AC input Frequency 47HZ / 63HZ 47HZ / 63HZ 47HZ / 63HZ 47HZ / 63HZ 47HZ / 63HZ 47HZ / 63HZ 47 – 63 Hz AC holdup time (80% load) 16MSEC 16MSEC 16MSEC 16MSEC 16MSEC 16MSEC 16 ms Average Efficiency (Energy Star 5.0 Compliant) 87 – 90 – 87% @ 20 – 50 – 100% load 87 – 90 – 87% @ 20 – 50 – 100% load 87 – 90 – 87% @ 20 – 50 – 100% load 87 – 90 – 87% @ 20 – 50 – 100% load Typical Efficiency (Active PFC) 65% 65% 65% N/A DC parameters +3.3v output 8.0A 8.0A 7.0 A 7.0 A 5A 5A N/A +5.0v output 16A 16A 15A 15A 16A 16A N/A +12.0v output 12vA/15A; 12VB/10A 12VA/13A; 12VB/7A 18A 18A 17A 17A +12VA - 9.0 A & +12VB - 7.0 A Note: +12VB Rated at 0.4A when in Standby Mode. +5.0v auxiliary output 4.0A 4.0A 4.0 4.0 4.0A 4.0A N/A -12.0v output 0.5A 0.5A 0.5A 0.5A 0.5A 0.5A 0.1 A Max total power 305W 255W 255W 255W 235W 235W 180W Max combined +3.3v / +5.0v power 80W 80W 91.5W 91.5W 88W 88W N/A Max combined 12.0v power (note: only if more than one 12v rail) 240W 240W N/A N/A N/A N/A 180W BTUs/h (based on PSU max wattage) 1603 BTU 1000 BTU 1341 BTU 1000 BTU 1235 BTU 921 BTU 723 BTU 3.3v CMOS battery (type and estimated battery life) Power Supply Fan 80*25mm 80*25mm 92*25mm 92*25mm 80*15mm 80*15mm N/A Compliance: 1watt requirement Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Blue Angel Compliant Select Select Select Select Select Select Select Climate Savers / 80Plus Compliant No Yes No Yes No Yes Yes FEMP (CECP) Standby Power Compliant No Yes No Yes No Yes Yes DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 18 AUDIO COMMUNICATIONS - NETWORK ADAPTER (NIC) NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile card. INTEGRATED ADI 1984A HIGH DEFINITION AUDIO MT DT SFF USFF High Definition Stereo support X X X X Number of channels 2 Number of Bits / Audio resolution 16, 20, and 24-bit resolution Sampling rate (recording/playback) Independent 8, 11.025, 16, 22.05, 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2, 96, 176.4, and 192 kHz sample rates Signal to Noise Ratio 96+ dB audio outputs, 90+ dB audio inputs Analog Audio X X X X Dolby Digital THX Digital out (S/PDIF) Audio Jack Impedance Microphone 150 kΩ Line-In 150 kΩ Line-Out 190 Ω Headphone .5 Ω Internal Speaker Power Rating 2W INTEGRATED INTEL® 82567 GIGABIT1 ETHERNET LAN 10/100/1000 MT DT SFF USFF External Connector Type RJ45 Data Rates supported 10/100/1000 Mbps Controller Details Controller bus architecture (example PCIe 1.0a x1) Intel Gigabit LAN Connect Interface (GLCI) and LAN Connect Interface (LCI) Integrated memory N/A Data transfer mode (example Bus-Master DMA) N/A Power consumption (full operation per data rate connection speed) 680mW (Max.) Power consumption (standby operation) 141mW (Max.) IEEE standards compliance (example 802.1P) 802.3 Hardware Certifications (example FCC, B, GS mark…) N/A Boot ROM Support EEPROM (located in SPI) Network Transfer Mode (example Full Duplex, Half Duplex) Network Transfer Rate (example 10BASE-T (half-duplex) 10 Mbps 10BASE-T (full-duplex) 20 Mbps 100BASE-TX (half-duplex) 100 Mbps 100BASE-TX (full-duplex) 200 Mbps 1000BASE-T (full-duplex) 2000 Mbps 10 Mb (full/half-duplex) 100 Mb (full/half-duplex) 1000 Mb (full-duplex) DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 19 COMMUNICATIONS - NETWORK ADAPTER (NIC) (CONT.) COMMUNICATIONS – INTEGRATED LAN NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile card. INTEGRATED INTEL® 82567 GIGABIT1 ETHERNET LAN 10/100/1000 (CONT.) MT DT SFF USFF Environmental Operating temperature 0° C to 70° C (32° F to 158° F) Operating humidity 20% to 80% (non-condensing) Operating System Driver Support Windows® XP, Windows Vista® Ultimate, Windows Vista® Business 32 bit/64 bit, Windows Vista Home Basic Manageability (examples WOL, PXE) WOL, PXE 2.1 Management Capabilities Alerting Intel® Standard Manageability, Intel Core 2 Duo/ Quad Processor with vPro Technology 1 This term does not connote an actual operating speed of 1 Gb/sec. For high speed transmission, connection to a Gigabit Ethernet server and network infrastructure is required. Broadcom NetXtreme 10/100/1000 PCIe Gigabit1 Networking Card MT DT SFF USFF Connector Type RJ45 Data Rates supported 10/100/1000 Mbps Half/Full duplex Controller Details Controller bus architecture (example PCIe 1.0a x1) PCIe c1.0a x1 Integrated memory 64KBytes RX, 8KBytes TX Data transfer mode (example Bus-Master DMA) Bus-Master DMA Power consumption (full operation per data rate connection speed) 2.84W (860mA @ +3.3V) Power consumption (standby operation) Less than 300mW IEEE standards compliance (example 802.1P) 802.3, 802.2, 802.3x, 802.1p Hardware Certifications (example FCC, B, GS mark…) FCC B, VCCI B, CE Boot ROM Support No Network Transfer Mode (example Full Duplex, Half Duplex) Full Duplex/Half Duplex Network Transfer Rate (example 10BASE-T (half-duplex) 10 Mbps 10BASE-T (full-duplex) 20 Mbps 100BASE-TX (half-duplex) 100 Mbps 100BASE-TX (full-duplex) 200 Mbps 1000BASE-T (full-duplex) 2000 Mbps 10BASE-T (full-duplex) 20 Mbps Max* 100BASE-TX (half-duplex) 100 Mbps Max* 100BASE-TX (full-duplex) 200 MbpsMax* 1000BASE-T (full-duplex) 2000 Mbps Max* * Depends on the system environment. 1 This term does not connote an actual operating speed of 1 Gb/sec. For high speed transmission, connection to a Gigabit Ethernet server and network infrastructure is required. DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 20 COMMUNICATIONS – INTEGRATED LAN (CONT.) BROADCOM NETXTREME 10/100/1000 PCIE GIGABIT1 NETWORKING CARD (CONT.) MT DT SFF USFF Environmental Operating temperature 0° C to 55° C (32° F - 131° F) Operating humidity 5% ~ 85% (non-condensing) Operating System Driver Support Windows® 7, Windows® XP, Windows Vista® Ultimate, Windows Vista® Business 32 bit/64 bit, Windows Vista Home Basic, Linux Manageability (examples WOL, PXE) WOL, PXE2.1, ACPI Management Capabilities Alerting (example ASF 2.0) None 1 This term does not connote an actual operating speed of 1 Gb/sec. For high speed transmission, connection to a Gigabit Ethernet server and network infrastructure is required. COMMUNICATIONS – MODEM V.92 DATA/FAX CONTROLLERLESS MODEM MT DT SFF USFF Bus PCI External Connector RJ-11 Data Transmission PCM - Pulse Coded Modulation (V.92/V.90) TCM - Trellis Coded Modulation (V.90/V.34/V.32 bis/V.32) Data Speeds 56kbps receive, 48kbps transmit Data Standards ITU V.92/V.90, V.34/V.32 bis/V.32 Fax Speeds 14.4kbps Fax Mode Capabilities 2-wire, half-duplex, synchronous Error Correction and Data Compression V.44, V.42, V.42bis, MNP 2-4, MNP 5 Power Management WOR (wake on ring) capable Upgradeability Driver upgradeable Video V.80 Synchronous Access Mode (SAM) can be supported by software applications (not driver) Operating Temperature 0~50 degree C Operating Humidity 45 degree C 90% max Operating System Support Windows 7,Vista 32/64, Windows XP 32/64 Operating System Driver Support Windows 7,Vista 32/64, Windows XP 32/64 Power Requirements +3.0V~+3.6V, 116.6mW max Chipset Conexant SmartHSFs/LF (CX11256 & CX20493) Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L X H) L: 5.25/13.325 H: 4.73/12.002 Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L X H) L: 5.26/13.366 H: 3.12/7.923 DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 21 COMMUNICATIONS – WIRELESS NOTE: Native DisplayPort on system is not supported w ith optional w ireless card on the DT and SFF chassis. DELL WIRELESS 1505 PCIE WLAN CARD (802.11N WITH REMOTE WAKE UP SUPPORT) MT DT SFF External Connector Type Custom WLAN Antenna Connector Controller Details Controller bus architecture Electrically compatible with the PCI Express Base Specification v1.1 (x1 lane) and PCIe v1.0a. WLAN standards supported 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n 802.11b Data Rates supported 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps 802.11a Data Rates supported 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 802.11g Data Rates supported 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 802.11n Data Rates supported 300, 270, 243, 240, 180, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Mbps Encryption WEP 64-bit and 128-bit, TKIP, AES-CCMP 128-bit Operating temperature 0 to +70 °C Operating humidity Max Operating Humidity 85 % Operating System Driver Support Windows 7, Windows XP 32/64, Vista 32/64 DELL WIRELESS 1510 PCIE MINI PCIE WLAN CARD (802.11N) USFF External Connector Type Custom WLAN Antenna Connector Controller Details Controller bus architecture Electrically compatible with the PCI Express Base Specification v1.1 (x1 lane) and PCIe v1.0a. WLAN standards supported 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n 802.11b Data Rates supported 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps 802.11a Data Rates supported 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 802.11g Data Rates supported 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 802.11n Data Rates supported 300, 270, 243, 240, 180, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Mbps Encryption WEP 64-bit and 128-bit, TKIP, AES-CCMP 128-bit Operating temperature 0 to +70 °C Operating humidity Max Operating Humidity 85 % Operating System Driver Support Windows 7, Windows XP 32/64, Vista 32/64 DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 22 COMMUNICATIONS – WIRELESS NOTE: Native DisplayPort on system is not supported w ith optional w ireless card on the DT and SFF chassis. DELL WIRELESS 1520 PCIE MINI PCIE WLAN CARD (802.11N) MT DT SFF USFF External Connector Type Custom WLAN Antenna Connector Controller Details Controller bus architecture Electrically compatible with the PCI Express Base Specification v1.1 (x1 lane) and PCIe v1.0a. WLAN standards supported 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n 802.11b Data Rates supported 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps 802.11a Data Rates supported 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 802.11g Data Rates supported 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 802.11n Data Rates supported 300, 270, 243, 240, 180, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Mbps Encryption WEP 64-bit and 128-bit, TKIP, AES-CCMP 128-bit Operating temperature 0 to +70 °C Operating humidity Max Operating Humidity 85 % Operating System Driver Support Windows 7, Windows XP 32/64, Vista 32/64 DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 23 GRAPHICS/VIDEO CONTROLLER NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile card. INTEGRATED INTEL GMA 4500 MT DT SFF USFF Bus Type Integrated GPU core clock Gen5 core @ 667 350 MHz Integrated and with 350MHz 24 bit RAMDAC Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed XP: Up to 1GB shared system memory with 2GB system memory Vista: Up to 2GB shared system memory with 4GB system memory Maximum power consumption 4 W Overlay Planes Yes Maximum Color Depth 32 bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85 Hz Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support OpenGL 2.0/DirectX 10.0 Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/ or digital) Up to 2560x1600 @ 60Hz (DP) Up to 1920x1200 @ 60Hz (DVI & VGA) Up to 1600x1200 @ 85Hz (VGA only) External Connectors VGA, DisplayPort Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 0° to 106° C (32° to 223° F) Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% (non-condensing) Altitude Range –15.2 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft) DisplayPort Bus Type AUX 1, 2, 4 lanes Maximum supported resolution Up to 2560x1600 @ 60Hz Maximum power consumption N/A External connectors DisplayPort DVI (Digital) Adder Card (MT,DT and SFF Only) Bus Type sDVO Maximum supported resolution Up to 1920x1566 @ 60 Hz Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 5.75 x 2.75 / 14.61 x 6.99 Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 5.75 x 2.75 / 14.61 x 6.99 Maximum power consumption N/A External connectors DVI 1 Up to 1.7 GB of system memory may be allocated to support integrated graphics, depending on operating system, system memory size and other factors. 2 DVI and VGA can be used concurrently for multi-monitor display in DOS. The DisplayPort controller does not support multi-monitor display in DOS 3 Populating a discrete graphics card in the x16 slot disables onboard video. DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 24 GRAPHICS/VIDEO CONTROLLER (CONT.) 1GB NVIDIA GEFORCE GT330 MT DT SFF Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16 GPU core clock 600Mhz Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 500Mhz Maximum power consumption 22W Overlay Planes Yes Maximum Color Depth 32-bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85Hz Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support D3D and OpenGL Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 1920x1440/32bpp @ 75Hz Min : 640x480/8bpp @ 60Hz External connectors 1 DVI and 1 DisplayPort Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 4.7 / 16.764 x 12.0 Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 3.35 / 16.764 x 8.5 Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft. 512MB AMD RADEON™ HD 4550 GRAPHICS DUAL DVI OR VGA AND TV OUT MT DT SFF Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16 GPU core clock 540Mhz Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 500Mhz Maximum power consumption 25W Overlay Planes Yes Maximum Color Depth 32-bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85Hz Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support D3D and OpenGL Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 1920x1440/32bpp @ 75Hz Min : 640x480/8bpp @ 60Hz External connectors 1 DVI and 1 DisplayPort Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 4.7 / 16.764 x 12.0 Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 3.35 / 16.764 x 8.5 Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft. DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 25 GRAPHICS/VIDEO CONTROLLER (CONT.) 1DMS-59 to VGA or DMS-59 to DVI adaptors required. 256MB AMD RADEON™ HD 3450 GRAPHICS DUAL DVI OR VGA AND TV OUT MT DT SFF Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16 GPU core clock 600Mhz Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 500Mhz Maximum power consumption 22W Overlay Planes Yes Maximum Color Depth 32-bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85Hz Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support D3D and OpenGL Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 1920x1440/32bpp @ 75Hz Min : 640x480/8bpp @ 60Hz External connectors DMS-591 and S-video Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 4.7 / 16.764 x 12.0 Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 3.35 / 16.764 x 8.5 Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft. 256MB NVIDIA GEFORCE 9300 GE MT DT SFF Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16 GPU core clock 540Mhz Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 500Mhz Maximum power consumption 25W Overlay Planes Yes Maximum Color Depth 32-bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85Hz Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support D3D and OpenGL Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 1920x1440/32bpp @ 75Hz Min : 640x480/8bpp @ 60Hz External connectors DMS-591 and S-video Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 4.7 / 16.764 x 12.0 Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 3.35 / 16.764 x 8.5 Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft. 1DMS-59 to VGA or DMS-59 to DVI adaptors required. DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 26 GRAPHICS/VIDEO CONTROLLER (CONT.) 256MB AMD RADEON™ HD 3470 GRAPHICS W/ DUAL DP MT DT SFF Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16 GPU core clock 750Mhz Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 500Mhz Maximum power consumption 18W Overlay Planes Yes Maximum Color Depth 32-bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85Hz Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support D3D and OpenGL Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 1920x1440/32bpp @ 75Hz Min : 640x480/8bpp @ 60Hz External connectors 2 Display Port Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 4.7 / 16.764 x 12.0 Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 4.7 / 16.764 x 12.0 Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft. 512MB NVIDIA QUADRO NVS 420 MT DT SFF Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16 GPU core clock 550Mhz Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 512MB, 700Mhz Maximum power consumption 40W Overlay Planes Yes Maximum Color Depth 32-bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 75Hz Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 2560x1600 @ 60Hz (Digital) Max : 1920x1200 @ 60Hz (Analog) External connectors VHDCI to Quad DisplayPort VHDCI to Quad single-link DVI-D Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 2.731 / 16.764 x 6.936 Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 2.731 / 16.764 x 6.936 Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft. DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 27 HARD DRIVES1 3.5” 160GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 160,041,885,696 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 8 MB Average Seek Time 8.5 ms Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 312,581,808 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 5 0C to 600C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400C to 650C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft 3.5” 250GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 250,059,350,016 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 8 MB Average Seek Time 8.5 ms Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 488,397,168 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A) DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 28 HARD DRIVES (CONT.) 3.5” 250GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD (CONT.) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 5 0C to 600C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400C to 650C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft 3.5” 320GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 320,072,933,376 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 8.5 ms Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 625,142,448 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 5 0C to 600C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400C to 650C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 29 HARD DRIVES (CONT.) 3.5” 500GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 500,107,862,016 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 8.5 ms Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 976,773,168 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 5 0C to 600C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400C to 650C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 30 HARD DRIVES (CONT.) 3.5” 1TB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 1,000,204,886,016 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 32 MB Average Seek Time 8.5 ms Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 1,953,525,168 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 5 0C to 600C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400C to 650C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 31 HARD DRIVES (CONT.) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 5 0C to 600C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400C to 650C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft 3.5” 80GB SATA 10000 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 80,026,361,856 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 (includes sled) Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 4.6 ms (average read) Rotational Speed 10,000 rpm Logical Blocks 156,301,488 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 7W, Active 10W DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A) DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 32 HARD DRIVES (CONT.) 3.5” 160GB SATA 10000 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 160,041,885,696 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 (includes sled) Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 4.6 ms (average read) Rotational Speed 10,000 rpm Logical Blocks 312,581,808 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 7W, Active 10W DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 5 0C to 600C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400C to 650C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 33 HARD DRIVES (CONT.) 2.5” 160GB FULL DISK ENCRYPTION SATA HDD Capacity (bytes) 160,041,885,696 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 (includes sled) Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 8 MB Average Seek Time 8.5 ms Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 312,581,808 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 1.0W, Active 3.25W DC Current 5V (.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 5 0C to 600C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400C to 650C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft 1 For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes ; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less. DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 34 HARD DRIVES (CONT.) 2.5” 250GB FIPS FULL DISK ENCRYPTION SATA HDD Capacity (bytes) 250,059,350,016 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 (includes sled) Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 8.5 ms Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 488,397,168 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 1.0W, Active 3.25W DC Current 5V (.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 5 0C to 600C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400C to 650C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft 1 For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes ; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less. DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 35 HARD DRIVES (CONT.) 1 For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes ; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less. Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 0°C to 70°C Relative Humidity Range 10 to 90% Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29°C Altitude Range -200 to 5,000 m Op Shock (@0.5ms) 1,500G Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -55°C to 95°C Relative Humidity Range 5 to 95% Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38°C Altitude Range -200 to 10,600 m 2.5” 64GB1 SATA SOLID STATE DRIVE Capacity (bytes) 64,023,257,088 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 3.94 x 2.75 x 0.374 Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s MTBF 1M hours Average Seek Time n/a Performance: Sequential Read/ Write 220/200 (MB/s) Performance: SYSmark ‘07 Overall Score 156 Logical Blocks 125,045,424 Power Source DC Power Consumption (Max) Idle 0.7W, Active 1.25W DC Current 5V (0.8A) DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 36 HARD DRIVES (CONT.) 1 For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes ; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less. Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 0°C to 70°C Relative Humidity Range 10 to 90% Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29°C Altitude Range -200 to 5,000 m Op Shock (@0.5ms) 1,500G Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -55°C to 95°C Relative Humidity Range 5 to 95% Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38°C Altitude Range -200 to 10,600 m 2.5” 128GB1 SATA SOLID STATE DRIVE Capacity (bytes) 128,035,676,160 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 3.94 x 2.75 x 0.374 Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s MTBF 1M hours Average Seek Time n/a Performance: Sequential Read/ Write 220/200 (MB/s) Performance: SYSmark ‘07 Overall Score 156 Logical Blocks 250,069,680 Power Source DC Power Consumption (Max) Idle 0.205W, Active 0.435W DC Current 5V (0.8A) DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 37 HARD DRIVES (CONT.) 1 For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes ; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less. 2.5” 160GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 160,144,285,696 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) Approximately (3.93 x 2.75 x 0.374 inches) Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 12 ms (Read) Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 312,581,808 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 1.0W, Active 3.25W DC Current 5V (.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 5 0C to 600C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400C to 650C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 38 HARD DRIVES (CONT.) 1 For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes ; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less. 2.5” 250GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 250,059,350,016 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) Approximately (3.93 x 2.75 x 0.374 inches) Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 12 ms (Read) Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 488,397,168 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 1.0W, Active 3.25W DC Current 5V (.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 5 0C to 600C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400C to 650C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 39 HARD DRIVES (CONT.) 1 For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes ; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less. 2.5” 320GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 320,072,933,376 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) Approximately (3.93 x 2.75 x 0.374 inches) Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 12 ms (Read) Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 625,142,448 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 1.0W, Active 3.25W DC Current 5V (.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 5 0C to 600C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400C to 650C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 40 OPTICAL DRIVES DVD +/- RW1 MT DT SFF USFF External Dimensions inches/centimeters (Without Bezel – W x H x D) 148.2mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 148.2mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 128.0 mm (5.04)/ 12.7mm (0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in) 128.0 mm (5.04)/ 12.7mm (0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in) Weight (max) pounds/ kilograms 800g 800g 170g 170g Interface type and speed SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s Disc Capacity Standard Standard Standard Standard Internal buffer size supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent Access Times (typical) supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent Maximum Data Transfer Rates Writes 16x DVD/48x CD 16x DVD/48x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD 8x DVD / 24x CD Reads 16x DVD/48x CD 16x DVD/48x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD Power Source DC Power Requirements 12V, 5V 12V, 5V 5V 5V DC Current 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 1000mA 1000mA Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29C 29C 29C 29C Altitude Range -200 to 3048 -200 to 3048 -200 to 3048 -200 to 3048 Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C Relative Humidity Range 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38C 38C 38C 38C Altitude Range -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m 1 Discs burned with this drive may not be compatible with some existing drives and players; using DVD+R media provides maximum compatibility. DVD-ROM MT DT SFF USFF External Dimensions inches/centimeters (Without Bezel – W x H x D) 148.2mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 148.2mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 128.0 mm (5.04)/ 12.7mm (0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in) 128.0 mm (5.04)/ 12.7mm (0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in) Weight (max) pounds/ kilograms 750g 750g 165g 165g Interface type and speed SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s Disc Capacity Standard Standard Standard Standard Internal buffer size supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent Access Times (typical) supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent Maximum Data Transfer Rates Writes N/A N/A N/A N/A Reads 16x DVD/48x CD 16x DVD/48x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 41 OPTICAL DRIVES (CONT.) DVD-ROM (CONT.) MT DT SFF USFF Power Source DC Power Requirements 12V, 5V 12V, 5V 5V 5V DC Current 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 800mA 800mA Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29C 29C 29C 29C Altitude Range -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C Relative Humidity Range 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38C 38C 38C 38C Altitude Range -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m COMBO DVD/ CDRW MT DT SFF USFF External Dimensions inches/centimeters (Without Bezel – W x H x D) 148.2mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 148.2mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 128.0 mm (5.04)/ 12.7mm (0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in) 128.0 mm (5.04)/ 12.7mm (0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in) Weight (max) pounds/ kilograms 750g 750g 165g 165g Interface type and speed SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s Disc Capacity Standard Standard Standard Standard Internal buffer size supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent Access Times (typical) supplier dependent supplier dependent c supplier dependent Maximum Data Transfer Rates Writes 48x CD 48x CD 24x CD 24x CD Reads 16x DVD/48x CD 16x DVD/48x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD Power Source DC Power Requirements 12V, 5V 12V, 5V 5V 5V DC Current 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 900mA 900mA Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29C 29C 29C 29C Altitude Range -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C Relative Humidity Range 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38C 38C 38C 38C Altitude Range -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 42 OPTICAL DRIVES (CONT.) BLU-RAY WRITER MT DT SFF USFF External Dimensions inches/centimeters (Without Bezel – W x H x D) 148.2mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 148.2mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 128.0 mm (5.04in)/ 12.7mm (0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in) 128.0 mm (5.04in)/ 12.7mm (0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in) Weight (max) pounds/ kilograms 750g 750g 165g 165g Interface type and speed SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s Disc Capacity Standard Standard Standard Standard Internal buffer size supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent Access Times (typical) supplier dependent supplier dependent c supplier dependent Maximum Data Transfer Rates Writes 6X BD/16x DVD/40x CD 6x BD/16x DVD/40x CD 6X BD/8x DVD/24x CD 6X BD/8x DVD/24x CD Reads 8X BD/16x DVD/40x CD 8x BD/16x DVD/40x CD 6X BD/8x DVD/ 24x CD 6X BD/8x DVD/ 24x CD Power Source DC Power Requirements 12V, 5V 12V, 5V 5V 5V DC Current 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 900mA 900mA Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29C 29C 29C 29C Altitude Range -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C Relative Humidity Range 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38C 38C 38C 38C Altitude Range -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 43 BIOS DEFAULTS Drives Diskette drive: USB SATA Operation; RAID On SMART Reporting: Disable SATA-0: Enable SATA-1: Enable External SATA: Enable System Configuration Integrated NIC: Enable USB Controller: Enable Parallel Port: PS/2 Parallel Port Address: 378h Serial Port #1: Auto Serial Port #2: Auto Front USB: Enable Rear Quad USB: Enable Rear Dual USB: Enable PCI Slots: Enable Audio: Enable Video Primary Video: Auto Performance Multiple CPU Core: Enable Intel® SpeedStep™: Disable, unless the customer purchased a SpeedStep™ capable processor. C States Control: Disable Limit CPUID Value: Disable HDD Acoustic Mode: Bypass Virtualization Support Virtualization: Disable VT for Direct I/O: Disable Security Administrator Password: Not set System Password: Not set Password Changes: Enable TPM Security: Disable CPU XD Support: Enable Computrace®: Deactivate SATA-0 Password: Not set DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 44 BIOS DEFAULTS (CONT.) Power Management AC Recovery: Power Off Auto On Time: Disable Low Power Mode: Disable Remote Wake Up: Disable Suspend Mode: S3 Fan Control Override: Disable Maintenance Service Tag: Set by the factory Asset Tag: Optional User Entry SERR Message: Enable Post Behavior Fast Boot: Enable Numlock LED: Enable POST HotKeys: Enable Keyboard Errors: Enable MEBx HotKey Enable DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 45 CHASSIS ENCLOSURE & VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS ENCLOSURE VENTILATION If your enclosure has doors, they need to be of a type that allows at least 30% airflow through the enclosure (front and back). ENCLOSURE MINIMUM CLEARANCE Leave a 10.2 cm (4 in.) minimum clearance on all vented sides of the computer to permit the airflow required for proper ventilation. RECOMMENDED ENCLOSURE Do not install your computer in an enclosure that does not allow airflow. This restricts the airflow and impacts your computer’s performance, possibly causing it to overheat. OPEN DESK MINIMUM CLEARANCE If your computer is installed in a corner, on a desk, or under a desk, leave at least 5.1 cm (2 in.) clearance from the back of the computer to the wall to permit the airflow required for proper ventilation. REGULATORY COMPLIANCE AND ENVIRONMENTAL Product related conformity assessment and regulatory authorizations including Product Safety, Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Ergonomics, and Communication Devices relevant to this product may be viewed at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance. The Regulatory Datasheet for this product is located at http://www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Details of Dell's environmental stewardship program to conserve product energy consumption, reduce or eliminate materials for disposal, prolong product life span and provide effective and convenient equipment recovery solutions may be viewed at www.dell.com/environment. Product related conformity assessment, regulatory authorizations, and information encompassing Environmental, Energy Consumption, Noise Emissions, Product Materials Information, Packaging, Batteries, and Recycling relevant to this product may be viewed by clicking the Design for Environment link on the webpage. DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 46 ACOUSTIC NOISE EMISSION INFORMATION Component Typical Configuration High-end Configuration CPU E8500 Q9550 Memory 1GB DDR3 1066 MHz (x1) 2GB DDR3 1066 MHz (x2) HDD (#, capacity) 160 GB 7200 RPM SATA2 250 GB 7200 RPM SATA2 (x2) RMSD DVDRW/DVD dual config DVDRW/DVD dual config Graphics Adapter GeForce 9300 GE Radeon HD 3470 OPTIPLEX 780 MT The Declared Noise Emission in accordance with ISO 9296 for the Dell OptiPlex 780 MT is as follows: (all values LWAd expressed in bels; 1 bel=10 decibels, re 10-12 Watts) Operating Mode Typical Configuration Declared Sound Power (LWAd) High-end Configuration Declared Sound Power (LWAd) Idle 3.8 N/A HDD Operating 3.8 N/A 90% CPU 3.9 N/A ODD Operating 5.1 N/A The Declared A-weighted Sound Pressure Level in decibels (re 2x10-5 Pa), at Operator, Bystander, and Desk Side Positions are measured in accordance with ISO 7779 7.6.1, 7.6.2, and C.15.2 and declared in accordance with ISO 9296 for this product is as follows1 : Operating Mode Typical Configuration Declared Sound Pressure (LpA) High-end Configuration Declared Sound Pressure (LpA) Table-Top Floor-Standing Table-Top Floor- Standing Operator Position (LpA) Bystander Position (LpA) Operator Position (LpA) Bystander Position (LpA) Operator Position (LpA) Bystander Position (LpA) Operator Position (LpA) Bystander Position (LpA) Idle 28.2 23.2 22.1 20.6 28.0 23.2 21.4 20.5 HDD Operating 28.1 23.1 22.5 20.9 28.0 23.0 21.4 20.4 90% CPU 30.8 26.1 23.6 22.0 32.2 26.8 27.6 26.3 ODD Operating 33.6 42.1 35.6 34.3 33.3 1 All tests are conducted according to ISO 7779 and declared according to ISO 9296 except 90% CPU. For this mode, the system CPU was stressed at 90% utilization with no other peripheral device actively seeking. This test mode is not specified in ISO 7779, but was measured using the same microphone distances and measurement techniques defined for the other reported operating modes. 2 Declared Sound Power rounded to nearest tenth of a bel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.2 DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 47 ACOUSTIC NOISE EMISSION INFORMATION OPTIPLEX 780 DT The Declared Noise Emission in accordance with ISO 9296 for the Dell OptiPlex 780 DT is as follows: (all values LWAd expressed in bels; 1 bel=10 decibels, re 10-12 Watts) The Declared A-weighted Sound Pressure Level in decibels (re 2x10-5 Pa), at Operator, Bystander, and Desk Side Positions are measured in accordance with ISO 7779 7.6.1, 7.6.2, and C.15.2 and declared in accordance with ISO 9296 for this product is as follows1 : 1 All tests are conducted according to ISO 7779 and declared according to ISO 9296 except 90% CPU. For this mode, the system CPU was stressed at 90% utilization with no other peripheral device actively seeking. This test mode is not specified in ISO 7779, but was measured using the same microphone distances and measurement techniques defined for the other reported operating modes. 2 Declared Sound Power rounded to nearest tenth of a bel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.2 Operating Mode Typical Configuration Declared Sound Power (LWAd) High-end Configuration Declared Sound Power (LWAd) Idle 3.7 N/A HDD Operating 3.7 N/A 90% CPU 4.1 N/A ODD Operating 5.1 N/A Operating Mode Typical Configuration Declared Sound Pressure (LpA) High-end Configuration Declared Sound Pressure (LpA) Table-Top Floor-Standing Table-Top Floor- Standing Operator Position (LpA) Bystander Position (LpA) Operator Position (LpA) Bystander Position (LpA) Operator Position (LpA) Bystander Position (LpA) Operator Position (LpA) Bystander Position (LpA) Idle 26.1 22.1 20.7 20.1 26.1 22.0 20.0 19.0 HDD Operating 25.9 22.0 20.8 19.9 26.0 21.9 20.2 19.1 90% CPU 32.4 26.4 24.3 23.4 35.0 29.0 26.5 25.0 ODD Operating 34.3 42.6 37.2 35.5 33.8 Component Typical Configuration High-end Configuration CPU E8500 Q9550 Memory 1GB DDR3 1066 MHz (x1) 2GB DDR3 1066 MHz (x2) HDD (#, capacity) 160 GB 7200 RPM SATA2 250 GB 7200 RPM SATA2 (x2) RMSD DVDRW/DVD dual config DVDRW/DVD dual config Graphics Adapter GeForce 9300 GE Radeon HD 3470 DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 48 ACOUSTIC NOISE EMISSION INFORMATION OPTIPLEX 780 SFF The Declared Noise Emission in accordance with ISO 9296 for the Dell OptiPlex 780 SFF is as follows: (all values LWAd expressed in bels; 1 bel=10 decibels, re 10-12 Watts) The Declared A-weighted Sound Pressure Level in decibels (re 2x10-5 Pa), at Operator, Bystander, and Desk Side Positions are measured in accordance with ISO 7779 7.6.1, 7.6.2, and C.15.2 and declared in accordance with ISO 9296 for this product is as follows1 : 1 All tests are conducted according to ISO 7779 and declared according to ISO 9296 except 90% CPU. For this mode, the system CPU was stressed at 90% utilization with no other peripheral device actively seeking. This test mode is not specified in ISO 7779, but was measured using the same microphone distances and measurement techniques defined for the other reported operating modes. 2 Declared Sound Power rounded to nearest tenth of a bel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.2 Operating Mode Typical Configuration Declared Sound Power (LWAd) High-end Configuration Declared Sound Power (LWAd) Idle 3.8 N/A HDD Operating 3.7 N/A 90% CPU 4.1 N/A ODD Operating 4.8 N/A Operating Mode Typical Configuration Declared Sound Pressure (LpA) High-end Configuration Declared Sound Pressure (LpA) Table-Top Floor-Standing Table-Top Floor- Standing Operator Position (LpA) Bystander Position (LpA) Operator Position (LpA) Bystander Position (LpA) Operator Position (LpA) Bystander Position (LpA) Operator Position (LpA) Bystander Position (LpA) Idle 28.0 24.1 20.8 20.2 31.0 26.5 23.0 22.2 HDD Operating 28.2 24.1 20.6 20.2 30.7 25.9 23.0 22.2 90% CPU 33.0 28.2 24.1 23.6 42.1 35.0 31.3 29.4 ODD Operating Component Typical Configuration High-end Configuration CPU E8500 Q9550 Memory 1GB DDR3 1066 MHz (x1) 2GB DDR3 1066 MHz (x2) HDD (#, capacity) 160 GB 7200 RPM SATA2 250 GB 7200 RPM SATA2 (x2) RMSD DVDRW/DVD dual config DVDRW/DVD dual config Graphics Adapter GeForce 9300 GE Radeon HD 3470 DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 49 ACOUSTIC NOISE EMISSION INFORMATION OPTIPLEX 780 USFF The Declared Noise Emission in accordance with ISO 9296 for the Dell Optiplex 780 USFF is as follows: (all values LWAd expressed in bels; 1 bel=10 decibels, re 10-12 Watts) The Declared A-weighted Sound Pressure Level in decibels (re 2x10-5 Pa), at Operator, Bystander, and Desk Side Positions are measured in accordance with ISO 7779 7.6.1, 7.6.2, and C.15.2 and declared in accordance with ISO 9296 for this product is as follows1 : 1 All tests are conducted according to ISO 7779 and declared according to ISO 9296 except 90% CPU. For this mode, the system CPU was stressed at 90% utilization with no other peripheral device actively seeking. This test mode is not specified in ISO 7779, but was measured using the same microphone distances and measurement techniques defined for the other reported operating modes. 2 Declared Sound Power rounded to nearest tenth of a bel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.2 Operating Mode Typical Configuration Declared Sound Power (LWAd) Idle 3.9 HDD Operating 3.9 90% CPU 4.4 ODD Operating 4.8 Component Typical Configuration CPU E8500 Memory 2GB DDR3 1066 MHz (x1) HDD (#, capacity) 160 GB 7200 RPM SATA2 RMSD DVDRW Graphics Adapter Integrated USER MANUAL ENG This user manual includes detailed usage instructions for your camera. Please read this manual thoroughly. 1 Copyright information ‡ Camera specifications or contents of this manual may be changed without prior notice due to upgrade of camera functions. ‡ You are not allowed to reuse or distribute any part of this manual without prior permission. ‡ We recommend using your camera within the country where you purchase it. ‡ Use this camera responsibly and adhere to all laws and regulations concerning its use. PlanetFirst represents Samsung Electronics' commitment to sustainable development and social responsibility through eco-driven business and management activities. ‡ Microsoft Windows and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. ‡ Mac and Apple App Store are registered trademarks of the Apple Corporation. ‡ Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google, Inc. ‡ Adobe, the Adobe logo, Photoshop, and Lightroom are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. ‡ microSD™, microSDHC™, and microSDXC™ are registered trademarks of the SD Association. ‡ HDMI, the HDMI logo, and the term "High Definition Multimedia Interface" are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. ‡ Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. ‡ Trademarks and trade names used in this manual are the property of their respective owners. 2 Health and safety information Prevent damage to subjects’ eyesight. Do not use the flash in close proximity (closer than 1 m/3 ft) to people or animals. If you use the flash too close to your subject’s eyes, this can cause temporary or permanent eyesight damage. Keep your camera away from small children and pets. Keep your camera and all accessories out of the reach of small children and animals. Small parts may cause choking or serious injury if swallowed. Moving parts and accessories may present physical dangers as well. Do not expose the camera to direct sunlight or high temperatures for an extended period of time. Prolonged exposure to sunlight or extreme temperatures can cause permanent damage to your camera’s internal components. Avoid covering the camera or charger with blankets or clothes. The camera may overheat, which may distort the camera or cause a fire. Do not handle the power supply cord or the charger during a thunderstorm. This may result in an electric shock. Always comply with the following precautions and usage tips to avoid dangerous situations and ensure peak performance of your camera. Warning—situations that could cause injury to yourself or others Do not disassemble or attempt to repair your camera. You can damage the camera and expose yourself to the risk of an electric shock. Do not use your camera near flammable or explosive gases and liquids. This may cause a fire or explosion. Do not insert flammable materials into the camera or store these materials near the camera. This may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not handle your camera with wet hands. This may result in an electric shock. 3 Health and safety information If liquid or foreign objects enter your camera, immediately disconnect all power sources, such as the battery or charger, and then contact a Samsung service center. Comply with any regulations that restrict the use of a camera in a certain area. ‡ Avoid interference with other electronic devices. ‡ Turn off the camera when in an aircraft. Your camera can cause interference with aircraft equipment. Follow all airline regulations and turn off your camera when directed by airline personnel. ‡ Turn off the camera near medical equipment. Your camera can interfere with medical equipment in hospitals or health care facilities. Follow all regulations, posted warnings, and directions from medical personnel. Avoid interference with pacemakers. Maintain a safe distance between this camera and all pacemakers to avoid potential interference, as recommended by the manufacturer and research groups. If you have any reason to suspect that your camera is interfering with a pacemaker or other medical device, turn off the camera immediately and contact the manufacturer of the pacemaker or medical device for guidance. Caution—situations that could cause damage to your camera or other equipment Remove the batteries from your camera when storing it for an extended period of time. Installed batteries may leak or corrode over time and cause serious damage to your camera. Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommended, Lithium-ion replacement batteries. Do not damage or heat the battery. Inauthentic, damaged, or heated batteries may cause a fire or personal injury. Use only Samsung-approved batteries, chargers, cables, and accessories. ‡ Using unauthorized batteries, chargers, cables, or accessories can cause batteries to explode, damage your camera, or cause injury. ‡ Samsung is not responsible for damage or injuries caused by unapproved batteries, chargers, cables, or accessories. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Misusing the battery may cause a fire or electric shock. 4 Health and safety information Do not touch the flash while it fires. The flash is very hot when fired and may burn your skin. When you use the AC charger, turn off the camera before you disconnect the power to the AC charger. Failing to do so may result in fire or electric shock. Disconnect the charger from the wall socket when not in use. Failing to do so may result in fire or electric shock. Do not use a damaged power supply cord, plug, or loose outlet when you charge batteries. This may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not allow the AC charger to come in contact with the +/- terminals on the battery. This may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not drop or subject the camera to strong impacts. Doing so may damage the screen or external or internal components. Exercise caution when you connect cables and install batteries and memory cards. If you force the connectors, improperly connect cables, or improperly install batteries and memory cards, you can damage ports, connectors, and accessories. Keep cards with magnetic strips away from the camera case. Information stored on the card may be damaged or erased. Never use a damaged battery or memory card. This may result in electric shock or camera malfunction or cause a fire. Do not place the camera in or near magnetic fields. Doing so may cause the camera to malfunction. Do not use the camera if the screen is damaged. If the glass or acrylic parts are broken, visit a Samsung service center to have the camera repaired. 5 Health and safety information Check that the camera is operating properly before use. The manufacturer takes no responsibility for any loss of files or damage that may result from camera malfunction or improper use. You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight. This may discolor the image sensor or cause it to malfunction. If the camera overheats, remove the battery and allow it to cool down. ‡ Prolonged usage of the camera may overheat the battery and raise the internal temperature of the camera. If the camera stops operating, remove the battery and allow it to cool down. ‡ High internal temperatures may result in noise in your photos. This is normal and does not affect your camera’s overall performance. Avoid interference with other electronic devices. Your camera emits radio frequency (RF) signals that may interfere with unshielded or improperly shielded electronic equipment, such as pacemakers, hearing aids, medical devices, and other electronic devices in homes or vehicles. Consult the manufacturers of your electronic devices to solve any interference problems you experience. To prevent unwanted interference, use only Samsung-approved devices or accessories. Use your camera in the normal position. Avoid contact with your camera’s internal antenna. Data transference and your responsibilities ‡ Data transferred via WLAN could be leaked, so avoid transferring sensitive data in public areas or on open networks. ‡ The camera manufacturer is not liable for any data transfers that infringe on copyrights, trademarks, intellectual property laws, or public decency ordinances. 6 Icons used in this manual Icon Function Additional information Safety warnings and precautions [ ] Camera buttons. For example, [Shutter] represents the shutter button. ( ) Page number of related information ĺ The order of options or menus you must select to perform a step; for example: Select b ĺ Quality (represents select b, and then Quality). * Annotation This manual is explained based on NX-M lenses. When you attach NX lenses using the mount adapter, some shooting options or functions may not be supported. 7 Contents Chapter 1 My Camera Getting started ............................................................................................ 27 Unpacking.................................................................................................................... 27 Camera layout .............................................................................................. 28 Using the DIRECT LINK button ............................................................................. 30 Setting the DIRECT LINK button ............................................................................. 30 Using the display ....................................................................................................... 31 Using the Self shot mode.......................................................................................... 31 Inserting the battery and memory card ................................................. 32 Removing the battery and memory card ......................................................... 34 Using the memory card adapter .......................................................................... 34 Charging the battery and turning on your camera .............................. 35 Charging the battery................................................................................................ 35 Turning on your camera ......................................................................................... 35 Performing the initial setup ...................................................................... 36 Selecting functions (options) ................................................................... 38 Selecting with buttons ............................................................................................ 38 Selecting by touch .................................................................................................... 38 Using m ................................................................................................................. 39 E.g. Selecting the photo size in P mode .............................................................. 39 Using the Smart panel ............................................................................................. 40 E.g. Adjust the exposure value in P mode .......................................................... 40 Selecting a mode ......................................................................................... 41 Accessing a Mode screen ....................................................................................... 41 Mode description ...................................................................................................... 41 Tips Concepts in Photography Shooting postures....................................................................................... 13 Holding the camera ..................................................................................................... 13 Standing photography ............................................................................................... 14 Crouching photography ............................................................................................ 14 Aperture ........................................................................................................ 15 Aperture value and the depth of field .................................................................. 16 Shutter speed ............................................................................................... 17 ISO sensitivity .............................................................................................. 18 How the aperture setting, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity control exposure ......................................................................................... 19 Correlation between focal length, angle, and perspective ................ 20 Depth of field ............................................................................................... 20 What controls out-of-focus effects? ....................................................................... 21 DOF preview ................................................................................................................... 22 Composition ................................................................................................. 23 Rule of Thirds .................................................................................................................. 23 Photos with two subjects .......................................................................................... 24 Flash ............................................................................................................... 25 Flash guide number ..................................................................................................... 25 8 Contents Display icons ................................................................................................ 43 In Shooting mode ..................................................................................................... 43 Capturing photos ........................................................................................................ 43 Recording videos ......................................................................................................... 44 About the level gauge ............................................................................................... 44 In Playback mode ...................................................................................................... 45 Viewing photos ............................................................................................................ 45 Playing videos ............................................................................................................... 45 Changing the information displayed ................................................................. 46 Lenses ............................................................................................................ 47 Lens layout ................................................................................................................... 47 Locking or unlocking the lens ................................................................................. 48 Lens markings ............................................................................................................ 49 Accessories ................................................................................................... 50 External flash layout ................................................................................................. 50 Connecting the external flash ................................................................................. 51 Mount adapter layout .............................................................................................. 52 Attaching the mount adapter ................................................................................. 52 Removing the mount adapter ................................................................................ 53 Shooting modes .......................................................................................... 54 Auto mode ................................................................................................................... 54 Smart mode................................................................................................................. 56 Using the Beauty Face mode ................................................................................... 56 Using the Best Face mode ........................................................................................ 57 Capturing panoramic photos .................................................................................. 58 Program mode ........................................................................................................... 59 Program Shift ................................................................................................................ 60 Minimum shutter speed ............................................................................................ 60 Aperture Priority mode ........................................................................................... 61 Shutter Priority mode .............................................................................................. 62 Manual mode.............................................................................................................. 63 Using Framing Mode .................................................................................................. 63 Using the Bulb function ............................................................................................ 64 Recording a video ..................................................................................................... 65 Available functions by shooting mode ............................................................. 66 Chapter 2 Shooting Functions Size and Resolution .................................................................................... 69 Photo size ..................................................................................................................... 69 Quality ........................................................................................................................... 70 ISO sensitivity .............................................................................................. 71 White Balance .............................................................................................. 72 Customizing preset White Balance options ....................................................... 73 Picture Wizard (photo styles) .................................................................... 74 9 Contents AF mode ........................................................................................................ 75 Single AF ....................................................................................................................... 75 Continuous AF ............................................................................................................ 76 Manual focus ............................................................................................................... 76 AF area ........................................................................................................... 77 Selection AF ................................................................................................................ 77 Multi AF ......................................................................................................................... 78 Face Detection ............................................................................................. 79 Normal........................................................................................................................... 79 Smile Shot .................................................................................................................... 80 Wink Shot ..................................................................................................................... 80 Touch AF ........................................................................................................ 81 Touch AF ....................................................................................................................... 81 AF Point ......................................................................................................................... 81 Tracking AF .................................................................................................................. 81 One touch shot .......................................................................................................... 82 MF Assist ....................................................................................................... 83 Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) ............................................................. 84 Drive (shooting method) ........................................................................... 85 Single ............................................................................................................................. 85 Continuous Normal .................................................................................................. 86 Burst ............................................................................................................................... 86 Timer .............................................................................................................................. 87 Auto Exposure Bracketing (AE Bracket) ............................................................. 87 White Balance Bracketing (WB Bracket) ............................................................ 88 Picture Wizard Bracketing (P Wiz Bracket) ........................................................ 88 Depth Bracketing ..................................................................................................... 89 Flash ............................................................................................................... 90 Reducing the red-eye effect .................................................................................. 91 Adjusting the flash intensity ................................................................................. 91 Metering ........................................................................................................ 92 Multi ............................................................................................................................... 92 Center-weighted ....................................................................................................... 93 Spot ................................................................................................................................ 93 Measuring the exposure value of the focus area ........................................... 94 Dynamic Range ........................................................................................... 95 Smart Filter ................................................................................................... 96 Exposure compensation ............................................................................ 97 Exposure lock ............................................................................................... 98 Video functions ........................................................................................... 99 Movie size..................................................................................................................... 99 When Video Out is set to NTSC ............................................................................... 99 When Video Out is set to PAL .................................................................................. 99 Movie quality ........................................................................................................... 100 Multi Motion ............................................................................................................ 100 Fader ........................................................................................................................... 101 Voice ............................................................................................................................ 101 10 Contents Chapter 3 Playback/Editing Searching and managing files ................................................................ 103 Viewing photos ....................................................................................................... 103 Viewing image thumbnails ................................................................................. 103 Viewing files by category .................................................................................... 104 Viewing files as a folder ........................................................................................ 104 Protecting files ........................................................................................................ 105 Deleting files ............................................................................................................ 106 Deleting a single file ................................................................................................. 106 Deleting multiple files .............................................................................................. 106 Deleting all files .......................................................................................................... 106 Viewing photos .......................................................................................... 107 Enlarging a photo .................................................................................................. 107 Viewing a slide show ............................................................................................. 107 Auto rotating ........................................................................................................... 108 Playing videos ............................................................................................ 109 Scanning backward or forward ......................................................................... 109 Adjusting the brightness of a video ................................................................ 110 Adjusting the volume of a video ...................................................................... 110 Trimming a video during playback .................................................................. 111 Capturing an image during playback ............................................................. 111 Editing photos ........................................................................................... 112 Cropping a photo ................................................................................................... 112 Rotating a photo .................................................................................................... 113 Resizing photos....................................................................................................... 113 Adjusting your photos .......................................................................................... 114 Retouching faces .................................................................................................... 115 Applying Smart Filter effects .............................................................................. 116 Chapter 4 Wireless network Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings ............... 118 Connecting to a WLAN ......................................................................................... 118 Setting network options ......................................................................................... 119 Manually setting the IP address ........................................................................... 119 Using the login browser....................................................................................... 120 Network connection tips ..................................................................................... 121 Entering text ............................................................................................................ 122 Using the NFC Feature (Tag & Go) ......................................................... 123 Using NFC features in Shooting mode ........................................................... 123 Using NFC features in Playback mode (Photo Beam)................................ 123 Using NFC features in Wi-Fi mode .................................................................... 123 Saving files to a smart phone automatically ....................................... 124 Sending photos or videos to a smart phone ....................................... 126 11 Contents Chapter 5 Camera settings menu User settings ............................................................................................... 146 ISO Customizing ..................................................................................................... 146 ISO Expansion ............................................................................................................. 146 ISO Step ......................................................................................................................... 146 Auto ISO Range .......................................................................................................... 146 Noise Reduction ..................................................................................................... 147 Bracket Settings ...................................................................................................... 147 Color Space ............................................................................................................... 148 Distortion Correct .................................................................................................. 149 Touch Operation ..................................................................................................... 149 iFn Customizing ...................................................................................................... 149 User Display .............................................................................................................. 150 Key Mapping ............................................................................................................ 151 Live view NFC........................................................................................................... 151 MobileLink/NFC Image Size .............................................................................. 151 Grid Line .................................................................................................................... 151 AF Lamp ..................................................................................................................... 152 Auto Self-Shot ......................................................................................................... 152 Lens Button Speed Settings ............................................................................... 152 Setting ......................................................................................................... 153 Sending photos or videos to multiple smart phones ........................ 128 Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release .............................. 130 Using the Baby Monitor ........................................................................... 132 Adjusting the noise level for alarm activation ............................................. 133 Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos ..................................... 134 Installing the program for Auto Backup on your PC.................................. 134 Sending photos or videos to a PC .................................................................... 134 Sending photos or videos via email ...................................................... 136 Changing email settings ...................................................................................... 136 Storing your information ........................................................................................ 136 Setting an email password ..................................................................................... 137 Changing the email password .............................................................................. 138 Sending photos or videos via email ................................................................ 138 Using photo or video sharing services ................................................. 140 Accessing a sharing service ................................................................................ 140 Uploading photos or videos............................................................................... 141 Using Samsung Link to send files .......................................................... 142 Uploading photos to an online storage ......................................................... 142 Viewing photos or videos on devices that support Samsung Link ...... 143 12 Contents Using or storing the camera ............................................................................... 167 Inappropriate places to use or store the camera ........................................... 167 Using on beaches or shores ................................................................................... 167 Storing for extended period of time ................................................................... 167 Using the camera with caution in humid environments ............................ 168 Other cautions ............................................................................................................ 168 About memory card .............................................................................................. 169 Supported memory card ........................................................................................ 169 Memory card capacity ............................................................................................. 170 Cautions when using memory cards .................................................................. 171 About the battery .................................................................................................. 172 Battery specifications ............................................................................................... 172 Battery life .................................................................................................................... 174 Low battery message ............................................................................................... 174 Notes about using the battery .............................................................................. 174 Cautions about using the battery ........................................................................ 175 Notes about charging the battery ....................................................................... 175 Notes about charging with a computer connected...................................... 176 Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care ............................ 176 Updating the firmware ............................................................................. 177 Before contacting a service center ........................................................ 178 Camera specifications .............................................................................. 181 Glossary ....................................................................................................... 186 Optional accessories ................................................................................. 192 Index ............................................................................................................ 193 FCC notice ................................................................................................... 196 Chapter 6 Connecting to external devices Viewing files on an HDTV ........................................................................ 157 Transferring files to your computer ....................................................... 158 Transferring files to your Windows OS computer ....................................... 158 Connecting the camera as a removable disk ................................................... 158 Disconnecting the camera (for Windows XP) .................................................. 159 Transferring files to your Mac OS ...................................................................... 159 Using programs on a PC........................................................................... 161 Installing programs from the provided CD ................................................... 161 Available programs when using i-Launcher .................................................... 161 Using i-Launcher .................................................................................................... 162 Requirements for Windows OS ............................................................................. 162 Requirements for Mac OS ....................................................................................... 162 Opening i-Launcher .................................................................................................. 162 Downloading the firmware .................................................................................... 163 Downloading the PC Auto Backup program ................................................... 163 Installing Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ........................................................ 163 Using Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ............................................................... 163 Chapter 7 Appendix Error messages .......................................................................................... 165 Maintaining the camera........................................................................... 166 Cleaning the camera ............................................................................................. 166 Camera lens and display ......................................................................................... 166 Image sensor ............................................................................................................... 166 Camera body ............................................................................................................... 166 13 Concepts in Photography Holding the camera Hold the camera and place your index finger on the shutter button. For larger lenses, place your left hand under the lens for support. Shooting postures A correct posture for stabilizing the camera is necessary for taking a good photo. Even if you hold a camera correctly, the wrong posture can cause the camera to shake. Stand up straight and remain still to maintain a steady base for your camera. When shooting with a slow shutter speed, hold your breath to minimize body movement. 14 Concepts in Photography Standing photography Compose your shot, stand up straight with your feet shoulder-length apart, and keep your elbows pointed down. Crouching photography Compose your shot, crouch with one knee touching the ground, and keep a straight posture. 15 Concepts in Photography Aperture The aperture is one of the three factors that determine the exposure. The aperture housing contains thin, metal plates that open and close to let light through the aperture and into the camera. The size of the aperture is related to the amount of light: a larger aperture allows more light and a smaller aperture allows less light. Aperture sizes Minimum aperture Medium aperture Maximum aperture Aperture opened slightly Aperture opened wide The size of the aperture is represented by a value known as an "F-number." The f-number represents the focal length divided by the diameter of the lens. For example, if a lens with a 50 mm focal length has an f-number of F2, the diameter of the aperture is 25 mm. (50 mm/25 mm = F2) The smaller the f-number, the greater the size of the aperture. The opening in the aperture is described as the Exposure Value (EV). Increasing the Exposure Value (+1 EV) means the amount of light doubles. Decreasing the Exposure Value (-1 EV) means the amount of light halves. You can also use the exposure compensation feature to fine-tune the amount of light by subdividing exposure values into 1/2, 1/3 EV, and so on. +1 EV F1.4 F2 F2.8 F4 F5.6 F8 -1 EV Exposure Value Steps 16 Concepts in Photography Aperture value and the depth of field You can blur or sharpen the background of a photo by controlling the aperture. It is closely related to the depth of field (DOF), which can be expressed as small or large. A photo with a large DOF A photo with a small DOF The aperture housing contains several blades. These blades move together and control the amount of light passing through the center of the aperture. The number of blades also affects the shape of light when shooting night scenes. If an aperture has an even number of blades, light divides into an equal number of sections. If the number of blades is odd, the number of sections is double the number of blades. For example, an aperture with 8 blades divides light into 8 sections and an aperture with 7 blades into 14 sections. 7 blades 8 blades 17 Concepts in Photography Shutter speed Shutter speed refers to the amount of time it takes to open and close the shutter. It controls the amount of light which passes through the aperture before it reaches the image sensor. Usually, the shutter speed is manually adjustable. The measurement of the shutter speed is known as the "Exposure Value" (EV), which is marked in intervals of 1 s, 1/2 s, 1/4 s, 1/8 s, 1/15 s, 1/1,000 s, 1/2,000 s, and so on. Exposure +1 EV -1 EV 1 s 1/2 s 1/4 s 1/8 s 1/15 s 1/30 s Shutter speed Therefore, the faster the shutter speed, the less light will be let in. Likewise, the slower the shutter speed, the more light will be let in. The photos below illustrate that a slow shutter speed allows more time for light to enter the camera. This adds a motion blurring effect to moving objects. On the other hand, a fast shutter speed allows less time to let light in and the photo more easily freezes subjects in motion. 0.8 s 0.004 s 18 Concepts in Photography ISO sensitivity The exposure of an image is determined by the sensitivity of the camera. This sensitivity is based on international film standards, known as ISO standards. On digital cameras, this sensitivity rating is used to represent the sensitivity of the digital mechanism that captures the image. ISO sensitivity doubles as the number doubles. For example, an ISO 200 setting is capable of capturing images at twice the speed of an ISO 100 setting. However, higher ISO settings can result in "noise"—small specks, spots, and other phenomena in a photo that give the shot a noisy or dirty appearance. As a general rule, it is best to use a low ISO setting to prevent noise in your photos, unless you are shooting in darkened environments or at night. Changes in the quality and brightness according to ISO sensitivity Because a low ISO sensitivity means the camera will be less sensitive to light, you need more light to have an optimal exposure. When using a low ISO sensitivity, open the aperture more or reduce the shutter speed to allow more light to enter the camera. For example, on a sunny day when light is abundant, a low ISO sensitivity does not require a slow shutter speed. However, in a dark place or at night, a low ISO sensitivity will result in a blurry photo. Therefore, it is recommended to increase the ISO sensitivity by a moderate amount. A photo captured with a tripod and high ISO sensitivity A blurred photo with a low ISO sensitivity 19 Concepts in Photography How the aperture setting, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity control exposure The aperture setting, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity are closely interconnected in photography. The aperture setting controls the opening that regulates the light that enters the camera, while the shutter speed determines the length of time that light is allowed to enter. ISO sensitivity determines the speed at which the film reacts to light. Together, these three aspects are described as the triangle of exposure. A change in shutter speed, aperture value, or ISO sensitivity can be offset by adjustments to the others to maintain the amount of light. The results, however, change according to the settings. For example, shutter speed is useful in expressing movement, aperture can control the depth of field, and ISO sensitivity can control the graininess of a photo. Settings Results Aperture value Wide aperture = more light Narrow aperture = less light Wide = small depth of field Narrow = large depth of field Settings Results Shutter speed Fast speed = less light Slow speed = more light Fast = still Slow = blurry ISO sensitivity High sensitivity = more sensitive to light Low sensitivity = less sensitive to light High = more grainy Low = less grainy 20 Concepts in Photography Correlation between focal length, angle, and perspective Focal length, which is measured in millimeters, is the distance between the middle of the lens to its focal point. It affects the angle and perspective of captured images. A short focal length translates into a wide angle, which allows you to capture a wide shot. A long focal length translates into a narrow angle, which allows you to capture telephoto shots. 9 mm angle 27 mm angle Depth of field Portraits or still-life photos mostly acclaimed by people are the ones on which the background is out of focus so the subject looks pronounced. Depending on the focused areas, a photo can be blurred or sharpened. This is called 'a low DOF' or 'a high DOF'. The depth of field is the focused area around the subject. Therefore, a small DOF signifies that the focused area is narrow and a large DOF means the focused area is wide. A photo with a small DOF, which stresses the subject and makes the rest of it blurred, can be obtained by capturing a photo close to the subject or selecting a low aperture value. Conversely, a photo with a large DOF which shows all the elements on the photo sharply focused can be achieved by capturing a photo far from the subject or selecting a high aperture value. Small Depth of Field Large Depth of Field 21 Concepts in Photography What controls out-of-focus effects? DOF depends on aperture value The wider the aperture is (namely the lower the aperture value), the lower the DOF becomes. Under the condition where the focal length is equal, a low aperture value leads to a photo with a low DOF. 27 mm F3.5 27 mm F11 DOF depends on focal length The longer the focal length is, the lower the DOF gets. 9 mm angle 27 mm angle 22 Concepts in Photography DOF depends on the distance between the subject and the camera The shorter the distance between the subject and the camera is, the lower the DOF gets. Therefore, taking a photo close to a subject can result in a photo of low DOF. A photo captured far from the subject A photo captured close to the subject DOF preview You can press the Custom button to get an idea of what your shot will look like before shooting. The camera adjusts the aperture to the predefined settings and shows the results on the screen. Set the function of the Custom button to Optical Preview. (p. 151) 23 Concepts in Photography Composition It is fun to capture a photo of the beauty of world with a camera. No matter how the world is beautiful, however, a poor composition cannot capture the beauty of it. When it comes to composition, it is very important to prioritize subjects. Composition in photography means arranging objects in a photo. Usually, abiding by the rule of thirds leads to a good composition. Rule of Thirds To use the rule of thirds, divide the image into a 3x3 pattern of equal rectangles. To compose photos that best emphasize the subject, make sure the subject is located at one of the corners of the center rectangle. Using the rule of thirds will create photos with stable and compelling compositions. Below are a few examples. 24 Concepts in Photography Photos with two subjects If your subject is in one corner of the photo, it creates an unbalanced composition. You can stabilize the photo by capturing a second subject in the opposite corner to balance the weight of the photo. Subject 1 Subject 2 Subject 1 Subject 2 Unstable Stable When taking landscape photos, centering the horizon will create an unbalanced effect. Give more weight to the photo by moving the horizon up or down. Subject 1 Subject 2 Subject 1 Subject 2 Unstable Stable 25 Concepts in Photography Flash Light is one of the most important components in photography. It is not easy, however, to have an enough amount of light anytime and anywhere. Making use of a flash allows you to optimize light settings and create a variety of effects. Flash, also known as strobe or speed light, helps to create adequate exposure in low-light conditions. It is also useful in light-abundant situations. For example, flash can be used in compensating the exposure of a subject’s shadow or capturing clearly both the subject and the background in backlit conditions. Before correction After correction Flash guide number The model number of a flash refers to the flash’s power, and the maximum amount of light created is represented by a value known as a "guide number". The bigger the guide number, the more light is emitted from the flash. The guide number is achieved by multiplying the distance from the flash to the subject and the aperture value when the ISO sensitivity is set to 100. Guide number = Flash to Subject Distance X Aperture value Aperture value = Guide number/Flash to Subject Distance Flash to Subject Distance = Guide number/Aperture value Therefore, if you know the guide number of a flash, you can estimate an optimum flash to subject distance when setting the flash manually. For example, if a flash has a guide number of GN 20 and is 4 meters away from the subject, the optimal aperture value is F5.0. Chapter 1 My Camera Learn about your camera’s layout, display icons, lens, optional accessories, and basic functions. My Camera 27 Getting started Unpacking Check your product box for the following items. Camera AC adapter/USB cable Rechargeable battery Strap Software CD-ROM (User manual included) Adobe Photoshop Lightroom DVD-ROM Quick Start Guide Quick Reference Guide ‡ The illustrations may differ from your actual items. ‡ The items may differ depending on your region. ‡ You can purchase optional accessories at a retailer or a Samsung service center. Samsung is not responsible for any problems caused by using unauthorized accessories. For information about accessories, refer to page 192. My Camera 28 Camera layout No. Name 1 Shutter button 2 Power button 3 DIRECT LINK button Start a preset Wi-Fi function. (p. 30) 4 External flash port cover 5 Microphone 6 Lens mount index 7 Internal antenna * Avoid contact with the internal antenna while using a wireless network. 8 Lens release button 9 Image sensor * Do not touch the image sensor. 10 Lens mount 11 NFC tag 12 AF-assist light/Timer lamp 13 Built-in flash 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 11 10 8 7 13 12 My Camera > Camera layout 29 No. Name 1 Speaker 2 Eyelet for camera strap 3 Video recording button Start recording a video. 4 Status lamp Indicate the status of the camera. ‡ Blinking: When saving a photo, shooting a video, sending data to a computer, connecting to WLAN, or sending a photo. ‡ Steady: When there is no data transfer or charging the battery. 5 f button Select a shooting mode. 6 D button ‡ In Shooting mode: Change the information on the display. ‡ In other situations: Move up. 7 F button ‡ In Shooting mode: Select an AF mode. ‡ In other situations: Move right. 8 o button ‡ In the Menu screen: Save the selected options. ‡ In Shooting mode: Allow you to select a focus area manually in some shooting modes. No. Name 9 Delete/Custom button ‡ In Shooting mode: Perform the assigned function. (p. 151) ‡ In Playback mode: Delete files. 10 I button ‡ In Shooting mode: Adjust the shutter speed, aperture value, exposure compensation, or ISO sensitivity. ‡ In Playback mode: View thumbnails. ‡ In other situations: Move down. 11 Playback button Enter Playback mode to view pictures or videos. 12 C button ‡ In Shooting mode: Select a shooting method or set the timer. ‡ In other situations: Move left. 13 m button Access options or menus. 14 Display (touch screen) ‡ To take a self-portrait while looking at yourself on the screen, flip the screen up. (p. 31) ‡ Touch the screen to select a menu or an option. (p. 38) 3 2 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 14 12 11 13 My Camera > Camera layout 30 No. Name 1 Tripod mount 2 Battery lock 3 Memory card slot 4 USB and shutter release port Connect the camera to a computer or shutter release. Use a shutter release cable with a tripod to minimize camera movement. 5 HDMI port 6 Battery slot 7 Battery cover Using the DIRECT LINK button You can turn on the Wi-Fi feature conveniently by pressing [DIRECT LINK]. Press [DIRECT LINK] again to return to the previous mode. Setting the DIRECT LINK button You can select a Wi-Fi function to launch when you press [DIRECT LINK]. (p. 151) To set a DIRECT LINK option, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺ d ĺ Key Mapping ĺDIRECT LINKĺ an option. 1 5 6 7 4 3 2 My Camera > Camera layout 31 Using the display You can take a self-portrait while looking at yourself on the display by flipping the display up. Using the Self shot mode When the camera is off and you enabled the Self shot option (p. 152), flipping the display upward turns the camera on and enters Self shot mode. In Self shot mode, the timer (3 seconds), one-touch shot, face detection, and beauty face functions are automatically activated. 1 Flip the display upward. 180˚ 2 Touch . 3 Drag the sliders or touch the +/- icons to adjust the softness and brightness of the skin tone. 4 Press [o] or touch Set. 5 Touch the frame area on the display, or press [Shutter]. ‡ After 3 seconds, the camera automatically releases the shutter. ‡ When the camera is off, flipping the display upward automatically turns the camera on. ‡ Keep the display closed when the camera is not in use. ‡ Flip the display only within the angle allowed. Failing to do so may damage your camera. ‡ When the camera is not held and the display is flipped upward, use a tripod. Otherwise, it may cause damage to your camera. ‡ Do not flip the display up when an external flash is mounted on the camera. Otherwise, it may cause damage to your camera. My Camera 32 Inserting the battery and memory card Learn how to insert or remove the battery and an optional memory card into the camera. 1 Insert your finger into the groove and open the battery cover. Be careful not to damage your fingernails when you open the battery cover. 2 Insert a memory card into the slot with the gold-colored contacts facing up. ‡ Insert the memory card fully until it locks into space. 3 Slide the battery lock to the left. 4 Insert the battery with the gold-colored contacts facing right. ‡ Hold the battery cover open with your finger. My Camera > Inserting the battery and memory card 33 5 Close the battery lock and slide it to the right. 6 Close the battery cover. 7 Press the battery cover firmly to ensure that it closes tightly. My Camera > Inserting the battery and memory card 34 Removing the battery and memory card Rechargeable battery Battery lock Slide the battery lock to the left to release the battery. Memory card Push the card gently until it disengages from the camera, and then pull it out of the slot. Using the memory card adapter To read data with a PC or memory card reader, insert the memory card into a memory card adapter. ‡ Do not bend or pull the battery lock. Doing so may damage the lock. ‡ While the status lamp of the camera is blinking, do not remove the memory card or battery. Doing so may damage the data stored on the memory card or your camera. My Camera 35 Charging the battery and turning on your camera Charging the battery Before you use the camera for the first time, you must charge the battery. Plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera, and then plug the other end of the USB cable into the AC adapter. Status lamp ‡ Red light on: Charging ‡ Green light on: Fully charged ‡ Red light blinking: Charging Error Use only the AC adapter and USB cable supplied with your camera. If you use another AC adapter, the camera battery may not charge or work properly. Turning on your camera To turn on or off the camera, press [ ]. ‡ The initial setup screen appears when you turn on the camera for the first time. (p. 36) For some lenses, when you turn on the camera, the lens moves automatically. Do not press or force the lens, as it may damage the lens. My Camera 36 Performing the initial setup When you turn on your camera for the first time, the initial setup screen appears. The language is preset for the country or region where the camera is sold. You can change the language as desired. You can also select an item by touching it on the screen. 1 Press [I] to select Time Zone, and then press [o]. 2 Press [D/I] to select a time zone, and then press [o]. Back Set Time Zone [GMT +00:00] London [GMT -01:00] Cape Verde [GMT -02:00] Mid-Atlantic [GMT -03:00] Buenos Aires, Sao Paulo [GMT -03:30] Newfoundland 3 Press [I] to select Date/Time Set, and then press [o]. 4 Press [C/F] to select an item (Year/Month/Day/Hour/ Minute/Summer time). 5 Press [D/I] to set the option, and then press [o]. Back Set Year Month Day Hour Min DST Date/Time Set ‡ The screen may differ depending on the language you selected. 6 Press [I] to select Date Type, and then press [o]. 7 Press [D/I] to select a date type, and then press [o]. Back Set Date Type YYYY/MM/DD MM/DD/YYYY DD/MM/YYYY My Camera > Performing the initial setup 37 8 Press [I] to select Time Type, and then press [o]. 9 Press [D/I] to select a time type, and then press [o]. Back Set Time Type 12 Hr 24 Hr 10 Press [m] to finish the initial setup. My Camera 38 Selecting functions (options) Selecting with buttons Press [D/I/C/F] to move, and then press [o] to select an option. Selecting by touch Do not use sharp objects, such as pens or pencils, to touch the screen. You can damage the screen. Dragging: Touch and hold an area on the screen, and then drag your finger. Touching: Touch an icon to select a menu or an option. Flicking: Gently flick your finger across the screen. My Camera > Selecting functions (options) 39 ‡ When you touch or drag the screen, discolorations may occur. This is not a malfunction, but a characteristic of the touch screen. Touch or drag lightly to minimize the discolorations. ‡ The touch screen may not work properly if you use the camera in extremely humid environments. ‡ The touch screen may not work properly if you apply screen protection film or other accessories to the screen. ‡ Depending on the viewing angle, the screen may appear dim. Adjust the brightness or viewing angle to improve the resolution. Using m Press [m] or touch on the screen, and then change shooting options or settings. E.g. Selecting the photo size in P mode 1 On the Mode screen, select Program. 2 Press [m] or touch . 3 Press [D/I] to move to b, and then press [o]. ‡ You can also touch b on the screen. 4 Press [D/I] to move to Photo Size, and then press [o]. ‡ You can also drag the option list, and then touch an option. AutoShare Photo Size Quality ISO Minimum Shutter Speed Back Select My Camera > Selecting functions (options) 40 5 Press [D/I] to move to an option, and then press [o]. ‡ You can also drag the option list, and then touch an option. ‡ Press [m] or touch Back to go back to the previous menu. (3:2) (5472x3648) (3:2) (3888x2592) (3:2) (2976x1984) (3:2) (1728x1152) (16:9) (5472x3080) Photo Size Back Set 6 Press [m] or touch Back to switch to Shooting mode. Using the Smart panel Touch on the screen to access some functions such as Exposure, ISO, and White Balance. E.g. Adjust the exposure value in P mode 1 On the Mode screen, select Program. 2 Touch . 3 Press [D/I/C/F] to move to EV, and then press [o]. ‡ You can also select an option by touching it. 4 Press [D/I/C/F] to adjust the exposure value, and then press [o]. ‡ You can also drag the dial on the screen to adjust the option. EV : 0 Back Adjust You can adjust some options by dragging them. My Camera 41 Selecting a mode Select various modes and functions on the Mode screen. Accessing a Mode screen In Shooting or Playback mode, press [f]. Press [f] again to return to the previous mode. Auto Smart Shutter Manual Priority Back Set Program Aperture Priority Wi-Fi Touch an icon to select a mode or function. You can also press [D/I/C/F] to move a mode or function, and then press [o] to select it. Mode description Mode Description Auto Capture a photo with a scene mode selected automatically by the camera. (p. 54) Smart Capture a photo with options that are preset for a specific scene. (p. 56) Program Capture a photo with settings you have adjusted manually except the shutter speed and aperture value. (p. 59) Aperture Priority Set the aperture value manually while the camera automatically selects an appropriate shutter speed. (p. 61) Shutter Priority Set the shutter speed manually while the camera automatically selects an appropriate aperture value. (p. 62) Manual Adjust both the aperture value and the shutter speed manually. (p. 63) My Camera > Selecting a mode 42 Mode Description Wi-Fi ‡ MobileLink: Send photos or videos to a smart phone. (p. 126) ‡ Remote Viewfinder: Use a smart phone as a remote shutter release and see a preview on your smart phone of an image from your camera. (p. 130) ‡ Group Share: Send photos or videos to multiple smart phones. (p. 128) ‡ Baby Monitor: Connect the camera to a smart phone and monitor a location. (p. 132) ‡ Auto Backup: Send photos or videos that you captured with the camera to a PC wirelessly. (p. 134) ‡ Email: Send photos or videos stored on the camera via email. (p. 136) ‡ SNS & Cloud: Upload photos or videos to file sharing websites. (p. 140) ‡ Samsung Link: Upload photos to Samsung Link online storage or view files on other Samsung Link supported devices. (p. 142) My Camera 43 Display icons Capturing photos 1 2 3 1. Shooting information Icon Description Shooting mode Current date Current time Auto exposure lock (p. 98) Available number of photos Memory card inserted Memory card not inserted* ‡ : Fully charged ‡ : Partially charged ‡ (Red): Empty (recharge the battery) ‡ : Charging Icon Description Auto focus frame Spot metering area Camera shake Level gauge (p. 44) Histogram (p. 150) Focus Shutter speed Aperture value Exposure adjustment value ISO sensitivity (p. 71) * Photos that were captured without inserting a memory card cannot be transferred to a memory card or a computer. 2. Shooting options Icon Description Photo size Drive mode Flash (p. 90) Flash intensity adjustment Metering (p. 92) AF mode (p. 75) Focus area Icon Description Face detection White Balance (p. 72) White Balance micro adjustment Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) (p. 84) RAW file Dynamic Range (p. 95) 3. Shooting options (Touch) Icon Description Change Smart mode** Mobile Connection*** Touch AF options Shooting options Smart panel ** This icon appears only when you select Smart mode. *** You can directly select a Wi-Fi function that connects to a smart phone. The icons displayed will change according to the mode you select or the options you set. In Shooting mode My Camera > Display icons 44 2. Shooting options Icon Description Video size AF mode (p. 75) Metering (p. 92) White Balance (p. 72) White Balance micro adjustment Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) (p. 84) Fader (p. 101) Voice recording off (p. 101) The icons displayed will change according to the mode you select or the options you set. About the level gauge The level gauge helps you align the camera with the horizontal and vertical lines on the display. If the level gauge is not level, calibrate the level gauge using the Horizontal Calibration function. (p. 153) Vertical Horizontal Ÿ Level Ÿ Unlevel You cannot use the level gauge when you shoot in portrait orientation. Recording videos 1 2 1. Shooting information Icon Description Shooting mode Cancel Touch AF. (Touch) Current recording time/ Available recording time Memory card inserted ‡ : Fully charged ‡ : Partially charged ‡ (Red): Empty (recharge the battery) ‡ : Charging Exposure value ISO sensitivity (p. 71) My Camera > Display icons 45 In Playback mode Viewing photos Information Mode F No Shutter ISO Metering Flash Focal Length White Balance EV Photo Size Date Icon Description Current file/The total number of files Folder number-File number RAW file Protected file Continuously captured photos (they will appear as a folder) (p. 104) Playback/Editing/Setting menu (Touch) Share a file. (Touch) View image thumbnails. (Touch) 1 2 3 No. Description 1 Captured photo 2 RGB histogram (p. 150) 3 Shooting mode, Metering, Flash, White Balance, Aperture value, Shutter speed, ISO, Focal length, Exposure value, Photo size, Date Playing videos Stop Icon Description Current file/The total number of files Playback speed Folder number-File number Multi Motion Current playback time Video length View previous file/Scan backward. (Each time you touch the scan backward icon, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.) Pause or resume playback. View next file/Scan forward. (Each time you touch the scan forward icon, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.) Adjust the volume or mute the sound. My Camera > Display icons 46 Changing the information displayed Press [D] repeatedly to change the display type. Mode Display type Shooting ‡ Basic shooting information (Shooting mode, Shutter speed, Aperture value, Exposure value, ISO sensitivity, etc.) ‡ Basic shooting information + Shooting option buttons (MENU, Fn, Mobile Connection, Touch AF) + Level gauge ‡ Basic shooting information + Shooting option buttons + Current shooting options information (Photo size, Drive mode, Flash, Metering, AF mode, etc.) ‡ Basic shooting information + Shooting option buttons + Current shooting options information + Histogram + Date and time Playback ‡ Basic information ‡ Display all information about the current file. ‡ Display all information about the current file including RGB histogram. ‡ No information (when connected to an HDTV or an HDMIenabled monitor) My Camera 47 Lenses You can purchase optional NX-M lenses. Learn about the functions of each lens and select one that suits your needs and preferences. Lens layout SAMSUNG NX-M 9 mm F3.5 ED lens (example) 3 1 2 No. Description 1 Lens 2 Lens mount index 3 Lens contacts My Camera > Lenses 48 SAMSUNG NX-M 9-27 mm F3.5-5.6 ED OIS lens (example) 5 3 1 2 4 No. Description 1 Zoom lock index 2 Lens 3 Zoom ring 4 Lens mount index 5 Lens contacts Locking or unlocking the lens To lock the lens, rotate and pull the zoom ring gently away from the camera body. Align the zoom lock indexes as shown in the illustration. To unlock the lens, rotate the zoom ring as shown in the illustration. You cannot capture a photo when the lens is locked. My Camera > Lenses 49 Lens markings Find out what the numbers on the lens signify. SAMSUNG NX-M 9-27 mm F3.5-5.6 ED OIS lens (example) 3 4 5 1 2 2 No. Description 1 Aperture value A range of supported aperture values. For example, 1:3.5–5.6 means the maximum aperture value range from 3.5 to 5.6. 2 Focal length The distance from the middle of the lens to its focal point (in millimeters). This figure is expressed in a range: minimum focal length to maximum focal length of the lens. Longer focal lengths result in narrower angles of view and the subject is magnified. Shorter focal lengths result in wider angles of view. 3 ED ED stands for Extra-low Dispersion. Extra-low dispersion glass is effective in minimizing chromatic aberration (a distortion that occurs when a lens fails to focus all colors to the same convergence point). 4 OIS (p. 84) Optical Image Stabilization. Lenses with this feature can detect camera shake and effectively cancel out the movement inside the camera. 5 Ø The lens diameter. When you attach a filter to the lens, make sure that the diameters of the lens and the filter are the same. My Camera 50 Accessories Use accessories such as external flash that can supply a constant amount of light. You can also use the mount adapter to attach NX lenses. For more information about optional accessories, refer to the manual for each accessory. ‡ The illustrations may differ from the actual items. ‡ You can purchase Samsung-approved accessories at a retailer or a Samsung service center. Samsung is not responsible for damage caused by using another manufacturer's accessories. External flash layout SEF7A (example) (optional) 1 4 3 2 No. Description 1 Flash fastening dial 2 Lamp 3 Flash connection 4 Flash port My Camera > Accessories 51 Connecting the external flash 1 Open the external flash port cover. 2 Mount the flash by inserting it firmly into the external flash port. ‡ Hold the external flash port cover open with your finger. 3 Lock the flash into place by turning the flash fastening dial as shown in the illustration. ‡ The available options may differ depending on the shooting mode. ‡ There is an interval between two bursts of the flash. Do not move until the flash fires a second time. ‡ Do not remove the flash forcefully. Doing so may damage the flash and camera. ‡ Use only Samsung-approved flashes. Using incompatible flashes may damage your camera. My Camera > Accessories 52 Attaching the mount adapter 1 Remove the mount adapter caps and body cap. 2 Align the indexes (white) on the camera and the mount adapter. Then, rotate the mount adapter as shown in the illustration until you hear a click. Mount adapter layout Samsung NX mount adapter (example) (optional) 1 2 4 3 No. Description 1 Lens release button 2 NX-M lens mount index 3 NX lens mount index 4 Tripod mount My Camera > Accessories 53 2 Press and hold the lens release button on the camera. Then, rotate the lens as shown in the illustration. ‡ Flash is not available when using the mount adapter. ‡ The Continuous option in Drive is not available when using the mount adapter. ‡ Horizontal lines may appear on the photo when you use the mount adapter and the subject is exposed to a fluorescent or mercury-vapor light source. To resolve this, select b ĺ Banding Reduction ĺ On. This function may cause the edges of the frame to appear dark. 3 Align the indexes (red) on the NX lens and the mount adapter. Then, rotate the lens as shown in the illustration until you hear a click. Removing the mount adapter 1 Press and hold the lens release button on the mount adapter. Then rotate the lens as shown in the illustration. My Camera 54 Shooting modes Two simple shooting modes—Auto and Smart mode—help you capture photos with numerous automatic settings. Additional modes allow for greater customization of settings. Auto mode In Auto mode, the camera recognizes surrounding conditions and automatically adjusts factors that contribute to exposure, including shutter speed, aperture value, metering, White Balance, and exposure compensation. As the camera controls most of the functions, some shooting functions are limited. This mode is useful for capturing quick snapshots with the least amount of adjustment. 1 On the Mode screen, select Auto. 2 Align your subject in the frame. 3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus. ‡ The camera selects a scene. An appropriate scene icon appears at the screen. A My Camera > Shooting modes 55 Recognizable scenes Icon Description Landscapes Scenes with bright white backgrounds Landscapes at night Portraits at night Landscapes with backlighting Portraits with backlighting Portraits Close-up photos of objects Close-up photos of text Sunsets Indoors, dark Partially lit Close-up with spot lighting Portraits with spot lighting Icon Description Blue skies Forested areas typically consist of green-colored subjects Close-up photos of colorful subjects Camera is stabilized on a tripod and the subject is not moving for a certain period of time. (when shooting in the dark) Actively moving subjects Fireworks (when using a tripod) 4 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo. ‡ The camera may detect different scenes, even the same subjects, depending on external factors such as camera shake, lighting, or distance to the subject. ‡ If the camera does not recognize an appropriate scene mode, it uses the default settings for the Auto mode. ‡ Even if it detects a face, the camera may not select a portrait mode depending on the subject's position or lighting. ‡ Even if you use a tripod, the camera may not detect the tripod mode ( ) if the subject is moving. ‡ The camera consumes more battery power, because it changes settings often to select appropriate scenes. My Camera > Shooting modes 56 Smart mode In Smart mode, you can capture photos with options that are preset for a specific scene. 1 On the Mode screen, select Smart. 2 Select a scene. Option Description Beauty Face Capture a portrait using options to make the skin tone softer and brighter. Best Face Capture multiple photos and replace faces to create the best possible image. Continuous Shot Capture a series of photos of moving subjects. Kids Shot Capture a photo with a funny sound to get a kid's attention. Landscape Capture still-life scenes and landscapes. Macro Capture small or close-up subjects. Food Capture a photo of food in more colorful tones. Parties and Indoors Capture a crisp indoor photos. Action Freeze Capture subjects moving at high speed. Rich Tones Capture a photo with vibrant colors. Panorama Capture a wide panoramic scene in a single photo. Waterfall Capture scenes with waterfalls. Option Description Silhouette Capture subjects as dark shapes against a light background. Sunset Capture scenes at sunset, with natural-looking reds and yellows. Night Capture a photo with less blurring and image noise in low light conditions. Fireworks Capture scenes with fireworks. Light Trace Capture scenes with the light trailing in low-light conditions. 3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture. Using the Beauty Face mode In Beauty Face mode, you can use options to make the skin tone softer and brighter before capturing a portrait. 1 On the Mode screen, select Smart ĺ Beauty Face. 2 Press [m] ĺb ĺ Face Retouch. 3 Press [D/I] to select an option. 4 Press [C/F] to adjust the option. ‡ You can also drag the sliders or touch +/- to adjust the options. My Camera > Shooting modes 57 5 Press [o]. 6 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter] to focus. 7 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo. Using the Best Face mode In Best Face mode, you can capture multiple photos and replace faces to create the best possible image. Use this mode to select the best image for each individual when capturing group photos. 1 On the Mode screen, select Smart ĺ Best Face. 2 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter] to focus. 3 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo. ‡ The camera captures 5 photos consecutively. ‡ The first photo is set as the background image. ‡ The camera automatically detects faces after shooting. 4 Touch a face to replace. Back Save 5 Touch the best image from the 5 faces that were captured. ‡ Repeat steps 4 and 5 to replace the rest of the faces in the photo. ‡ The icon will appear on the image that the camera recommends. 6 Press [o] to save the photo. ‡ Use a tripod to prevent your camera from shaking. ‡ The resolution is set to 5.9M or less. My Camera > Shooting modes 58 Capturing panoramic photos In Panorama mode, you can capture a wide panoramic scene in a single photo. Panorama mode captures and combines a series of photos to create a panoramic image. 1 On the Mode screen, select Smart ĺ Panorama. 2 Press and hold [Shutter], and then slowly move the camera in the direction you selected. ‡ An arrow toward the direction of motion is displayed, and the entire shooting image is displayed in the preview box. ‡ When the scenes are aligned, the camera captures the next photo automatically. 3 When you are finished, release [Shutter]. ‡ The camera will automatically save the shots into one photo. ‡ If you release [Shutter] while shooting, the panoramic shooting stops and photos that have been captured are saved. ‡ The resolution varies depending on the panoramic photo you captured. ‡ In Panorama mode, some shooting options are not available. ‡ The camera may stop shooting due to the shooting composition or the subject's movement. ‡ In Panorama mode, your camera may not capture the entire last scene if you stop moving the camera to improve the photo quality. To capture the entire scene, move your camera slightly beyond the point where you want the scene to end. ‡ For best results when capturing panoramic photos, avoid the following: - moving the camera too quickly or too slowly - moving the camera too little to capture the next image - moving the camera at irregular speeds - shaking the camera - shooting in dark places - capturing moving subjects nearby - shooting conditions where the brightness or color of light is changing ‡ Photos taken are automatically saved, and shooting is stopped under the following conditions: - if you change the shooting direction while shooting - if you move the camera too rapidly - if you do not move the camera My Camera > Shooting modes 59 Program mode The camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture value so that an optimal exposure value can be achieved. This mode is useful when you want to capture shots of constant exposure while being able to adjust other settings. 1 On the Mode screen, select Program. 2 Set the desired options. 3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. My Camera > Shooting modes 60 Program Shift Program Shift function lets you adjust the shutter speed and aperture value while the camera maintains the same exposure. Press [I] to select the shutter speed and aperture value and press [C/F] to adjust the aperture value. The shutter speed will change according to the aperture value. Minimum shutter speed Set the shutter speed not to be slower than the selected speed. However, if an optimal exposure value cannot be achieved because the ISO sensitivity reached the maximum ISO value that is set by Auto ISO Range, shutter speed may be slower than the selected minimum shutter speed. To set the minimum shutter speed, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Minimum Shutter Speed ĺ an option. ‡ This feature is available only when the ISO sensitivity is set to Auto. ‡ This feature is available only in Program or Aperture Priority mode. My Camera > Shooting modes 61 Aperture Priority mode In Aperture Priority mode, the camera automatically calculates shutter speed according to the aperture value you choose. You can adjust the depth of field (DOF) by changing the aperture value. This mode is useful for taking portraits, flowers, or landscape shots. Large Depth of Field Small Depth of Field 1 On the Mode screen, select Aperture Priority. 2 Press [I] to select the aperture value. 3 Press [C/F] to adjust the aperture value. 4 Set the desired options. 5 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. ‡ In low-light settings, you may need to increase the ISO sensitivity to prevent blurred photos. ‡ To set the minimum shutter speed, in Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Minimum Shutter Speed ĺ an option. ‡ You can also touch the aperture value on the screen to adjust it. My Camera > Shooting modes 62 Shutter Priority mode In Shutter Priority mode, the camera automatically adjusts the aperture value according to the shutter speed you choose. This mode is useful for capturing photos of fast-moving subjects or for creating tracer effects in a photo. For example, set the shutter speed to over 1/500 s to freeze the subject. To make the subject appear blurred set the shutter speed to below 1/30 s. Slow shutter speed Fast shutter speed 1 On the Mode screen, select Shutter Priority. 2 Press [I] to select the shutter speed. 3 Press [C/F] to adjust the shutter speed. 4 Set the desired options. 5 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. ‡ In order to compensate for the reduced amount of light allowed by fast shutter speeds, open the aperture and let in more light. If your photos are still too dark, increase the ISO value. ‡ You can also touch the shutter speed on the screen to adjust it. My Camera > Shooting modes 63 Manual mode Manual mode lets you adjust the shutter speed and aperture value manually. In this mode, you can fully control the exposure of your photos. This mode is useful in controlled shooting environments, such as a studio, or when it is necessary to fine-tune camera settings. The Manual mode is also recommended for shooting night scenes or fireworks. 1 On the Mode screen, select Manual. 2 Press [I] to select the aperture value or shutter speed. 3 Press [C/F] to adjust the aperture value or shutter speed. 4 Set the desired options. 5 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. You can also touch the aperture value or shutter speed on the screen to adjust it. Using Framing Mode When you adjust the aperture value or shutter speed, the exposure changes according to the settings, so the display may darken. With this function on, the brightness of the display is constant regardless of the settings, so you can better frame your shot. To use Framing Mode, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Framing Mode ĺ an option. My Camera > Shooting modes 64 Using the Bulb function Use the Bulb function to shoot night scenes or the night sky. While you are pressing [Shutter], the shutter is left open so you can create moving light effects. To use a bulb, In Shooting mode, press [I] to select the shutter speed ĺ Press [C] repeatedly to set the shutter speed to Bulb ĺ Press and hold [Shutter] for the desired time. ‡ If you set a high ISO value or open the shutter for a long time, image noise may increase. ‡ Drive options, flash, and One touch shot cannot be used with the Bulb function. ‡ The Bulb function is available only in Manual mode. ‡ Use a tripod and shutter release to prevent your camera from shaking. ‡ The longer you open the shutter, the longer it takes to save a photo. Do not turn the camera off while the camera saves a photo. ‡ If you use this function for a long time, use a fully charged battery. My Camera > Shooting modes 65 ‡ H.264 (MPEG-4 part10/AVC) is the latest video coding format established in 2003 collaboratively by ISO-IEC and ITU-T. Since this format uses a high compression rate, more data can be saved in less memory space. ‡ If you have the image stabilizer option on when shooting a movie, the camera may record the image stabilizer sound. ‡ If you remove the camera lens while recording a movie, the recording will be interrupted. Do not change the lens while recording. ‡ If you change the shooting angle of the camera suddenly while shooting a movie, the camera may not be able to record images accurately. Use a tripod to minimize camera shake. ‡ The camera supports only the Multi AF function when recording a video. You cannot use any other focus area setting functions. ‡ When the size of a movie file exceeds 4 GB, the camera automatically stops recording even if the maximum recording time (29 minutes and 59 seconds) has not been reached. ‡ If you use a slow writing memory card, the recording of your movie can be interrupted because the card cannot process data at the rate the video is being shot. If this occurs, replace the card with a faster memory card or reduce the video size (for example, from 1280X720 to 640X480). ‡ When formatting a memory card, always format using the camera. If you format on another camera or a PC, you can lose files on the card or cause a change in the capacity of the card. ‡ While recording a video in the same ISO sensitivity, the screen may be darker than taking a photo. Adjust the ISO sensitivity. ‡ When you record a video in Program, Aperture Priority, or Shutter Priority mode, ISO is automatically set to Auto. Recording a video In Shooting mode, you can record Full HD videos (1920X1080) by pressing (Video recording). The camera lets you record a video up to 29 minutes and 59 seconds in length at 30 fps, and saves the files in MP4 (H.264) format. The sound is recorded via the camera's microphone. Select Fader to fade in or out a scene. You can also select Voice or other options to set recording options. (p. 101) 1 On the Mode screen, select a shooting mode. ‡ This feature may not work in some modes. 2 Set the desired options. 3 Press (Video recording) to start recording. ‡ The camera will retain the shutter speed and aperture value that you have set before starting shooting. 4 Press (Video recording) again to stop. ‡ You can also press [Shutter] to stop recording. My Camera > Shooting modes 66 Available functions by shooting mode For details about shooting functions, see Chapter 2. Function Auto Smart Program Aperture Priority Shutter Priority Manual Face Retouch (p. 56) - O ---- Photo Size (p. 69) OOOOOO Quality (p. 70) - OOOOO ISO (p. 71) - - OOOO White Balance (p. 72) - - OOOO Picture Wizard (p. 74) - - OOOO Smart Filter (p. 96) - - OOOO AF Mode (p. 75) - OOOOO AF Area (p. 77) - OOOOO Face Detection (p. 79) - - OOOO Touch AF (p. 81) OOOOOO MF Assist (p. 83) OOOOOO Link AE to AF Point (p. 94) - - OOOO Framing Mode (p. 63) - - OOOO O: You can select options for the function. (Available options vary by shooting mode.) -: The function is set to a certain option by default or the function is not available. My Camera > Shooting modes 67 Function Auto Smart Program Aperture Priority Shutter Priority Manual OIS (Anti-Shake) (p. 84) OOOOOO Drive (Continuous/Burst/Timer/Bracket) (p. 85) OOOOOO Metering (p. 92) - - OOOO Dynamic Range (p. 95) - - OOOO Flash (p. 90) OOOOOO Exposure compensation (p. 97) - - OOO - Exposure lock (p. 98) - - OOO - O: You can select options for the function. (Available options vary by shooting mode.) -: The function is set to a certain option by default or the function is not available. Chapter 2 Shooting Functions Learn about the functions you can set in Shooting mode. You can enjoy more customized photos and videos by using the shooting functions. 69 Shooting Functions > Size and Resolution ize and Resolution Shooting Functions Photo size As you increase the resolution, your photo or video will include more pixels, so it can be printed on larger paper or displayed on a larger screen. When you use a high resolution, the file size will also increase. Select a low resolution for photos that will be displayed in a digital picture frame or uploaded to the web. To set the size, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Photo Size ĺ an option. * Default Icon Size Recommended for (3:2) 5472x3648* Printing on A1 paper. (3:2) 3888x2592 Printing on A2 paper. (3:2) 2976x1984 Printing on A3 paper. (3:2) 1728x1152 Printing on A5 paper. (16:9) 5472x3080 Printing on A1 paper or viewing on an HDTV. (16:9) 3712x2088 Printing on A3 paper or viewing on an HDTV. (16:9) 2944x1656 Printing on A4 paper or viewing on an HDTV. (16:9) 1920x1080 Printing on A5 paper or viewing on an HDTV. (1:1) 3648x3648 Printing a square photo on A1 paper. (1:1) 2640x2640 Printing a square photo on A3 paper. (1:1) 2000x2000 Printing a square photo on A4 paper. (1:1) 1024x1024 Attaching to an email. Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. Size and Resolution 70 Shooting Functions > Size and Resolution Quality The camera saves photos in either the JPEG or RAW format. Photos captured by a camera are often transformed to the JPEG format and stored in the memory according to the settings of the camera at the time of shooting. RAW files are not transformed to the JPEG format and are stored in the memory without any changes. RAW files have the file extension "SRW". To adjust and calibrate exposures, White Balances, tones, contrasts, and colors of the RAW files, or to convert them into JPEG or TIFF format, use the Adobe Photoshop Lightroom program found on the supplied DVD-ROM. Ensure you have enough space on the memory card to save photos in the RAW format. To set the quality, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Quality ĺ an option. * Default Icon Format Description JPEG Super Fine*: ‡ Compressed for the best quality. ‡ Recommended for printing in large size. JPEG Fine: ‡ Compressed for better quality. ‡ Recommended for printing in normal size. * Default Icon Format Description JPEG Normal: ‡ Compressed for normal quality. ‡ Recommended for printing in small size or uploading to the web. RAW RAW: ‡ Save a photo without data loss. ‡ Recommended for editing after shooting. RAW+JPEG RAW + S.Fine: Save a photo in both the JPEG (S.Fine quality) and RAW format. RAW+JPEG RAW + Fine: Save a photo in both the JPEG (Fine quality) and RAW format. RAW+JPEG RAW + Normal: Save a photo in both the JPEG (Normal quality) and RAW format. Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. 71 Shooting Functions > ISO sensitivity SO sensitivity Shooting Functions The ISO sensitivity value represents the sensitivity of camera to light. The larger the ISO value, the more sensitive the camera is to light. Consequently, by selecting a higher ISO sensitivity value, you can capture photos in dim or dark places at faster shutter speeds. However, this may increase electronic noise and result in a grainy photo. To set ISO sensitivity, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ ISO ĺ an option. Examples ISO 160 ISO 400 ISO 800 ISO 3200 ‡ Increase the ISO value in places where flash use is prohibited. You can capture a clear photo by setting a high ISO value without having to secure more light. ‡ Use the Noise Reduction function in order to reduce the visual noise that can appear on photos of a high ISO value. (p. 147) ‡ Available options may differ depending on the shooting conditions. ‡ You can also touch the ISO value on the screen to adjust it. ISO sensitivity 72 Shooting Functions > White Balance ite Balance Shooting Functions White Balance represents the light source that influences on the color of a photo. The color of a photo depends on the type and quality of the light source. If you want the color of your photo to be realistic, select an appropriate lighting condition to calibrate the White Balance, such as Auto WB, Daylight, Cloudy, Tungsten, or adjust color temperature manually. You can also adjust color for the preset light sources so that the colors of the photo match the actual scene under mixed lighting conditions. To set the White Balance, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ White Balance ĺ an option. * Default Icon Description Auto WB*: Use automatic settings depending on the lighting conditions. Daylight: Select when taking outdoor photos on a sunny day. This option results in photos closest to the natural colors of the scene. Cloudy: Select when taking outdoor photos on a cloudy day or in shadows. Photos captured on cloudy days tend to be more bluish than on sunny days. This option offsets that effect. Fluorescent White: Select when shooting under a daylight fluorescent lamp, especially for white fluorescent light. * Default Icon Description N Fluorescent NW: Select when shooting under a daylight fluorescent lamp, especially for white fluorescent light of very white hues. D Fluorescent Daylight: Select when shooting under a daylight fluorescent lamp, especially for white fluorescent light of slightly bluish hue. Tungsten: Select when taking indoor photos under incandescent bulbs or halogen lamps. Incandescent tungsten bulbs tend to have a reddish hue. This option offsets that effect. Flash WB: Select when using a flash. Custom Set: Use your pre-defined settings. You can manually set the White Balance by pressing [D], and then shooting a white sheet of paper. Fill the spot metering circle with the paper and set the White Balance. Color Temperature: Manually adjust the color temperature of the light source. Color temperature is a measurement in degrees Kelvin that indicates the specific type of light source. You can get a warmer photo with a higher value, and a cooler photo with a lower value. Press [D], and then adjust the color temperature. Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. White Balance 73 Shooting Functions > White Balance Customizing preset White Balance options You can also customize preset White Balance options. To customize preset options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ White Balance ĺ an option ĺ [D] ĺ press [D/I/C/F]. White Balance : Daylight Back Set Reset You can also touch an area on the screen. Examples Auto WB Daylight Fluorescent Daylight Tungsten 74 Shooting Functions > Picture Wizard (photo styles) icture Wizard (photo styles) Shooting Functions Picture Wizard lets you apply different photo styles to your photo to create various looks and emotional moods. You can also create and save your own photo styles by adjusting color, saturation, sharpness, and contrast for each style. There is no rule for which style is suitable in which conditions. Experiment with different styles and find your own settings. To set a photo style, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Picture Wizard ĺ an option. Examples Standard Vivid Portrait Landscape Forest Retro Cool Calm Classic ‡ You can also adjust the value of the preset style settings. Select a Picture Wizard option, press [D], and then adjust color, saturation, sharpness, or contrast. ‡ To customize your own picture wizard, select , , or , and then adjust the color, saturation, sharpness, and contrast. ‡ Picture Wizard options cannot be set with Smart Filter options at the same time. Picture Wizard (photo styles) 75 Shooting Functions > AF mode Shooting Functions AF mode Learn how to adjust the camera’s focus according to the subjects. You can select a focusing mode appropriate to the subject among Single Auto Focus, Continuous Auto Focus, and Manual Focus. The AF function is activated when you press [Shutter] halfway. In the MF mode, you have to press [C/F] to focus manually. In most cases, you can have a focus by selecting Single AF. Fast moving subjects or subjects with small shading differences to the background are difficult to focus. Select an appropriate focusing mode for such instances. To set the auto focus mode, In Shooting mode, press [F] ĺ an option. ‡ You can also set the option by pressing [m] ĺb ĺ AF Mode ĺ an option in Shooting mode. ‡ The available options may differ depending on the lens in use. Single AF Single AF is appropriate for shooting a still subject. When you press [Shutter] halfway, the focus fixes in the focus area. The area turns green when the focus is achieved. 76 Shooting Functions > AF mode Continuous AF While you are pressing [Shutter] halfway, the camera continues to automatic focusing. Once the focus area is fixed on the subject, the subject is always in focus even when moving. This mode is recommended for shooting a person on a bicycle, a running dog, or a car racing scene. Manual focus You can manually focus on a subject by pressing [C/F] on the camera. The MF Assist function lets you easily achieve a focus. While you are adjusting the focus, the focus area is magnified. This mode is recommended for shooting an object similar in color to the background, a night scene, or fireworks. ‡ After capturing a photo with manual focus, press [o] ĺ [C/F] to manually adjust the focus again. ‡ If you use this function, you cannot set Touch AF, Face Detection, AF Area, and Link AE to AF Point options. ‡ While you are adjusting the focus, the manual focus scale ( ) appears. 77 Shooting Functions > AF area Shooting Functions The AF area function changes the positions of the focus area. Generally, cameras focus on the nearest subject. When there are a lot of subjects, however, unwanted subjects can be in focus. In order to prevent unwanted subjects from being in focus, change the focus area so that a desired subject is in focus. You can get a clearer and sharper photo by selecting an appropriate focus area. To set the auto focus area, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ AF Area ĺ an option. Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. Selection AF You can set the focus on an area you want. Apply an out-of-focus effect to make the subject more distinguishable. The focus on the photo below was repositioned and resized so that it fits the subject’s face. To resize or move the focus area, in Shooting mode, press [o]. Touch an area to focus on it or press [D/I/C/F] to move the focus area, and pinch your fingers together or spread them apart to resize the focus area. AF area 78 Shooting Functions > AF area Multi AF The camera displays a green rectangle in places where focus is set correctly. The photo is divided into two or more areas, and the camera obtains focus points of each area. It is recommended for scenery photos. When you press [Shutter] halfway, the camera displays the focus areas as shown in the photo below. 79 Shooting Functions > Face Detection ce Detection Shooting Functions Face Detection Use Face Detection options to capture a self portrait or a smiling face. To use the face detection function, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Face Detection ĺ an option. ‡ When your camera detects a face, it tracks the detected face automatically. ‡ When you use the Face Detection AF option, the camera focuses on the area with the white frame automatically. ‡ Depending on the Picture Wizard options, Face Detection may not be effective. ‡ When you set manual focus, Face Detection may not be available. ‡ Face Detection may not be effective when: - the subject is far from the camera - it is too bright or too dark - the subject is not facing the camera - the subject is wearing sunglasses or a mask - the subject’s facial expression changes drastically - the subject is backlit or the lighting conditions are unstable ‡ When you set Face Detection options, the AF area is automatically set to Multi AF. ‡ Depending on the Face Detection options you selected, some shooting options may not be available. Normal The camera focuses on human faces preferentially. Faces of up to 10 people can be detected. This setting is recommended for shooting a group of people. When you press [Shutter] halfway, the camera focuses on faces as shown in the photo below. In cases of shooting a group of people, the camera displays the focus on the nearest person’s face in white and the rest of the people’s faces in gray. 80 Shooting Functions > Face Detection Wink Shot The camera automatically releases the shutter 2 seconds after it detects a winking face. ‡ Wink for more than 1 second for better detection. ‡ Wink detection may fail when: - the camera is below eye level - the subject appears dark due to backlighting - the subject is wearing glasses - the subject is far from the camera Smile Shot The camera automatically releases the shutter when it detects a smiling face. When your subject smiles broadly, your camera can detect the smile more easily. 81 Shooting Functions > Touch AF Shooting Functions Tracking AF Tracking AF allows you to track and automatically focus on your subject, even when the subject is moving or when you change the shooting composition. White frame: Your camera is tracking the subject. Green frame: Your subject is in focus when you half-press [Shutter]. Red frame: Your camera failed to focus. Select or focus on an area that you touch on the screen. Additionally, focus on the subject and capture a photo by touching on the screen. To set Touch AF, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺTouch AF ĺ an option. ‡ Available options may differ depending on the shooting conditions. ‡ You can also touch on the screen and select an option in Shooting mode. Touch AF Touch AF allows you to select and focus on the focus area that you touch on the screen. AF Point The focus area will correspond to the area you touch on the screen and the focus will not be achieved. Touch AF 82 Shooting Functions > Touch AF One touch shot You can capture a photo with the touch of your finger. As you touch a subject, the camera focuses on the subject automatically and captures a photo. ‡ If you do not select a focus area, the Auto Focus function does not work. ‡ Tracking a subject may fail when: - the subject is too small - the subject moves irregularly - the subject is backlit or you are shooting in a dark place - colors or patterns on the subject and the background are the same - the subject includes horizontal patterns, such as blinds - the camera shakes excessively - you capture photos continuously ‡ When tracking fails, the feature will be reset. ‡ If the camera fails to track the subject, the focus area will be reset. ‡ If the camera fails to focus, the focus frame will change to red and the focus will be reset. 83 Shooting Functions > Shooting Functions > MF Assist F Assist Shooting Functions In the manual focus mode, you have to press [C/F] to focus. When you use the MF Assist function, you can achieve a clearer focus because the focus area is magnified. This function is only available on a lens that supports manual focus. To set the manual focus assist, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ MF Assist ĺ an option. * Default Option Description Off Do not use the MF Assist function. Enlarge x5* The focus area is magnified by 5 times when you adjust the focus. Enlarge x8 The focus area is magnified by 8 times when you adjust the focus. MF Assist 84 Shooting Functions > Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) ptical Image Stabilization (OIS) Shooting Functions Use the Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) function to minimize camera shake. OIS may not be available with some lenses. Camera shake tends to occur in dark places or when shooting indoors. In such cases, the camera uses slower shutter speeds in order to increase the amount of light taken in, which can result in a blurry photo. You can prevent this situation by using the OIS function. To set OIS options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ OIS (Anti-Shake) ĺ an option. * Default Icon Description Mode 1*: The OIS function is applied only when you press [Shutter] in full or half. Mode 2: The OIS function is on. Off: The OIS function is off. Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) Without OIS correction With OIS correction ‡ OIS may not function properly when: - you move your camera to follow a moving subject - there is too much camera shake - the shutter speed is slow (for example, when you select Night in Smart mode) - the battery is low - you capture a close-up shot ‡ If you use the OIS function with a tripod, your images may be blurred by the vibration of the OIS sensor. Deactivate the OIS function when you use a tripod. ‡ If the camera is hit or dropped, the display will be blurry. If this occurs, turn off the camera, and then turn it on again. ‡ Use the OIS function only when needed because the function consumes more battery power. ‡ This option may not be available with some lenses. 85 Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) rive (shooting method) Shooting Functions You can set the shooting method, such as Continuous, Burst, Timer or Bracketing. Select Single to capture one photo at a time. Select Continuous Normal or Burst to shoot fast moving subjects. Select AE Bracket, WB Bracket, P Wiz Bracket, or Depth Bracket to adjust exposure, White Balance, apply picture Wizard effects, or capture photos with different depths of field. You can also select Timer to capture a photo automatically after a specified time. To change the shooting method, In Shooting mode, press [C] ĺ an option. ‡ You can also set the option by pressing [m] ĺb ĺ Drive ĺ a shooting method in Shooting mode. ‡ Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. Single Capture one photo whenever you press [Shutter]. Recommended for general conditions. Drive (shooting method) 86 Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) Continuous Normal Continuously capture photos while you are pressing [Shutter]. You can capture up to 6 photos per second. Maximum shooting speed is 6 frames per second. It will slow down after approx. JPEG 11 shots, RAW 4 shots. (May vary depending on the spec of memory card.) Burst Consecutively capture up to 10 shots per second (3 seconds), 15 shots per second (2 seconds), or 30 shots per second (1 second) when you press [Shutter] once. It is recommended for shooting the rapid motion of fast moving subjects such as racing cars. • To set the number of shots, in Shooting mode, press [C] ĺ Burst, and then press [D]. • The photo size is set to 5M. • It may take longer to save a photo. • You cannot use the flash with this option. • Shutter speed must be faster than 1/30 second. • Photos captured with this option may be slightly enlarged when saving. • You cannot set an ISO option higher than ISO 3200. • This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available when the photo quality is set to RAW. 87 Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) Timer Capture a photo after a specified time. You can set the Timer for 2 to 30 seconds. ‡ Press [Shutter] to stop capturing. ‡ To set the timer details, in Shooting mode, press [C] ĺTimer, and then press [D]. Auto Exposure Bracketing (AE Bracket) When you press [Shutter], the camera captures 3 consecutive photos: the original, one a step darker, and one a step lighter. Use a tripod to prevent blurry photos as the camera captures three photos continuously. You can adjust the settings in Bracket Settings menu. Exposure -2 Original Exposure +2 To set the bracketing details, press [m] ĺ d ĺ Bracket Settings ĺ an option. 88 Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) White Balance Bracketing (WB Bracket) When you press [Shutter], the camera captures 3 consecutive photos: the original and two more with different White Balance settings. The original photo is captured when you press [Shutter]. The other two are automatically adjusted according to the White Balance you have set. You can adjust the settings in Bracket Settings menu. WB-2 Original WB+2 ‡ To set the bracketing details, press [m] ĺ d ĺ Bracket Settings ĺ an option. ‡ This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available when the photo quality is set to RAW. Picture Wizard Bracketing (P Wiz Bracket) When you press [Shutter], the camera captures three consecutive photos, each with a different Picture Wizard setting. The camera captures a photo and applies the three Picture Wizard options you have set to the image captured. You can select three different settings in Bracket Settings menu. Vivid Standard Retro ‡ To set the bracketing details, press [m] ĺ d ĺ Bracket Settings ĺ an option. ‡ This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available when the photo quality is set to RAW. 89 Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) Depth Bracketing When you press [Shutter], the camera captures three consecutive photos, each with a different depth of field by adjusting the aperture value. Use a tripod to prevent blurry photos as the camera captures three photos continuously. You can adjust the settings in Bracket Settings menu. ‡ To set the bracketing details, press [m] ĺ d ĺ Bracket Settings ĺ an option. ‡ This feature is available only in Program or Aperture Priority mode. ‡ If the aperture value is set to its maximum or minimum, two photos will be captured with the maximum or minimum aperture value. 90 Shooting Functions > Flash Shooting Functions In order to capture a realistic photo of a subject, the amount of light should be constant. When the light source varies, you can use a flash and supply a constant amount of light. Select appropriate settings according to a light source and a subject. To set flash options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Flash ĺ an option. Icon Description Off: Do not use the flash. A Smart Flash: The camera automatically adjusts the brightness of the flash according to the amount of light in the surrounding environment. A Auto: The flash automatically fires in dark places. Auto Red-eye: The flash automatically fires and reduces red-eyes. Fill in: The flash fires whenever you capture a photo. (Brightness is automatically adjusted.) Fill-in Red: The flash fires whenever you capture a photo and reduces red-eyes. 1st Curtain: The flash fires immediately after the shutter opens. The camera captures a photo of a subject earlier in an action sequence clearly. Ball moving direction Icon Description 2nd Curtain: The flash fires just before the shutter closes. The camera captures a photo of a subject later in an action sequence clearly. Ball moving direction ‡ The available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. ‡ There is an interval between two bursts of the flash. Do not move until the flash fires a second time. ‡ If you select Off, the flash does not fire even when an external flash is attached. ‡ For some lenses, the lens may block the light from the internal flash. If this occurs, use an optional external flash. ‡ If you attach a lens other than the one provided, using a lens mount adapter, no flashes will fire. Use only Samsung-approved flashes. Using incompatible external flashes may damage your camera. Flash 91 Shooting Functions > Flash Reducing the red-eye effect If the flash fires when you capture a photo of a person in the dark, a red glow may appear in the eyes. To reduce the red-eye effect, select Auto Red-eye or Fill-in Red. Without red-eye reduction With red-eye reduction If the subject is too far from the camera or moves when the first flash fires, redeyes may not be reduced. Adjusting the flash intensity When the flash is on, adjust the flash intensity ±2 levels. To set the flash intensity, In Shooting mode, touch ĺ Flash ĺ move to a desired option ĺ press [D] ĺ [C/F]. Back Set Flash : Fill in ‡ You can also drag the slider or touch +/- to adjust the intensity. ‡ Adjusting the flash intensity may not be effective when: - the subject is too close to the camera - you set a high ISO sensitivity - the exposure value is too big or too small ‡ In some shooting modes, you cannot use this function. ‡ If the subject is too close when you use the flash, some light may be blocked, resulting in a dark photo. Ensure that the subject is within the recommended range, which varies by lens. 92 Shooting Functions > Metering etering Shooting Functions The metering mode refers to the way in which a camera measures the quantity of light. The camera measures the amount of light in a scene, and in many of its modes, uses the measurement to adjust various settings. For example, if a subject looks darker than its actual color, the camera captures an overexposed photo of it. If a subject looks lighter than its actual color, the camera captures an underexposed photo of it. The brightness and overall mood of the photo can also be affected by how the camera measures the amount of light. Select an appropriate setting for a shooting condition. To set a metering option, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Metering ĺ an option. Multi The Multi mode calculates the amount of light in multiple areas. When light is sufficient or insufficient, the camera adjusts the exposure by averaging the overall brightness of the scene. This mode is suitable for general photos. Metering 93 Shooting Functions > Metering Center-weighted The Center-weighted mode calculates a broader area than the Spot mode does. It sums up the amount of light in the center portion of the shot (60–80%) and that of the rest of the shot (20–40%). It is recommended for situations where there is a slight difference in brightness between a subject and a background or an area of the subject is large compared to the overall composition of the photo. Spot The Spot mode calculates the amount of light in the center. When you capture a photo in conditions where there is a strong backlight behind a subject, the camera adjusts the exposure so as to shoot a subject correctly. For example, when you select the Multi mode in a strong backlight condition, the camera calculates that the overall amount of light is abundant, which results in a darker photo. The Spot mode can prevent this situation as it calculates the amount of light in a designated area. The subject is in bright color while the background is dark. The Spot mode is recommended for a situation like this where a huge difference in the exposure exists between a subject and a background. 94 Shooting Functions > Metering Measuring the exposure value of the focus area When this function is turned on, the camera automatically sets an optimal exposure by calculating the brightness of the focus area. This function is only available when you select Spot metering or Multi metering, and Selection AF. To set this function, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Link AE to AF Point ĺ an option. 95 Shooting Functions > Dynamic Range namic Range Shooting Functions This function automatically corrects the loss of bright detail that can occur due to shading differences in the photo. To set Dynamic Range options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Dynamic Range ĺ an option. Without Dynamic Range effect With Dynamic Range effect * Default Icon Description Off*: Do not use Dynamic Range. Smart Range+: Correct the loss of bright detail. HDR: Capture 3 photos with different exposures, and then combine them to create a single image automatically. ‡ You cannot set an ISO option higher than ISO 3200. ‡ Dynamic Range options cannot be set with drive options other than Single or Timer. ‡ Dynamic Range options cannot be set with Smart Filter or Picture Wizard options at the same time. ‡ Dynamic Range options cannot be set with the Bulb function. Dynamic Range 96 Shooting Functions > Smart Filter mart Filter Shooting Functions Smart Filter lets you apply special effects to your photos or videos. You can select various filter options to create special effects that are difficult to be achieved with normal lenses. To set Smart Filter options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Smart Filter ĺ an option. * Default Option Description Off* No effect Vignetting Apply the retro-looking colors, high contrast, and strong vignette effect of Lomo cameras. Miniature Apply a tilt-shift effect to make the subject appear in miniature. Sketch Apply a pen sketch effect. Fish Eye Distort close objects to imitate the visual effect of a fisheye lens. Smart Filter options cannot be set with Picture Wizard options at the same time. Smart Filter 97 Shooting Functions > Exposure compensation xposure compensation Shooting Functions The camera automatically sets the exposure by measuring the levels of light from the photo’s composition and the position of a subject. If the exposure set by the camera is higher or lower than you expected, you can adjust the exposure value manually. The exposure value is adjustable in ±3 increments. The camera displays the exposure warning in red for each step beyond ±3 range. To adjust the exposure value, touch the exposure level indicator on the screen or touch ĺ EV and adjust the exposure value. You can also press [I] to select the exposure value and press [C/F] to adjust it. You can check the exposure value by the position of the exposure level indicator. Exposure level indicator Increased exposure (brighter) Decreased exposure (darker) Exposure warning Standard exposure index -2 Original +2 Exposure compensation 98 Shooting Functions > Exposure lock xposure lock Shooting Functions When you cannot achieve an appropriate exposure because of a strong brightness contrast, lock the exposure and then capture a photo. To lock the exposure, adjust the photo’s composition on which you want to calculate the exposure, and then press the Custom button. (when the function of the Custom button is set to AEL) (p. 151) After locking the exposure, aim the lens where you desire, and then press [Shutter]. Exposure lock 99 Shooting Functions > Video functions ideo functions Shooting Functions The functions available for video are explained below. Movie size Set the movie size. To set movie size options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺgĺ Movie Size ĺ an option. When Video Out is set to NTSC * Default Icon Size Recommended for * 1920X1080 (30 fps) (16:9) View on a Full HDTV. 1280X720 (30 fps) (16:9) View on an HDTV. 640X480 (30 fps) (4:3) View on a TV. 320X240 (30 fps) (4:3) Post on a website using the wireless network (30 seconds maximum). When Video Out is set to PAL * Default Icon Size Recommended for * 1920X1080 (25 fps) (16:9) View on a Full HDTV. 1280X720 (25 fps) (16:9) View on an HDTV. 640X480 (25 fps) (4:3) View on a TV. 320X240 (25 fps) (4:3) Post on a website using the wireless network (30 seconds maximum). Video functions 100 Shooting Functions > Video functions Movie quality Set the Movie quality. To set movie quality options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺgĺ Movie Quality ĺ an option. * Default Icon Extension Description MP4 (H.264) Normal: Record videos in normal quality. MP4 (H.264) HQ*: Record videos in high quality. Multi Motion Set the playing speed of a video. To set playing speed options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺgĺMulti Motion ĺ an option. * Default Icon Description x0.25: Record a video to view it at 1/4 normal speed during playback. (Available only with 640x480 or 320x240) x1*: Record a video to view it at normal speed during playback. x5: Record a video to view it at 5X normal speed during playback. x10: Record a video to view it at 10X normal speed during playback. x20: Record a video to view it at 20X normal speed during playback. ‡ If you select an option other than x1, the sound recording function and the Distortion Correct function will not be supported. ‡ The available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. 101 Shooting Functions > Video functions Voice Sometimes, a muted video is more appealing than the one with sound. Turn the voice off to record a muted video. To set voice options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺgĺ Voice ĺ an option. Fader You can fade in or fade out a scene using the fader function on the camera without having to do it on a PC. Set the fade in option to gradually fade in at the start of the scene. Set the fade out option to gradually fade out the scene. Use the function appropriately and add dramatic effects on your videos. To set fader options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺgĺFader ĺ an option. * Default Icon Description Off*: Fader function not used. In: Scene gradually fades in. Out: Scene gradually fades out. In-Out: The fader function is applied at the start and end of the scene. When you use the fader function, it may take longer to save a file. Chapter 3 Playback/Editing Learn about how to play back and edit photos and videos. Refer to chapter 6 for editing files on a PC. 103 Playback/Editing Learn how to view photo and video thumbnails and how to protect or delete files. If you perform no operations for a while, information and icons on the screen disappear. When you operate the camera again, they will reappear. Viewing photos 1 Press [y]. ‡ The most recent file you captured will be displayed. 2 Press [C/F] to scroll through files. ‡ You can also drag the image left or right to move to another file. You may not be able to edit or play back files that were captured with other cameras, due to unsupported sizes or codecs. Use a computer or another device to edit or play back these files. Viewing image thumbnails In order to search for photos and videos you want, convert to the thumbnail view by pressing [I] or touching in Playback mode. The thumbnail view displays multiple images at a time so that you can easily look through items you wish to find. You can also classify and display files by category, such as date or file type. In thumbnail view, press [m] ĺz ĺ View ĺ an item to select the thumbnail view mode. Searching and managing files 104 Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files Viewing files by category 1 In the thumbnail view, press [m] ĺz ĺ Filter ĺ a category. * Default Option Description All* View files normally. Date View files by the date they were saved. File Type View files by the file type. 2 Select a list to open it. 3 Select a file to view it. Viewing files as a folder Continuous and burst shots appear as a folder. Selecting a folder will play back all photos automatically. Deleting a folder will delete all photos in the folder. 1 In Playback mode, press [C/F] to move to a desired folder. ‡ You can also drag the image left or right to move to a desired folder. ‡ The camera will automatically play back photos in the folder. 2 Press [o] to open the folder. ‡ You can also touch the folder on the screen to open the folder. 105 Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files 3 Press [C/F] to move to another file. ‡ You can also drag the image left or right to move to another file. 4 Press [o] to return to Playback mode. ‡ You can also touch to return to Playback mode. Protecting files Protect your files from accidental deletion. 1 In Playback mode, scroll to a file. 2 Press [m] ĺz ĺ Protect ĺ On. You cannot delete or rotate a protected file. 106 Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files Deleting files Delete files in Playback mode and secure more space on your memory card. Protected files are not deleted. Deleting a single file You can select a single file and delete it. 1 In Playback mode, select a file, and then press [n]. 2 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes. Deleting multiple files You can select multiple files and delete them. 1 In Playback mode, press [m] ĺz ĺ Delete ĺ Multiple Delete. ‡ Alternatively, in thumbnails view, press [n], and then select files to delete. 2 Select files you want to delete by pressing [C/F], and then press [o]. ‡ Press [o] again to cancel your selection. 3 Press [n]. 4 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes. Deleting all files You can delete all files on the memory card at once. 1 In Playback mode, press [m]. 2 Select z ĺ Delete ĺ Delete All. 3 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes. 107 Playback/Editing Enlarging a photo You can enlarge photos when viewing them in Playback mode. Pinch your fingers together or spread them apart on the screen to reduce or enlarge a photo. Drag the photo to move the magnified area. You can also use the Trim function to extract the portion of the image displayed on the screen and save it as a new file. Magnified area Magnification (The maximum magnification may differ by resolution.) Back Crop To Do this Move magnified area Press [D/I/C/F]. Crop the enlarged image Press [o]. (saved as a new file) Return to the original image Press [m]. Double-tap an area to enlarge it quickly. Viewing a slide show You can view photos in a slide show and apply various effects to the slide show. 1 In Playback mode, press [m]. 2 Select z ĺ Slide Show Options. 3 Select a slide show effect option. ‡ Skip to step 4 to start a slide show with no effects. * Default Option Description Play Mode Set whether or not to repeat the slide show. (One Play*, Repeat) Interval ‡ Set the interval between photos. (1 sec*, 3 sec, 5 sec, 10 sec) ‡ Intervals can only be set when the scene change effect is Off. Effect ‡ Set a scene change effect between photos. ‡ Select Off to cancel effects. Viewing photos 108 Playback/Editing > Viewing photos 4 Press [m]. 5 Select Start Slide Show. 6 View the slide show. ‡ Press [o] to pause. ‡ Press [o] again to resume. ‡ Press [m] to stop the slide show and return to Playback mode. Auto rotating With Auto Rotate on, the camera automatically rotates photos you have captured vertically so they fit the screen horizontally. To set auto rotate options, In Playback mode, press [m] ĺz ĺ Auto Rotate ĺ an option. 109 Playback/Editing In Playback mode, you can play a video, capture an image from a video, or crop a video to save as another file. Stop Icon Description View previous file/Scan backward. (Each time you touch the icon while playing the video, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.) Pause or resume playback. View next file/Scan forward. (Each time you touch the icon while playing the video, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.) Adjust the volume or mute the sound. Scanning backward or forward To scan backwards or forwards through a video file while it is playing, use one of the following methods. ‡ Touch . Each time you touch the icon, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X. ‡ Press [C/F]. Each time you press the button, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X. ‡ Drag the handles that appear on the progress bar to the left or right. You can change the playback position in the video. ‡ Drag an area on the screen to the left or right. You can change the playback position in the video. Playing videos 110 Playback/Editing > Playing videos Adjusting the brightness of a video Adjust the brightness of a video while playing it. To adjust the brightness of a video, Touch the left half of the display ĺ drag upward or downward. Stop Adjusting the volume of a video Adjust the volume of a video while playing it. To adjust the volume of a video, Touch the right half of the display ĺ drag upward or downward. Stop You can also press [D/I] to adjust the volume of a video. 111 Playback/Editing > Playing videos 9 Touch Trim to trim a video. ‡ You can adjust the scene to be cropped by dragging the handles that appear on the progress bar. 10 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes. ‡ The original video should be at least 10 seconds long. ‡ The camera will save the edited video as a new file and leave the original video intact. ‡ The point where you want the trimming to begin can be selected 2 seconds after playback starts. Capturing an image during playback 1 While viewing a video, press [o] or touch at the point where you want to capture an image. 2 Touch Capture. ‡ The resolution of the captured image will be the same as the original video. ‡ The captured image is saved as a new file. Trimming a video during playback 1 In Playback mode, scroll to a video, and then press [m]. 2 Select Trim Movie. 3 Press [o] or touch to start playing the video. 4 Press [o] or touch at the point where you want the trimming to begin. 5 Touch Start Point. 6 Press [o] or touch to resume playing the video. 7 Press [o] or touch at the point where you want the trimming to end. 8 Touch End Point. 112 Playback/Editing Edited photos are saved as new files under different file names. Photos captured in some modes cannot be edited with the Image Edit function. To edit images, In Playback mode, scroll to a photo, and then press [m] ĺ z ĺ Edit Image ĺan option. ‡ Some images may not be edited with the Image Edit function. In this case, use the supplied image editing software. ‡ RAW files cannot be edited with the Image Edit function. In this case, use the supplied image editing software. ‡ The camera will save edited photos as new files. ‡ When you edit photos, the camera will automatically convert them to a lower resolution. Photos that you rotate or resize manually are not automatically converted to a lower resolution. ‡ You cannot edit photos while viewing files as a folder. Open the folder and select a photo to edit each photo. Cropping a photo 1 Touch ĺ . 2 Drag the corner of the box to adjust the size of the area. 3 Drag the box to move the location of the area. 4 Press [o] or touch to save. Editing photos 113 Playback/Editing > Editing photos Rotating a photo 1 Touch ĺ . 2 Touch an option. Rotate : Right 90˚ 3 Press [o] or touch to save. ‡ You can also rotate a photo in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting z ĺ Rotate ĺ a desired option. ‡ The camera will overwrite the original file. Resizing photos Change the size of a photo and save it as a new file. 1 Touch ĺ . 2 Touch an option. Resize : 3888 x 2592 3 Press [o] or touch to save. Available resize options differ depending on the original size of the photo. 114 Playback/Editing > Editing photos Adjusting your photos You can correct captured photos by adjusting the brightness, contrast, or color. 1 Touch . 2 Touch an adjusting option. • If you selected (Auto adjustment), skip to step 6. Icon Description Original (Reset to the original image) Auto adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation RGB adjustment Color Temperature Exposure 3 Press [C/F] to adjust the option. • You can also drag the slider or touch +/- to adjust the option. 4 Press [o] or touch . 5 Touch . 6 Press [o] or touch to save. 115 Playback/Editing > Editing photos Retouching faces 1 Touch ĺ . 2 Press [C/F] to adjust the option. ‡ You can also drag the slider or touch +/- to adjust the option. ‡ As the number increases, the skin tone becomes brighter and smoother. 3 Press [o] or touch to save. 116 Playback/Editing > Editing photos Applying Smart Filter effects Apply special effects to your photos. 1 Touch , and then touch an option. Smart Filter : Vignetting Option Description Off No effect Vignetting Apply the retro-looking colors, high contrast, and strong vignette effect of Lomo cameras. Miniature Apply a tilt-shift effect to make the subject appear in miniature. Soft Focus Hide facial imperfections or apply dreamy effects. Sketch Apply a pen sketch effect. Option Description Fish-eye Distort close objects to imitate the visual effect of a fisheye lens. Classic Apply a black and white effect. Retro Apply a sepia tone effect. Oil Painting Apply an oil painting effect. Cartoon Apply a cartoon effect. Ink Painting Apply ink sketching effect. Cross Filter Add lines that radiate outward from bright objects to imitate the visual effect of a cross filter. Zooming Shot Blur the edges of a photo to emphasize the subjects in the center. 2 Press [o] or touch . 3 Touch to save. Chapter 4 Wireless network Learn how to connect to wireless local area networks (WLANs) and use functions. 118 Wireless network Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Learn to connect via an access point (AP) when you are in a range of a WLAN. You can also configure network settings. Connecting to a WLAN 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 Select , , , , or . 3 Follow the on-screen instructions until the Wi-Fi Setting screen appears. ‡ In some modes, press [m], and then select Wi-Fi Setting. ‡ The camera automatically searches for available AP devices. 4 Select an AP. Samsung1 Samsung2 Samsung3 Wi-Fi Setting Refresh Back ‡ Select Refresh to refresh the list of connectable APs. ‡ Select Add wireless network to add an AP manually. The AP name must be in English to add the AP manually. Icon Description Ad hoc AP Secured AP WPS AP Signal strength Press [F] or touch to open network setting options. ‡ When you select a secured AP, a pop-up window appears. Enter the required passwords to connect to the WLAN. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 122) ‡ When a login page appears, refer to "Using the login browser". (p. 120) ‡ When you select an unsecured AP, the camera will connect to the WLAN. ‡ If you select a WPS profile supported AP, select ĺ WPS PIN connection, and then enter a PIN on the AP device. You can also connect to a WPS profile supported AP by selecting ĺ WPS button connection on the camera, and then pushing the WPS button on the AP device. ‡ If a pop-up message about data collection regulations appears, read and agree to it. 119 Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Setting network options 1 In the Wi-Fi Setting screen, move to an AP, and then press [F] or touch . 2 Select each option, and then enter the required information. Option Description Network Password Enter the network password. IP Setting Set the IP address automatically or manually. Manually setting the IP address 1 In the Wi-Fi Setting screen, move to an AP, and then press [F] or touch . 2 Select IP Setting ĺ Manual. 3 Select each option, and then enter the required information. Option Description IP Enter the static IP address. Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask. Gateway Enter the gateway. DNS Server Enter the DNS address. 120 Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Using the login browser You can enter your login information via the login browser when connecting to some APs, sharing services, or cloud servers. Icon Description Close the login browser. Move to the previous page. Move to the next page. Stop loading the page. Reload the page. ‡ You may not be able to select some items depending on the page you connected to. This does not indicate a malfunction. ‡ The login browser may not close automatically after you log into some pages. If this occurs, close the login browser by touching , and then proceed with the desired operation. ‡ It may take longer to load the login page due to the page size or network speed. If this occurs, wait until the login information input window appears. 121 Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Network connection tips ‡ Some Wi-Fi features are not available if you do not insert a memory card. ‡ The quality of the network connection will be determined by the AP. ‡ The further the distance between your camera and the AP, the longer it will take to connect to the network. ‡ If a nearby device is using the same radio frequency signal as your camera, it may interrupt your connection. ‡ If your AP name is not in English, the camera may not be able to locate the device or the name may appear incorrectly. ‡ For network settings or a password, contact your network administrator or network service provider. ‡ If a WLAN requires authentication from the service provider, you may not be able to connect to it. To connect to the WLAN, contact your network service provider. ‡ Depending on the encryption type, the number of digits in the password may differ. ‡ A WLAN connection may not be possible in all surroundings. ‡ The camera may display a WLAN enabled printer on the AP List. You cannot connect to a network via a printer. ‡ You cannot connect your camera to a network and a TV simultaneously. ‡ Connecting to a network may incur additional charges. Costs will vary based on the conditions of your contract. ‡ If you cannot connect to a WLAN, try another AP from the available AP list. ‡ A login page may appear when you select free WLANs provided by some network service providers. Enter your ID and password to connect to the WLAN. For information about registering or the service, contact the network service providers. ‡ Be cautious when you enter personal information for an AP connection. Do not enter any payment or credit card information on your camera. The manufacturer is not liable for any problem caused by entering such information. ‡ Available network connections may differ by country. ‡ The WLAN feature of your camera must comply with radio transmission laws in your region. To ensure compliance, use the WLAN feature only in the country where you purchased the camera. ‡ The process for adjusting network settings may differ, depending on network conditions. ‡ Do not access a network that you are not authorized to use. ‡ Before you connect to a network, ensure your battery is fully charged. ‡ You cannot upload or send files captured in some modes. ‡ Files that you transfer to another device may not be supported by the device. In this case, use a computer to play back the files. 122 Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Entering text Learn how to enter text. The icons in the table let you move the cursor, change the case, etc. Press [D/I/C/F] to scroll to a key and press [o] to enter it. Or, touch a key to enter it. X Cancel Done Icon Description Move the cursor. In ABC mode, change the case. X Delete the last letter. Cancel Stop entering text and return to the previous page. Switch between Symbol mode and ABC mode. Enter a space. Done Save the displayed text. ‡ You can use only the English alphabets in some modes, regardless of the display language. ‡ Press [y] to move to Done directly. ‡ The number of characters you can enter varies depending on the situation. ‡ The screen may differ depending on the input mode. 123 Wireless network Using the NFC Feature (Tag & Go) Using NFC features in Playback mode (Photo Beam) In Playback mode, the camera transfers the current file to the smart phone automatically when you read a tag from an NFC-enabled device. ‡ To transfer multiple files, select files from the thumbnail view, and then read a tag from an NFC-enabled device. Using NFC features in Wi-Fi mode Select MobileLink or Remote Viewfinder from the pop-up window that appears by reading a tag from an NFC-enabled device. (p. 126, 130) Place a smart phone's NFC antenna near the camera’s NFC tag to launch the feature for saving photos to a smart phone automatically or the feature for using a smart phone as a remote shutter. You can also transfer files to an NFC-enabled device in Playback mode. ‡ This feature is supported by NFC-enabled smart phones running Android OS. It is recommended that you use the latest version. This feature is not available for iOS devices. ‡ You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps or the Google Play Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. ‡ For devices running Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, download Samsung SMART CAMERA App from www.samsung.com. ‡ To read an NFC tag, place the NFC-enabled device near the camera’s NFC tag for more than 2 seconds. ‡ You can set the size for transferred photos by pressing [m], and then selecting d ĺ MobileLink/NFC Image Size ĺ an option. ‡ Do not modify the NFC tag in any way. Using NFC features in Shooting mode Launch AutoShare or Remote Viewfinder by reading a tag from an NFCenabled device. (p. 124, 130) Preset to launch the Wi-Fi function by reading a tag on an NFC-enabled device. (p. 151) 124 Wireless network Saving files to a smart phone automatically The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the AutoShare feature via a WLAN. When you capture a photo with your camera, the photo is saved to a smart phone automatically. ‡ The AutoShare feature is supported by smart phones or tablets running Android OS or iOS. (Some features may not be supported by some models.) Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest version. If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform properly. ‡ You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. ‡ For devices running Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, download Samsung SMART CAMERA App from www.samsung.com. ‡ If you set this function, the setting is maintained even when you change the Shooting mode. ‡ This feature may not be supported in some modes or may not be available with some shooting options. 1 In Shooting mode, touch ĺAutoShare. ‡ You can also press [m] ĺb ĺ AutoShare ĺ On. ‡ If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. ‡ To require PIN verification when connecting the smart phone to the camera, select Security Settings. (p. 155) 2 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App. ‡ For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. ‡ To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 28) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is connected to your camera, and then skip to step 5. 3 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone to the camera. ‡ The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time. ‡ If the Wi-Fi Privacy lock is enabled, enter the PIN displayed on the camera to the smart phone. 125 Wireless network > Saving files to a smart phone automatically 4 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your camera. ‡ If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected automatically. ‡ An icon that shows the connection status ( ) will appear on the camera’s screen. 5 Capture a photo. ‡ The captured photo is saved to the camera, and then transferred to the smart phone. If a memory card is not inserted or the memory is full, the captured photo is transferred to the smart phone without being saved to the camera. ‡ If you recorded a video, it is saved only to the camera. ‡ The image file captured while recording a video is not saved on the smart phone. ‡ If the GPS feature is activated on the smart phone, the GPS information will be saved with the captured photo. 126 Wireless network The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the MobileLink feature via a WLAN. You can easily send photos or videos to your smart phone. ‡ The MobileLink feature is supported by smart phones or tablets running Android OS or iOS. (Some features may not be supported by some models.) Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest version. If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform properly. ‡ You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. ‡ For devices running Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, download Samsung SMART CAMERA App from www.samsung.com. ‡ When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. ‡ You can view up to 1,000 recent files and send up to 1,000 files at a time. ‡ When you send Full HD videos using MobileLink feature, you may not be able to play back files on some devices. ‡ When using this feature on an iOS device, the device may lose its Wi-Fi connection. ‡ You cannot send RAW files. ‡ You can set the size for transferred photos by pressing [m], and then selecting d ĺ MobileLink/NFC Image Size ĺ an option. ‡ You can also touch ĺ MobileLink on the screen in Shooting mode. ‡ You can also send files in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi) ĺ MobileLink or by selecting ĺ MobileLink. ‡ The screen turns off if you perform no operations on the camera for 30 seconds. 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 On the camera, select . ‡ If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. ‡ To require PIN verification when connecting the smart phone to the camera, select Security Settings. (p. 155) 3 On the camera, select a sending option. ‡ If you select Select Files from Smartphone, you can use your smart phone to view and share files stored on the camera. The screen turns off if you perform no operations on the smart phone for 30 seconds. ‡ If you select Select Files from Camera, you can select files to send from the camera. 4 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App. ‡ For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. ‡ To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 28) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is connected to your camera, and then skip to step 7. Sending photos or videos to a smart phone 127 Wireless network > Sending photos or videos to a smart phone 5 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone to the camera. ‡ The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time. ‡ If the Wi-Fi Privacy lock is enabled, enter the PIN displayed on the camera to the smart phone. 6 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your camera. ‡ If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected automatically. 7 On the smart phone or camera, select files to transfer from the camera. 8 On the smart phone, touch the copy button or on the camera, select Send. ‡ The camera will send the files to the smart phone. 128 Wireless network Sending photos or videos to multiple smart phones The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the Group Share feature via a WLAN. You can easily send photos or videos to multiple smart phones. ‡ The Group Share feature is supported by smart phones or tablets running Android OS or iOS. (Some features may not be supported by some models.) Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest version. If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform properly. ‡ You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. ‡ For devices running Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, download Samsung SMART CAMERA App from www.samsung.com. ‡ When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. ‡ Transferring files to multiple smart phones may take longer than transferring files to one device. ‡ When you send Full HD videos using Group Share feature, you may not be able to play back files on some devices. ‡ When using this feature on an iOS device, the device may lose its Wi-Fi connection. ‡ You cannot send RAW files. ‡ You can set the size for transferred photos by pressing [m], and then selecting d ĺ MobileLink/NFC Image Size ĺ an option. ‡ You can also send files in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi) ĺ Group Share or by selecting ĺ Group Share. 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 On the camera, select . ‡ If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. ‡ To require PIN verification when connecting the smart phone to the camera, select Security Settings. (p. 155) 3 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App. ‡ For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. ‡ To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 28) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is connected to your camera, and then skip to step 6. 129 Wireless network > Sending photos or videos to multiple smart phones 4 Touch Connect next to the desired smart phone listed on the camera. ‡ If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected automatically. ‡ You can connect to up to 4 smart phones. ‡ If the Wi-Fi Privacy lock is enabled, enter the PIN displayed on the camera to the smart phone. 5 Select Next. 6 On camera, select files to transfer from the camera. 7 On the camera, select Send. ‡ The camera will send the files to the smart phone. ‡ When you connect to multiple smart phones, the camera will send the files to all devices at the same time. 130 Wireless network The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the Remote Viewfinder feature via a WLAN. Use the smart phone as a remote shutter release with the Remote Viewfinder feature. The captured photo will display on the smart phone. ‡ The Remote Viewfinder feature is supported by smart phones or tablets running Android OS or iOS. (Some features may not be supported by some models.) Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest version. If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform properly. ‡ You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. ‡ For devices running Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, download Samsung SMART CAMERA App from www.samsung.com. ‡ You can also touch ĺ Remote Viewfinder on the screen in Shooting mode. ‡ Continuously captured photos or videos will not display on the smart phone. 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 On the camera, select . ‡ If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. ‡ To require PIN verification when connecting the smart phone to the camera, select Security Settings. (p. 155) 3 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App. ‡ For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. ‡ To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 28) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is connected to your camera, and then skip to step 6. 4 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone to the camera. ‡ The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time. ‡ If the Wi-Fi Privacy lock is enabled, enter the PIN displayed on the camera to the smart phone. Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release 131 Wireless network > Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release 5 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your camera. ‡ If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected automatically. 6 On the smart phone, select q to open the smart panel. 7 On the smart phone, set the shooting options. ‡ While using this feature, some buttons are not available on your camera. ‡ With the smart phone, you can operate the camera only by touching the screen. ‡ Some shooting options are not supported. ‡ Shooting options that you have set will remain on the camera after the connection with the smart phone has ended. 8 Touch to return to the shooting screen. 9 On the smart phone, touch and hold to focus, and then release it to capture the photo. ‡ Touch to record a video and touch to stop a video. ‡ If the GPS feature is activated on the smart phone, the GPS information will be saved with the captured photo. ‡ When you use this feature, the ideal distance between the camera and the smart phone may vary, depending on your surroundings. ‡ The smart phone must be within 7 m of the camera to use this feature. ‡ It will take some time to capture the photo after you release on the smart phone. ‡ If the file save option is set to Smartphone + Camera, only photos will be transferred to the smart phone. (Videos and RAW files will not be transferred.) ‡ If you capture photos continuously when the file save option is set to Smartphone + Camera, photos will not be transferred to the smart phone. ‡ The smart phone's screen will not mirror the camera's display when recording a video. ‡ The Remote Viewfinder function will deactivate when: - there is an incoming call on the smart phone - either the camera or the smart phone turns off - device loses its connection to the WLAN - the Wi-Fi connection is poor or unstable - you perform no operations for approximately 3 minutes while connected - folder and file number are max values ‡ The screen turns off if you perform no operations on the camera for 30 seconds. 132 Wireless network Using the Baby Monitor 3 On the camera, select an AP from the list, and then position the camera. ‡ Place the camera in a safe location where children or pets cannot reach it. ‡ Point the camera lens at the subject. ‡ We recommend you connect the camera to a power outlet with the AC adapter. 4 On the smart phone, select the AP that the camera is connected to. ‡ For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. 5 On the smart phone, turn on the Samsung Home Monitor application. Use the Baby Monitor feature to connect the camera to a smart phone on which the Samsung Home Monitor is installed, and monitor a location. ‡ The Baby Monitor feature is supported by smart phones that support WVGA (800X480) or higher resolution and run the Android OS or iOS. (Some features may not be supported by some models.) Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest version. If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform properly. ‡ You should install the Samsung Home Monitor application on your smart phone before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. ‡ Use this feature indoors only. 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 On the camera, select . ‡ If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. 133 Wireless network > Using the Baby Monitor 6 Start live video or sound monitoring. ‡ Watch live video from the camera on your smart phone. During video monitoring, touch the Sound Monitoring Mode button on the smart phone to stop the video stream. If the camera detects noise, an alarm will notify you on the smart phone. ‡ During live video monitoring via the smart phone, video is not saved on the camera. ‡ If the monitored location is dark, touch to turn on the AF-assist light. ‡ During sound monitoring, alarms will sound on the smart phone if the camera detects noise for a short period at a volume that is higher than the designated level. ‡ During live video monitoring, alarms will not sound on the smart phone even if the camera detects noise. 7 Touch to exit the Samsung Home Monitor application. Adjusting the noise level for alarm activation You can set the level of noise that will activate an alarm while using sound monitoring. Press [D/I] to adjust the noise level. Noise level for alarm activation: When the camera detects noise that exceeds the designated level for a short period, an alarm will sound. Back Wi-Fi Setting Sensor sensitivity Do not use this feature for illegal purposes. 134 Wireless network Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos You can send photos or videos that you captured with the camera to a PC wirelessly. Installing the program for Auto Backup on your PC 1 Install i-Launcher on the PC. (p. 161) 2 Connect the camera to the PC with the USB cable. 3 When the Auto Backup program icon appears, click it. ‡ The Auto Backup program is installed on the PC. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation. 4 Remove the USB cable. Before installing the program, ensure that the PC is connected to a network. Sending photos or videos to a PC 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 Select . ‡ If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. ‡ The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. ‡ If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 118) 3 Select a backup PC. 135 Wireless network > Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos 4 Select OK. ‡ To cancel sending, select Cancel. ‡ You cannot select individual files to backup. This function backs up only new files on the camera. ‡ The backup's progress will be shown on the PC monitor. ‡ When the transfer is completed, the camera will turn off automatically in approximately 30 seconds. Select Cancel to return to the previous screen and prevent the camera from turning off automatically. ‡ To turn off your PC automatically after the transfer is complete, select Shut down PC after backup. ‡ To change the backup PC, select Change PC. ‡ When you connect the camera to the WLAN, select the AP that is connected to the PC. ‡ The camera will search for available access points even if you are connecting to the same access point again. ‡ If you turn off the camera or remove the battery while sending files, the file transfer will be interrupted. ‡ While you are using this feature, the shutter control is disabled on your camera. ‡ You can connect only one camera to the PC at a time for sending files. ‡ The backup may be canceled due to network conditions. ‡ When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. ‡ You must turn off Windows Firewall and any other firewalls before using this feature. ‡ You can send up to 1,000 recent files. ‡ On the PC software, the server name must be entered in the Latin alphabet and can contain no more than 48 characters. 136 Wireless network 5 Select the Name box, enter your name, and then touch Done. Sender Setting Name Save Email Reset 6 Select the Email box, enter your email address, and then touch Done. 7 Select Save to save your changes. ‡ To delete your information, select Reset. You can change settings in the email menu and send photos or videos stored on the camera via email. Changing email settings In the email menu, you can change settings for storing your information. You can also set or change the email password. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 122) Storing your information 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 Select . ‡ The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. ‡ If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 118) 3 Press [m]. 4 Select Sender Setting. Sending photos or videos via email 137 Wireless network > Sending photos or videos via email Setting an email password 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 Select . ‡ The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. ‡ If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 118) 3 Press [m]. 4 Select Setting Password ĺ On. ‡ To deactivate the password, select Off. 5 When the pop-up appears, select OK. 6 Enter a 4-digit password. 7 Enter the password again. 8 When the pop-up appears, select OK. If you lost your password, you can reset it by selecting Reset on the password setting screen. When you reset the information, the previously saved user’s setting information and email address will be deleted. 138 Wireless network > Sending photos or videos via email Changing the email password 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 Select . ‡ The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. ‡ If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 118) 3 Press [m]. 4 Select Change Password. 5 Enter your current 4-digit password. 6 Enter a new 4-digit password. 7 Enter the new password again. 8 When the pop-up appears, select OK. Sending photos or videos via email You can send photos or videos stored on the camera via email. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 122) 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 Select . 3 Connect to a WLAN. (p. 118) 4 Select the Sender box, enter your email address, and then touch Done. ‡ If you have previously saved your information, it will be inserted automatically. (p. 136) ‡ To use an address from the list of previous senders, select ĺ an address. 139 Wireless network > Sending photos or videos via email 5 Select the Receiver box, enter an email address, and then touch Done. ‡ To use an address from the list of previous recipients, select ĺ an address. ‡ Select to add additional recipients. You can input up to 30 recipients. ‡ Select to delete an address from the list. 6 Select Next. 7 Select files to send. ‡ You can select up to 20 files. The total size must be 7 MB or less. 8 Select Next. 9 Select the comment box, enter your comments, and then touch Done. 10 Select Send. ‡ The camera will send the email. ‡ If an email fails to send, a message prompting you to send it again appears. ‡ Even if a photo appears to have transferred successfully, errors with the recipient’s email account may cause the photo to be rejected or recognized as spam. ‡ You may not be able to send an email if no network connection is available or if your email account settings are incorrect. ‡ You cannot send an email if the combined file sizes exceed the 7 MB. The maximum resolution of photos you can send is 2M. The maximum resolution of videos you can send is . If the selected photo has a resolution higher than 2M, it will be automatically resized to a lower resolution. ‡ If you cannot send an email because of firewall or user authentication settings, contact your network administrator or network service provider. ‡ When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. ‡ You can also send an email in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi) ĺ Email or by selecting ĺ Email. 140 Wireless network Upload your photos or videos to file sharing services. Available sharing services will be displayed on your camera. To upload files to some sharing services, you must visit the website and register before connecting your camera. Accessing a sharing service 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 Select . 3 Connect to a WLAN. (p. 118) 4 Select a sharing service. ‡ If the pop-up message that prompts you to create an account appears, select OK. 5 Enter your ID and password to log in. ‡ For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 122) ‡ If you connected to some sharing services, refer to "Using the login browser". (p. 120) ‡ To select an ID from the list, select ĺ an ID. ‡ If you have previously logged in to the sharing service, you may be logged in automatically. You must have an existing account on the file sharing service to use this feature. Using photo or video sharing services 141 Wireless network > Using photo or video sharing services Uploading photos or videos 1 Access the sharing service with your camera. 2 Select files to upload. ‡ You can select up to 20 files. The total size must be 10 MB or less. (On some sharing services, the total size or number of files may vary.) 3 Select Upload. ‡ The camera will upload photos or videos. ‡ When an upload fails, a message prompting you to upload it again appears. ‡ On some sharing services, you can enter your comments by selecting the comment box. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 122) ‡ You can set an upload folder for Facebook by pressing [m], and then selecting Upload Folder (Facebook) on the sharing service's list screen. ‡ You cannot upload files if the file size exceeds the limit. The maximum resolution of photos you can upload is 2M. The maximum resolution of videos you can upload is . If the selected photo has a resolution higher than 2M, it will be automatically resized to a lower resolution. (On some sharing services, the maximum photo resolution may vary.) ‡ The method of uploading photos or videos may differ depending on the selected sharing service. ‡ If you cannot access a sharing service because of firewall or user authentication settings, contact your network administrator or network service provider. ‡ Uploaded photos or videos may be automatically titled with the date they were captured. ‡ The speed of your internet connection may affect how quickly photos upload or web pages open. ‡ When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. ‡ You can also upload photos or videos to file sharing services in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi) ĺ a sharing service or by selecting ĺ a sharing service. ‡ You cannot upload videos to some sharing services. ‡ When you upload photos to a file sharing service, the photo may be resized to 2M or 1M depending on their policy. 142 Wireless network Using Samsung Link to send files You can upload files from your camera to the Samsung Link online storage or view files on a Samsung Link device connected to the same AP. Uploading photos to an online storage 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 Select ĺWeb storage. ‡ If the guide message appears, select OK. ‡ The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. ‡ If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 118) ‡ To change the size for uploaded photos, press [m], and then select Upload Image Size. 3 Enter your ID and password, and then select Login ĺ OK. ‡ For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 122) ‡ To select an ID from the list, select ĺ an ID. ‡ If you have previously logged in to the website, you may be logged in automatically. To use this feature, you must create a Samsung Link account and an account with an affiliated online storage service using your PC. After you have finished creating the accounts, add your online storage account to Samsung Link. 4 Select an online storage service. ‡ Before you use this feature, you must visit the Samsung Link website with your PC and register an online storage. 5 Select files to upload, and then select Upload. ‡ You cannot upload video files to Samsung Link online storage. ‡ When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. ‡ You can upload up to 20 files. ‡ You can also upload photos in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi) ĺ Samsung Link or by selecting ĺ Samsung Link. 143 Wireless network > Using Samsung Link to send files Viewing photos or videos on devices that support Samsung Link 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 Select ĺNearby devices. ‡ The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. ‡ If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 118) ‡ You can set to allow only selected devices or all devices to connect by pressing [m], and then selecting DLNA Access Control on the screen. ‡ A sharing file list is created. Wait until other devices can find your camera. 3 Connect the Samsung Link device to a network, and then turn on the Samsung Link feature. ‡ Refer to your device's user manual for more information. 4 On the camera, allow the Samsung Link device to connect to your camera. 5 On the Samsung Link device, select a camera to connect to. 6 On the Samsung Link device, browse the shared photos or videos. ‡ For information about searching for the camera and browsing the photos or videos on the Samsung Link device, refer to the device's user manual. ‡ Videos may not play smoothly depending on the type of Samsung Link device or the network condition. AP ▲ The camera is connected to a TV that supports Samsung Link via WLAN. 144 Wireless network > Using Samsung Link to send files ‡ You can share up to 1,000 recent files. ‡ On a Samsung Link device, you can view only photos or videos captured with your camera. ‡ The range of the wireless connection between your camera and a Samsung Link device may vary depending on the specifications of the AP. ‡ If the camera is connected to 2 Samsung Link devices, playback may be slower. ‡ Photos or videos will be shared in their original sizes. ‡ You can use this feature only with devices that support Samsung Link. ‡ Shared photos or videos will not be stored on the Samsung Link device, but they can be stored in the camera to meet the device's specifications. ‡ Transferring photos or videos to the Samsung Link device may take some time depending on the network connection, the number of files to be shared, or the sizes of the files. ‡ If you power off the camera abnormally while viewing photos or videos on a Samsung Link device (for example, by removing the battery), the device considers the camera to still be connected. ‡ The order of photos or videos on the camera may be different than on the Samsung Link device. ‡ Depending on the number of photos or videos you want to share, it may take some time to load your photos or videos and complete the initial set-up process. ‡ While viewing photos or videos on the Samsung Link device, continuously using the device's remote or performing additional operations on the device may prevent this feature from working properly. ‡ If you reorder or sort files on the camera while viewing them on a Samsung Link device, you must repeat the initial set-up process to update the list of files on the device. ‡ When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. ‡ We recommend you use a network cable to connect your Samsung Link device to your AP. This will minimize any video ‘Stuttering’ you may experience when streaming content. ‡ To view files on a Samsung Link device using the Nearby devices feature, enable multicast mode on your AP. Chapter 5 Camera settings menu Learn about the user settings and general settings menu. You can adjust the settings to better suit your needs and preferences. 146 Camera settings menu You can set the user environment with these settings. To set user options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺ d ĺ an option. Available items and the order of them may differ depending on shooting conditions. ISO Customizing ISO Expansion You can select ISO 100 and 25600. ISO Step You can set the size for the ISO sensitivity by either 1/3 or 1 step. Auto ISO Range You can set the maximum ISO value under which each EV step is chosen when you set the ISO to Auto. User settings 147 Camera settings menu > User settings Noise Reduction Use the Noise Reduction to reduce the visual noise in photos. * Default Option Description High ISO NR This function reduces noise that may occur when you set a high ISO sensitivity. (Off, High, Normal*, Low) Long Term NR This function reduces noise when you set the camera for a long exposure. (Off, On*) Bracket Settings You can set up the options for each bracketing. * Default Option Description AE Bracket Settings Set the exposure interval. (-/+0.3 EV*, -/+0.7 EV, -/+1.0 EV, -/+1.3 EV, -/+1.7 EV, -/+2.0 EV, -/+2.3 EV, -/+2.7 EV, -/+3.0 EV) WB Bracket Settings Adjust the White Balance interval range of the 3 bracketed photos. (AB-/+3*, AB-/+2, AB-/+1, MG-/+3, MG-/+2, MG-/+1) For example, AB-/+3 adjusts the Amber value plus or minus three steps. MG-/+3 adjusts the Magenta value the same amount. P Wiz Bracket Settings Select 3 Picture Wizard settings the camera uses to capture the 3 bracketed photos. Depth Bracket Settings Set the depth interval. (-/+0.3, -/+0.7, -/+1.0*, -/+1.3, -/+1.7, -/+2.0, -/+2.3, -/+2.7, -/+3.0) 148 Camera settings menu > User settings Color Space The color space option allows you to select methods for representing colors. Digital imaging devices such as digital cameras, monitors, and printers have their own methods for representing colors, which are called color spaces. * Default Option Description sRGB* sRGB (Standard RGB) is an international specification to define the color space created by IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). It is widely used for creating colors on PC monitors and is also the standard color space for Exif. sRGB is recommended for regular images and images you intend to publish on the Internet. Adobe RGB Adobe RGB is used for commercial printing and has a larger color range than sRGB. Its wider range of colors helps you to easily edit photos on a computer. Note that individual programs are generally compatible with a limited number of color spaces. Adobe RGB sRGB When the color space is set to Adobe RGB, photos will be saved as "_SAMXXXX.JPG". 149 Camera settings menu > User settings Distortion Correct You can correct lens distortion that might occur from lenses. This feature is available with lenses that support it. Touch Operation Set to enable touch operation in Shooting mode. * Default Option Description Off Do not use touch operations in Shooting mode. (You can use touch operations in other situations.) On* Use touch operations in Shooting mode. iFn Customizing You can select options that can be adjusted when you press [i-Function] on an i-Function lens. Option Description Aperture Set to adjust the aperture value. Shutter Speed Set to adjust the shutter speed. EV Set to adjust the exposure value. ISO Set to adjust ISO sensitivity. White Balance Set to adjust the White Balance. 150 Camera settings menu > User settings User Display You can add or remove shooting information from the display. 1 2 3 No. Description 1 Icons Set to display icons on the right in Shooting mode. 2 Date & Time Set to display the date and time. 3 Histogram Set the histogram on the display on or off. About histogram A histogram is a graph that shows the brightness distribution of a photo. A histogram inclined to the left indicates a dark photo. A histogram inclined to the right indicates a bright photo. The height of the graph is related to color information. The graph gets higher if a specific color is more common. Insufficient exposure Balanced exposure Excessive exposure 151 Camera settings menu > User settings Key Mapping You can change the function assigned to the Custom button or the DIRECT LINK button. * Default Button Function Custom Set the Custom button's function. ‡ Optical Preview*: Execute the Depth of Field Preview function for the current aperture value. (p. 22) ‡ One Touch WB (White Balance): Execute the Custom White Balance function. ‡ One Touch RAW +: Save a file in the RAW+JPEG format. To save a file in JPEG format, press the button again. ‡ Reset: Reset some settings. ‡ AEL: Execute the auto exposure lock function. (Halfpressing [Shutter] executes the auto focus lock function.) ‡ AEL Hold: Keep executing the auto exposure lock function after shooting. (The exposure remains locked even after you capture a photo.) DIRECT LINK Set the DIRECT LINK button's function. (AutoShare, MobileLink, Remote Viewfinder, Group Share, Baby Monitor, Auto Backup, Email, SNS & Cloud, Samsung Link) Live view NFC In Shooting mode, turn on the NFC feature on an NFC-enabled smart phone and place the smart phone's NFC antenna near the camera’s NFC tag to launch AutoShare or Remote Viewfinder. This feature is supported by NFC-enabled smart phones running Android OS. It is recommended that you use the latest version. This feature is not available for iOS devices. MobileLink/NFC Image Size Set the size of photos to transfer to a smartphone using the MobileLink or NFC functions. * Default Option Description Resize to 2M or lower If a photo's size is larger than 3M, it will be transferred after resizing it to 2M or lower. Original* The photo will be transferred in its original size. Grid Line Select a guide to help you compose a scene. (Off*, 4 X 4, 3 X 3, Cross, Diagonal) 152 Camera settings menu > User settings Lens Button Speed Settings Set the zoom speed for the Power Zoom lens' buttons at either fast, medium, or slow speed. At fast speed, zoom noise increases and can be recorded in videos. This function is available only when you attach the Power Zoom lens using the mount adapter. AF Lamp When shooting in dark places, turn the AF lamp on in order to have a better auto focus. The Auto Focus functions more accurately in dark places when the AF lamp is on. Auto Self-Shot Set to turn on the camera and enter Self shot mode automatically when you flip the display upward. In Self shot mode, the timer (3 seconds), one-touch shot, face detection, and beauty face options are automatically activated. 153 Camera settings menu Learn to configure your camera's settings. To set Setting options, In Shooting or Playback mode, press [m] ĺ q ĺ an option. * Default Item Description Sound ‡ System Volume: Set the sound volume or turn all sound off entirely. (Off, Low, Medium*, High) Even if the system volume is turned off, the camera emits the sound while playing a video or a slide show. ‡ AF Sound: Set the sound the camera emits when you half-press the shutter button on or off. (Off, On*) ‡ Button Sound: Set the sound the camera emits when you press the buttons or touch the screen on or off. (Off, On*) Quick View Set the Quick View time length–the amount of time the camera displays a photo immediately after you capture it. (Off, 1 sec*, 3 sec, 5 sec, Hold) * Default Item Description Display Adjust Adjust the display brightness, auto brightness setting, display color, or level gauge. ‡ Display Brightness: You can adjust the display brightness manually. ‡ Auto Brightness: Turn auto brightness on or off. (Off, On*) ‡ Display Color: You can adjust the display color manually. ‡ Horizontal Calibration: Calibrate the level gauge. If the level gauge is not level, position the camera on the level surface, and then follow the on-screen instructions. ‡ You cannot access the Horizontal Calibration option in Playback mode. ‡ You cannot calibrate the level gauge in portrait orientation. Auto Display Off Set the display off time. The display turns off if you do not use the camera for the time you set. (Off, 30 sec*, 1 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min) Auto Power Off Set power shut off time. The camera shuts off if you do not use it for the time you set. (Off, 1 min*, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min, 30 min) ‡ The camera retains the power-off time setting even if you replace the battery. ‡ Auto Power Off may not work if the camera is connected to a computer or a TV or playing a slide show or a movie. Setting 154 Camera settings menu > Setting * Default Item Description Help Guide Display Set to display help text about menus and functions. (Off, On*) Press [n] to hide the help text. Language Set a language the camera shows on the display. Date & Time Set date, time, date format, time zone and whether to imprint the date on photos. (Time Zone, Date/Time Set, Date Type, Time Type, Imprint) ‡ The date appears on the lower right side of the photo. ‡ When you print a photo, some printers may not print the date appropriately. Video Out Set the video signal output appropriate for your country when connecting the camera to an external video device such as a monitor or HDTV. ‡ NTSC: USA, Canada, Japan, Korea, Taiwan, Mexico, etc. ‡ PAL (Supports only PAL B, D, G, H, or I): Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, England, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Singapore, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, Norway, etc. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) When you connect the camera to an HDTV that supports Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), you can control the play function of the camera with the TV remote control. ‡ Off: You cannot control the play function of camera with the TV remote control. ‡ On*: You can control the play function of camera with the TV remote control. * Default Item Description HDMI Output When you connect the camera to an HDTV with an HDMI cable, you can change the resolution of the image. ‡ NTSC: Auto*, 1080i, 720p, 480p, 576p (activates only when PAL is selected) If the connected HDTV does not support the resolution you select, the camera sets the resolution one level lower. File Number Set the method of numbering files and folders. ‡ Reset: After using the reset function, the next file name is started at 0001. ‡ Series*: New file numbers continue the existing number sequence, even if you have installed a new memory card, formatted the card, or deleted all photos. ‡ The first folder name is 100PHOTO, if you have selected the sRGB color space and Standard file naming, the first file name is SAM_0001. ‡ File name numbers are increased by 1 from SAM_0001 to SAM_9999. ‡ Folder numbers are increased by 1 from 100PHOTO to 999PHOTO. ‡ The maximum number of files that can be saved in one folder is 9,999. ‡ File numbers are assigned according to DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) specifications. ‡ If you change a file name (for example, on a computer), the camera will not be able to play the file. 155 Camera settings menu > Setting * Default Item Description Format Format the memory card. Formatting deletes all existing files including protected files. (No*, Yes) Errors can occur if you use a memory card formatted by another brand of camera, a memory card reader, or a computer. Please format memory cards in the camera before using them to capture photos. Device Information View the firmware version of the body and the lens, Mac address, and network certification number, or update the firmware. ‡ Firmware Update: Update the firmware of the camera body or lens. (Body Firmware, Lens Firmware) ‡ You can update the firmware by connecting the camera to the computer and starting i-Launcher. For more details, refer to page 177. ‡ You cannot run a firmware upgrade without a fully charged battery. Recharge the battery fully before running a firmware upgrade. ‡ If you update the firmware, user settings and values will be reset. (Date, time, language, and video out will not change.) ‡ Do not turn the camera off while the update is in progress. * Default Item Description Wi-Fi Privacy lock Set to require a PIN when connecting the camera and a smart phone. ‡ PIN: Enter a PIN before connecting. ‡ None*: Allow a connection without requiring a PIN. ‡ Connections will automatically be made without requiring a PIN when using the NFC function. ‡ PINs are automatically generated and renewed only when you reset the camera settings or update the firmware. ‡ If you have previously connected your camera to a smart phone via a PIN, they will connect automatically. Reset Reset the setup menu and shooting options to the factory defaults. (Date, time, language, and video output settings do not change.) (No*, Yes) Open Source License View open source licenses. Chapter 6 Connecting to external devices Make full use of the camera by connecting it to external devices such as a computer or HDTV. 157 Connecting to external devices Play back photos or videos by connecting your camera to an HDTV using an optional HDMI cable. 1 In Shooting or Playback mode, press [m] ĺ q ĺ HDMI Output ĺ an option. (p. 154) 2 Turn off your camera and HDTV. 3 Connect your camera to your HDTV with the optional HDMI cable. 4 Turn on your HDTV, and then select the HDMI video source. 5 Turn on the camera. ‡ The camera automatically enters into Playback mode when you connect it to an HDTV. 6 View photos or play videos using the camera buttons. ‡ When using the HDMI cable, you can connect the camera to an HDTV using the Anynet+(CEC) method. ‡ The Anynet+(CEC) functions allow you to control connected devices using the TV remote control. ‡ If the HDTV supports Anynet+(CEC), the TV turns on automatically when used in conjunction with the camera. This feature may not be available on some HDTVs. ‡ When connected to an HDTV by an HDMI cable, the camera cannot capture a photo or video. ‡ When connected to an HDTV, some of the camera’s playback functions may not be available. ‡ The length of time after which the camera and an HDTV are connected may vary depending on the memory card that you are using. As the main feature of a memory card is to increase the transfer speed, it is not necessarily true to say that a memory card with a faster transfer speed is also fast in using the HDMI function. Viewing files on an HDTV 158 Connecting to external devices Transfer files on a memory card to your computer by connecting the camera to the PC. Transferring files to your Windows OS computer Connecting the camera as a removable disk You can connect the camera to your computer as a removable disk. Open the removable disk and transfer files to your computer. 1 Turn off the camera. 2 Connect the camera to your computer with the USB cable. ‡ You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. ‡ If you try to plug the USB cable into the HDMI port, the camera may not work properly. 3 Turn on the camera. ‡ The computer recognizes the camera automatically. 4 On your computer, select My Computer ĺ Removable Disk ĺ DCIM ĺ 100PHOTO. 5 Select the files you want, and then drag or save them to your computer. Transferring files to your computer 159 Connecting to external devices > Transferring files to your computer Disconnecting the camera (for Windows XP) With Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows 8, the methods for disconnecting the camera are similar. 1 Ensure that no data is being transferred between the camera and the computer. ‡ If the status lamp on your camera is blinking, it means the data transfer is in progress. Please wait until the status lamp stops blinking. 2 Click on the tool bar at the bottom right of your computer screen. 3 Click the pop-up message. 4 Click the message box indicating safely removed. 5 Remove the USB cable. Transferring files to your Mac OS Mac OS 10.5 or later is supported. 1 Turn off the camera. 2 Connect your camera to a Macintosh computer with the USB cable. ‡ You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. ‡ If you try to plug the USB cable into the HDMI port, the camera may not work properly. 160 Connecting to external devices > Transferring files to your computer 3 Turn on the camera. ‡ The computer recognizes the camera automatically and displays a removable disk icon. 4 On your computer, open the removable disk. 5 Transfer photos or videos to the Mac OS computer. 161 Connecting to external devices You can view and edit files using the provided programs. You can also send the files to a PC wirelessly. Installing programs from the provided CD 1 Insert the installation CD into your PC. 2 Select a language. 3 Select a program to install. 4 Follow the on-screen instructions. 5 Click Exit to complete the installation. Available programs when using i-Launcher Item Description Firmware Upgrade You can download the firmware of your camera. PC Auto Backup i-Launcher provides a link for downloading the PC Auto Backup program when you connect the camera to a computer. You can send photos or videos that you captured with the camera to a PC wirelessly. Using programs on a PC 162 Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC Using i-Launcher i-Launcher allows you update the firmware of the camera or the lens or provides a link to download the PC Auto Backup program. Requirements for Windows OS Item Requirements CPU Intel® Core™ 2 Duo 1.66 GHz or higher/ AMD Athlon X2 Dual-Core 2.2 GHz or higher RAM Minimum 512 MB RAM (1 GB or more recommended) OS* Windows 7, Windows 8 Hard disk capacity 250 MB or more (1 GB and above recommended) Others • CD-ROM drive • 1024X768 pixels, 16-bit color display compatible monitor (1280X1024 pixels, 32-bit color display recommended) • USB 2.0 port • nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT or higher/ ATI X1600 series or higher • Microsoft DirectX 9.0c or later * A 32-bit version of i-Launcher will be installed—even on 64-bit editions of Windows 7 and Windows 8. • The requirements on the following page are recommendations only. i-Launcher may not work properly even when the computer meets the requirements, depending on the condition of your computer. • If your computer does not meet the requirements, videos may not play correctly. The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage that results from using unqualified computers such as a computer you assembled yourself. Requirements for Mac OS Item Requirements OS Mac OS 10.5 or higher (except PowerPC) RAM Minimum 256 MB RAM (512 MB or more recommended) Hard disk capacity Minimum 110 MB Others USB 2.0 port, CD-ROM drive Opening i-Launcher On your computer, select Start ĺ All Programs ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher ĺ Samsung i-Launcher. Or, click Applications ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher on your Mac OS computer. 163 Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC Downloading the firmware From the Samsung i-Launcher screen, click Firmware Upgrade. For information about updating the firmware, refer to page 177. Downloading the PC Auto Backup program From the Samsung i-Launcher screen, click PC Auto Backup. For information about installing the PC Auto Backup program, refer to page 134. Installing Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 1 Insert Adobe Photoshop Lightroom DVD-ROM into your PC. 2 Select a language. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions. Using Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Photos captured by a camera are often transformed to JPEG formats and stored in the memory according to the settings of the camera at the time of shooting. RAW files are not transformed to JPEG formats and are stored in the memory without any changes. With Adobe Photoshop Lightroom, you can calibrate exposures, White Balances, tones, contrasts, and colors of photos. You can also edit JPEG or TIFF files as well as RAW files. For more information, refer to the program guide. ‡ Depending on your version of Adobe Photoshop Lightroom, you may not be able to open RAW files. In this case, update the program from the Adobe website. ‡ In Adobe Photoshop Lightroom, an image’s brightness, color and other effects may be displayed differently. This occurs because the original camera settings and options applied during image capture are removed, ready for it to be processed in Adobe Photoshop Lightroom. Chapter 7 Appendix Get information about error messages, camera maintenance, trouble shooting tips, specifications, and optional accessories. 165 Appendix When the following error messages appear, try these remedies. Error messages Suggested remedies Lens is locked The lens is locked. Rotate the lens counterclockwise. (p. 48) Card Error ‡ Turn off the camera, and then turn it on again. ‡ Remove the memory card and insert it again. ‡ Format the memory card. Low Battery Insert a charged battery or recharge the battery. No Image File Capture photos or insert a memory card that contains photos. Device disconnected. Network connection disconnected while photos are being transferred to supported devices. Re-select a supported device. File Error Delete the damaged file or contact a service center. Error messages Suggested remedies Memory Full Delete unnecessary files or insert a new memory card. Transfer failed. ‡ The camera has failed to send e-mails or files to other devices. Try sending again. ‡ Check the network connection and try again. Unable to capture a photo because folder and file number on the memory card reached the maximum values. Reset the folder number? File names do not match the DCF standard. Follow the on-screen instructions to reset the folder number. Error 00 Turn off your camera and remount the lens. If the message still appears, contact a service center. Error messages 166 Appendix Cleaning the camera Camera lens and display Use a brush to remove dust and wipe the lens gently with a soft cloth. If any dust remains, apply lens cleaning liquid to a piece of cleaning paper and wipe gently. Image sensor Depending on different shooting conditions, dust may appear in photos because the image sensor is exposed to the external environment. This problem is normal, and the exposure to dust occurs in everyday use of the camera. Avoid contact with the image sensor while using the blower. Camera body Wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. Never use benzene, thinners, or alcohol to clean the device. These solutions can damage the camera or cause it to malfunction. Maintaining the camera 167 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Using on beaches or shores ‡ Protect your camera from sand and dirt when you use it on beaches or in other similar areas. ‡ Your camera is not waterproof. Do not handle the battery, adapter, or memory card with wet hands. Operating the camera with wet hands may cause damage to your camera. Storing for extended period of time ‡ When you store the camera for an extended period, place it in a sealed container with an absorbent material, such as silica gel. ‡ Over time, unused batteries will discharge and must be recharged before use. ‡ The present date and time can be initialized when the camera is turned on after the camera and battery have been separated for a prolonged period. Using or storing the camera Inappropriate places to use or store the camera ‡ Avoid exposing the camera to very cold or very hot temperatures. ‡ Avoid using your camera in areas with extremely high humidity, or where the humidity changes drastically. ‡ Avoid exposing the camera to direct sunlight and storing it in hot, poorly ventilated areas, such as in a car during summer time. ‡ Protect your camera and the display from impact, rough handling, and excessive vibration to avoid serious damage. ‡ Avoid using or storing your camera in dusty, dirty, humid, or poorly ventilated areas to prevent damage to moving parts and internal components. ‡ Do not use your camera near fuels, combustibles, or flammable chemicals. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the camera or its accessories. ‡ Do not store the camera where there are mothballs. 168 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Using the camera with caution in humid environments When you transfer the camera from a cold environment to a warm one, condensation can form on the lens or internal components of the camera. In this situation, turn off the camera and wait for at least 1 hour. If condensation forms on the memory card, remove the memory card from the camera and wait until all moisture has evaporated before reinserting it. Other cautions ‡ Do not swing your camera by the strap. This may cause injury to yourself or others or damage to your camera. ‡ Do not paint your camera, as paint can clog moving parts and prevent proper operation. ‡ Turn off the camera when not using it. ‡ Your camera consists of delicate parts. Avoid impacts to the camera. ‡ Protect the display from external force by keeping it in the case when not in use. Protect the camera from scratches by keeping it away from sand, sharp implements, or loose change. ‡ Do not use the camera if the screen is cracked or broken. Broken glass or acrylic could cause injury to your hands and face. Take the camera to a Samsung service center to have it repaired. ‡ Never place cameras, batteries, chargers, or accessories near, on, or in heating devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. Heat can deform or overheat these devices, which can cause a fire or explosion. ‡ Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight, as this may discolor the image sensor or cause it to malfunction. ‡ Protect your lens from fingerprints and scratches. Clean your lens with a soft, clean, debris-free lens cloth. ‡ The camera may turn off if impacted from the outside. This is to protect the memory card. Turn on the camera to use it again. ‡ While you use the camera, it may heat up. This is normal and should not affect your camera’s lifespan or performance. ‡ When you use the camera in low temperatures, it may take some time to turn on, the color of the display may be changed temporarily, or afterimages may appear. These conditions are not malfunctions and they will correct themselves when the camera is returned to milder temperatures. ‡ Paint or metal on the outside of the camera may cause allergies, itchy skin, eczema, or swelling for people with sensitive skin. If you experience any of these symptoms, stop using the camera immediately and consult a doctor. ‡ Do not insert foreign objects into any of your camera’s compartments, slots, or access points. Damage due to improper use may not be covered by your warranty. ‡ Do not allow unqualified personnel to service the camera or attempt to service the camera yourself. Any damage that results from unqualified service is not covered by your warranty. 169 Appendix > Maintaining the camera About memory card Supported memory card This product supports microSD, microSDHC, or microSDXC memory cards. Memory card adapter Memory card To read data with a PC or memory card reader, insert the memory card into a memory card adapter. 170 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Memory card capacity The memory capacity may differ depending on shooting scenes or shooting conditions. These capacities are based on a 2 GB SD card. Size Quality Super Fine Fine Normal RAW RAW + S.Fine RAW + Fine RAW + Normal Photo 20.0M (5472X3648) 160 290 398 55 35 44 48 10.1M (3888X2592) 288 486 630 - 44 51 53 5.9M (2976X1984) 435 679 835 - 49 54 56 2.0M (1728X1152) 831 1,081 1,201 - 56 58 57 Burst 489 743 899 - - - - 16.9M (5472X3080) 186 332 450 - 37 46 50 7.8M (3712X2088) 355 577 730 - 48 52 55 4.9M (2944X1656) 497 752 908 - 51 55 56 2.1M (1920X1080) 1,546 2,804 3,847 - 60 62 63 13.3M (3648X3648) 228 398 529 - 40 48 52 7.0M (2640X2640) 385 616 771 - 48 53 55 4.0M (2000X2000) 566 829 981 - 52 56 57 1.1M (1024X1024) 2,779 4,690 6,085 - 62 63 64 171 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Cautions when using memory cards • Avoid memory cards to very cold or very hot temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F). Extreme temperatures can cause memory cards to malfunction. • Insert a memory card in the correct direction. Inserting a memory card in the wrong direction may damage your camera and memory card. • Do not use memory cards that have been formatted by other cameras or by a computer. Reformat the memory card with your camera. • Turn off the camera when you insert or remove the memory card. • Do not remove the memory card or turn off your camera while the lamp is blinking, as this may damage your data. • When the lifespan of a memory card has expired, you cannot store any more photos on the card. Use a new memory card. • Do not bend, drop, or subject memory cards to heavy impact or pressure. • Avoid using or storing memory cards near strong magnetic fields. • Avoid using or keeping memory cards in areas with high temperature, high humidity, or corrosive substances. Size Quality HQ Normal Video 1920X1080 (30 fps) Approx. 17' Approx. 19' 51" 1280X720 (30 fps) Approx. 23' 46" Approx. 29' 38" 640X480 (30 fps) Approx. 52' 57" Approx. 69' 43" For Sharing (30 fps) - Approx. 235' 48" • The figures above are measured without using the zoom function. • Available recording time may vary if you use the zoom. • Several videos were recorded in succession to determine the total recording time. • The maximum recording time is 29 minutes and 59 seconds per file. • The maximum playback time of For Sharing videos is 30 seconds per file. 172 Appendix > Maintaining the camera About the battery Use only Samsung-approved batteries. Battery specifications Item Description Model* B740AE/B740AC/B740AU/B740AK Type Lithium-ion battery Cell capacity 2,330 mAh Voltage 3.8 V Charging time** (When the battery is completely discharged) Approx. 270 min * The battery specifications or model may differ depending on your region. ** The figures above are based on when you use the provided USB cable and AC adapter. Charging the battery by connecting it to a computer may take longer. ‡ Prevent memory cards from making contact with liquids, dirt, or foreign substances. If dirty, wipe the memory card clean with a soft cloth before you insert the memory card in your camera. ‡ Do not allow liquids, dirt, or foreign substances to come in contact with memory cards or the memory card slot. Doing so may cause memory cards or the camera to malfunction. ‡ When you carry a memory card, use a case to protect the card from electrostatic discharges. ‡ Transfer important data to other media, such as a hard disk, CD, or DVD. ‡ When you use the camera for an extended period, the memory card may become warm. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. ‡ Use a memory card that meets the standard requirements. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. 173 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Personal injury or death can occur if the battery is handled carelessly or improperly. For your safety, follow these instructions for proper battery handling: ‡ The battery can ignite or explode if not handled properly. If you notice any deformities, cracks, or other abnormalities in the battery, immediately discontinue use of the battery and contact your manufacturer. ‡ Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommend battery chargers and charge the battery only by the method described in this user manual. ‡ Do not place the battery near heating devices or expose to excessively warm environments, such as the inside of an enclosed car in the summertime. ‡ Do not place the battery in a microwave oven. ‡ Avoid storing or using the battery in hot, humid places, such as spas or shower enclosures. ‡ Do not rest the device on flammable surfaces, such as bedding, carpets, or electric blankets for a prolonged period. ‡ When the device is switched on, do not leave it in any confined space for a prolonged period. ‡ Do not allow battery terminals to come in contact with metallic objects, such as necklaces, coins, keys, or watches. ‡ Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommended, Lithium-ion replacement batteries. ‡ Do not disassemble the battery or puncture it with any sharp object. ‡ Avoid exposing the battery to high pressure or crushing forces. ‡ Avoid exposing the battery to major impacts, such as dropping it from high places. ‡ Do not expose the battery to temperatures of 60 °C (140 °F) or above. ‡ Do not allow the battery to come in contact with moisture or liquids. ‡ Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire, or the like. Disposal guidelines ‡ Dispose of the battery with care. ‡ Do not dispose of the battery in a fire. ‡ Disposal regulations may differ by country or region. Dispose of the battery in accordance with all local and federal regulations. Guidelines for charging the battery Charge the battery only by the method described in this user manual. The battery can ignite or explode if not charged properly. 174 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Battery life Shooting mode Average time / Number of photos Photos ‡ Approx. 325 min/Approx. 650 photos (When you attach a 9 mm lens and use the internal flash) ‡ Approx. 265 min/Approx. 530 photos (When you attach a 9-27 mm lens and use the external flash) Videos Approx. 190 min (Record videos at 1920X1080 resolution and 30 fps.) ‡ The figures above are based on the CIPA test standards. Your results may differ depending on your actual usage. ‡ Available shooting time differs depending on background, shooting interval, and use conditions. ‡ Several videos were recorded in succession to determine the total recording time. Low battery message When the battery has fully discharged, the battery icon will turn red and the "Low Battery" message will appear. Notes about using the battery ‡ Avoid exposing batteries to very cold or very hot temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F). Extreme temperatures can reduce the charging capacity of your batteries. ‡ When you use the camera for an extended period, the area around the battery chamber may become warm. This does not affect the normal use of the camera. ‡ Do not pull the power supply cord to disconnect the plug from the power outlet, as this may cause a fire or electric shock. ‡ In temperatures below 0 °C/32 °F, battery capacity and battery life may decrease. ‡ Battery capacity may decrease in low temperatures, but will return to normal in milder temperatures. ‡ Remove the batteries from your camera when storing it for an extended period. Installed batteries may leak or corrode over time and cause serious damage to your camera. Storing the camera for extended periods with the battery installed causes the battery to discharge. You may not be able to recharge a fully discharged battery. ‡ When you do not use the camera for an extended period (3 months or more), check the battery and recharge it regularly. If you let the battery discharge continually, its capacity and life may decrease, which can lead to a malfunction, fire, or explosion. 175 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Cautions about using the battery Protect batteries, chargers, and memory cards from damage. Prevent batteries from making contact with metal objects, as this can create a connection between the + and – terminals of your battery and lead to temporary or permanent battery damage and may cause a fire or electric shock. Notes about charging the battery ‡ If the status lamp is off, ensure that the battery is inserted correctly. ‡ If the camera is on while charging, the battery may not fully charge. Turn off the camera before charging the battery. ‡ Do not use your camera when you are charging the battery. This may cause a fire or electric shock. ‡ Do not pull the power supply cord to disconnect the plug from the power outlet, as this may cause a fire or electric shock. ‡ Let the battery charge for at least 10 minutes before turning on the camera. ‡ If you connect the camera to an external power source when the battery is depleted, using high energy-consuming functions will cause the camera to turn off. To use the camera normally, recharge the battery. ‡ If you reconnect the power cable when the battery is fully charged, the status lamp turns on for approximately 30 minutes. ‡ Using the flash or recording videos depletes the battery quickly. Charge the battery until the red status lamp turns off. ‡ If the status lamp blinks in red, reconnect the cable, or remove the battery and insert it again. ‡ If you charge the battery when the cable is overheated or the temperature is too high, the status lamp may blink in red. Charging will start when the battery cools down. ‡ Overcharging batteries may shorten battery life. After charging is finished, disconnect the cable from your camera. ‡ Do not bend or place heavy objects on the AC cable. Doing so may damage the cable. 176 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Notes about charging with a computer connected ‡ Use only the provided USB cable. ‡ The battery may not charge when: - you use a USB hub - other USB devices are connected to your computer - you connect the cable to the port on the front side of your computer - the USB port of your computer does not support the power output standard (5 V, 500 mA) Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care ‡ Never dispose of batteries in a fire. Follow all local regulations when you dispose of used batteries. ‡ Never place batteries or cameras on or in heating devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. Batteries may explode when they are overheated. 177 Appendix Updating the firmware Connect the camera to the computer and update the firmware of the camera of the lens. ‡ You cannot run a firmware upgrade without a fully charged battery. Recharge the battery fully before running a firmware upgrade. ‡ If you update the firmware, user settings and values will be reset. (Date, time, language, and video out will not change.) ‡ Do not turn the camera off while the update is in progress. 1 Turn off the camera. 2 Connect your camera to the computer with the USB cable. ‡ You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. ‡ If you try to plug the USB cable into the HDMI port, the camera may not work properly. 3 Turn on the camera. 4 On the computer, select i-Launcher ĺ Firmware Upgrade. 5 Follow the on-screen instructions to download the firmware to the camera. ‡ You can download the firmware of the camera or the lens. 6 Turn off the camera when the download completes. 7 Remove the USB cable. 8 Turn on the camera. 9 Press [m] ĺ q ĺ Device Information ĺ Software Update ĺ Body Firmware or Lens Firmware. 10 Select Yes from a pop-up window on the camera to update the firmware. 178 Appendix Before contacting a service center If you are having trouble with your device, try these troubleshooting solutions before contacting a service professional. When you leave your camera at a service center, be sure to also leave the other components that may have contributed to the malfunction, such as the memory card and battery. Situation Suggested remedies Cannot turn on the camera ‡ Ensure that the battery is inserted. ‡ Ensure that the battery is inserted correctly. ‡ Charge the battery. The power turns off suddenly ‡ Charge the battery. ‡ Your camera may be in Auto power off mode or the display turns off automatically. (p. 153) ‡ The camera may be turned off automatically to prevent the memory card from being damaged due to excessive heat. Turn on your camera again. The camera is losing battery power quickly ‡ The battery may lose power more quickly in low temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F). Keep the battery warm by putting it into your pocket. ‡ Using the flash or recording videos depletes the battery quickly. Recharge if needed. ‡ Batteries are consumable parts that must be replaced over time. Get a new battery if the battery life is diminishing quickly. Situation Suggested remedies Cannot capture photos ‡ There is no space on the memory card. Delete unnecessary files or insert a new card. ‡ Format the memory card. ‡ The memory card is defective. Get a new memory card. ‡ Ensure that the camera is switched on. ‡ Charge the battery. ‡ Ensure that the battery is inserted correctly. The camera freezes Remove the battery and insert it again. The camera heats up While using the camera, it may heat up. This is normal and should not affect your camera’s lifespan or performance. The flash fires unexpectedly The flash may fire due to static electricity. The camera is not malfunctioning. The flash does not work ‡ The flash option may be set to Off. (p. 90) ‡ You cannot use the flash in some modes. The date and time are incorrect Set the date and time under the q menu. (p. 154) The display or buttons do not work Remove the battery and insert it again. 179 Appendix > Before contacting a service center Situation Suggested remedies The memory card has an error ‡ Turn off the camera, and then turn it on again. ‡ Remove the memory card, and then insert it again. ‡ Format the memory card. See "Cautions when using memory cards" for more details. (p. 171) Your TV or computer cannot display photos and videos that are stored on a microSDXC memory card microSDXC memory cards use the exFAT file system. Ensure that the external device is compatible with the exFAT file system before connecting the camera to the device. Your computer does not recognize a microSDXC memory card microSDXC memory cards use the exFAT file system. To use microSDXC memory cards on a Windows XP computer, download and update the exFAT file system driver from the Microsoft website. Cannot display files If you change the name of a file, your camera may not play the file (the name of the file should meet the DCF standard). If you encounter this situation, display files on your computer. Situation Suggested remedies The photo is blurry ‡ Ensure that the focus option you set is suitable for the kind of shot you are capturing. ‡ Use a tripod to prevent your camera from shaking. ‡ Ensure that the lens is clean. If not, clean the lens. (p. 166) The colors in the photo do not match the actual scene An incorrect White Balance can create unrealistic color. Select the proper White Balance option to suit the light source. (p. 72) The photo is too bright or too dark Your photo is overexposed or underexposed. ‡ Adjust the aperture value or the shutter speed. ‡ Adjust the ISO sensitivity. (p. 71) ‡ Turn the flash off or on. (p. 90) ‡ Adjust the exposure value. (p. 97) Photos are distorted This camera can have minute distortion when using a wide-angle lens that enables shooting with a wide angle of view. This is normal, and does not cause malfunction. Horizontal lines appear on the photo This may occur when the subject is exposed to a fluorescent or mercury-vapor light source. Select a slow shutter speed or set the shooting mode to Auto. 180 Appendix > Before contacting a service center Situation Suggested remedies Playback screen does not appear on the connected external device ‡ Ensure that HDMI cable is properly connected to the external monitor. ‡ Ensure that the memory card is properly recorded. Your computer does not recognize your camera ‡ Ensure that the USB cable is connected correctly. ‡ Ensure that the camera is switched on. ‡ Ensure that you are using a supported operating system. Your computer disconnects the camera while transferring files The file transfer may be interrupted by static electricity. Disconnect the USB cable and connect it again. i-Launcher is not functioning properly ‡ End i-Launcher and restart the program. ‡ Depending on your computer's specifications and environment, the program may not launch automatically. In this case, click Start ĺ All Programs ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher ĺ Samsung i-Launcher on your Windows computer. (For Windows 8, open Start screen, and then select All apps ĺ Samsung i-Launcher.) Or, click Applications ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher on your Mac OS computer. Situation Suggested remedies Auto Focus does not work ‡ Subject is not in focus. When the subject is outside the AF area, shoot by moving the subject inside the AF area and half-pressing [Shutter]. ‡ Subject is too close. Step back from the subject and shoot. Lens does not work ‡ Ensure that the lens is properly mounted. ‡ Remove the lens from the camera and remount it. External flash does not work Ensure that the external flash is properly mounted on the external flash port. The date & time settings screen appears when you power on the camera ‡ Set the date and time again. ‡ This screen appears when the camera’s internal power source is completely discharged. Insert a fully charged battery and wait at least 72 hours in power off status for the internal power source to be recharged. 181 Appendix Camera specifications Image Sensor Type BSI CMOS Sensor size 13.2 X 8.8 mm Effective pixels Approx. 20.5 mega-pixels Total pixels Approx. 20.9 mega-pixels Color filter RGB primary color filter Lens Mount Type Samsung NX-M Mount Available lens Samsung NX-M Lenses Image Stabilization Type Lens shift (depends on lens) Mode Off/Mode 1/Mode 2 Distortion Correct Off/On (depends on lens) i-Function Supported (depends on lens) Display Type TFT LCD with Touch Panel (C-type Touch Control Enabled) Size 3.0" (Approx. 75.2 mm) Resolution HVGA (320X480) 460.8 k dots Field of view Approx. 100 % Angle Flip up: 180° User display Grid Line, Icons, Histogram, Level gauge Focusing Type Contrast AF Focusing point ‡ Selection: 1 point (Free selection) ‡ Multi: Normal 21 points, Close up 35 points ‡ Face detection: Max. 10 faces ‡ Object tracking AF Mode Single AF, Continuous AF, Manual Focus, Touch AF & Shutter AF Assist Lamp Green LED 182 Appendix > Camera specifications Shutter Type Electronic shutter Speed • Auto: 1/16,000–1/4 sec. • Manual: 1/16,000–30 sec. (1/3 EV Step) • Bulb (time limit: 4 min.) Exposure Metering system TTL 221 (17X13) Block segment Metering: Multi, Center-weighted, Spot Metering range: EV 0–18 (ISO160 · 9 mm, F3.5) Compensation ±3 EV (1/3 EV Step) AE lock Custom button ISO equivalent Auto, 160, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400, 12800 (1 or 1/3 EV Step) * Auto ISO settings are selectable up to ISO 3200. You can select ISO 100 and 25600. Drive Mode Mode Single, Continuous, Burst (5M only), Timer, Bracket (Auto Exposure, White Balance, Picture Wizard, Depth) Continuous shooting 6 fps * Maximum shooting speed is 6 frames per second. It will slow down after approx. JPEG 11 shots, RAW 4 shots. (May vary depending on the spec of memory card.) Bracket shooting Auto exposure bracketing (±3 EV), White Balance bracketing, Picture Wizard bracketing, Depth bracketing Self-timer 2–30 sec. (1 second interval) Shutter release via Micro USB port (optional) Flash Type Built-in flash Mode Smart Flash, Auto, Auto Red-eye, Fill in, Fill-in Red, 1st Curtain, 2nd Curtain, Off Guide number 4.9 (based on ISO 160, 24 mm), 4 (based on ISO 100, 24 mm) Angle of view 24 mm (35 mm film equivalent) Sync speed Less than 1/200 sec. Flash EV -2–+2 EV (1/2 EV Step) External flash Samsung NX mini external flash available (SEF7A) (optional) Guide number: 8 (Based on ISO 160, 24 mm), 7 (Based on ISO 100, 24 mm) Sync terminal External flash port 183 Appendix > Camera specifications White Balance Mode Auto WB, Daylight, Cloudy, Fluorescent White, Fluorescent NW, Fluorescent Daylight, Tungsten, Flash WB, Custom Set, Color Temperature (Manual) Micro adjustment Amber/Blue/Green/Magenta 7 steps respectively Dynamic Range Off/Smart Range+/HDR Picture Wizard Mode Standard, Vivid, Portrait, Landscape, Forest, Retro, Cool, Calm, Classic, Custom1, Custom2, Custom3 Parameter Color, Saturation, Sharpness, Contrast Shooting Mode Auto, Smart, Program, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, Manual Smart mode Beauty Face, Best Face, Continuous Shot, Kids Shot, Landscape, Macro, Food, Parties and Indoors, Action Freeze, Rich Tones, Panorama, Waterfall, Silhouette, Sunset, Night, Fireworks, Light Trace Smart filter Vignetting, Miniature, Sketch, Fish Eye Size ‡ JPEG (3:2): 20.0M (5472X3648), 10.1M (3888X2592), 5.9M (2976X1984), 5.0M (2736X1824) (Burst mode only), 2.0M (1728X1152) ‡ JPEG (16:9): 16.9M (5472X3080), 7.8M (3712X2088), 4.9M (2944X1656), 2.1M (1920X1080) ‡ JPEG (1:1): 13.3M (3648X3648), 7.0M (2640X2640), 4.0M (2000X2000), 1.1M (1024X1024) ‡ RAW: 20.0M (5472X3648) Quality Super Fine, Fine, Normal, RAW, RAW + S.Fine, RAW + Fine, RAW + Normal RAW standard SRW (ver.3.0.0) Color space sRGB, Adobe RGB Video Type MP4 (H.264) Format Movie: H.264, Sound: AAC Movie AE mode Program, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, Manual Movie clip Audio on/off (Shooting time: Max. 29' 59'') Smart filter Vignetting, Miniature, Sketch, Fish Eye 184 Appendix > Camera specifications Size 1920X1080, 1280X720, 640X480, 320X240 (For Sharing) Frame rate 30 fps Multi Motion x0.25 (640X480, 320X240 only), x1, x5, x10, x20 Quality HQ, Normal Sound Mono Edit Still image capture, Time trimming Playback Type Single image, Thumbnails (15/28), Slide show, Movie Edit Smart Filter, Crop, Resize, Rotate, Face Retouch, Brightness, Contrast, Auto adjustment, Saturation, RGB adjustment, Color Temperature, Exposure Smart filter Vignetting, Miniature, Soft Focus, Sketch, Fish Eye, Classic, Retro, Oil Painting, Cartoon, Ink Painting, Cross Filter, Zooming Shot Storage Media External memory (optional)*: microSD card (2 GB guaranteed), microSDHC card (up to 32 GB guaranteed), microSDXC card (up to 64 GB guaranteed) * Class 6 and above recommended File format RAW (SRW (ver.3.0.0)), JPEG (EXIF 2.3), MP4 (Movie), DCF Wireless network Type IEEE 802.11b/g/n Function AutoShare, Remote Viewfinder, MobileLink, Photo Beam, Auto Backup, Samsung Link, SNS & Cloud, Email, Baby Monitor, Group Share NFC Yes Interface Digital output USB 2.0 (micro USB jack) Video output ‡ NTSC, PAL (selectable) ‡ HDMI External release Yes DC power input DC 5.0 V, 0.55 A via micro USB 185 Appendix > Camera specifications Power Source Type Rechargeable battery: B740AE/B740AC/B740AU/ B740AK (2,330 mAh, 3.8 V) * The battery specifications or model may differ depending on your region. Dimensions (W X H X D) 110.4 X 61.9 X 22.5 mm Weight 158 g (without battery and memory card) Operating Temperature 0–40 °C Operating Humidity 5–85 % Software i-Launcher, Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 5 * Specifications may change without notice to improve performance. * Other brands and products names are trademarks of respective owners. 186 Appendix Glossary AP (Access Point) An access point is a device that allows wireless devices to connect to a wired network. Ad-Hoc network An ad-hoc network is a temporary connection for sharing files or an internet connection and between computers and devices. AdobeRGB Adobe RGB is used for commercial printing and has a larger color range than sRGB. Its wider range of colors helps you to easily edit photos on a computer. AEB (Auto Exposure Bracket) This feature automatically captures several images at different exposures to help you capture a properly-exposed image. AEL (Auto Exposure Lock) These features help you lock the exposure on which you want to calculate the exposure. AF (Auto Focus) A system that automatically focuses the camera lens on the subject. Your camera uses the contrast to focus automatically. AMOLED (Active-matrix organic light-emitting diode)/ LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) AMOLED is a visual display that is very thin and light, as it does not need backlighting. LCD is a visual display commonly used in consumer electronics. This display needs a separate backlight, such as CCFL or LED, to reproduce colors. Aperture The aperture controls the amount of light that reaches the camera’s sensor. 187 Appendix > Glossary Composition Composition in photography means arranging objects in a photo. Usually, abiding by the rule of thirds leads to a good composition. DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) A specification to define a file format and file system for digital cameras created by the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA). Depth of field The distance between the nearest and farthest points that can be acceptably focused in a photograph. Depth of field varies with lens aperture, focal length, and distance from the camera to the subject. Selecting a smaller aperture, for example, will increase the depth of field and blur the background of a composition. Camera shake (Blur) If the camera is moved while the shutter is open, the entire image may appear blurred. This occurs more often when the shutter speed is slow. Prevent camera shake by raising the sensitivity, using the flash, or using a faster shutter speed. Alternatively, use a tripod or the OIS function to stabilize the camera. Cloud Computing Cloud computing is a technology that allows you to store data on remote servers and to use them from a device with internet access. Color space The range of colors that the camera can see. Color temperature Color Temperature is a measurement in degrees Kelvin (K) that indicates the hue of a specific type of light source. As the color temperature increases, the color of the light source has a more bluish quality. As the color temperature decreases, the color of the light source has a more reddish quality. At 5,500 degrees Kelvin, the color of the light source is similar to the sun at midday. 188 Appendix > Glossary Flash A speed light that helps to create adequate exposure in low-light conditions. Focal length The distance from the middle of the lens to its focal point (in millimeters). Longer focal lengths result in narrower angles of view and the subject is magnified. Shorter focal lengths result in wider angles of view. Histogram A graphical representation of the brightness of an image. The horizontal axis represents the brightness and the vertical axis represents the number of pixels. High points at the left (too dark) and right (too bright) on the histogram indicate a photo that is improperly exposed. H.264/MPEG-4 A high-compression video format established by international standard organizations ISO-IEC and ITU-T. This codec is capable of providing good video quality at low bit rates developed by the Joint Video Team (JVT). EV (Exposure Value) All the combinations of the camera’s shutter speed and lens aperture that result in the same exposure. EV Compensation This feature allows you to quickly adjust the exposure value measured by the camera, in limited increments, to improve the exposure of your photos. Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format) A specification to define an image file format for digital cameras created by the Japan Electronic Industries Development Association (JEIDA). Exposure The amount of light allowed to reach the camera’s sensor. Exposure is controlled by a combination of the shutter speed, the aperture value, and ISO sensitivity. 189 Appendix > Glossary Metering The metering refers to the way in which the camera measures the quantity of light to set the exposure. MF (Manual Focus) A system that manually focuses the camera lens on the subject. You can use the focus ring to focus on a subject. MJPEG (Motion JPEG) A video format which is compressed as a JPEG image. Image sensor The physical part of a digital camera that contains a photosite for each pixel in the image. Each photosite records the brightness of the light that strikes it during an exposure. Common sensor types are CCD (Chargecoupled Device) and CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor). IP (Internet protocol) address An IP address is a unique number that is assigned to every device that is connected to the internet. ISO sensitivity The sensitivity of the camera to light, based on the equivalent film speed used in a film camera. At higher ISO sensitivity settings, the camera uses a higher shutter speed, which can reduce blur caused by camera shake and low light. However, images with high sensitivity are more susceptible to noise. JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) A lossy method of compression for digital images. JPEG images are compressed to reduce their overall file size with minimal deterioration of the image resolution. 190 Appendix > Glossary PAL (Phase Alternate Line) A video color encoding standard used in numerous countries throughout Africa, Asia, Europe, and the Middle East. Quality An expression of the rate of compression used in a digital image. Higher quality images have a lower rate of compression, which usually results in a larger file size. RAW (CCD raw data) The original, unprocessed data, collected directly from the camera’s image sensor. White Balance, contrast, saturation, sharpness, and other data can be manipulated with editing software before the image is compressed into a standard file format. Resolution The number of pixels present in a digital image. High resolution images contain more pixels and typically show more detail than low resolution images. Noise Misinterpreted pixels in a digital image that may appear as misplaced or random, bright pixels. Noise usually occurs when photos are shot with a high sensitivity or when a sensitivity is automatically set in a dark place. NFC (Near Field Communication) NFC is a set of standards for radio communication at very close proximity. You can use NFC-enabled devices to activate features or exchange data with other devices. NTSC (National Television System Committee) A video color encoding standard used most commonly in Japan, North America, the Philippines, South America, South Korea, and Taiwan. Optical zoom This is a general zoom which can enlarge images with a lens and does not deteriorate quality of images. 191 Appendix > Glossary Shutter speed Shutter speed refers to the amount of time it takes to open and close the shutter, and it is an important factor in the brightness of a photo, as it controls the amount of light which passes through the aperture before it reaches the image sensor. A fast shutter speed allows less time to let light in and the photo becomes darker and more easily freezes subjects in motion. sRGB (Standard RGB) International standard of color space established by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). This is defined from color space for PC monitors and is also used as the standard color space for Exif. Vignetting A reduction of an image’s brightness or saturation at the periphery (outer edges) compared to the center of the image. Vignetting can draw interest to subjects positioned in the center of an image. White Balance (Color balance) An adjustment of the intensities of colors (typically the primary colors red, green, and blue), in an image. The goal of adjusting the White Balance, or color balance, is to correctly render the colors in an image. Wi-Fi Wi-Fi is a technology that allows electronic devices to exchange data wirelessly over a network. WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) WPS is a technology that secures wireless home networks. 192 Appendix Optional accessories You can purchase the following optional items: Lens, External flash, Shutter release (micro USB type), Rechargeable battery, Battery charger, Camera bag, Camera case, Memory card, Filter, USB cable, HDMI cable, Strap ‡ To locate the type, image and availability of accessories, visit the Samsung website. ‡ Before purchasing accessories, make sure they are compatible with your camera. GPS10 and EM10 are not compatible with this camera. ‡ Use only Samsung-approved accessories. Samsung is not responsible for damage caused by using another manufacturer’s accessories. ‡ The accessories supplied with each product may be different in type and quantity. 193 Appendix A Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 163 Aperture 15, 19 Auto Backup 134 Auto focus 75 B Baby Monitor 132 Battery Caution 172 Charging 35 Insert 32 Best Face mode 57 Bracketing 87 C Camera Connecting as removable disk 158 Connecting to PC 158 Disconnecting (Windows) 159 Layout 28 Camera specifications 181 Charging 35 Color space 148 D Date & Time 154 Depth of Field (DOF) 16, 20 DIRECT LINK 30 Display brightness 153 Display type 46 Drive 85 E Enlarging 107 Exposure Value (EV) 15, 97 F Fader 101 Files Deleting 106 Photo type 70 Protecting 105 Video type 100 Flash Flash options 90 Guide number 25 Intensity 91 F-number 15 Focal length 20 I Icons Playback mode 45 Shooting mode 43 i-Launcher 162 Image adjustment Adjusting photos 114 Retouching faces 115 ISO sensitivity 71 L Lenses Layout 47 Locking 48 Markings 49 Unlocking 48 M Maintenance 166 Memory card Caution 169 Insert 32 Metering 92 MobileLink 126 Index 194 Appendix > Index N NFC (Tag & Go) 123 O One touch shot 82 Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) 84 Optional accessories Attach the mount adapter 52 Connect the flash 51 Flash layout 50 Mount adapter layout 52 P Panorama mode 58 Photos Editing 112 Enlarging 107 Shooting options 69 Viewing on camera 103 Picture Wizard 74 Posture 13 Power save mode 153 R Red-eye effect 91 Remote Viewfinder 130 Resolution Playback mode 113 Shooting mode (Movie) 99 Shooting mode (Photo) 69 Retouching faces 115 Rotating 113 Rule of thirds 23 S Samsung Link 142 Service center 178 Settings 153 Shooting modes Aperture Priority 61 Auto 54 Manual 63 Program 59 Recording 65 Shutter Priority 62 Smart 56 Shutter speed 17, 19 Slide show 107 Smart filter Playback mode 116 Shooting mode 96 Smart panel 40 T Thumbnails 103 Timer 87 Touch AF 81 Touch screen 38 Tracking AF 81 Transferring files Mac 159 Windows 158 TV 157 U Unpacking 27 V Video Out 154 Videos Capturing 111 Options 99 Recording 65 Viewing 109 W White balance 72 Wireless network 118 195 Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment) (Applicable in countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the product, accessories, or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product or their local government office for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal. This product is RoHS compliant. Correct disposal of batteries in this product (Applicable in countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the battery, manual, or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd, or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium, or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment. To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system. CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler. To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website: www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect Or call, (877) 278 - 0799 Appendix 196 Appendix FCC notice Caution: Any changes or modifications in construction of this device which are not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: - Reorientate, or relocate, the receiving antenna. - Increase the distance between the equipment and receiver. - Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. - Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement: This equipment complies with FCC RF Radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device and its antenna must not be colocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Caution: Any changes or modifications to the equipment not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void user’s authority to operate the equipment. IC: 649E-EVNXF1 FCC ID: A3L-EVNXF1 197 33258/SDPPI/2014 1258 TRC/SS/2014/39 TA-2013/2281 APPROVED No.: ESD-1408453C Model : EV-NXF1 Year of Manufacture : 2014 CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. This equipment may be operated in all EU countries. In France, this equipment may only be used indoors. Declaration of Conformity Trade Name : Samsung Electronics America, Inc. Model No. : Samsung EV-NXF1 Responsible Party: Samsung Electronics America, Inc. Address : 85 Challenger Road, Ridgefield Park, NJ 07660 Telephone No.: 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) This device complies with Industry Canada License-Exempt RSS standard (S) Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Complies with IDA Standards DA100790 Please refer to the warranty that came with your product or visit our website www.samsung.com for after-sales service or inquiries. Mode d’emploi FRE Ce mode d’emploi propose des instructions détaillées pour l’utilisation de l’appareil photo. Veuille le lire attentivement. 1 Informations sur les droits d’auteur • Les caractéristiques de l’appareil photo ou le contenu de ce mode d’emploi peuvent faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis, suite à l’évolution des fonctions de l’appareil photo. • La distribution ou la réutilisation du contenu de ce mode d’emploi, même partielle, sans autorisation préalable, est interdite. • Nous vous recommandons d’utiliser votre appareil photo dans le pays où vous l’avez acheté. • Utilisez l’appareil photo de manière responsable et veillez à respecter toutes les législations et règlementations en vigueur. PlanetFirst représente l’engagement de Samsung Electronics à l’égard du développement durable et de la responsabilité sociale, qui se traduit par des décisions et des activités commerciales sous une optique écologique. • Microsoft Windows et le logo Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation. • Mac et Apple App Store sont des marques déposées d’Apple Corporation. • Google Play Store est une marque déposée de Google, Inc. • Adobe, le logo Adobe, Photoshop et Lightroom sont des marques déposées ou des marques d’Adobe Systems Incorporated aux Etats-Unis et / ou dans d’autres pays. • microSD™, microSDHC™ et microSDXC™ sont des marques déposées de la SD Association. • HDMI, le logo HDMI et l’expression « High Definition Multimedia Interface » sont des marques commerciales ou des marques déposées de HDMI Licensing LLC. • Wi-Fi®, le logo Wi-Fi CERTIFIED et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance. • Les marques commerciales mentionnées dans ce mode d’emploi appartiennent à leurs propriétaires respectifs. 2 Renseignements relatifs à la santé et à la sécurité Tachez de ne pas éblouir les sujets photographiés. N’utilisez pas le flash à proximité (à moins d’1 mètre) de personnes ou d’animaux. L’utilisation du flash trop près des yeux du sujet peut provoquer des lésions temporaires ou permanentes. Ne laissez pas l’appareil photo à la portée d’enfants en bas âge ou d’animaux domestiques. Tenez l’appareil photo, ses pièces et ses accessoires, hors de portée des enfants en bas âge et des animaux. L’ingestion de petites pièces peut provoquer l’étouffement ou des blessures graves. Les parties détachables et les accessoires représentent également un danger. Evitez toute exposition prolongée de l’appareil photo à la lumière directe du soleil ou à des températures élevées. Une exposition prolongée à la lumière directe du soleil ou à des températures très élevées peut endommager de manière permanente les composants internes de l’appareil photo. Evitez de couvrir l’appareil photo ou le chargeur avec des couvertures ou des vêtements. L’appareil photo risque de surchauffer, de se déformer ou de prendre feu. Ne manipulez pas le cordon d’alimentation ou le chargeur lors d’un orage. Vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique. Respectez toujours les consignes et conseils d’utilisation suivants afin de prévenir toute situation dangereuse et de garantir un fonctionnement optimal de l’appareil photo. Attention—situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de blesser d’autres personnes Ne démontez pas ou n’essayez pas de réparer vous-même l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez endommager l’appareil photo et vous exposer à un risque de choc électrique. N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de gaz ou de liquides inflammables ou explosifs. Un départ d’incendie ou une explosion risque de se produire. N’introduisez pas de matériaux inflammables dans l’appareil photo ou ne stockez pas de tels matériaux à proximité de l’appareil photo. Vous risquez de provoquer une flamme ou de recevoir une décharge électrique. N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo avec les mains mouillées. Vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique. 3 Renseignements relatifs à la santé et à la sécurité Si du liquide ou des corps étrangers pénètrent dans l’appareil photo, déconnectez toutes les sources d’alimentation comme la batterie ou le chargeur, puis contactez le centre de service après-vente de Samsung. Respectez toutes les réglementations limitant l’utilisation des appareils photo dans certaines zones. • Evitez toute interférence avec d’autres appareils électroniques. • Eteignez l’appareil photo lorsque vous voyagez en avion. Cet appareil photo peut provoquer des interférences avec les équipements de navigation aérienne. Respectez l’ensemble des réglementations aériennes et éteignez l’appareil photo lorsque vous y êtes invité par le personnel navigant. • Eteignez l’appareil photo à proximité de tout équipement médical. Cet appareil photo peut créer des interférences avec les équipements médicaux des hôpitaux ou des établissements de santé. Respectez l’ensemble des réglementations, avertissements affichés et recommandations du personnel médical. Evitez toute interférence avec les stimulateurs cardiaques. Maintenez l’appareil photo à bonne distance des stimulateurs cardiaques pour éviter toute interférence, comme recommandé par le fabricant et les groupes de recherche. Si vous avez une quelconque raison de suspecter que l’appareil photo provoque des interférences avec un stimulateur cardiaque ou tout autre appareil médical, éteignez-le immédiatement et contactez le fabricant du stimulateur cardiaque ou de l’appareil médical pour en savoir plus. Attention—situations susceptibles d’endommager l’appareil photo ou d’autres équipements Si vous rangez l’appareil photo sans l’utiliser pour une période de temps prolongée, retirez d’abord la batterie. Les batteries peuvent fuir ou se détériorer avec le temps, risquant d’endommager gravement l’appareil photo. Utilisez uniquement des batteries de remplacement lithiumion originales recommandées par le fabricant. N’endommagez pas ou ne chauffez pas la batterie. Les batteries non homologuées, endommagées ou ayant été exposées à la chaleur sont à même de produire une flamme ou une blessure. Utilisez uniquement des batteries, des chargeurs et des accessoires homologués par Samsung. • L’utilisation de batteries, de chargeurs, de câbles ou d’accessoires non homologués peut endommager l’appareil photo, provoquer leur éclatement ou causer des blessures. • Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommage ou blessure résultant d’une utilisation inappropriée de batteries, chargeurs, câbles ou accessoires. Utilisez la batterie prévue uniquement pour l’appareil photo. Une mauvaise utilisation de celle-ci risque de produire une flamme ou une décharge électrique. 4 Renseignements relatifs à la santé et à la sécurité Ne touchez pas le flash en cours de déclenchement. Le flash est très chaud lorsqu’il se déclenche et peut provoquer des brûlures. Lorsque vous utilisez le chargeur secteur, éteignez l’appareil photo avant de couper l’alimentation du chargeur secteur. Ne pas suivre ces instructions peut produire des flammes ou une électrocution. Débranchez le chargeur de la prise murale lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Ne pas suivre ces instructions peut produire des flammes ou une électrocution. N’utilisez jamais de fiches et de cordons d’alimentation endommagés ou de prises électriques mal fixées lorsque vous rechargez la batterie. Vous risquez de provoquer une flamme ou de recevoir une décharge électrique. Le chargeur secteur ne doit jamais entrer en contact avec les bornes +/- de la batterie. Vous risquez de provoquer une flamme ou de recevoir une décharge électrique. Ne laissez pas l’appareil photo tomber ou subir des chocs. Cela peut endommager l’écran ou des composants, tant externes qu’internes. Effectuez les branchements des cordons, des adaptateurs et l’insertion des batteries et des cartes mémoire avec précaution. Enfoncer les cordons en forçant ou sans précaution et brancher les câbles ou insérer les batteries et les cartes mémoire de manière incorrecte peut endommager les ports, les prises et les accessoires. Evitez tout contact des cartes mémoire avec l’étui de l’appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager ou d’effacer les données stockées sur la carte. N’utilisez jamais de batterie ou de carte mémoire endommagée. Vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique, d’endommager l’appareil photo ou de provoquer une flamme. Ne soumettez ou n’approchez pas l’appareil photo de champs magnétiques. Cela risque d’entraîner un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil photo. N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo si l’écran est endommagé. Si les parties en verre ou en acrylique sont brisées, apportez l’appareil photo dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung afin de la faire réparer. 5 Renseignements relatifs à la santé et à la sécurité Vérifiez que l’appareil photo fonctionne correctement avant de l’utiliser. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de fichiers ou de dégâts résultant d’un fonctionnement incorrect ou d’une mauvaise utilisation de l’appareil photo. Vous devez brancher la fiche micro-USB du câble USB sur l’appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous installez le câble à l’envers. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données. Ne jamais exposer l’objectif aux rayons directs du soleil. Vous risquez de décolorer le capteur d’images ou d’entraîner des dysfonctionnements. Si l’appareil photo surchauffe, retirez la batterie jusqu’à ce qu’elle refroidisse. • Lors d’un usage prolongé, la batterie peut chauffer et augmenter la température interne de l’appareil photo. Si l’appareil photo ne fonctionne plus, retirez la batterie et laissez-lui le temps de refroidir. • Des températures internes élevées peuvent entraîner l’apparition de parasites sur vos photos. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas les performances globales de l’appareil photo. Evitez toute interférence avec d’autres appareils électroniques. Votre appareil photo émet des signaux de radiofréquences (RF) qui risquent d’interférer avec les équipements électroniques non blindés ou blindés de façon incorrecte, comme les stimulateurs cardiaques, les prothèses auditives et tout autre appareil électronique, que ce soit dans les bâtiments ou les véhicules. Consultez les fabricants de vos appareils électroniques pour résoudre tout problème d’interférence. Pour éviter toute interférence indésirable, utilisez uniquement des appareils ou accessoires approuvés par Samsung. Utilisez l’appareil photo en position normale. Evitez tout contact avec l’antenne interne de l’appareil photo. Transfert des données et responsabilités • Les données transférées via un réseau local sans fil pourraient être divulguées. Evitez donc de transférer des données sensibles dans des endroits publics ou via des réseaux ouverts. • Le fabricant de l’appareil photo ne peut être tenu responsable des transferts de données enfreignant les droits d’auteur, les législations sur les marques commerciales et la propriété intellectuelle ou les règlements concernant les outrages aux bonnes mœurs. 6 Icônes utilisées dans ce mode d’emploi Icône Fonction Informations complémentaires Mises en garde et précautions [ ] Touches de l’appareil photo. Par exemple, [Déclencheur] désigne la touche du déclencheur/obturateur. ( ) Numéro de page où se trouve l’information correspondante ĺ Séquence d’options ou de menus à sélectionner pour accomplir une procédure ; par exemple : sélectionnez b ĺ Qualité (signifie que vous devez sélectionner b, puis Qualité). * Annotation Ce mode d’emploi est basé sur les objectifs NX-M. Lorsque vous fixez des objectifs NX à l’aide de l’adaptateur de montage, il est possible que certaines options ou fonctions de prises de vue ne soient pas prises en charge. 7 Table des matières Chapitre 1 Mon appareil photo Mise en route ............................................................................................... 27 Contenu du coffret ................................................................................................... 27 Présentation de l’appareil photo ............................................................. 28 Utilisation de la touche DIRECT LINK ................................................................. 30 Configuration de la touche DIRECT LINK ............................................................ 30 Utilisation de l’écran ................................................................................................. 31 Utilisation du mode Autoportrait .......................................................................... 31 Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire .................................... 32 Retrait de la batterie et de la carte mémoire................................................... 34 Utilisation de l’adaptateur de carte mémoire ................................................. 34 Mise en charge de la batterie et mise sous tension de l’appareil photo ........................................................................................... 35 Chargement de la batterie ..................................................................................... 35 Mise sous tension de l’appareil photo ............................................................... 35 Configuration initiale ................................................................................. 36 Sélection de fonctions (options) .............................................................. 38 Sélection à l’aide des touches............................................................................... 38 Sélection à l’aide de l’écran tactile ...................................................................... 38 Utilisation de l’option m .................................................................................. 39 Ex. : définir le format photo en mode P .............................................................. 39 Utilisation du panneau intelligent ...................................................................... 40 Ex. : régler la valeur d’exposition en mode P ..................................................... 40 Sélection d’un mode .................................................................................. 41 Accès à l’écran Mode ................................................................................................ 41 Description des modes ........................................................................................... 41 Conseils Concepts de photographie Postures pour les prises de vue ................................................................ 13 Prise en main de l’appareil photo ........................................................................... 13 Photographie en position debout .......................................................................... 14 Photographie en position accroupie ..................................................................... 14 Ouverture ..................................................................................................... 15 Valeur d’ouverture et profondeur de champ ...................................................... 16 Vitesse d’obturation.................................................................................... 17 Sensibilité ISO .............................................................................................. 18 Contrôle de l’exposition par le réglage de l’ouverture, de la vitesse d’obturation et de la sensibilité ISO ................................. 19 Corrélation entre la longueur de focale, l’angle et la perspective .... 20 Profondeur de champ ................................................................................ 20 Quels sont les éléments qui contrôlent les effets hors-mise au point ? .... 21 Aperçu de la profondeur de champ ....................................................................... 22 Composition ................................................................................................. 23 Règle des tiers ................................................................................................................ 23 Photos avec deux sujets ............................................................................................. 24 Flash ............................................................................................................... 25 Nombre guide du flash ............................................................................................... 25 8 Table des matières Icônes affichées à l’écran ........................................................................... 43 En mode Prise de vue .............................................................................................. 43 Prise de photos ............................................................................................................. 43 Enregistrement de vidéos ......................................................................................... 44 A propos de l’indicateur de niveau ....................................................................... 44 En mode Lecture ....................................................................................................... 45 Affichage de photos ................................................................................................... 45 Lecture de vidéos ........................................................................................................ 45 Modification des informations affichées .......................................................... 46 Objectifs ........................................................................................................ 47 Présentation de l’objectif ........................................................................................ 47 Verrouillage et déverrouillage de l’objectif ........................................................ 48 Marquages de l’objectif ........................................................................................... 49 Accessoires ................................................................................................... 50 Présentation du flash externe ............................................................................... 50 Fixation du flash externe ........................................................................................... 51 Disposition de la bague d’adaptation ............................................................... 52 Montage de la bague d’adaptation ...................................................................... 52 Retrait de la bague d’adaptation ........................................................................... 53 Modes de prise de vue ............................................................................... 54 Mode Automatique .................................................................................................. 54 Mode intelligent ........................................................................................................ 56 Utilisation du mode Beauté ..................................................................................... 56 Utilisation du mode Meilleure photo ................................................................... 57 Prise de photos panoramiques ............................................................................... 58 Mode Programme ..................................................................................................... 59 Changement de programme .................................................................................. 60 Vitesse obturation minimum ................................................................................... 60 Mode Priorité ouverture ......................................................................................... 61 Mode Priorité Vitesse ............................................................................................... 62 Mode Manuel .............................................................................................................. 63 Utilisation du mode d’exposition ........................................................................... 63 Utilisation de la fonction Bulb ................................................................................. 64 Enregistrement d’une vidéo .................................................................................. 65 Fonctions disponibles en mode Prise de vue ................................................. 66 Chapitre 2 Fonctions de prise de vue Format et résolution ................................................................................... 69 Format photo .............................................................................................................. 69 Qualité ........................................................................................................................... 70 Sensibilité ISO .............................................................................................. 71 Balance des blancs ...................................................................................... 72 Personnalisation des options de préréglage de la balance des blancs .... 73 Assistant photo (styles de photo) ............................................................ 74 9 Table des matières Mode AF ........................................................................................................ 75 AF unique ..................................................................................................................... 75 AF continu .................................................................................................................... 76 Mise au point manuelle .......................................................................................... 76 Zone AF ......................................................................................................... 77 Mise au point sélection ........................................................................................... 77 Mise au point multiple ............................................................................................ 78 Détection des visages ................................................................................ 79 Normale ........................................................................................................................ 79 Sourire ........................................................................................................................... 80 Clin d’œil ....................................................................................................................... 80 Mise au point tactile ................................................................................... 81 Mise au point tactile ................................................................................................. 81 Point AF ......................................................................................................................... 81 Mise au point avec suivi .......................................................................................... 81 Déclenchement par sélection .............................................................................. 82 Aide mise au point manuelle .................................................................... 83 Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS) .................................................... 84 Prise de vue (type) ...................................................................................... 85 Unique ........................................................................................................................... 85 Normal continu .......................................................................................................... 86 Mode Rafale ................................................................................................................ 86 Retardateur .................................................................................................................. 87 Bracketing Exposition automatique (BKT AE) ................................................. 87 Bracketing Balance des blancs (BKT NB) ........................................................... 88 Bracketing Assistant photo (A. photo Bracketing) ........................................ 88 Bracketing de profondeur de champ ................................................................ 89 Flash ............................................................................................................... 90 Réduction de l’effet yeux rouges ......................................................................... 91 Réglage de l’intensité du flash.............................................................................. 91 Mesure de l’exposition ............................................................................... 92 Multiple ......................................................................................................................... 92 Centrée .......................................................................................................................... 93 Sélective ....................................................................................................................... 93 Mesure de la valeur d’exposition de la zone de mise au point ................. 94 Plage dynamique ........................................................................................ 95 Filtre intelligent ........................................................................................... 96 Compensation de l’exposition .................................................................. 97 Verrouillage de l’exposition ...................................................................... 98 Fonctions vidéo ........................................................................................... 99 Format vidéo ............................................................................................................... 99 Lorsque Vidéo est réglée sur NTSC ........................................................................ 99 Lorsque Vidéo est réglée sur PAL ........................................................................... 99 Qualité vidéo ............................................................................................................ 100 Multi-mouvements ................................................................................................ 100 Fondu.......................................................................................................................... 101 Voix .............................................................................................................................. 101 10 Table des matières Chapitre 3 Lecture / Retouche Recherche et gestion de fichiers ............................................................ 103 Affichage de photos .............................................................................................. 103 Affichage des images sous forme de miniatures ........................................ 103 Affichage de fichiers par catégorie .................................................................. 104 Visionnage de fichiers sous forme de dossiers ............................................ 104 Protection de fichiers ............................................................................................ 105 Suppression de fichiers ........................................................................................ 106 Suppression d’un seul fichier ................................................................................ 106 Suppression de plusieurs fichiers ........................................................................ 106 Suppression de tous les fichiers ........................................................................... 106 Affichage de photos ................................................................................. 107 Agrandissement d’une photo ............................................................................ 107 Visionnage d’un diaporama ............................................................................... 107 Rotation automatique .......................................................................................... 108 Lecture de vidéos ...................................................................................... 109 Avance ou retour rapide de la lecture ............................................................ 109 Réglage de la luminosité d’une vidéo ............................................................ 110 Réglage du volume d’une vidéo ....................................................................... 110 Recadrage d’une vidéo au cours de la lecture ............................................. 111 Extraction d’une image pendant la lecture .................................................. 111 Retouche de photos ................................................................................. 112 Rognage d’une photo .......................................................................................... 112 Rotation d’une photo ........................................................................................... 113 Redimensionnement de photos ....................................................................... 113 Réglage des photos ............................................................................................... 114 Retouche de visages ............................................................................................. 115 Effets de filtre intelligent ..................................................................................... 116 Chapitre 4 Réseau sans fil Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau ............................................................................. 118 Connexion à un réseau local sans fil................................................................ 118 Configuration des options de réseau ................................................................. 119 Configuration manuelle de l’adresse IP ............................................................. 119 Utilisation du navigateur de connexion ........................................................ 120 Conseils relatifs à la connexion réseau ........................................................... 121 Saisie de texte .......................................................................................................... 122 Utilisation de la fonction NFC (Partage par contact) ......................... 123 Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Prise de vue ................................ 123 Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Lecture (Partage instantané) .............................................................................................. 123 Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Wi-Fi ............................................... 123 Enregistrement automatique de fichiers sur un smartphone ......... 124 Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone ................................ 126 11 Table des matières Chapitre 5 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo Paramètres utilisateur .............................................................................. 146 Personnalisation ISO ............................................................................................. 146 Extension ISO .............................................................................................................. 146 Palier ISO ....................................................................................................................... 146 Plage ISO auto ............................................................................................................. 146 Réducteur de bruit ................................................................................................. 147 Réglage Bracketing ................................................................................................ 147 Espace colorimétrique .......................................................................................... 148 Corriger distort. ....................................................................................................... 149 Fonctionnement tactile ....................................................................................... 149 Personnalisation iFn .............................................................................................. 149 Affichage utilisateur .............................................................................................. 150 Attribution touches ............................................................................................... 151 Vue Live NFC ............................................................................................................ 151 Taille de l’image MobileLink/NFC ..................................................................... 151 Grille ............................................................................................................................ 151 Voyant de mise au point ...................................................................................... 152 Autoportrait automatique .................................................................................. 152 Réglagle de la touche Vitesse sur l’objectif ................................................... 152 Paramètres .................................................................................................. 153 Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à plusieurs smartphones .................. 128 Utilisation d’un smartphone pour le déclenchement de l’obturateur à distance ........................................................................ 130 Utilisation de la fonction Baby Monitor ............................................... 132 Réglage du niveau de bruit pour l’activation de l’alarme ....................... 133 Utilisation de Sauvegarde automatique pour envoyer des photos ou des vidéos ........................................................................ 134 Installation du programme Sauvegarde automatique sur votre ordinateur ...................................................................................................... 134 Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un ordinateur ........................................... 134 Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel .......................................... 136 Modification des paramètres de courriel ...................................................... 136 Enregistrement de vos informations .................................................................. 136 Création d’un mot de passe de courriel ............................................................ 137 Changement du mot de passe de courriel ....................................................... 138 Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel ................................................... 138 Utilisation des services de partage de photos ou de vidéos ............ 140 Accès à un service de partage ........................................................................... 140 Téléchargement de photos ou de vidéos ...................................................... 141 Utilisation de Samsung Link pour l’envoi de fichiers ......................... 142 Téléchargement de photos sur un système de stockage en ligne ....... 142 Visionnage de photos ou de vidéos sur des dispositifs compatibles Samsung Link .......................................................................................................... 143 12 Table des matières Usage et rangement de l’appareil photo....................................................... 168 Usage ou rangement inapproprié de l’appareil photo ................................ 168 Utilisation sur la plage ou en bord de mer ....................................................... 168 Rangement pour une durée prolongée ............................................................ 168 Usage avec précaution de l’appareil photo dans les environnements humides .........................................................................................................................169 Autres avertissements .............................................................................................. 169 A propos des cartes mémoire ............................................................................ 170 Cartes mémoires prises en charge ...................................................................... 170 Capacité de la carte mémoire ............................................................................... 171 Précautions d’utilisation des cartes mémoire ................................................. 172 A propos de la batterie ......................................................................................... 173 Caractéristiques de la batterie .............................................................................. 173 Autonomie de la batterie ........................................................................................ 175 Message de batterie faible ..................................................................................... 175 Remarques à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie ........................................ 175 Avertissements à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie ................................ 176 Remarques concernant la recharge de la batterie......................................... 176 Remarques à propos de la recharge avec raccordement à un ordinateur ............................................................................................................177 Utilisation et recyclage consciencieux des batteries et des chargeurs .......................................................................................................................177 Mise à jour du micrologiciel .................................................................... 178 Avant de contacter un centre de service après-vente ....................... 179 Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo ..................................................... 182 Glossaire ...................................................................................................... 187 Accessoires en option............................................................................... 193 Index ............................................................................................................ 194 Chapitre 6 Connexion à des appareils externes Affichage de fichiers sur un téléviseur HD ........................................... 158 Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur ..................................................... 159 Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Windows ........................................ 159 Connexion de l’appareil photo en tant que disque amovible................... 159 Déconnexion de l’appareil photo (Windows XP) ........................................... 160 Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Mac .................................................. 160 Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur .................................... 162 Installation des programmes depuis le CD fourni ...................................... 162 Programmes disponibles lors de l’utilisation d’i-Launcher ........................ 162 Utilisation d’i-Launcher ........................................................................................ 163 Configuration requise pour Windows ................................................................ 163 Configuration requise pour Mac .......................................................................... 163 Ouverture d’i-Launcher ........................................................................................... 163 Téléchargement du firmware ................................................................................ 164 Téléchargement du programme PC Auto Backup ......................................... 164 Installation d’Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ................................................. 164 Utilisation d’Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ................................................... 164 Chapitre 7 Annexe Messages d’erreur ..................................................................................... 166 Entretien de l’appareil photo .................................................................. 167 Nettoyage de l’appareil photo .......................................................................... 167 Objectif et écran de l’appareil photo .................................................................. 167 Capteur d’images ....................................................................................................... 167 Boîtier de l’appareil photo ...................................................................................... 167 13 Concepts de photographie Prise en main de l’appareil photo Tenez l’appareil photo et placez l’index sur la touche du déclencheur. Pour des objectifs plus grands, soutenez l’appareil en plaçant la main gauche sous l’objectif. Postures pour les prises de vue Pour stabiliser l’appareil photo et prendre une bonne photo, une posture correcte est nécessaire. Même si vous tenez l’appareil photo correctement, une mauvaise posture peut le faire bouger. Tenez-vous debout, bien droit et restez immobile afin de stabiliser l’appareil photo. Afin de réduire les mouvements du corps, retenez votre souffle lorsque vous effectuez une prise de vue avec une vitesse d’obturation lente. 14 Concepts de photographie Photographie en position debout Composez votre prise de vue, tenez-vous debout, bien droit, les pieds dans le prolongement de vos épaules, les coudes pointés vers le bas. Photographie en position accroupie Composez votre prise de vue, accroupissez-vous en plaçant un genou au sol tout en vous tenant droit. 15 Concepts de photographie Ouverture L’ouverture fait partie des trois facteurs qui déterminent l’exposition. L’intérieur de l’ouverture contient de fines lamelles de métal qui s’ouvrent et se referment afin de laisser la lumière passer à travers l’ouverture et pénétrer dans l’appareil photo. La taille de l’ouverture est liée à la quantité de lumière : une ouverture plus grande laisse passer plus de lumière, tandis qu’une ouverture plus petite laisse pénétrer moins de lumière. Tailles d’ouverture Ouverture minimum Ouverture moyenne Ouverture maximum Ouverture réduite Ouverture large La taille de l’ouverture est représentée par une valeur désignée par le terme « nombre f ». Le nombre f se détermine par la longueur de focale divisée par le diamètre de l’objectif. Par exemple, si un objectif avec une longueur de focale de 50 mm a pour nombre f F2, le diamètre de l’ouverture est de 25 mm. (50 mm/25 mm = F2) Plus le nombre f est faible, plus la taille de l’ouverture est importante. La taille de l’ouverture se définit par la valeur d’exposition (EV). Augmenter la valeur d’exposition (+1 EV) signifie que la quantité de lumière double. Baisser la valeur d’exposition (-1 EV) signifie que la quantité de lumière est réduite de moitié. Vous pouvez également utiliser la fonction de compensation de l’exposition afin d’effectuer un réglage de quantité de lumière fin, en subdivisant les valeurs d’exposition par 1/2, 1/3 EV, et ainsi de suite. +1 EV F1.4 F2 F2.8 F4 F5.6 F8 -1 EV Niveaux de la valeur d’exposition 16 Concepts de photographie Valeur d’ouverture et profondeur de champ En contrôlant l’ouverture, vous pouvez rendre l’arrière plan d’une photo plus flou ou plus net. Ceci est étroitement lié à la profondeur de champ (DOF) qui peut être définie comme faible ou élevée. Photo avec une profondeur de champ élevée Photo avec une profondeur de champ faible L’intérieur de l’ouverture contient plusieurs lamelles. Ces lamelles se déplacent simultanément et contrôlent la quantité de lumière qui passe à travers le centre de l’ouverture. Lors de prises de vues réalisées de nuit, le nombre de lamelles joue sur l’aspect de la lumière. Pour un nombre donné de lamelles dans l’ouverture, la lumière est divisée par le nombre de sections correspondant. Si le nombre de lamelles est impair, le nombre de sections est double. Par exemple, une ouverture disposant de 8 lamelles divise la lumière en 8 sections alors qu’une ouverture disposant de 7 lamelles la divise en 14 sections. 7 lamelles 8 lamelles 17 Concepts de photographie Vitesse d’obturation La vitesse d’obturation désigne l’intervalle de temps entre l’ouverture et la fermeture de l’obturateur. Elle contrôle la quantité de lumière qui passe à travers l’ouverture avant d’atteindre le capteur d’images. Généralement, la vitesse d’obturation est réglable manuellement. La mesure de la vitesse d’obturation est connue sous le nom de « Valeur d’exposition » (EV), qui se caractérise par des intervalles de 1 s, 1/2 s, 1/4 s, 1/8 s, 1/15 s, 1/1 000 s, 1/2 000 s, et ainsi de suite. Exposition +1 EV -1 EV 1 s 1/2 s 1/4 s 1/8 s 1/15 s 1/30 s Vitesse d’obturation Par conséquent, plus la vitesse d’obturation est élevée, moins la lumière pénètre. De même, plus la vitesse d’obturation est faible, plus la lumière pénètre. Les photos représentées ci-dessous illustrent une vitesse d’obturation lente laissant plus de temps à la lumière pour pénétrer dans l’objectif de l’appareil photo. Cela engendre un effet de flou lié au mouvement des objets. Par ailleurs, une vitesse d’obturation rapide accorde moins de temps à la lumière pour pénétrer, ce qui tend à immobiliser un sujet en mouvement sur la photo. 0,8 s 0,004 s 18 Concepts de photographie Sensibilité ISO L’exposition d’une image est déterminée par la sensibilité de l’appareil photo. Cette sensibilité est basée sur des standards photographiques internationaux, connus sous le nom de standards ISO. Sur les appareils numériques, cette échelle de sensibilité est utilisée pour représenter la sensibilité du mécanisme numérique qui capture l’image. Lorsque le nombre double, la sensibilité ISO double également. Par exemple, une sensibilité définie sur ISO 200 peut capturer des images deux fois plus vite qu’une sensibilité définie sur ISO 100. Néanmoins, des paramètres ISO élevés peuvent causer du « bruit », à savoir des petites tâches, des points et autres phénomènes qui donnent à la photo une apparence sale ou avec des parasites. En règle générale, il vaut mieux utiliser une faible sensibilité ISO afin d’éviter la présence de bruit sur les photos, sauf si vous effectuez une prise de vue dans un environnement sombre ou de nuit. Changements de la qualité et de la luminosité en fonction de la sensibilité ISO Une faible sensibilité ISO signifie que l’appareil photo est moins sensible à la lumière et que vous avez besoin de plus de lumière pour une exposition optimale. Lorsque vous utilisez une faible sensibilité ISO, choisissez une ouverture plus importante ou réduisez la vitesse d’obturation afin de laisser plus de lumière pénétrer dans l’appareil photo. Par exemple, une faible sensibilité ISO au cours d’une journée ensoleillée où la lumière est abondante ne nécessite pas de vitesse d’obturation lente. Néanmoins, dans un endroit sombre ou de nuit, une faible sensibilité ISO rendent les photos floues. Il est donc recommandé d’augmenter la sensibilité ISO de manière modérée. Photo prise avec un trépied et une sensibilité ISO élevée Photo floue avec une faible sensibilité ISO 19 Concepts de photographie Contrôle de l’exposition par le réglage de l’ouverture, de la vitesse d’obturation et de la sensibilité ISO En photographie, les paramètres d’ouverture, de vitesse d’obturation et de sensibilité ISO sont étroitement liés. Les paramètres d’ouverture contrôlent et régulent la quantité de lumière qui pénètre dans l’appareil photo, alors que la vitesse d’obturation détermine la durée au cours de laquelle la lumière peut pénétrer. La sensibilité ISO correspond à la vitesse à laquelle un appareil photo réagit à la lumière. Ces trois aspects sont désignés globalement par le triangle d’exposition. Un changement de la vitesse d’obturation, de la valeur d’ouverture ou de la sensibilité ISO peut être compensé par un réglage des autres valeurs pour maintenir la quantité de lumière. Néanmoins, les résultats varient en fonction des paramètres utilisés. Par exemple, la vitesse d’obturation est utile pour capturer des mouvements, l’ouverture permet de contrôler la profondeur de champ et la sensibilité ISO le grain d’une photo. Paramètres Résultats Valeur d’ouverture Large ouverture = plus de lumière Ouverture étroite = moins de lumière Large = petite profondeur de champ Etroit = grande profondeur de champ Paramètres Résultats Vitesse d’obturation Vitesse rapide = moins de lumière Vitesse lente = plus de lumière Rapide = image nette Lente = image floue Sensibilité ISO Haute sensibilité = plus de sensibilité à la lumière Basse sensibilité = moins de sensibilité à la lumière Haute = plus de grain Basse = moins de grain 20 Concepts de photographie Corrélation entre la longueur de focale, l’angle et la perspective La longueur de focale, ou distance focale, exprimée en millimètres, correspond à la distance séparant le milieu de l’objectif du foyer de mise au point. Elle influe sur l’angle et la perspective des images prises. Une longueur de focale courte génère un angle de vue étendu, ce qui permet de photographier un plan large. Une longueur de focale longue génère un angle de vue étroit, ce qui permet de photographier au téléobjectif. Angle 9 mm Angle 27 mm Profondeur de champ Les plus belles photos de nature morte ou de portraits sont celles dont l’arrière plan est flou et sur lesquelles le sujet ressort. En fonction des zones mises au point, une photo peut être floue ou nette. Ceci est désigné par « une profondeur de champ faible » ou « une profondeur de champ élevée ». La profondeur de champ est la zone mise au point autour du sujet. C’est pourquoi, une faible profondeur de champ signifie que la zone mise au point est étroite, tandis qu’une profondeur de champ élevée élargit la zone mise au point. Une photo avec une faible profondeur de champ, qui met le sujet en évidence et dont le reste est flou, peut être obtenue en prenant une photo à proximité du sujet ou en sélectionnant une faible valeur d’ouverture. A l’opposé, une photo avec une profondeur de champ élevée et dont chaque élément est nettement mis au point peut être obtenue en prenant une photo en étant éloigné du sujet ou en sélectionnant une valeur d’ouverture élevée. Profondeur de champ réduite Profondeur de champ élevée 21 Concepts de photographie Quels sont les éléments qui contrôlent les effets hors-mise au point ? La profondeur de champ dépend de la valeur d’ouverture Plus l’ouverture est large (par définition, plus la valeur d’ouverture est basse), plus la profondeur de champ est faible. Dans une situation où la longueur de focale est égale, une faible valeur d’ouverture résulte en une faible profondeur de champ sur une photo. 27 mm F3.5 27 mm F11 Profondeur de champ liée à la longueur de focale Plus la longueur de focale est importante, plus la profondeur de champ est faible. Angle 9 mm Angle 27 mm 22 Concepts de photographie Profondeur de champ liée à la distance entre le sujet et l’appareil photo Plus la distance entre le sujet et l’appareil photo est courte, plus la profondeur de champ est faible. C’est pourquoi, prendre une photo rapprochée d’un sujet a pour conséquence une faible profondeur de champ. Photo prise en étant éloigné du sujet Photo prise à proximité du sujet Aperçu de la profondeur de champ Afin d’obtenir un aperçu de l’aspect final de votre photo avant d’effectuer la prise de vue, vous pouvez appuyer sur la touche de personnalisation. L’appareil photo règle l’ouverture sur les paramètres prédéfinis et affiche le résultat sur l’écran. Affectez la fonction Aperçu optique à la touche de personnalisation (p. 151). 23 Concepts de photographie Composition La photographie est un art qui a pour raison d’être de capturer l’essence même des merveilles du monde à l’aide d’un appareil photo. Néanmoins, quand bien même le sujet présage d’une photo réussie, une mauvaise composition ne peut en reproduire fidèlement l’aspect. En matière de composition, il est très important de hiérarchiser les sujets. En photographie, la composition signifie la disposition des éléments d’une scène. En règle générale, une bonne composition doit obéir à la règle des tiers. Règle des tiers La règle des tiers consiste à diviser l’image en un quadrillage de 3x3, formé de rectangles de taille égale. Pour composer des photos qui mettent le mieux en valeur le sujet, veillez à ce que le sujet soit placé dans l’un des quatre coins du rectangle central. L’utilisation de la règle des tiers permet de créer des photos avec une composition équilibrée et saisissante. En voici quelques exemples. 24 Concepts de photographie Photos avec deux sujets Si votre sujet se trouve à l’un des coins de la photo, la composition semble alors déséquilibrée. Vous pouvez équilibrer la photo en prenant un second sujet placé à l’extrémité opposée. Sujet 1 Sujet 2 Sujet 1 Sujet 2 Instable Stable Le fait de centrer l’horizon sur une photo de paysage crée une impression de déséquilibre. Equilibrez la photo en déplaçant l’horizon vers le haut ou vers le bas. Sujet 1 Sujet 2 Sujet 1 Sujet 2 Instable Stable 25 Concepts de photographie Flash La lumière est l’un des éléments les plus importants en photographie. Il n’est, cependant, pas simple d’avoir la quantité de lumière suffisante quel que soit le moment ou l’endroit. L’utilisation d’un flash vous permet d’optimiser les paramètres de lumière et de créer différents effets. Le flash, également appelé éclairage stroboscopique ou laser, permet de créer un niveau d’exposition satisfaisant dans des conditions de faible éclairage. Il est également utile dans des conditions de forte luminosité. Par exemple, le flash peut être utilisé pour compenser l’exposition de l’ombre d’un sujet ou pour saisir à la fois le sujet et l’arrière-plan en contre jour. Avant correction Après correction Nombre guide du flash Le numéro de modèle d’un flash indique la puissance du flash ; ainsi, la quantité de lumière maximale créée est représentée par une valeur appelée « nombre guide ». Plus le nombre est élevé, plus le flash est puissant. Le nombre guide s’obtient en multipliant la distance entre le flash et le sujet par la valeur d’ouverture, lorsque la sensibilité ISO est définie sur 100. Nombre guide = Distance flash-sujet X Valeur d’ouverture Valeur d’ouverture = Nombre guide / Distance flash-sujet Distance flash-sujet = Nombre guide / Valeur d’ouverture Par conséquent, si vous connaissez le nombre guide d’un flash, vous pouvez estimer la distance flash-sujet lorsque vous réglez le flash manuellement. Par exemple, si un flash possède le nombre guide NG 20 et est à 4 mètres de distance du sujet, la valeur d’ouverture optimale est de F5.0. Chapitre 1 Mon appareil photo Découvrez les différents composants de l’appareil photo, les icônes affichées à l’écran, les différents objectifs disponibles, les accessoires en option et les fonctions de base. Mon appareil photo 27 Mise en route Contenu du coffret Sortez le téléphone de son coffret et vérifiez que tous les éléments suivants sont présents : Appareil photo Adaptateur secteur / Câble USB Batterie rechargeable Dragonne CD-ROM (Mode d’emploi inclus) DVD-ROM Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Guide de demarrage rapide Guide de référence rapide • Les illustrations peuvent différer par rapport au produit fourni. • Les éléments peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique. • Vous pouvez acheter des accessoires en option auprès d’un revendeur ou d’un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de problème consécutif à l’utilisation d’accessoires non autorisés. Pour en savoir plus sur les accessoires, reportez-vous à la page 193. Mon appareil photo 28 Présentation de l’appareil photo N° Nom 1 Déclencheur 2 Touche Marche / Arrêt 3 Touche DIRECT LINK Démarrez une fonction Wi-Fi prédéfinie (p. 30). 4 Cache du port du flash externe 5 Microphone 6 Repère d'installation de l'objectif 7 Antenne interne * Eviter tout contact avec l’antenne interne lors de l’utilisation du réseau sans fil. 8 Touche de déverrouillage de l’objectif 9 Capteur d'images * Ne touchez pas le capteur d’images. 10 Monture de l'objectif 11 Balise NFC 12 Voyant AF / Voyant du retardateur 13 Flash intégré 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 11 10 8 7 13 12 Mon appareil photo > Présentation de l’appareil photo 29 N° Nom 1 Haut-parleur 2 Anneau d'attache de la dragonne 3 Touche d’enregistrement vidéo Démarrer un enregistrement vidéo. 4 Voyant d'état Indiquer l’état de l’appareil photo. • Clignotement : lors de l’enregistrement d’une photo ou d’une vidéo, de l’envoi de données vers un ordinateur, de la connexion à un réseau local sans fil ou l’envoi d’une photo. • Fixe : en l’absence de transfert de données ou lorsque la batterie est en charge. 5 Touche f Sélectionner un mode de Prise de vue. 6 Touche D • En mode Prise de vue : modifier les informations à l’écran. • Dans d’autres cas : monter. 7 Touche F • En mode Prise de vue : sélectionner un mode AF. • Dans d’autres cas : se déplacer vers la droite. 8 Touche o • Sur l’écran d’accueil : enregistrer les options sélectionnées. • En mode Prise de vue : sélectionner manuellement une zone de mise au point dans certains modes de prise de vue. N° Nom 9 Touche Supprimer / Personnaliser • En mode Prise de vue : exécuter la fonction assignée (p. 151). • En mode Lecture : supprimer des fichiers. 10 Touche I • En mode Prise de vue : régler la vitesse d’obturation, la valeur d’ouverture, la compensation d’exposition ou la sensibilité ISO. • En mode Lecture : afficher les miniatures. • Dans d’autres cas : descendre. 11 Touche Lecture Activer le mode Lecture pour visualiser les photos ou visionner des vidéos. 12 Touche C • En mode Prise de vue : sélectionner la méthode de prise de vue ou régler le retardateur. • Dans d’autres cas : se déplacer vers la gauche. 13 Touche Accéder aux options ou aux menus. m 14 Affichage (tactile) • Pour prendre un autoportrait en se regardant dans l’écran, faire pivoter l’écran vers le haut (p. 31). • Appuyer sur l’écran pour sélectionner un menu ou une option (p. 38). 3 2 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 14 12 11 13 Mon appareil photo > Présentation de l’appareil photo 30 N° Nom 1 Douille pour trépied 2 Loquet de la batterie 3 Fente de carte mémoire 4 USB et port de déverrouillage du déclencheur Brancher l’appareil photo sur un ordinateur, un téléviseur ou le port de déclenchement de l’obturateur. Utiliser un câble de déclenchement de l’obturateur avec un trépied pour réduire le bougé de l’appareil photo. 5 Port HDMI 6 Emplacement batterie 7 Cache batterie Utilisation de la touche DIRECT LINK La touche [DIRECT LINK] vous permet d’activer facilement la fonction Wi-Fi. Appuyez sur [DIRECT LINK] pour revenir au mode précédent. Configuration de la touche DIRECT LINK Vous pouvez sélectionner une fonction Wi-Fi à exécuter au moment où vous appuyez sur la touche [DIRECT LINK] (p. 151). Pour définir une option DIRECT LINK En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d ĺ Attribution touches ĺDIRECT LINK ĺ une option. 1 5 6 7 4 3 2 Mon appareil photo > Présentation de l’appareil photo 31 Utilisation de l’écran Vous pouvez prendre un autoportrait en vous regardant dans l’écran en le faisant pivoter vers le haut. Utilisation du mode Autoportrait Lorsque l’appareil photo est éteint et que vous avez activé l’option Autoportrait (p. 152), basculer l’écran vers le haut allume l’appareil photo qui passe en mode Autoportrait. En mode Autoportrait, les fonctions de retardateur (3 secondes), OneTouch Shot, détection des visages et beauté sont automatiquement activées. 1 Faites pivoter l’écran vers le haut. 180˚ 2 Appuyez sur . 3 Faites glisser le curseur ou appuyez sur les icônes +/- pour régler la douceur et l’éclat du grain de peau. 4 Appuyez sur [o] ou sur Définir. 5 Appuyez sur le cadre de l’écran ou sur [Déclencheur]. • Après 3 secondes, l’appareil photo déverrouille automatiquement le déclencheur. • Lorsque l’appareil est éteint, la basculement de l’écran vers le haut allume automatiquement l’appareil photo. • Laissez l’écran fermé lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil photo. • Faites pivoter l’écran en respectant scrupuleusement les angles autorisés. Le non-respect de cette recommandation risque d’endommager l’appareil photo. • Utilisez un trépied lorsque l’écran est incliné vers le haut et que vous ne le tenez pas à la main. Si vous passez outre ces précautions, vous risquez d’endommager votre appareil photo. • Ne faites pas pivoter l’écran vers le haut lorsqu’un flash externe est monté sur l’appareil photo. Si vous passez outre ces précautions, vous risquez d’endommager votre appareil photo. Mon appareil photo 32 Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire Voici comment installer ou retirer la batterie et une carte mémoire en option dans l’appareil photo. 1 Insérez le doigt dans la rainure et ouvrez le cache de la batterie. Faites attention à ne pas vous abîmer les ongles lorsque vous ouvrez le cache de la batterie. 2 Insérez une carte mémoire dans la fente en orientant la puce vers le haut. • Insérez à fond la carte mémoire jusqu’à ce qu’elle se verrouille en position. 3 Faites glisser le loquet de la batterie vers la gauche. 4 Insérez la batterie en orientant la puce vers la droite. • Maintenez le cache de la batterie ouvert avec le doigt. Mon appareil photo > Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire 33 5 Fermez le loquet de la batterie et faites-le glisser vers la droite. 6 Fermez le cache batterie. 7 Appuyez fermement sur le cache de la batterie afin de vous assurer qu’il est bien fermé. Mon appareil photo > Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire 34 Retrait de la batterie et de la carte mémoire Batterie rechargeable Loquet de la batterie Faites glisser le loquet de la batterie vers la gauche pour libérer la batterie. Carte mémoire Appuyez doucement sur la carte pour la faire sortir de l’appareil photo, puis retirez-la entièrement de son emplacement. Utilisation de l’adaptateur de carte mémoire Pour pouvoir lire des données sur un ordinateur ou par le biais d’un lecteur de cartes, insérez la carte dans l’adaptateur approprié. • Ne pliez pas ou ne tirez pas sur le loquet de la batterie. Vous risquez d’endommager le loquet. • Ne retirez jamais la carte mémoire ou la batterie lorsque le voyant d’état de l’appareil photo clignote. Vous risquez d’endommager les données stockées sur la carte mémoire ou dans l’appareil photo. Mon appareil photo 35 Mise en charge de la batterie et mise sous tension de l’appareil photo Chargement de la batterie Vous devez charger complètement la batterie avant d’utiliser l’appareil photo pour la première fois. Branchez l’extrémité la plus fine du câble USB sur l’appareil photo, puis l’autre extrémité du câble USB sur un adaptateur secteur. Voyant d'état • Voyant rouge allumé : en charge • Voyant vert allumé : charge complète • Voyant rouge clignotant : erreur de recharge Utilisez uniquement l’adaptateur secteur et le câble USB fournis avec l’appareil photo. Si vous utilisez un autre adaptateur secteur, la batterie de l’appareil photo risque de ne pas se recharger ou de fonctionner correctement. Mise sous tension de l’appareil photo Pour allumer ou éteindre l’appareil photo, appuyez sur [ ]. • L’écran de configuration initiale apparaît lorsque vous allumez l’appareil photo pour la première fois (p. 36). Pour certains objectifs, lorsque vous allumez l’appareil photo, l’objectif se déplace automatiquement. N’appuyez pas ou ne forcez pas sur l’objectif, vous risqueriez de l’abîmer. Mon appareil photo 36 Configuration initiale Lorsque vous allumez l’appareil photo pour la première fois, l’écran de configuration initiale s’affiche. La langue est réglée selon le pays ou la région où l’appareil photo est vendu. Vous pouvez la changer pour celle de votre choix. Vous pouvez également sélectionner un élément en appuyant dessus à l’écran. 1 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Fuseau horaire, puis appuyez sur [o]. 2 Appuyez sur [D / I] pour sélectionner un fuseau horaire, puis appuyez sur [o]. Retour Définir Fuseau horaire [GMT +00:00] Londres [GMT -01:00] Cap Vert [GMT -02:00] Açores [GMT -03:00] Buenos Aires, Sao Paulo [GMT -03:30] Terre-Neuve 3 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Configuration date/ heure, puis appuyez sur [o]. 4 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour sélectionner un élément (Année/ Mois/Jour/Heure/Minute/Heure d’été). 5 Appuyez sur [D / I] pour définir une option, puis appuyez sur [o]. Retour Définir Année Mois Jour Heure Min Heure d'été Configuration date/heure • L’affichage peut différer en fonction de la langue sélectionnée. 6 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Type date, puis appuyez sur [o]. 7 Appuyez sur [D / I] pour sélectionner un format de date, puis appuyez sur [o]. Retour Définir Type date AAAA/MM/JJ MM/JJ/AAAA JJ/MM/AAAA Mon appareil photo > Configuration initiale 37 8 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Type d'heure, puis appuyez sur [o]. 9 Appuyez sur [D / I] pour sélectionner un format d’heure, puis appuyez sur [o]. Retour Définir Type d'heure 12 h 24 h 10 Appuyez sur [m] pour terminer la configuration. Mon appareil photo 38 Sélection de fonctions (options) Sélection à l’aide des touches Appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour vous déplacer, puis appuyez sur [o] pour sélectionner une option. Sélection à l’aide de l’écran tactile N’utilisez pas d’objets pointus, comme des crayons ou des stylos, pour appuyer sur l’écran. Vous risquez de l’endommager. Faire glisser : maintenez une zone à l’écran appuyée, puis faites glisser le doigt pour la déplacer. Appuyer : appuyez sur une icône pour sélectionner un menu ou une option. Effleurer : faites glisser brièvement le doigt sur l’écran. Mon appareil photo > Sélection de fonctions (options) 39 • Lorsque vous appuyez sur un élément à l’écran ou que vous le faites glisser, cela peut entraîner des décolorations. Il ne s’agit pas d’un dysfonctionnement, mais d’une caractéristique de l’écran tactile. N’appuyez pas trop fort sur l’écran pour minimiser cet effet de décoloration. • L’écran tactile peut ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous utilisez l’appareil photo dans un environnement extrêmement humide. • L’écran tactile peut ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous installez un film protecteur ou tout autre accessoire sur l’écran. • Selon l’angle de vue, la luminosité de l’écran peut parfois sembler insuffisante. Réglez la luminosité ou l’angle de vue afin d’améliorer la luminosité. Utilisation de l’option m Appuyez sur [m] ou sur à l’écran, puis modifiez les options ou les paramètres de prise de vue. Ex. : définir le format photo en mode P 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Programme. 2 Appuyez sur [m] ou sur . 3 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour accéder à b, puis appuyez sur [o]. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur b à l’écran. 4 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour accéder à Format photo, puis appuyez sur [o]. • Vous pouvez également faire défiler la liste et appuyer sur une option. AutoShare Format photo Qualité ISO Vitesse obturation minimum Retour Sélectionner Mon appareil photo > Sélection de fonctions (options) 40 5 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour sélectionner une option, puis appuyez sur [o]. • Vous pouvez également faire défiler la liste et appuyer sur une option. • Appuyez sur [m] ou Retour pour revenir au menu précédent. (3:2) (5472x3648) (3:2) (3888x2592) (3:2) (2976x1984) (3:2) (1728x1152) (16:9) (5472x3080) Format photo Retour Définir 6 Appuyez sur [m] ou Retour pour revenir au mode Prise de vue. Utilisation du panneau intelligent Appuyez sur à l’écran pour accéder à certaines fonctions telles que Exposition, ISO et Balance des blancs. Ex. : régler la valeur d’exposition en mode P 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Programme. 2 Appuyez sur . 3 Appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour accéder à l’option EV, puis appuyez sur [o]. • Vous pouvez également sélectionner une option en appuyant dessus. 4 Appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour régler la valeur de l’exposition, puis appuyez sur [o]. • Vous pouvez également faire glisser la molette sur l’écran pour régler l’option. EV : 0 Retour Régler Vous pouvez également régler certaines options en les faisant glisser. Mon appareil photo 41 Sélection d’un mode Sélectionnez une variété de modes et de fonctions sur l’écran Mode. Accès à l’écran Mode En mode Prise de vue ou Lecture, appuyez sur [f]. Appuyez à nouveau sur [f] pour revenir au mode précédent. Automatique Intelligent Priorité vitesse Manuel Retour Définir Programme Priorité ouverture Wi-Fi Appuyez sur une icône pour sélectionner un mode ou une fonction. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [D/I/C/F] pour accéder à un mode ou une fonction, puis appuyer sur [o] pour le/la sélectionner. Description des modes Mode Description Automatique Prendre une photo à l’aide d’un mode Scène sélectionné automatiquement par l’appareil photo (p. 54). Intelligent Prendre une photo avec des options prédéfinies pour une scène spécifique (p. 56). Programme Prenez une photo avec des paramètres réglés manuellement, à l’exception de la vitesse d’obturation et de la valeur d’ouverture (p. 59). Priorité ouverture Définir la valeur d’ouverture manuellement tandis que l’appareil photo sélectionne automatiquement une vitesse d’obturation appropriée (p. 61). Priorité vitesse Définir la vitesse d’obturation manuellement tandis que l’appareil photo sélectionne automatiquement une valeur d’ouverture appropriée (p. 62). Manuel Régler manuellement la valeur d’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation (p. 63). Mon appareil photo > Sélection d’un mode 42 Mode Description Wi-Fi • MobileLink : envoyer des photos ou des vidéos à un smartphone (p. 126). • Remote Viewfinder : utiliser un smartphone comme déclencheur distant de l’obturateur et afficher un aperçu d’une image de votre appareil photo sur le smartphone (p. 130). • Group Share : envoyer des photos ou des vidéos à plusieurs smartphones (p. 128). • Baby Monitor : connecter l’appareil photo à un smartphone pour surveiller un endroit (p. 132). • Sauvegarde automatique : envoyer sur un ordinateur, à l’aide de la fonction sans fil, les photos ou vidéos prises avec l’appareil photo (p. 134). • Courriel : envoyer par courriel des photos ou des vidéos stockées sur l’appareil photo (p. 136). • Réseaux sociaux et Cloud : publier vos photos ou vos vidéos sur des sites Web de partage de fichiers (p. 140). • Samsung Link : télécharger des photos vers le stockage en ligne Samsung Link ou visionner des fichiers sur d’autres appareils compatibles Samsung Link (p. 142). Mon appareil photo 43 Icônes affichées à l’écran Prise de photos 1 2 3 1. Informations de prise de vue Icône Description Mode de prise de vue Date du jour Heure du moment Verrouillage automatique de l’exposition (p. 98) Nombre de photos disponibles Carte mémoire insérée Carte mémoire non insérée* • : recharge complète • : recharge partielle • (Rouge) : vide (recharger la batterie) • : recharge en cours Icône Description Cadre de mise au point automatique Zone de mesure de l’exposition sélective Bougé de l’appareil photo Indicateur de niveau (p. 44) Histogramme (p. 150) Mise au point Vitesse d’obturation Valeur d’ouverture Valeur de réglage de l’exposition Sensibilité ISO (p. 71) * Les photos prises sans insérer de carte mémoire ne peuvent pas être imprimées ou transférées sur une carte mémoire ou sur un ordinateur. 2. Options de prise de vue Icône Description Format photo Mode de sélection Flash (p. 90) Réglage de l’intensité du flash Mesure de l’exposition (p. 92) Mode AF (p. 75) Zone de mise au point Icône Description Détection des visages Balance des blancs (p. 72) Réglage fin de la balance des blancs Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS) (p. 84) Fichier RAW Plage dynamique (p. 95) 3. Options de prise de vue (tactile) Icône Description Modifier le mode Intelligent** Connexion mobile*** Options de mise au point tactile Options de prise de vue Panneau intelligent ** Cette icône s’affiche lorsque vous sélectionnez le mode Intelligent. *** Vous pouvez sélectionner directement une fonction Wi-Fi qui se connecte à un smartphone. Les icônes varient en fonction du mode sélectionné ou des options choisies. En mode Prise de vue Mon appareil photo > Icônes affichées à l’écran 44 2. Options de prise de vue Icône Description Taille de la vidéo Mode AF (p. 75) Mesure de l’exposition (p. 92) Balance des blancs (p. 72) Réglage fin de la balance des blancs Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS) (p. 84) Fondu (p. 101) Enregistrement vocal désactivé (p. 101) Les icônes varient en fonction du mode sélectionné ou des options choisies. A propos de l’indicateur de niveau L’indicateur de niveau vous permet d’aligner l’appareil photo par rapport aux lignes horizontale et verticale à l’écran. Si l’indicateur de niveau n’est pas droit, réglez-le à l’aide de la fonction Calibrage horizontal (p. 153). Vertical Horizontal Ÿ Aligné sur l’horizon Ÿ Non aligné sur l’horizon Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser l’indicateur de niveau lors d’une prise de vue en orientation portrait. Enregistrement de vidéos 1 2 1. Informations de prise de vue Icône Description Mode de prise de vue Annuler la mise au point tactile. (tactile) Durée d’enregistrement actuelle / Durée d’enregistrement disponible Carte mémoire insérée • : recharge complète • : recharge partielle • (Rouge) : vide (recharger la batterie) • : recharge en cours Valeur d’exposition Sensibilité ISO (p. 71) Mon appareil photo > Icônes affichées à l’écran 45 En mode Lecture Affichage de photos Informations Mode F No Déclencheur ISO Mesure de l'exposition Flash Distance focale Balance des blancs EV Format photo Date Icône Description Fichier en cours / Nombre total de fichiers Numéro de dossier-Numéro de fichier Fichier RAW Fichier protégé Photos prises en continu (elles apparaissent sous forme de dossier) (p. 104) Menu Lecture / Edition / Paramétrage (tactile) Partager un fichier. (tactile) Afficher les images sous forme de miniatures. (tactile) 1 2 3 N° Description 1 Photo prise 2 Histogramme RGB (p. 150) 3 Mode Prise de vue, Mesure de l’exposition, Flash, Balance des blancs, Valeur d’ouverture, Vitesse d’obturation, ISO, Distance focale, Valeur d’exposition, Format photo, Date Lecture de vidéos Arrêter Icône Description Fichier en cours / Nombre total de fichiers Vitesse de lecture Numéro de dossier-Numéro de fichier Multi-mouvements Temps de lecture en cours Durée de la vidéo Afficher le fichier précédent / Retour rapide. (Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur l’icône de retour rapide, la vitesse de retour change selon l’ordre suivant : 2X, 4X, 8X.) Mettre une pause ou reprendre la lecture. Afficher le fichier suivant / Avance rapide. (Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur l’icône d’avance rapide, la vitesse d’avance change selon l’ordre suivant : 2X, 4X, 8X.) Régler le volume ou couper le son. Mon appareil photo > Icônes affichées à l’écran 46 Modification des informations affichées Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur [ D] pour changer de type d’affichage. Mode Type d’affichage Prise de vue • Informations de base sur la prise de vue (Mode Prise de vue, Vitesse d’obturation, Valeur d’ouverture, Valeur d’exposition, Sensibilité ISO, etc.) • Informations de base sur la prise de vue + Touches d’options de prise de vue (MENU, Fn, Connexion mobile, Mise au point tactile) + Indicateur de niveau • Informations de base sur la prise de vue + Touches d’options de prise de vue + Informations sur les options de la prise de vue en cours (Format photo, Mode de sélection, Flash, Mesure de l’exposition, Mode AF, etc.) • Informations de base sur la prise de vue + Touches d’options de prise de vue + Informations sur les options de la prise de vue en cours + Histogramme + Date et heure Lecture • Informations de base • Afficher toutes les informations sur le fichier en cours. • Afficher toutes les informations sur la prise de vue, y compris l’histogramme RGB. • Aucune information (lorsque vous êtes connecté à un HDTV ou un moniteur compatible HDMI) Mon appareil photo 47 Objectifs Vous pouvez acheter des objectifs NX-M en option. Découvrez les fonctions de chaque objectif et choisissez-en un selon vos besoins et vos préférences. Présentation de l’objectif Objectif SAMSUNG NX-M 9 mm F3.5 ED (exemple) 3 1 2 N° Description 1 Objectif 2 Repère d'installation de l'objectif 3 Contacts de l’objectif Mon appareil photo > Objectifs 48 Objectif SAMSUNG NX-M 9-27 mm F3.5-5.6 ED OIS (exemple) 5 3 1 2 4 N° Description 1 Index de verrouillage du zoom 2 Objectif 3 Bague de zoom 4 Repère d'installation de l'objectif 5 Contacts de l’objectif Verrouillage et déverrouillage de l’objectif Pour verrouiller l’objectif, faites pivoter la bague de zoom et tirez doucement dessus pour l’écarter l’appareil photo. Alignez les repères de verrouillage du zoom sur LOCK, comme indiqué dans l’illustration. Pour déverrouiller l’objectif, tournez la bague de zoom comme indiqué dans l’illustration. Il est impossible de prendre une photo si l’objectif est verrouillé. Mon appareil photo > Objectifs 49 Marquages de l’objectif Découvrez ce que les numéros inscrits sur l’objectif signifient. Objectif SAMSUNG NX-M 9-27 mm F3.5-5.6 ED OIS (exemple) 3 4 5 1 2 2 N° Description 1 Valeur d’ouverture Gamme de valeurs d’ouverture prises en charge. Par exemple, 1:3.5 – 5.6 correspond à une gamme de valeurs maximales d’ouverture allant de 3,5 à 5,6. 2 Longueur de focale Distance entre le centre de l’objectif et son point focal (en millimètres). Cette valeur est exprimée sous forme de plage (longueur minimum à maximum). Des longueurs de focale plus importantes réduisent les angles de vue et agrandissent le sujet. Des longueurs de focale moins élevées agrandissent les angles de vue. 3 ED ED signifie dispersion extra faible (Extra-low Dispersion). Un verre à très faible dispersion assure une excellente correction de l’aberration chromatique (déformation qui se produit lorsqu’un objectif ne parvient pas à mettre au point toutes les couleurs vers le même point de convergence). 4 OIS (p. 84) Stabilisation optique de l’image. Les objectifs bénéficiant de cette fonction détectent les mouvements internes de l’appareil photo et les compensent efficacement. 5 Ø Diamètre de l’objectif. Assurez-vous que le diamètre des filtres que vous fixez sur l’objectif est égal au diamètre de ce dernier. Mon appareil photo 50 Accessoires Utilisez des accessoires comme un flash externe qui peut vous fournir une quantité de lumière constante. Vous pouvez également utiliser la bague d’adaptation pour fixer les objectifs NX. Pour obtenir davantage d’informations sur les accessoires en option, consultez le mode d’emploi de ceux-ci. • Les illustrations peuvent différer par rapport au produit fourni. • Vous pouvez acheter des accessoires agréés Samsung auprès d’un revendeur ou d’un centre de service après-ventes Samsung. Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommages causés par l’utilisation d’accessoires fournis par d’autres fabricants. Présentation du flash externe SEF7A (exemple) (en option) 1 4 3 2 N° Description 1 Cadran de fixation du flash 2 Lampe 3 Connexion flash 4 Port du flash Mon appareil photo > Accessoires 51 Fixation du flash externe 1 Ouvrez le cache du port du flash externe. 2 Montez le flash en l’insérant fermement dans le port du flash externe. • Maintenez le cache du port du flash externe ouvert avec le doigt. 3 Sécurisez le flash en tournant le cadran de fixation du flash dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d’une montre. • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction du mode de prise de vue sélectionné. • Un court laps de temps se déroule entre les deux déclenchements du flash. Ne bougez pas tant que le flash ne s’est pas déclenché une seconde fois. • Ne forcez pas sur le flash pour le retirer. Vous risquez d’endommager le flash et l’appareil photo. • Utilisez uniquement des flashs homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de flashs incompatibles peut endommager l’appareil photo. Mon appareil photo > Accessoires 52 Montage de la bague d’adaptation 1 Retirez les caches de la bague d’adaptation et le cache du boîtier. 2 Alignez les repères (blancs) sur l’appareil photo et la bague d’adaptation. Tournez ensuite la bague d’adaptation comme indiqué dans l’illustration jusqu’au déclic. Disposition de la bague d’adaptation Bague d’adaptation Samsung NX (exemple) (en option) 1 2 4 3 N° Description 1 Touche de déverrouillage de l’objectif 2 Repère de la monture d’objectif NX-M 3 Repère de la monture d’objectif NX 4 Douille pour trépied Mon appareil photo > Accessoires 53 2 Maintenez enfoncée la touche de déverrouillage de l’objectif sur l’appareil photo. Faites ensuite tourner l’objectif comme indiqué dans l’illustration. • Le flash n’est pas disponible lors de l’utilisation de la bague d’adaptation. • L’option Continue dans le mode Prise de vue n’est pas disponible lors de l’utilisation de la bague d’adaptation. • Des lignes horizontales peuvent apparaître sur la photo lorsque vous utilisez la bague d’adaptation et que le sujet est exposé à une source lumineuse fluorescente ou une lampe au mercure. Pour résoudre ce problème, sélectionnez b ĺ Réduction de l'effet de bandes ĺ Activé. Cette fonction peut assombrir les bords du cadre. 3 Alignez les repères (rouges) sur l’objectif NX et la bague d’adaptation. Tournez ensuite l’objectif comme indiqué dans l’illustration jusqu’au déclic. Retrait de la bague d’adaptation 1 Maintenez enfoncée la touche de déverrouillage de l’objectif sur la bague d’adaptation. Faites ensuite tourner l’objectif comme indiqué dans l’illustration. Mon appareil photo 54 Modes de prise de vue Deux modes de prise de vue simples, Automatique et Intelligent, vous permettent de réaliser des prises de vue à l’aide de nombreux paramètres automatiques. Des modes supplémentaires vous offrent de plus grandes possibilités de personnalisation des paramètres. Mode Automatique En mode Automatique, l’appareil photo reconnaît l’environnement dans lequel les prises de vue sont effectuées et règle automatiquement les facteurs liés à l’exposition, comme par exemple la vitesse d’obturation, la valeur d’ouverture, la mesure de l’exposition, la balance des blancs et la compensation de l’exposition. L’appareil photo contrôlant la plupart de ces fonctions, certaines fonctions de prise de vue sont limitées. Ce mode est utile pour prendre rapidement des photos en effectuant le moins de réglages possible. 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Automatique. 2 Cadrez le sujet. 3 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course. • L’appareil photo sélectionne une scène. L’icône correspondante apparaît à l’écran. A Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 55 Scènes reconnaissables Icône Description Paysages Scènes sur fonds blancs éclatants Paysages de nuit Portraits de nuit Paysages à contre-jour Portraits à contre-jour Portraits Plans rapprochés d’objets Plans rapprochés de texte Couchers de soleil Intérieurs, endroits obscurs Eclairage partiel Plans rapprochés avec éclairage au spot Portraits avec éclairage au spot Icône Description Ciel bleu Zones boisées (couleur dominante verte) Plans rapprochés de sujets colorés Appareil photo stabilisé sur un trépied et sujet relativement immobile pendant une durée donnée. (en cas de prise de vue dans un endroit sombre) Sujets en mouvement Feux d’artifice (lors de l’utilisation d’un trépied) 4 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. • Il est possible que l’appareil photo détecte des scènes différentes ou des sujets identiques, en fonction des conditions de prise de vue, telles que le bougé de l’appareil photo, l’éclairage et la distance à laquelle se trouve le sujet. • Si l’appareil photo ne reconnaît pas de mode scénique, il utilise les paramètres par défaut du mode Automatique. • Même lorsqu’un visage est détecté, il est possible que l’appareil photo ne sélectionne pas un mode Portrait, selon la position du sujet ou de l’éclairage. • Même si vous utilisez un trépied, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne détecte pas le mode Trépied ( ) si le sujet est en mouvement. • La batterie de l’appareil photo se décharge plus rapidement, car l’appareil change souvent les paramètres afin de capturer les scènes adéquates. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 56 Mode intelligent En mode Intelligent, vous pouvez prendre une photo avec des options prédéfinies pour une scène donnée. 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Intelligent. 2 Sélectionnez une scène. Option Description Beauté Réaliser un portrait à l’aide de diverses options qui permettent d’adoucir et d’éclairer le grain de peau. Meilleure photo Prendre plusieurs clichés et remplacer les visages pour obtenir la meilleure photo possible. Mode Continu Prendre une série de photos de sujets qui se déplacent. Prise Enfants Prendre une photo avec un son amusant pour attirer l’attention des enfants. Paysage Réaliser des clichés de nature morte ou de paysage. Macro Prendre en photo des petits sujets ou réaliser des gros plans. Nature morte Prendre en photo des aliments dans des tons plus colorés. Fêtes et intérieurs Prendre des photos d’intérieur nettes. Action Prendre en photo des sujets se déplaçant à grande vitesse. Ton riche Prendre une photo avec des couleurs dynamiques. Panorama Prendre en photo une scène panoramique en un seul cliché. Cascade Prendre en photo des scènes avec des cascades. Option Description Silhouette Prendre en photo des sujets sous forme d’ombres foncées se détachant sur un fond clair. Coucher de soleil Prendre des photos de couchers du soleil avec des tons rouges et jaunes naturels. Nuit Prendre une photo d’une plus grande netteté et avec un bruit réduit, dans des conditions d’éclairage faible. Feux d'artifice Prendre en photo des scènes avec des feux d’artifice. Lumière Prendre en photo des scènes avec des traînées lumineuses dans des conditions de faible luminosité. 3 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour effectuer la prise de vue. Utilisation du mode Beauté En mode Beauté, diverses options vous permettent d’adoucir et d’éclairer le grain de peau avant de réaliser un portrait. 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Intelligent ĺ Beauté. 2 Appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Retouche des visages. 3 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour sélectionner une option. 4 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler l’option. • Vous pouvez également faire glisser le curseur ou appuyer sur +/- pour régler les options. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 57 5 Appuyez sur [o]. 6 Cadrez le sujet à photographier, puis enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point. 7 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. Utilisation du mode Meilleure photo En mode Meilleure photo, vous pouvez prendre plusieurs clichés et remplacer les visages pour obtenir la meilleure photo possible. Vous avez alors la possibilité de choisir, pour chacun des individus d’une photo de groupe, le meilleur cliché. 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Intelligent ĺ Meilleure photo. 2 Cadrez le sujet à photographier, puis enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point. 3 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. • L’appareil photo prend 5 photos consécutives. • La première est définie comme arrière-plan. • Les visages sont automatiquement détectés après la mise au point par l’appareil photo. 4 Appuyez sur un visage pour le remplacer. Retour Enregistrer 5 Sélectionnez la meilleure pose pour les 5 visages photographiés. • Répétez les étapes 4 et 5 pour remplacer le reste des visages de la photo. • L’icône apparaît sur l’image recommandée par l’appareil photo. 6 Appuyez sur [o] pour enregistrer la photo. • Utilisez un trépied pour stabiliser l’appareil photo. • La résolution photo est définie sur 5.9M ou à une valeur inférieure. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 58 Prise de photos panoramiques En mode Panorama, vous pouvez prendre une large scène panoramique sur une seule photo. Le mode Panorama permet de prendre une série de photos puis de les combiner pour créer une image panoramique. 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Intelligent ĺ Panorama. 2 Maintenez le [Déclencheur] enfoncé, puis déplacez lentement l’appareil photo dans la direction souhaitée. • Une flèche indiquant la direction du mouvement apparaît et l’intégralité de l’image prise est affichée dans le champ d’aperçu. • Une fois les scènes alignées, l’appareil photo prend alors le cliché suivant automatiquement. 3 Une fois terminé, relâchez le [Déclencheur]. • L’appareil photo enregistre automatiquement les photos en une seule. • Si vous relâchez le [Déclencheur] au cours de la prise de vue, la vue panoramique s’interrompt et les photos prises sont enregistrées. • La résolution varie en fonction de la photo panoramique que vous avez prise. • En mode Panorama, certaines options de prise de vue ne sont pas disponibles. • L’appareil photo peut cesser de photographier du fait de la composition de la prise de vue ou du déplacement du sujet. • En mode Panorama, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne prenne pas l’intégralité de la dernière scène si vous arrêtez le déplacement de l’objectif pour améliorer la qualité de la photo. Pour prendre une scène entière, déplacez l’appareil photo légèrement au-delà du point final. • Pour optimiser les résultats lors de la prise de photos panoramiques, évitez : - de déplacer l’appareil photo trop rapidement ou trop lentement ; - d’interrompre le déplacement de l’appareil photo avant le cliché suivant ; - de déplacer l’appareil photo à une vitesse irrégulière ; - de secouer l’appareil photo ; - d’effectuer la prise de vue dans un endroit sombre ; - de prendre en photo des sujets en mouvement placés trop près de l’objectif ; - les conditions de prise de vue, où la luminosité et la couleur de la lumière, ne cessent de changer. • Les photos réalisées sont automatiquement sauvegardées et la prise de vue est interrompue dans les circonstances suivantes : - si vous changez de direction en pleine prise de vue ; - si vous bougez l’appareil photo trop rapidement ; - si vous ne bougez pas l’appareil photo. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 59 Mode Programme L’appareil photo règle automatiquement la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur d’ouverture afin d’atteindre une valeur d’exposition optimale. Ce mode est pratique lorsque vous souhaitez réaliser des prises de vue avec une exposition constante tout en ayant la possibilité de régler d’autres paramètres. 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Programme. 2 Définissez les options de votre choix. 3 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 60 Changement de programme La fonction Changement de programme vous permet de régler la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur d’ouverture tout en conservant la même valeur d’exposition sur l’appareil photo. Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur d’ouverture, puis appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler la valeur d’ouverture. La vitesse d’obturation change en fonction de la valeur d’ouverture. Vitesse obturation minimum Réglez la vitesse d’obturation afin qu’elle ne soit pas plus lente que la vitesse sélectionnée. Toutefois, si la valeur d’exposition optimale ne peut être atteinte, car la sensibilité ISO est égale à la valeur ISO maximale définie par l’option Plage ISO auto, la vitesse d’obturation doit être plus lente que la vitesse d’obturation minimum sélectionnée. Pour définir une vitesse d’obturation minimum En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Vitesse obturation minimum ĺ une option. • Cette fonction est disponible uniquement si la sensibilité ISO est réglée sur Automatique. • Cette fonction est disponible uniquement en mode Programme ou Priorité ouverture. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 61 Mode Priorité ouverture En mode Priorité ouverture, l’appareil photo calcule automatiquement la vitesse d’obturation en fonction de la valeur d’ouverture choisie. Vous pouvez ajuster la profondeur de champ (DOF) en modifiant la valeur d’ouverture. Ce mode est utile pour prendre des portraits ou des photos de fleurs ou de paysages. Profondeur de champ élevée Profondeur de champ réduite 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Priorité ouverture. 2 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner la valeur d’ouverture. 3 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler la valeur d’ouverture. 4 Définissez les options de votre choix. 5 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. • En cas de faible luminosité, il peut s’avérer nécessaire d’augmenter la sensibilité ISO afin d’éviter de prendre des photos floues. • Pour régler la vitesse d’obturation minimum, en mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Vitesse obturation minimum ĺ une option. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur la valeur d’ouverture à l’écran pour la régler. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 62 Mode Priorité Vitesse En mode Priorité Vitesse, l’appareil photo règle automatiquement la valeur d’ouverture en fonction de la vitesse d’obturation choisie. Ce mode est utile pour prendre des photos de sujets en mouvement ou pour créer des effets de vitesse sur une photo. Par exemple, définissez la vitesse d’obturation sur une valeur supérieure à 1/500 s afin d’immobiliser le sujet sur l’image. Pour rendre le sujet flou, réglez la vitesse d’obturation sur une valeur inférieure à 1/30 s. Vitesse d’obturation lente Vitesse d’obturation rapide 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Priorité vitesse. 2 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner la priorité vitesse. 3 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour sélectionner la priorité vitesse. 4 Définissez les options de votre choix. 5 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. • Afin de compenser le manque de lumière causé par des vitesses d’obturation rapides, augmentez l’ouverture pour permettre à plus de lumière d’entrer. Si vos photos sont toujours trop sombres, augmentez la valeur ISO. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur la vitesse d’obturation à l’écran pour la régler. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 63 Mode Manuel Le mode Manuel vous permet d’ajuster la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur d’ouverture manuellement. Dans ce mode, vous pouvez entièrement contrôler l’exposition de vos photos. Ce mode est utile dans des environnements de prise de vue professionnels, tel qu’un studio, ou lorsqu’il est nécessaire d’affiner les paramètres de l’appareil photo. Le mode Manuel est également recommandé pour les prises de vue de nuit ou les feux d’artifice. 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Manuel. 2 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner la valeur d’ouverture ou la priorité vitesse. 3 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler la valeur d’ouverture ou la priorité vitesse. 4 Définissez les options de votre choix. 5 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur la valeur d’ouverture ou la vitesse d’obturation à l’écran pour la régler. Utilisation du mode d’exposition Lorsque vous réglez la valeur d’ouverture ou la vitesse d’obturation, l’exposition change en fonction des paramètres et l’affichage peut s’assombrir. Lorsque cette fonction est activée, la luminosité de l’écran est constante quels que soient les paramètres choisis, pour vous permettre de mieux cadrer la prise de vue. Pour utiliser le mode d’exposition En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Mode d'exposition ĺ une option. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 64 Utilisation de la fonction Bulb Utilisez la fonction Bulb pour réaliser des prises de vue nocturnes ou pour photographier des ciels étoilés. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’obturateur reste ouvert de façon à vous permettre de créer des effets de lumière animée. Pour utiliser un flash de type bulb En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner la priorité vitesse ĺ Appuyez sur [C] de façon continue pour régler la priorité vitesse sur Bulb ĺMaintenez le [Déclencheur] enfoncé pendant la durée souhaitée. • Si vous réglez une valeur ISO élevée ou si vous laissez l’obturateur ouvert pendant longtemps, du bruit plus important risque d’apparaître sur l’image. • Les options de prise de vue, le flash et la fonction Déclenchement par sélection ne peuvent pas être utilisés avec la fonction Bulb. • La fonction Bulb est disponible uniquement en mode Manuel. • Utilisez un trépied et le déclenchement de l’obturateur pour stabiliser l’appareil photo. • Plus l’obturateur reste ouvert, plus l’enregistrement d’une photo est long. N’éteignez pas l’appareil photo lorsque l’enregistrement d’une photo est en cours. • Si vous utilisez cette fonction pendant une durée prolongée, veillez à ce que la batterie soit complètement rechargée. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 65 • Le format H.264 (MPEG-4 part10 / AVC) est l’un des derniers formats vidéo mis au point par les organismes internationaux de normalisation ISO-IEC et ITU-T et disponible depuis 2003. Sachant que ce format utilise un taux de compression élevé, davantage de données peuvent être enregistrées dans un espace mémoire plus restreint. • Il est possible que l’appareil photo enregistre le son du stabilisateur d’image si vous avez activé cette option ou bien lorsque vous réalisez une vidéo. • Si vous retirez l’objectif de l’appareil photo lorsque vous réalisez une vidéo, l’enregistrement est alors interrompu. Ne changez pas d’objectif lorsque vous réalisez une vidéo. • Si vous modifiez brusquement l’angle de prise de vue lorsque vous réalisez une vidéo, il est possible que l’appareil photo ne puisse pas enregistrer les images de façon précise. Utilisez un trépied pour réduire les mouvements de l’appareil photo. • L’appareil photo prend uniquement en charge la fonction Mise au point multiple lors de l’enregistrement d’une vidéo. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser d’autres fonctions de réglage de la zone de mise au point. • Lorsque la taille du fichier vidéo est supérieure à 4 Go, l’appareil photo interrompt automatiquement l’enregistrement même si la durée maximale d’enregistrement (29 minutes et 59 secondes) n’est pas atteinte. • Si vous utilisez une carte mémoire à vitesse d’écriture lente, il est possible que l’enregistrement de la vidéo en cours s’interrompe, car la carte ne parvient pas à traiter un débit de données trop élevé. Si cela se produit, remplacez la carte utilisée par une autre carte à vitesse d’écriture plus rapide, ou bien réduisez la résolution de l’image (par exemple, de 1280X720 à 640X480). • Utilisez toujours l’appareil photo pour formater une carte mémoire. Si vous formatez les fichiers sur un autre appareil photo ou sur un ordinateur, cela peut affecter la capacité d’enregistrement de la carte ou bien causer la perte de fichiers. • Lors de l’enregistrement d’une vidéo avec la même sensibilité ISO, l’écran peut être plus sombre que lors de la prise d’une photo. Réglez la sensibilité ISO. • Lorsque vous enregistrez une vidéo en mode Programme, Priorité ouverture, ou Priorité vitesse, le paramètre ISO est automatiquement défini sur Automatique. Enregistrement d’une vidéo En mode Prise de vue, vous pouvez enregistrer des vidéos Full HD (1920X1080) en appuyant sur (mode d’enregistrement vidéo). L’appareil photo vous permet de réaliser des vidéos d’une durée de 29 minutes et 59 secondes maximum, à 30 ips, et enregistre les fichiers au format MP4 (H.264). Le son est enregistré via le microphone de l’appareil photo. Sélectionnez Fondu pour appliquer un fondu entrant ou sortant à la scène. Vous pouvez également sélectionner l’option Voix ou toute autre option permettant de paramétrer l’enregistrement (p. 101). 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez un mode Prise de vue. • Il est possible que cette fonction soit inopérante dans certains modes. 2 Définissez les options de votre choix. 3 Appuyez sur (mode d’enregistrement vidéo) pour lancer l’enregistrement. • L’appareil photo maintient la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur d’ouverture définies avant la prise de vue. 4 Appuyez à nouveau sur (mode d’enregistrement vidéo) pour l’arrêter. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur le [Déclencheur] pour arrêter l’enregistrement. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 66 Fonctions disponibles en mode Prise de vue Pour obtenir plus d’informations à propos des fonctions de prise de vue, reportez-vous à la section 2. Fonction Automatique Intelligent Programme Priorité ouverture Priorité vitesse Manuel Retouche des visages (p. 56) -O- - - - Format photo (p. 69) OOOOOO Qualité (p. 70) - OOOOO ISO (p. 71) - - OOOO Balance des blancs (p. 72) - - OOOO Assistant photo (p. 74) - - OOOO Filtre intelligent (p. 96) - - OOOO Mode AF (p. 75) - OOOOO Zone AF (p. 77) - OOOOO Détection des visages (p. 79) - - OOOO Mise au point tactile (p. 81) OOOOOO Aide mise au point manuelle (p. 83) OOOOOO Lien AE à AF (p. 94) - - OOOO Mode d'exposition (p. 63) - - OOOO O : vous pouvez sélectionner les options de la fonction. (Les options disponibles varient selon le mode Prise de vue.) - : la fonction est réglée sur une certaine option par défaut ou la fonction n’est pas disponible. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 67 Fonction Automatique Intelligent Programme Priorité ouverture Priorité vitesse Manuel OIS (anti flou de bougé) (p. 84) OOOOOO Prise de vue (Continue/Mode Rafale/ Retardateur/Bracketing) (p. 85) OOOOOO Mesure de l'exposition (p. 92) - - OOOO Plage dynamique (p. 95) - - OOOO Flash (p. 90) OOOOOO Compensation de l'exposition (p. 97) - - OOO - Verrouillage de l’exposition (p. 98) - - OOO - O : vous pouvez sélectionner les options de la fonction. (Les options disponibles varient selon le mode Prise de vue.) - : la fonction est réglée sur une certaine option par défaut ou la fonction n’est pas disponible. Chapitre 2 Fonctions de prise de vue Découvrez les fonctions que vous pouvez définir en mode Prise de vue. En utilisant les fonctions de prise de vue, vous pouvez personnaliser encore plus vos photos et vos vidéos. Fonctions de prise de vue 69 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Format photo Sélectionner une résolution plus élevée permet d’augmenter le nombre de pixels des photos ou des vidéos afin de pouvoir les imprimer sur du papier grand format ou de les visionner sur un grand écran. Si vous utilisez une résolution élevée, la taille du fichier augmente également. Pour afficher des photos dans un cadre numérique ou en télécharger vers le web, sélectionnez une basse résolution. Pour régler la taille En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Format photo ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Taille Recommandé pour (3:2) 5472x3648* Impression sur papier A1. (3:2) 3888x2592 Impression sur papier A2. (3:2) 2976x1984 Impression sur papier A3. (3:2) 1728x1152 Impression sur papier A5. (16:9) 5472x3080 Impression sur papier A1 ou affichage sur un téléviseur HD. (16:9) 3712x2088 Impression sur papier A3 ou affichage sur un téléviseur HD. (16:9) 2944x1656 Impression sur papier A4 ou affichage sur un téléviseur HD. (16:9) 1920x1080 Impression sur papier A5 ou affichage sur un téléviseur HD. (1:1) 3648x3648 Impression d’une photo carrée sur du papier au format A1. (1:1) 2640x2640 Impression d’une photo carrée sur du papier au format A3. (1:1) 2000x2000 Impression d’une photo carrée sur du papier au format A4. (1:1) 1024x1024 Pièce jointe à un courriel. Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. Format et résolution 70 Fonctions de prise de vue > Format et résolution Qualité L’appareil photo enregistre les photos au format JPEG ou RAW. Les photos prises par un appareil numérique sont souvent converties en format JPEG et stockées en mémoire selon les paramètres de l’appareil photo au moment de la prise de vue. Les fichiers RAW ne sont pas convertis au format JPEG et sont stockés en mémoire sans aucune modification. Les fichiers RAW ont pour extension « SRW ». Pour régler et étalonner l’exposition, la balance des blancs, les tonalités, le contraste et les couleurs des fichiers RAW, ou pour les convertir au format JPEG ou TIFF, utilisez le programme Adobe Photoshop Lightroom fourni sur le DVD-ROM. Pour enregistrer des photos en format RAW, assurez-vous que la carte mémoire dispose d’un espace suffisant. Pour définir la qualité En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Qualité ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Format Description JPEG Maximale* : • Compressée afin d’obtenir la meilleure qualité possible. • Recommandé pour imprimer en grand format. JPEG Elevée : • Compressé pour obtenir une meilleure qualité. • Recommandé pour imprimer en format normal. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Format Description JPEG Normale : • Compressé pour obtenir une qualité normale. • Recommandé pour imprimer en petit format ou pour envoyer sur le web. RAW RAW : • Enregistrer une photo sans perte de données. • Recommandé pour effectuer des modifications après la prise de vue. RAW+JPEG RAW + Très élevée : enregistrer une photo au format JPEG (qualité maximale) et RAW. RAW+JPEG RAW + Elevée : enregistrer une photo au format JPEG (qualité Elevée) et RAW. RAW+JPEG RAW + Normale : enregistrer une photo au format JPEG (qualité normale) et RAW. Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. Fonctions de prise de vue 71 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue La sensibilité ISO désigne la sensibilité de l’appareil photo à la lumière. Plus la valeur de la sensibilité ISO est importante, plus l’appareil photo est sensible à la lumière. Par conséquent, en sélectionnant une valeur de sensibilité ISO plus élevée, vous pouvez réaliser des prises de vue dans des endroits sombres, en utilisant une vitesse d’obturation supérieure. Néanmoins, il est possible que cela augmente les effets de bruit électronique et donne un aspect granuleux à la photo. Pour définir la sensibilité ISO En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ ISO ĺ une option. Exemples ISO 160 ISO 400 ISO 800 ISO 3200 • Augmentez la valeur ISO dans les endroits où l’utilisation du flash est interdite. En définissant une valeur ISO élevée, vous pouvez obtenir des photos d’une plus grande clarté sans avoir besoin de davantage de lumière. • Afin de réduire le bruit visuel (parasites) qui peut apparaître sur des photos prises avec une valeur ISO élevée, utilisez la fonction Réducteur de bruit (p. 147). • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur la valeur ISO à l’écran pour la régler. Sensibilité ISO Fonctions de prise de vue 72 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue En photographie, la balance des blancs permet de corriger la dominante de couleur en fonction de l’éclairage ambiant. La couleur des photos dépend du type et de la qualité de la source d’éclairage. Pour que les couleurs de vos photos soient le reflet de la réalité, choisissez des conditions d’éclairage appropriées pour calibrer la balance des blancs, par exemple Balance des blancs automatique, Lumière du jour, Nuageux, Tungstène, ou bien réglez la température des couleurs manuellement. Vous pouvez également ajuster la couleur des sources de lumière prédéfinies de façon à ce que les couleurs de la photo correspondent aux couleurs véritables de la scène sous différentes conditions d’éclairage. Pour définir une balance des blancs En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Balance des blancs ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Description Balance des blancs automatique* : automatiser les paramètres en fonction des conditions d’éclairage. Lumière du jour : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue en extérieur par beau temps. Cette option permet d’obtenir des photos reproduisant au mieux les couleurs naturelles d’une scène. Nuageux : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue en extérieur par temps nuageux ou dans un endroit ombragé. Les photos prises par temps nuageux ont tendance à présenter une teinte plus bleutée que celles prises par beau temps. Cette option permet de compenser cet effet. Blanc fluorescent : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue sous un éclairage de type lumière naturelle fluorescente, en particulier celle de couleur blanche. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Description N Blanc/Noir fluorescent : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue sous un éclairage de type lumière naturelle fluorescente, en particulier celle aux tonalités de blanc très prononcé. D Lumière du jour fluorescent : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue sous un éclairage de type lumière naturelle fluorescente, en particulier celle de couleur blanche avec une teinte légèrement bleue. Tungstène : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue en intérieur avec des ampoules à incandescence ou des lampes halogène. Les ampoules tungstène incandescentes ont tendance à ajouter une tonalité rougeâtre. Cette option permet de compenser cet effet. Balance des blancs flash : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue à l’aide d’un flash. Réglage personnalisé : utiliser vos paramètres prédéfinis. Vous pouvez définir manuellement la balance des blancs en appuyant sur [D], et en prenant une feuille de papier blanc en photo. Remplir le cercle de mesure de l’exposition sélective avec la feuille de papier et définir la balance des blancs. Température couleur : régler manuellement la température des couleurs de la source lumineuse. La température des couleurs est une mesure exprimée en degrés kelvins et qui indique spécifiquement le type de source lumineuse. Il est possible d’obtenir une photo plus chaleureuse à l’aide d’une valeur élevée, et une photo moins chaleureuse à l’aide d’une valeur plus basse. Appuyez sur [D], puis réglez la température de couleur. Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. Balance des blancs 73 Fonctions de prise de vue > Balance des blancs Personnalisation des options de préréglage de la balance des blancs Vous pouvez également personnaliser les options prédéfinies de balance des blancs. Pour personnaliser les options prédéfinies En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Balance des blancs ĺ une option ĺ [D] ĺ appuyez sur [D/I/C/F]. Balance des blancs : Lumière du jour Retour Définir Réinitialiser Vous pouvez également appuyer sur une zone à l’écran. Exemples Balance des blancs automatique Lumière du jour Lumière du jour fluorescent Tungstène Fonctions de prise de vue 74 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue L’assistant photo vous permet d’appliquer des styles à vos photos afin de leur faire adopter différents aspects et créer des impressions particulières. Vous pouvez également créer et enregistrer vos propres styles de photos en réglant la couleur, la saturation, la netteté et le contraste pour chacun de ces styles. L’application de différents styles ne suit aucune règle particulière, quelles que soient les conditions. Essayez plusieurs styles différents et trouvez les paramètres qui vous conviennent. Pour définir un style de photo En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Assistant photo ĺ une option. Exemples Standard Accentué Portrait Paysage Naturel Rétro Cool Calme Classique • Vous pouvez également régler les valeurs des paramètres de styles prédéfinis. Sélectionnez une option de l’Assistant photo, appuyez sur [D], puis réglez la couleur, la saturation, la netteté ou le contraste. • Pour personnaliser l’Assistant photo, sélectionnez , ou , puis réglez la couleur, la saturation, la netteté et le contraste. • Il est impossible de régler en même temps les options de l’Assistant photo et les options de Filtre intelligent. Assistant photo (styles de photo) Fonctions de prise de vue 75 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Mode AF Voici comment régler la mise au point de l’appareil photo en fonction des sujets. Vous pouvez sélectionner un mode de mise au point adapté au sujet, parmi les modes de Mise au point automatique unique, Mise au point automatique continue et Mise au point manuelle. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, la fonction de mise au point automatique s’active. En mode MF, vous devez appuyer sur [C/F] pour effectuer manuellement la mise au point. Dans la plupart des cas, vous pouvez effectuer une mise au point en sélectionnant AF unique. Il est difficile d’effectuer une mise au point sur des sujets se déplaçant rapidement ou ayant des effets d’ombre subtils différents de ceux de l’arrière-plan. Dans ce cas, sélectionnez un mode de mise au point approprié. Pour définir le mode de mise au point automatique En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [F] ĺ une option. • Vous pouvez également effectuer ce réglage en appuyant sur [m] ĺb ĺ Mode AF ĺ option choisie en mode Prise de vue. • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction l’objectif utilisé. AF unique La fonction AF unique est appropriée pour les photos de sujets immobiles. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, la mise au point s’établit dans la zone correspondante. Une fois la mise au point effectuée, la zone devient verte. 76 Fonctions de prise de vue > Mode AF AF continu Tant que vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, l’appareil photo continue d’effectuer la mise au point automatique. Une fois la zone de mise au point établie, cette dernière reste active sur le sujet même lorsque ce dernier est en mouvement. Ce mode est recommandé pour photographier une personne sur une bicyclette, un chien qui court ou une course automobile. Mise au point manuelle Vous pouvez effectuer la mise au point manuellement sur un sujet en appuyant sur [C/F] sur l’appareil photo. La fonction Aide mise au point manuelle vous permet d’effectuer facilement la mise au point. Lorsque vous réglez la mise au point, la zone de mise au point est agrandie. Ce mode est recommandé pour photographier un objet dont la couleur est similaire à celle de l’arrière-plan, une scène de nuit ou un feu d’artifice. • Après avoir pris une photo avec la mise au point manuelle, appuyez sur [o] ĺ [C/F] pour régler de nouveau manuellement la mise au point. • Si vous utilisez cette fonction, vous ne pouvez pas régler les options Mise au point tactile, Détection des visages, Zone AF, et Lien AE à AF. • Tandis que vous réglez la mise au point, l’échelle de la mise au point manuelle ( ) apparaît. Fonctions de prise de vue 77 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue La fonction Zone AF permet de modifier l’emplacement de la zone de mise au point. D’une manière générale, les appareils photo effectuent une mise au point sur le sujet le plus proche. En présence de plusieurs sujets, il arrive que certains sujets soient involontairement mis au point. Vous pouvez modifier l’emplacement de la zone de mise au point afin d’éviter qu’une mise au point porte sur des sujets non choisis. En sélectionnant une zone de mise au point appropriée, vous pouvez obtenir une photo plus claire et plus nette. Pour définir la zone de mise au point automatique En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Zone AF ĺ une option. Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. Mise au point sélection Vous pouvez définir la mise au point sur une zone en particulier. Appliquez un effet hors-mise au point afin de faire ressortir le sujet. La zone de mise au point de la photo ci-dessous a été repositionnée et sa taille a été modifiée afin de l’adapter au visage du sujet. En mode Prise de vue, afin de redimensionner ou de déplacer la zone de mise au point, appuyez sur [o]. Appuyez sur une zone pour y effectuer la mise au point ou appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour déplacer la zone de mise au point, puis effectuez un mouvement de pincement avec deux doigts ou le mouvement inverse pour redimensionner la zone de mise au point. Zone AF 78 Fonctions de prise de vue > Zone AF Mise au point multiple L’appareil photo affiche un rectangle vert sur les zones de la photo où la mise au point est correctement effectuée. La photo est divisée en au moins deux zones et l’appareil photo effectue une mise au point sur chaque zone. Ceci est recommandé pour les photos de paysages. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, l’appareil photo affiche les zones de mise au point, comme illustré sur la photo ci-dessous. Fonctions de prise de vue 79 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Détection des visages Utilisez les options de Détection des visages pour faire un autoportrait ou un visage souriant. Pour utiliser la fonction de détection des visages En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Détection des visages ĺ une option. • Lorsque l’appareil photo détecte un visage, il suit automatiquement le visage détecté. • Avec l’option AF Détection Visage, l’appareil photo effectue automatiquement la mise au point sur le cadre blanc. • Selon les options sélectionnées dans l’Assistant photo, la détection des visages peut ne pas être efficace. • Lors d’une mise au point manuelle, la détection des visages peut ne pas être possible. • La détection des visages risque de ne pas fonctionner lorsque : - le sujet est éloigné de l’appareil photo ; - la luminosité est trop forte ou trop faible ; - le sujet n’est pas face à l’appareil photo ; - le sujet porte des lunettes de soleil ou un masque ; - les expressions faciales du sujet changent radicalement ; - le sujet est à contre-jour ou les conditions d’éclairage sont instables. • Lorsque vous définissez les options Détection des visages, la zone AF est automatiquement réglée sur Mise au point multiple. • Selon les options de Détection des visages que vous avez sélectionnées, il est possible que certaines options de prise de vue ne soient pas disponibles. Normale L’appareil photo effectue une mise au point en priorité sur les visages. Il peut détecter jusqu’à 10 visages. Ce paramètre est recommandé pour les photos de groupe. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, l’appareil photo effectue une mise au point sur les visages, comme cela est présenté sur la photo ci-dessous. Lors d’une prise de vue d’un groupe de personnes, la mise au point effectuée avec l’appareil photo sur le visage de la personne la plus proche s’affiche en blanc tandis que celle effectuée sur les autres personnes s’affiche en gris. 80 Fonctions de prise de vue > Détection des visages Clin d’œil L’appareil photo déverrouille automatiquement le déclencheur 2 secondes après avoir détecté un clin d’œil. • Clignez des yeux pendant plus de 1 seconde pour une meilleure détection. • La détection des clignements des yeux peut échouer si : - l’appareil photo n’est pas aligné par rapport au niveau des yeux ; - le sujet est dans l’ombre ; - le sujet porte des lunettes ; - le sujet est éloigné de l’appareil photo. Sourire L’appareil photo déverrouille automatiquement le déclencheur lorsqu’il détecte un visage souriant. Lorsque votre sujet a un grand sourire, il est plus facile pour l’appareil photo de le détecter. Fonctions de prise de vue 81 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Mise au point avec suivi La mise au point avec suivi permet de suivre un sujet et d’effectuer automatiquement la mise au point, même si le sujet se déplace ou en cas de changement de cadrage de la prise de vue. Cadre blanc : l’appareil photo effectue un suivi. Cadre vert : la mise au point est effectuée lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course. Cadre rouge : l’appareil photo ne parvient pas à effectuer la mise au point. Sélectionnez ou effectuez la mise au point sur une zone en appuyant sur l’écran. Effectuez ensuite la mise au point sur le sujet et prenez une photo en appuyant sur l’écran. Pour régler la mise au point tactile En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺMise au point tactile ĺ une option. • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur sur l’écran et sélectionner une option en mode Prise de vue. Mise au point tactile La mise au point tactile vous permet de sélectionner une zone focale et d’effectuer une mise au point en appuyant sur l’écran. Point AF La zone de mise au point correspond à celle sur laquelle vous appuyez à l’écran tant que la mise au point n’est pas effectuée. Mise au point tactile 82 Fonctions de prise de vue > Mise au point tactile Déclenchement par sélection Une simple pression du doigt suffit pour prendre une photo. Lorsque vous appuyez sur un sujet, l’appareil photo effectue automatiquement la mise au point sur lui et prend une photo. • Si vous ne sélectionnez aucune zone de mise au point, la mise au point automatique est inopérante. • Le suivi peut s’avérer impossible si : - le sujet est trop petit ; - le sujet bouge de manière irrégulière ; - le sujet est à contre-jour ou si la luminosité est insuffisante ; - les couleurs ou les motifs sur le sujet et l’arrière-plan sont identiques ; - des motifs horizontaux, tels que des stores, sont présents ; - l’appareil photo n’est pas stable ; - vous prenez des photos en continu. • Lorsque le suivi ne parvient pas à s’effectuer, la fonctionnalité est réinitialisée. • Si l’appareil photo ne parvient pas à suivre le sujet, la zone de mise au point est réinitialisée. • Si l’appareil photo ne réussit pas à effectuer la mise au point, le cadre de mise au point devient rouge et la fonctionnalité est réinitialisée. Fonctions de prise de vue 83 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue En mode mise au point manuelle, vous devez appuyer sur [C/F] pour effectuer la mise au point. Lorsque vous utilisez la fonction Aide mise au point manuelle, vous pouvez obtenir une meilleure mise au point car la zone de mise au point est agrandie. Cette fonction est disponible uniquement sur les objectifs avec lesquels la mise au point manuelle est possible. Pour définir l’aide à la mise au point manuelle En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Aide mise au point manuelle ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description Désactivé Ne pas utiliser la fonction Aide mise au point manuelle. Agrandir x5* Lorsque vous effectuez la mise au point, la zone de mise au point est grossie jusqu’à 5 fois. Agrandir x8 Lorsque vous effectuez la mise au point, la zone de mise au point est grossie jusqu’à 8 fois. Aide mise au point manuelle Fonctions de prise de vue 84 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Utilisez la fonction OIS (stabilisation optique de l’image) pour réduire le bougé de l’appareil photo. La fonction OIS peut ne pas être disponible avec certains objectifs. Le bougé de l’appareil photo tend à se produire dans les endroits sombres ou lors de la prise de vue en intérieur. Dans ces cas-là, l’appareil photo utilise une vitesse d’obturation plus lente afin d’augmenter la quantité de lumière qui pénètre dans l’objectif, ce qui peut donner des photos floues. Vous pouvez éviter ce type de situations en utilisant la fonction OIS. Pour définir les options OIS En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ OIS (anti flou de bougé) ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Description Mode 1* : la fonction OIS s’applique uniquement lorsque vous enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à fond ou à mi-course. Mode 2 : la fonction OIS est activée. Désactivé : la fonction OIS est désactivée. Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS) Sans correction OIS Avec correction OIS • L’option OIS risque de ne pas fonctionner si : - vous bougez l’appareil photo pour suivre un sujet en mouvement ; - l’appareil photo est instable ; - la vitesse d’obturation est lente (par exemple, si vous sélectionnez Nuit dans le mode Intelligent) ; - le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible ; - vous prenez une photo en gros plan. • Si la fonction OIS est utilisée avec un trépied, les photos peuvent être floues en raison des vibrations du capteur OIS. Désactivez la fonction OIS lorsque vous utilisez un trépied. • Si l’appareil photo est soumis à un choc, l’affichage devient flou. Si cela se produit, éteignez l’appareil photo, puis rallumez-le. • Utilisez la fonction OIS uniquement si cela est nécessaire, car la batterie se décharge plus rapidement. • Cette option peut ne pas être disponible avec certains objectifs. Fonctions de prise de vue 85 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Il vous est possible de définir le type de prise de vue, par exemple Continue, Mode Rafale, Retardateur ou Bracketing. Sélectionnez Unique pour prendre une photo à la fois. Sélectionnez Normal continu ou Mode Rafale pour prendre des photos de sujets se déplaçant rapidement. Sélectionnez BKT AE, BKT NB, A. photo Bracketing ou Bracketing de profondeur de champ pour régler l’exposition, la balance des blancs, appliquer des effets de l’assistant photo ou prendre des photos avec différentes profondeurs de champ. Vous pouvez également sélectionner Retardateur pour prendre automatiquement une photo à l’issue d’une durée particulière. Pour modifier la méthode de prise de vue En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [C] ĺ une option. • Vous pouvez également effectuer ce réglage en appuyant sur [m] ĺb ĺ Prise de vue ĺ une option en mode Prise de vue. • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. Unique Prenez une photo à chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur]. Recommandé pour des conditions de prise de vue courantes. Prise de vue (type) 86 Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue (type) Normal continu Prenez des photos en continu en appuyant sur le [Déclencheur]. Vous pouvez prendre jusqu’à 6 photos par seconde. La vitesse maximale de prise de vue est de 6 images par seconde. Elle ralentira au bout environ de 11 clichés au format JPEG et de 4 clichés au format RAW. (Cela peut varier en fonction des caractéristiques techniques de la carte mémoire.) Mode Rafale Prenez successivement 10 photos par seconde (3 secondes), 15 photos par seconde (2 secondes) ou 30 photos par seconde (1 seconde) lorsque vous appuyez une fois sur le [Déclencheur]. Cette fonctionnalité est recommandée pour prendre des photos de mouvements rapides ou de sujets se déplaçant rapidement, par exemple lors de courses automobiles. • Pour définir le nombre de clichés, en mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [C] → Mode Rafale, puis appuyez sur [D]. • Le format photo est réglé sur 5M. • L’enregistrement d’une photo peut prendre plus de temps. • Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le flash avec cette option. • La vitesse d’obturation doit être supérieure à 1/30 seconde. • Les photos capturées avec cette option peuvent être légèrement agrandies lors de l’enregistrement. • Vous ne pouvez pas régler l’option ISO à une valeur supérieure à ISO 3200. • Cette option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le format de fichier RAW et n’est pas disponible lorsque la qualité d’image est réglée sur RAW. 87 Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue (type) Retardateur Prenez une photo à l’issue d’une durée particulière. Vous pouvez régler le retardateur sur un délai compris entre 2 et 30 secondes. • Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour interrompre la prise de vue. • Pour définir les détails du retardateur, en mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [C] ĺ Retardateur, puis appuyez sur [D]. Bracketing Exposition automatique (BKT AE) Après avoir appuyé sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo prend 3 photos consécutives : l’originale, une un peu plus sombre et une autre un peu plus claire. Utilisez un trépied afin d’éviter d’obtenir un résultat flou lors de la prise continue des trois clichés par l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez régler les paramètres dans le menu Réglage Bracketing. Exposition -2 Original Exposition +2 Pour définir les détails de la fonction bracketing, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d ĺ Réglage Bracketing ĺ une option. 88 Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue (type) Bracketing Balance des blancs (BKT NB) Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo prend 3 photos consécutives : l’originale et deux autres avec des paramètres de balance des blancs différents. La photo originale est réalisée lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur]. Les deux autres sont réglées automatiquement en fonction de la balance des blancs que vous avez définie. Vous pouvez régler les paramètres dans le menu Réglage Bracketing. WB-2 Original WB+2 • Pour définir les détails de la fonction bracketing, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d ĺ Réglage Bracketing ĺ une option. • Cette option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le format de fichier RAW et n’est pas disponible lorsque la qualité d’image est réglée sur RAW. Bracketing Assistant photo (A. photo Bracketing) Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo réalise trois clichés consécutifs, chacun avec différents paramètres de l’assistant photo. L’appareil photo effectue une prise de vue et applique les trois options de l’assistant photo que vous avez définies pour la photo prise. Vous pouvez sélectionner trois paramètres différents dans le menu Réglage Bracketing. Accentué Standard Rétro • Pour définir les détails de la fonction bracketing, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d ĺ Réglage Bracketing ĺ une option. • Cette option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le format de fichier RAW et n’est pas disponible lorsque la qualité d’image est réglée sur RAW. 89 Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue (type) Bracketing de profondeur de champ Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo réalise trois clichés consécutifs, chacun avec une profondeur différente en ajustant la valeur d’ouverture. Utilisez un trépied afin d’éviter d’obtenir un résultat flou lors de la prise continue des trois clichés par l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez régler les paramètres dans le menu Réglage Bracketing. • Pour définir les détails de la fonction bracketing, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d ĺ Réglage Bracketing ĺ une option. • Cette fonction est disponible uniquement en mode Programme ou Priorité ouverture. • Si la valeur d’ouverture est réglée au maximum ou au minimum, deux photos seront prises avec la valeur d’ouverture maximum ou minimum. Fonctions de prise de vue 90 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Pour obtenir une photo réaliste du sujet, la quantité de lumière doit être constante. Lorsque la source de luminosité varie, vous pouvez utiliser un flash pour obtenir une quantité de lumière stable. Sélectionnez des paramètres appropriés en fonction d’une source de lumière et d’un sujet. Pour définir les options du flash En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Flash ĺune option. Icône Description Désactivé : ne pas utiliser le flash. A Flash intelligent : l’appareil photo règle automatiquement l’intensité du flash en fonction de la quantité de lumière ambiante. A Automatique : le flash se déclenche automatiquement dans les endroits sombres. Yeux rouges auto : le flash se déclenche automatiquement et réduit l’effet yeux rouges. Contre jour : le flash se déclenche chaque fois que vous prenez une photo. (La luminosité est automatiquement ajustée.) Ctre jour + Yeux rouges : le flash se déclenche et réduit l’effet yeux rouges chaque fois que vous prenez une photo. 1er Rideau : le flash se déclenche immédiatement après l’ouverture de l’obturateur. L’appareil photo capture plus rapidement et plus nettement la photo d’un sujet au cours d’un mouvement. Direction du déplacement de la boule Icône Description 2e Rideau : le flash se déclenche juste avant que l’obturateur ne se referme. L’appareil photo prend plus lentement et plus clairement la photo d’un sujet au cours d’un mouvement. Direction du déplacement de la boule • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. • Un court laps de temps se déroule entre les deux déclenchements du flash. Ne bougez pas tant que le flash ne s’est pas déclenché une seconde fois. • Si vous sélectionnez Désactivé, le flash ne se déclenche pas même si un flash externe est installé. • Pour certains objectifs, l’objectif peut bloquer la lumière provenant du flash interne. Si cela se produit, utilisez un flash externe en option. • Si vous fixez un autre objectif que celui fourni à l’aide d’une bague d’adaptation, le flash ne se déclenche pas. Utilisez uniquement des flashs homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de flashs externes incompatibles peut endommager l’appareil photo. Flash 91 Fonctions de prise de vue > Flash Réduction de l’effet yeux rouges Si le flash se déclenche lorsque vous photographiez une personne dans un endroit sombre, il est possible qu’une lueur rouge apparaisse dans ses yeux. Pour réduire l’effet yeux rouges, sélectionnez Yeux rouges auto ou Ctre jour + Yeux rouges. Sans réduction des yeux rouges Avec réduction des yeux rouges Si le sujet est trop éloigné de l’appareil photo ou se déplace lorsque le flash se déclenche, il se peut que l’effet yeux rouges ne soit pas corrigé. Réglage de l’intensité du flash Lorsque le flash est activé, réglez son intensité de ±2 niveaux. Pour définir l’intensité du flash En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur ĺ Flash ĺ sélectionnez l’option de votre choix ĺ appuyez sur [D] ĺ [C/F]. Retour Définir Flash : Contre jour • Vous pouvez également faire glisser le curseur ou appuyer sur +/- pour régler l’intensité. • Le réglage de l’intensité du flash risque d’être sans effet si : - le sujet est trop près de l’appareil photo ; - vous avez sélectionné une sensibilité ISO élevée ; - la valeur d’exposition est trop élevée ou trop faible. • Dans certains modes de prise de vue, cette fonction n’est pas accessible. • Si le sujet est trop rapproché lorsque vous utilisez le flash, cela peut refléter la lumière et assombrir la photo. Vérifiez que le sujet est situé à la distance recommandée, qui peut varier selon l’objectif utilisé. Fonctions de prise de vue 92 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Le mode de mesure de l’exposition correspond à la manière dont l’appareil photo mesure la quantité de lumière. L’appareil photo mesure la quantité de lumière, puis utilise cette mesure dans de nombreux modes afin de régler divers paramètres. Par exemple, si un sujet semble plus foncé qu’il ne l’est en réalité, l’appareil photo effectue une prise de vue surexposée de ce sujet. Si un sujet semble plus clair qu’il ne l’est en réalité, l’appareil photo effectue une prise de vue sous-exposée de ce sujet. La luminosité et l’ambiance générale de la photo peuvent également être affectées par la façon dont l’appareil photo mesure la quantité de lumière. Sélectionnez des paramètres appropriés pour chaque type de conditions de prise de vue. Pour définir une option de mesure de l’exposition En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Mesure de l'exposition ĺ une option. Multiple Le mode Multiple calcule la quantité de lumière dans différentes zones. Lorsque la lumière est suffisante, ou lorsqu’elle ne l’est pas, l’appareil photo règle l’exposition en équilibrant la luminosité générale de la scène. Ce mode est adapté aux photos courantes. Mesure de l’exposition 93 Fonctions de prise de vue > Mesure de l’exposition Centrée Le mode Centrée effectue des calculs sur une zone plus large qu’en mode Sélective. Il détermine la quantité de lumière dans la partie centrale de la photo (60 – 80%) ainsi que sur le reste de la photo (20 – 40%). Ce mode est recommandé dans les cas où la différence de luminosité entre un sujet et un arrière-plan est faible, ou qu’une partie du sujet est grande au regard de la composition générale de la photo. Sélective La mesure Sélective calcule la quantité de lumière au centre. Lorsque vous réalisez une prise de vue dans des conditions de fort contre-jour derrière un sujet, l’appareil photo règle l’exposition afin de capturer correctement ce dernier. Par exemple, lorsque vous sélectionnez le mode Multiple dans des conditions de fort contre-jour, l’appareil photo considère que la quantité globale de lumière est élevée, ce qui assombrit la photo. Le mode Sélective permet d’éviter cette situation, car la quantité de lumière est calculée dans une zone définie. Le sujet est clair alors que l’arrière plan est sombre. Le mode Sélective est recommandé dans un cas comme celui-ci, qui présente une différence d’exposition importante entre un sujet et un arrière-plan. 94 Fonctions de prise de vue > Mesure de l’exposition Mesure de la valeur d’exposition de la zone de mise au point Lorsque cette fonction est activée, l’appareil photo applique automatiquement une exposition optimale en calculant la luminosité de la zone de mise au point. Cette option est disponible uniquement si vous sélectionnez la mesure de l’exposition Sélective ou Multiple, et l’option Mise au point sélection. Pour appliquer cette fonction En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Lien AE à AF ĺ une option. Fonctions de prise de vue 95 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Cette fonction corrige automatiquement la perte de luminosité due à des différences de niveaux d’exposition sur la photo. Pour définir les options de Plage dynamique En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Plage dynamique ĺ une option. Sans effet de plage dynamique Avec effet de plage dynamique * Paramètre par défaut Icône Description Désactivé* : ne pas utiliser la Plage dynamique. Plage intelligente+ : corriger la perte de luminosité. HDR : prendre 3 photos avec différentes expositions, puis les associer afin de créer automatiquement une image unique. • Vous ne pouvez pas régler l’option ISO à une valeur supérieure à ISO 3200. • Les options Plage dynamique ne peuvent pas être définies avec des options de prise de vue autres que Unique ou Retardateur. • Il est impossible de régler en même temps les options de Plage dynamique avec les options Filtre intelligent ou Assistant photo. • Les options Plage dynamique ne peuvent pas être réglées avec la fonction Bulb. Plage dynamique Fonctions de prise de vue 96 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Le filtre intelligent vous permet d’appliquer des effets spéciaux à vos photos ou vidéos. Vous pouvez sélectionner diverses options de filtre pour créer des effets spéciaux difficiles à obtenir avec des objectifs normaux. Pour appliquer les options de filtre intelligent En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Filtre intelligent ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description Désactivé* Aucun effet Vignettage Appliquer des couleurs rétro, un fort contraste et un effet de dégradé intense, caractéristiques des appareils Lomo. Miniature Appliquer un effet de plongée pour que le sujet apparaisse plus petit. Esquisse Appliquer un effet d’esquisse au crayon. Œil de poisson Déformer les objets en gros plan pour imiter l’effet visuel d’un objectif ultra grand angle. Il est impossible de régler en même temps les options du Filtre intelligent et les options de l’Assistant photo. Filtre intelligent Fonctions de prise de vue 97 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue L’appareil photo définit automatiquement l’exposition en mesurant les niveaux de lumière à partir de la composition d’une photo et de la position d’un sujet. Si la valeur d’exposition définie par l’appareil photo est plus élevée ou plus basse que celle que vous attendiez, vous pouvez alors la régler manuellement. La valeur d’exposition peut être réglée en faisant varier les valeurs de ±3. L’appareil photo affiche un message d’avertissement en rouge pour chaque niveau d’exposition au-delà d’une plage de ±3. Pour régler la valeur d’exposition, appuyez sur le voyant de niveau d’exposition à l’écran ou sur ĺ EV et réglez la valeur d’exposition. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [I] pour sélectionner la valeur d’exposition et appuyer sur [C/F] pour la régler. Vous pouvez vérifier la valeur d’exposition par rapport à l’indicateur de niveau d’exposition. Indicateur de niveau d’exposition Exposition augmentée (plus clair) Exposition réduite (plus sombre) Mise en garde à propos de l’exposition Indice d’exposition standard -2 Original +2 Compensation de l’exposition Fonctions de prise de vue 98 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Si vous ne parvenez pas à obtenir une exposition adéquate à cause d’un fort contraste de luminosité, verrouillez l’exposition, puis prenez la photo. Pour verrouiller l’exposition, définissez les éléments de la photo sur lesquels vous souhaitez calculer le niveau d’exposition et appuyez sur la touche de personnalisation. (lorsque la fonction de la touche de personnalisation est réglée sur AEL) (p. 151) Une fois l’exposition verrouillée, pointez l’objectif sur le sujet et appuyez sur le [Déclencheur]. Verrouillage de l’exposition Fonctions de prise de vue 99 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Les fonctions vidéo disponibles sont présentées ci-dessous. Format vidéo Définissez le format vidéo. Pour définir les options du format vidéo En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺgĺ Format vidéo ĺ une option. Lorsque Vidéo est réglée sur NTSC * Paramètre par défaut Icône Taille Recommandé pour * 1920X1080 (30 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur Full HD. 1280X720 (30 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur HD. 640X480 (30 ips) (4:3) Visionner sur un téléviseur. 320X240 (30 ips) (4:3) Publier sur un site Web via un réseau sans fil (30 secondes maximum). Lorsque Vidéo est réglée sur PAL * Paramètre par défaut Icône Taille Recommandé pour * 1920X1080 (25 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur Full HD. 1280X720 (25 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur HD. 640X480 (25 ips) (4:3) Visionner sur un téléviseur. 320X240 (25 ips) (4:3) Publier sur un site Web via un réseau sans fil (30 secondes maximum). Fonctions vidéo 100 Fonctions de prise de vue > Fonctions vidéo Qualité vidéo Définissez la qualité vidéo à utiliser. Pour définir les options de la qualité vidéo En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺgĺ Qualité vidéo ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Extension Description MP4 (H.264) Normale : enregistrer des vidéos en qualité normale. MP4 (H.264) HQ* : enregistrer des vidéos en haute qualité. Multi-mouvements Régler la vitesse de lecture d’une vidéo. Pour définir les options de vitesse de lecture En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺgĺMultimouvements ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Description x0.25 : enregistrer une vidéo et la visionner au 1/4 de la vitesse normale. (Disponible uniquement à la résolution 640x480 ou 320x240) x1* : enregistrer une vidéo et la visionner à la vitesse normale. x5 : enregistrer une vidéo et la visionner à la vitesse normale X 5. x10 : enregistrer une vidéo et la visionner à la vitesse normale X 10. x20 : enregistrer une vidéo et la visionner à la vitesse normale X 20. • Si vous sélectionnez une option différente de x1, les fonctions d’enregistrement sonore et de correction des distorsions ne seront pas prises en charge. • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. 101 Fonctions de prise de vue > Fonctions vidéo Voix Il arrive parfois que certaines vidéos muettes soient plus attractives que celles filmées avec le son. Désactivez l’enregistrement vocal afin de réaliser une vidéo muette. Pour définir les options de voix En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺgĺ Voix ĺ une option. Fondu Vous pouvez appliquer un fondu au début ou à la fin d’une scène en utilisant la fonction de fondu sur l’appareil photo, sans avoir recours à un ordinateur. Appliquez l’effet de fondu entrant pour qu’une scène commence progressivement par cet effet. Appliquez l’effet de fondu sortant pour qu’une scène se termine progressivement par cet effet. Utilisez cette fonction de manière appropriée pour vous permettre d’ajouter des effets spectaculaires à vos vidéos. Pour définir les options de fondu En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺgĺFondu ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Description Désactivé* : fonction de fondu non utilisée. Entrant : la scène est fondue progressivement en début de séquence. Sortant : la scène est fondue progressivement en fin de séquence. Entrant-Sortant : le fondu est appliqué au début et à la fin de la scène. Lorsque la fonction de fondu est utilisée, l’enregistrement d’un fichier peut prendre plus de temps. Chapitre 3 Lecture / Retouche Voici comment lire et retoucher des photos et des vidéos. Pour retoucher des fichiers sur un ordinateur, reportez-vous à la section 6. 103 Lecture / Retouche Voici comment afficher les miniatures de vos photos et vidéos, et comment protéger ou supprimer des fichiers. Si vous n’effectuez aucune opération pendant un certain temps, les informations et icônes à l’écran disparaissent. Ces éléments réapparaissent lorsque vous réutilisez l’appareil photo. Affichage de photos 1 Appuyez sur [y]. • Le fichier capturé le plus récent s’affiche. 2 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour faire défiler les fichiers. • Vous pouvez également faire glisser l’image vers la gauche ou la droite pour passer à un autre fichier. Il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas modifier ou reproduire des fichiers capturés avec d’autres appareils photo en raison de tailles ou de codecs non pris en charge. Utilisez un ordinateur ou un autre dispositif pour modifier ou reproduire ces fichiers. Affichage des images sous forme de miniatures Pour rechercher des photos et des vidéos de votre choix, convertissezles en vues Miniatures en appuyant sur [I] ou sur en mode Lecture. L’affichage sous forme de miniatures permet de visionner plusieurs images à la fois afin de parcourir et de trouver facilement les éléments que vous recherchez. Vous pouvez également classer et afficher les fichiers par catégorie, telles que la date ou le type de fichier. En vue Miniatures, appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Afficher ĺ un élément pour sélectionner le mode vue Miniatures. Recherche et gestion de fichiers 104 Lecture / Retouche > Recherche et gestion de fichiers Affichage de fichiers par catégorie 1 En vue Miniatures, appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Filtrer ĺune catégorie. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description Tout* Afficher les fichiers normalement. Date Afficher les fichiers en fonction de leur date d’enregistrement. Type de fichier Afficher les fichiers par type. 2 Sélectionnez une liste afin de l’ouvrir. 3 Sélectionnez un fichier afin de l’afficher. Visionnage de fichiers sous forme de dossiers Les prises de vues en continue et en rafale apparaissent sous forme de dossiers. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un dossier, toutes les photos sont automatiquement lues. La suppression d’un dossier entraîne celle de toutes les photos qu’il contient. 1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [C/F] pour accéder au dossier voulu. • Vous pouvez également faire glisser l’image vers la gauche ou la droite pour accéder au dossier voulu. • L’appareil photo lit automatiquement les photos contenues dans le dossier. 2 Appuyez sur [o] pour ouvrir le dossier. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur le dossier à l’écran pour ouvrir le dossier. 105 Lecture / Retouche > Recherche et gestion de fichiers 3 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour accéder à un autre fichier. • Vous pouvez également faire glisser l’image vers la gauche ou la droite pour passer à un autre fichier. 4 Appuyez sur [o] pour revenir au mode Lecture. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur pour revenir au mode Lecture. Protection de fichiers Protégez vos fichiers contre toute suppression accidentelle. 1 En mode Lecture, faites défiler l’affichage pour atteindre un fichier. 2 Appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Protéger ĺ Activé. Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer ou faire pivoter un fichier protégé. 106 Lecture / Retouche > Recherche et gestion de fichiers Suppression de fichiers En mode Lecture, supprimez des fichiers pour gagner de l’espace sur la carte mémoire. Les fichiers protégés ne sont pas supprimés. Suppression d’un seul fichier Vous pouvez sélectionner un seul fichier et le supprimer. 1 En mode Lecture, sélectionnez un fichier et appuyez sur [n]. 2 Lorsque la fenêtre s’affiche, appuyez sur Oui. Suppression de plusieurs fichiers Vous pouvez effectuer une sélection multiple de fichiers pour les supprimer. 1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Supprimer ĺ Suppression multiple. • Vous pouvez également, en mode Miniatures, appuyer sur [n], puis sélectionner les fichiers à supprimer. 2 Sélectionnez les fichiers à supprimer, puis appuyez sur [C/F], puis sur [o]. • Appuyez sur [o] à nouveau pour annuler votre sélection. 3 Appuyez sur [n]. 4 Lorsque la fenêtre s’affiche, appuyez sur Oui. Suppression de tous les fichiers Vous pouvez supprimer tous les fichiers de la carte mémoire en même temps. 1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m]. 2 Sélectionnez z ĺ Supprimer ĺ Supprimer tout. 3 Lorsque la fenêtre s’affiche, appuyez sur Oui. 107 Lecture / Retouche Agrandissement d’une photo En mode Lecture, vous pouvez agrandir les photos lorsque vous les visualisez. Effectuez un mouvement de pincement avec deux doigts sur l’écran pour réduire une photo ou le mouvement inverse pour l’agrandir. Faites glisser la photo pour déplacer la zone agrandie. Vous pouvez également utiliser la fonction Recadrer afin d’extraire une partie de l’image affichée sur l’écran et d’enregistrer la photo découpée en tant que nouveau fichier. Zone agrandie Agrandissement (L’agrandissement maximum possible peut varier en fonction de la résolution.) Retour Rogner Pour Procédez comme suit Déplacer la zone agrandie Appuyer sur [D/I/C/F]. Rogner la photo agrandie Appuyez sur [o]. (enregistrée en tant que nouveau fichier) Revenir à l’image originale Appuyez sur [m]. Appuyez deux fois sur une zone pour l’agrandir rapidement. Visionnage d’un diaporama Vous pouvez visionner les photos sous forme de diaporama et ajouter des effets de transition entre chaque photo. 1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m]. 2 Sélectionnez z ĺ Options diaporama. 3 Choisissez une option d’effet de diaporama. • Passez à l’étape 4 pour démarrer le diaporama sans aucun effet. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description Mode de lecture Activer une option de répétition du diaporama. (Une lecture*, Répétition) Intervalle • Définir l’intervalle entre l’affichage des photos. (1 s*, 3 s, 5 s, 10 s) • Les intervalles peuvent uniquement être définis si l’effet de changement de scène est réglé sur Désactivé. Effet • Définir un changement de scène entre les photos. • Sélectionnez Désactivé pour annuler les effets. Affichage de photos 108 Lecture / Retouche > Affichage de photos 4 Appuyez sur [m]. 5 Sélectionnez Démarrer diaporama. 6 Visionnez le diaporama. • Appuyez sur [o] pour mettre en pause. • Appuyez à nouveau sur [o] pour reprendre la lecture. • Appuyez sur [m] pour interrompre le diaporama et revenir au mode Lecture. Rotation automatique En activant la fonction Rotation auto, l’appareil photo fait pivoter automatiquement les photos prises verticalement afin qu’elles s’affichent horizontalement à l’écran. Pour définir les options de rotation automatique En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Rotation auto ĺ une option. 109 Lecture / Retouche En mode Lecture, vous pouvez lire une vidéo, en extraire une image ou encore la rogner et l’enregistrer en tant que nouveau fichier. Arrêter Icône Description Afficher le fichier précédent / Retour rapide. (Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur l’icône lors de la lecture d’une vidéo, la vitesse de lecture change selon la séquence suivante : 2X, 4X, 8X.) Mettre une pause ou reprendre la lecture. Afficher le fichier suivant / Avance rapide. (Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur l’icône lors de la lecture d’une vidéo, la vitesse de lecture change selon la séquence suivante : 2X, 4X, 8X.) Régler le volume ou couper le son. Avance ou retour rapide de la lecture Pour avancer ou rembobiner un fichier vidéo lors de sa lecture, utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes. • Appuyez sur . Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur l’icône, la vitesse de lecture change selon l’ordre suivant : 2X, 4X, 8X. • Appuyez sur [C/F]. Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur la touche, la vitesse de lecture change selon l’ordre suivant : 2X, 4X, 8X. • Faites glisser les poignées qui apparaissent sur la barre de progression à gauche ou à droite. Vous pouvez modifier la position de lecture dans la vidéo. • Faites glisser une zone de l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite. Vous pouvez modifier la position de lecture dans la vidéo. Lecture de vidéos 110 Lecture / Retouche > Lecture de vidéos Réglage de la luminosité d’une vidéo Réglez la luminosité d’une vidéo au cours de sa lecture. Pour régler la luminosité d’une vidéo Appuyez sur le côté gauche de l’écran ĺ faites glisser l’affichage vers le haut ou le bas. Arrêter Réglage du volume d’une vidéo Réglez le volume d’une vidéo au cours de sa lecture. Pour régler le volume d’une vidéo Touchez la moitié droite de l’afficheur ĺ faites-la glisser vers le haut ou le bas. Arrêter Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [D/I] pour régler le volume d’une vidéo. 111 Lecture / Retouche > Lecture de vidéos 9 Appuyez sur Recadrer pour raccourcir une vidéo. • Vous pouvez définir la scène à rogner en faisant glisser les poignées qui apparaissent sur la barre de progression. 10 Lorsque la fenêtre s’affiche, appuyez sur Oui. • La durée de la vidéo d’origine doit être d’au moins 10 secondes. • L’appareil photo enregistre la vidéo modifiée en tant que nouveau fichier et conserve la vidéo d’origine intacte. • L’endroit où vous souhaitez que le recadrage commence peut être sélectionné 2 secondes après le début de la lecture. Extraction d’une image pendant la lecture 1 Lors du visionnage d’une vidéo, appuyez sur [o] ou à l’endroit où vous souhaitez extraire une image. 2 Appuyez sur Enregistrer. • La résolution de l’image extraite est la même que celle de la vidéo d’origine. • L’image extraite est enregistrée en tant que nouveau fichier. Recadrage d’une vidéo au cours de la lecture 1 En mode Lecture, faites défiler l’affichage pour atteindre une vidéo, puis appuyez sur [m]. 2 Sélectionnez Recadrer la vidéo. 3 Appuyez sur [o] ou pour démarrer la lecture de la vidéo. 4 Appuyez sur [o] ou à l’endroit où le recadrage doit débuter. 5 Appuyez sur Point de départ. 6 Appuyez sur [o] ou pour reprendre la lecture de la vidéo. 7 Appuyez sur [o] ou à l’endroit où le recadrage doit se terminer. 8 Appuyez sur Point final. 112 Lecture / Retouche Les photos retouchées sont enregistrées en tant que nouveaux fichiers, sous des noms de fichiers différents. Il est impossible de retoucher les photos prises dans certains modes par le biais de la fonction Édition photo. Pour retoucher des images En mode Lecture, faites défiler l’affichage pour atteindre une photo, puis appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Retoucher l'image ĺune option. • Il est possible que certaines images ne puissent pas être retouchées à l’aide de la fonction Édition photo. Dans ce cas, utilisez le logiciel de retouche fourni. • Les fichiers RAW ne peuvent pas être retouchés à l’aide la fonction Retoucher l’image. Dans ce cas, utilisez le logiciel de retouche fourni. • L’appareil photo enregistre les photos retouchées en tant que nouveau fichier. • Lorsque vous retouchez des photos, l’appareil photo les enregistre automatiquement à une résolution inférieure. Les photos pivotées ou redimensionnées manuellement ne sont pas automatiquement converties à une résolution inférieure. • Les photos visionnées en tant que dossier ne peuvent pas être retouchées. Ouvrez le dossier et sélectionnez une photo pour retoucher chacune des photos. Rognage d’une photo 1 Appuyez sur ĺ . 2 Faites glisser le coin du cadre pour redimensionner la zone. 3 Faites glisser le cadre pour déplacer la zone. 4 Appuyez sur [o] ou sur pour enregistrer. Retouche de photos 113 Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos Rotation d’une photo 1 Appuyez sur ĺ . 2 Appuyez sur une option. Rotation : Droite (90°) 3 Appuyez sur [o] ou sur pour enregistrer. • Vous pouvez également faire pivoter une photo en mode Lecture en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant z ĺ Rotation ĺ une option voulue. • L’appareil photo écrase le fichier d’origine. Redimensionnement de photos Modifiez la taille d’une photo pour l’enregistrer sous forme de nouveau fichier. 1 Appuyez sur ĺ . 2 Appuyez sur une option. Redimensionner : 3888 x 2592 3 Appuyez sur [o] ou sur pour enregistrer. Les options de redimensionnement disponibles dépendent de la taille d’origine de la photo. 114 Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos Réglage des photos Vous pouvez modifier les photos prises en réglant la luminosité, le contraste ou la couleur. 1 Appuyez sur . 2 Appuyez sur une option de réglage. • Si vous avez sélectionné (Réglage automatique), passez à l’étape 6. Icône Description Original (revenir à l’image originale) Réglage automatique Luminosité Contraste Saturation Réglage RVB Température couleur Exposition 3 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler l’option. • Vous pouvez également faire glisser le curseur ou appuyer sur +/- pour régler l’option. 4 Appuyez sur [o] ou sur . 5 Appuyez sur . 6 Appuyez sur [o] ou sur pour enregistrer. 115 Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos Retouche de visages 1 Appuyez sur ĺ . 2 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler l’option. • Vous pouvez également faire glisser le curseur ou appuyer sur +/- pour régler l’option. • Au fur et à mesure que la valeur augmente, la couleur de la peau devient plus lumineuse et plus douce. 3 Appuyez sur [o] ou sur pour enregistrer. 116 Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos Effets de filtre intelligent Appliquez des effets spéciaux à vos photos. 1 Appuyez sur , puis sur une option. Filtre intelligent : Vignettage Option Description Désactivé Aucun effet Vignettage Appliquer des couleurs rétro, un fort contraste et un effet de dégradé intense, caractéristiques des appareils Lomo. Miniature Appliquer un effet de plongée pour que le sujet apparaisse plus petit. Onirique Masquer les imperfections du visage ou appliquer des effets doux. Esquisse Appliquer un effet d’esquisse au crayon. Option Description Effet ultra grand angle Déformer les objets en gros plan pour imiter l’effet visuel d’un objectif ultra grand angle. Classique Appliquer un effet noir et blanc. Rétro Appliquer un effet sépia. Peinture à l'huile Appliquer un effet de peinture à l’huile. Dessin Appliquer un effet de bande dessinée. Peinture à l'encre Appliquer un effet d’esquisse à l’encre. Filtre croisé Ajouter des lignes qui irradient vers l’extérieur depuis les objets brillants pour imiter l’effet visuel d’un filtre croisé. Prise de vue zoom Brouiller les bords d’une photo pour souligner les sujets placés au milieu. 2 Appuyez sur [o] ou sur . 3 Appuyez sur pour enregistrer. Chapitre 4 Réseau sans fil Voici comment vous connecter à des réseaux locaux sans fil et à utiliser des fonctions de connectivité. 118 Réseau sans fil Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau Cette section décrit comment se connecter via un point d’accès lorsqu’un réseau local sans fil se trouve dans le champ de détection. Vous pouvez également configurer les paramètres réseau. Connexion à un réseau local sans fil 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi. 2 Sélectionnez , , , , ou . 3 Suivre les instructions qui s’affichent jusqu’à l’apparition de l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi. • Dans certains modes, appuyez sur [m], puis sélectionnez Paramètres Wi-Fi. • L’appareil photo recherche automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles. 4 Sélectionnez un point d’accès. Samsung1 Samsung2 Samsung3 Paramètres Wi-Fi Actualiser Retour • Sélectionnez Actualiser pour actualiser la liste des points d’accès disponibles. • Sélectionnez Ajouter mode sans fil pour ajouter un point d’accès manuellement. Le nom du point d’accès doit être en anglais pour ajouter le point d’accès manuellement. Icône Description Point d’accès Ad hoc Point d’accès sécurisé Point d’accès WPS Force du signal Appuyez sur [F] ou appuyez sur pour définir les options de paramètres réseau. • Lorsque vous choisissez un point d’accès sécurisé, une fenêtre contextuelle apparaît. Saisissez le mot de passe requis pour vous connecter au réseau local sans fil. Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section « Saisie de texte » (p. 122). • Lorsqu’une page de connexion apparaît, reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation du navigateur de connexion » pour en savoir plus (p. 120). • Si vous choisissez un point d’accès non sécurisé, l’appareil photo se connecte au réseau local sans fil. • Si vous choisissez un point d’accès pris en charge par un profil WPS, sélectionnez ĺ Connexion PIN WPS, puis saisissez le code PIN sur le périphérique du point d’accès. Vous avez également la possibilité de vous connecter à un point d’accès pris en charge par un profil WPS en sélectionnant ĺ Connexion via la touche WPS sur l’appareil photo et en appuyant sur la touche WPS sur le périphérique du point d’accès. • Si un message vous informe de la réglementation en vigueur sur la collecte de données, lisez son contenu et acceptez ses conditions. 119 Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau Configuration des options de réseau 1 Dans l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi, accédez à un point d’accès, puis appuyez sur [F] ou . 2 Pour chaque option, précisez les informations requises. Option Description Mot de passe réseau Saisir le mot de passe réseau. Configuration IP Définir l’adresse IP automatiquement ou manuellement. Configuration manuelle de l’adresse IP 1 Dans l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi, accédez à un point d’accès, puis appuyez sur [F] ou . 2 Sélectionnez Configuration IP ĺ Manuel. 3 Pour chaque option, précisez les informations requises. Option Description IP Saisir l’adresse IP statique. Masque sousréseau Indiquer le masque sous-réseau. Passerelle Indiquer la passerelle. Serveur DNS Saisir l’adresse DNS. 120 Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau Utilisation du navigateur de connexion Vous pouvez saisir vos informations de session via le navigateur lors de la connexion à certains points d’accès, services de partage ou serveurs Cloud. Icône Description Fermer le navigateur de connexion. Accéder à la page précédente. Accéder à la page suivante. Arrêter le chargement de la page. Recharger la page. • Il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas sélectionner certaines options selon la page à laquelle vous êtes connecté. Il ne s’agit pas d’un dysfonctionnement. • Le navigateur de connexion peut ne pas se fermer automatiquement après la connexion à certaines pages. Si cela se produit, fermez le navigateur en appuyant sur , puis poursuivez vos manipulations. • La page de connexion peut s’avérer plus longue à charger en fonction de sa taille ou du débit du réseau. Si cela se produit, patientez jusqu’à ce que la fenêtre de connexion s’affiche. 121 Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau Conseils relatifs à la connexion réseau • Certaines fonctions Wi-Fi ne sont pas disponibles si vous n’insérez pas de carte mémoire. • La qualité de la connexion réseau est déterminée par les points d’accès. • Plus la distance entre l’appareil photo et le point d’accès est grande, plus ce premier met du temps à se connecter au réseau. • Si un périphérique à proximité utilise une fréquence radio identique à celle de l’appareil photo, il se peut que votre connexion s’interrompe. • Si le nom de votre point d’accès n’est pas en anglais, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne puisse pas localiser le périphérique ou que son nom apparaisse de façon incorrecte. • Pour connaître les paramètres réseau et le mot de passe requis, contactez votre administrateur réseau ou votre fournisseur d’accès réseau. • Si un réseau local sans fil requiert l’authentification du fournisseur d’accès, il se peut que vous ne soyez pas en mesure de vous connecter audit réseau. Pour vous connecter au réseau local sans fil, contactez votre fournisseur de service réseau. • En fonction du type de chiffrement, la longueur du mot de passe peut varier. • En fonction des conditions environnantes, il peut s’avérer impossible d’établir une connexion à un réseau local sans fil. • Il est possible que l’appareil photo affiche une imprimante compatible avec les réseaux locaux sans fil figurant dans la liste des points d’accès. Vous ne pouvez cependant pas vous connecter au réseau par le biais d’une imprimante. • Il est impossible de connecter l’appareil photo simultanément à un réseau et à un téléviseur. • La connexion à un réseau peut entraîner des frais supplémentaires. Ces coûts varient en fonction des conditions de votre forfait. • Si vous ne pouvez pas vous connecter à un réseau local sans fil, essayez un autre point d’accès dans la liste des points d'accès disponibles. • Il se peut qu’une page de connexion apparaisse lorsque vous sélectionnez des réseaux locaux sans fil gratuits mis à disposition par certains fournisseurs d’accès réseau. Saisissez votre ID et votre mot de passe pour vous connecter au réseau local sans fil. Pour en savoir plus sur l’inscription à ces services ou à un service particulier, contactez les fournisseurs d’accès réseau en question. • Soyez prudent lors de la saisie d’informations personnelles pour vous connecter à un point d’accès. Ne saisissez aucune information de paiement sur l’appareil photo. Le fabricant ne peut être tenu responsable de tout problème survenant suite à la saisie de telles informations. • Les connexions réseau disponibles peuvent varier selon le pays. • La fonction de réseau local sans fil de l’appareil photo doit être conforme à la législation en matière de transmission par radiofréquences dans votre pays ou région. Pour assurer une compatibilité totale, n’utilisez la fonction de réseau local sans fil que dans le pays dans lequel vous avez acheté l’appareil photo. • Les opérations à suivre pour régler les paramètres réseau peuvent différer en fonction des conditions du réseau. • Ne tentez pas d’accéder à un réseau dont l’accès ne vous est pas autorisé. • Avant de vous connecter à des réseaux, assurez-vous que la batterie est entièrement rechargée. • Vous ne pouvez pas télécharger ou envoyer des fichiers capturés dans certains modes. • Les fichiers transférés vers un autre appareil peuvent ne pas être pris en charge par cet appareil. Dans ce cas, utilisez un ordinateur pour lire les fichiers. 122 Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau Saisie de texte Cette section décrit comment saisir du texte. Les icônes dans le tableau vous permettent de déplacer le curseur, de modifier la casse, etc. Appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour faire défiler jusqu’à la touche souhaitée, puis appuyez sur [o] pour la saisir. Ou appuyez sur une touche pour la saisir. X Annuler Effectué Icône Description Déplacer le curseur. En mode ABC, changer la casse. X Supprimer la dernière lettre. Annuler Arrêter la saisie de texte et revenir à la page précédente. Passer du mode Symbole au mode ABC. Ajouter un espace. Effectué Enregistrer le texte à l’écran. • Dans certains modes, vous pouvez saisir uniquement du texte exclusivement à l’aide des caractères anglais, quelle que soit la langue d’affichage choisie. • Appuyez sur [y] pour aller jusqu’à Effectué directement. • Le nombre de caractères à saisir varie en fonction de la situation. • L’affichage peut différer en fonction du mode de saisie. 123 Réseau sans fil Utilisation de la fonction NFC (Partage par contact) Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Lecture (Partage instantané) En mode Lecture, l’appareil photo transfère automatiquement le fichier actif sur le smartphone lorsque vous procédez à la lecture d’une balise depuis un dispositif compatible NFC. • Pour transférer plusieurs fichiers, sélectionnez des fichiers depuis l’écran Miniatures, puis procédez à la lecture d’une balise depuis un dispositif compatible NFC. Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Wi-Fi Sélectionnez MobileLink ou Remote Viewfinder depuis la fenêtre qui s’affiche en procédant à la lecture d’une balise depuis un dispositif compatible NFC (p. 126, 130). Placez l’antenne NFC du smartphone à proximité du symbole NFC de l’appareil photo pour lancer la fonctionnalité d’enregistrement automatique des photos sur le smartphone ou pour utiliser le smartphone comme déclencheur à distance. Vous pouvez également transférer des fichiers vers un dispositif compatible NFC en mode Lecture. • Cette fonctionnalité est prise en charge par les smartphones compatibles NFC fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android. Il est recommandé d’utiliser la dernière version. Cette fonctionnalité n’est pas disponible pour les appareils iOS. • Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone ou appareil pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps ou Google Play Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement. • Pour les appareils fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, téléchargez Samsung SMART CAMERA App depuis www.samsung.com/fr ou www.samsung.ca. • Pour se connecter à une balise NFC, placez le dispositif compatible NFC à proximité de la balise NFC de l’appareil photo pendant plus de 2 secondes. • Vous pouvez définir la taille des photos transférées en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant d ĺ MobileLink / Taille de l'image NFC ĺ une option. • Il ne faut en aucun cas modifier l’étiquette NFC. Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Prise de vue Lancez AutoShare ou Remote Viewfinder en procédant à la lecture d’une balise depuis un dispositif compatible NFC (p. 124, 130). Configurez la fonction Wi-Fi pour qu’elle se lance à la lecture d’une balise sur un dispositif compatible NFC (p. 151) 124 Réseau sans fil Enregistrement automatique de fichiers sur un smartphone L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la fonction AutoShare via un réseau local sans fil. Lorsque vous prenez une photo à l’aide de l’appareil photo, la photo s’enregistre automatiquement sur le smartphone. • La fonctionnalité AutoShare est prise en charge par les smartphones ou les tablettes fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS. (Certains modèles ne prennent pas en charge toutes ces fonctionnalités.) Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez à jour le firmware à la version la plus récente. Si la version du firmware n’est pas la plus récente, il est possible que cette fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement. • Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone ou appareil pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement. • Pour les appareils fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, téléchargez Samsung SMART CAMERA App depuis www.samsung.com/fr ou www.samsung.ca. • Si vous activez cette fonction, les paramètres sont conservés même si vous changez de mode Prise de vue. • Il est possible que certains modes ne prennent pas en charge cette fonction ou que cette dernière ne soit pas disponible avec certaines options de prise de vue. 1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur ĺAutoShare. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [m] ĺb ĺ AutoShare ĺ Activé. • Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant. • Pour qu’il vous soit demandé de saisir un code PIN lorsque vous connectez le smartphone à l’appareil photo, sélectionnez Paramètres sécurité. (p. 156) 2 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer l’application. • Pour démarrer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à proximité de la balise NFC (p. 28) de l’appareil photo. Vérifiez que le smartphone est connecté à l’appareil photo, puis passez à l’étape 5. 3 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et établissez la connexion entre le smartphone et l’appareil photo. • Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à la fois. • Si le Verrouillage Wi-Fi est activé, saisissez le code PIN affiché sur l’appareil photo depuis le smartphone. 125 Réseau sans fil > Enregistrement automatique de fichiers sur un smartphone 4 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez la connexion du smartphone. • Si le smartphone s’est connecté à l’appareil photo auparavant, la connexion est automatique. • Une icône indiquant l’état de la connexion ( ) apparaît sur l’écran de l’appareil photo. 5 Prenez une photo. • La photo est enregistrée sur l’appareil photo, puis transférée au smartphone. Si aucune carte mémoire n’est insérée ou si la mémoire est insuffisante, la photo prise est alors transférée sur le smartphone sans qu’elle soit enregistrée sur l’appareil photo. • Tout enregistrement vidéo n’est conservé que sur l’appareil photo. • Le fichier image généré au cours de l’enregistrement d’une vidéo n’est pas sauvegardé sur le smartphone. • Si la fonction GPS est activée sur le smartphone, les informations GPS sont alors enregistrées avec la photo prise. 126 Réseau sans fil L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la fonction MobileLink via un réseau local sans fil. Vous pouvez facilement envoyer des photos ou des vidéos à votre smartphone. • La fonctionnalité MobileLink est prise en charge par les smartphones ou les tablettes fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS. (Certains modèles ne prennent pas en charge toutes ces fonctionnalités.) Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez à jour le firmware à la version la plus récente. Si la version du firmware n’est pas la plus récente, il est possible que cette fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement. • Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone ou appareil pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement. • Pour les appareils fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, téléchargez Samsung SMART CAMERA App depuis www.samsung.com/fr ou www.samsung.ca. • Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction. • Vous pouvez visualiser jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers récents et envoyer jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers à la fois. • Lorsque vous envoyez des vidéos Full HD à l’aide de la fonction MobileLink, il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas lire ces fichiers sur certains appareils. • Lors de l’utilisation de cette fonction sur un appareil iOS, la connexion Wi-Fi risque d’être désactivée. • Il est impossible d’envoyer des fichiers RAW. • Vous pouvez définir la taille des photos transférées en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant dĺMobileLink / Taille de l'image NFCĺ une option. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur ĺMobileLink sur l’écran en mode Prise de vue. • Vous pouvez également envoyer des fichiers en mode Lecture en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant Partager (Wi-Fi)ĺMobileLink ou en sélectionnant ĺMobileLink. • L’écran s’éteint si vous n’effectuez aucune opération sur l’appareil photo dans les 30 secondes. 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi. 2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez . • Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant. • Pour qu’il vous soit demandé de saisir un code PIN lorsque vous connectez le smartphone à l’appareil photo, sélectionnez Paramètres sécurité. (p. 156) 3 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez une option d’envoi. • Si l’option Sélectionner des fichiers du smartphone est activée, vous pouvez utiliser votre smartphone pour afficher et partager les fichiers stockés sur l’appareil photo. L’écran s’éteint si vous n’effectuez aucune opération sur le smartphone dans les 30 secondes. • Si l’option Sélectionner des fichiers de l’appareil photo est activée, vous pouvez sélectionner les fichiers à envoyer depuis l’appareil photo. 4 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer l’application. • Pour démarrer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à proximité de la balise NFC (p. 28) de l’appareil photo. Vérifiez que le smartphone est connecté à l’appareil photo, puis passez à l’étape 7. Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone 127 Réseau sans fil > Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone 5 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et établissez la connexion entre le smartphone et l’appareil photo. • Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à la fois. • Si le Verrouillage Wi-Fi est activé, saisissez le code PIN affiché sur l’appareil photo depuis le smartphone. 6 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez la connexion du smartphone. • Si le smartphone s’est connecté à l’appareil photo auparavant, la connexion est automatique. 7 Sur le smartphone ou l’appareil photo, sélectionnez les fichiers à transférer depuis l’appareil photo. 8 Sur le smartphone, appuyez sur la touche de copie ou, sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez Envoyer. • L’appareil photo envoie les fichiers au smartphone. 128 Réseau sans fil Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à plusieurs smartphones L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la fonction Group Share via un réseau local sans fil. Vous pouvez facilement envoyer des photos ou des vidéos à plusieurs smartphones. • La fonctionnalité Group Share est prise en charge par les smartphones ou les tablettes fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS. (Certains modèles ne prennent pas en charge toutes ces fonctionnalités.) Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez à jour le firmware à la version la plus récente. Si la version du firmware n’est pas la plus récente, il est possible que cette fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement. • Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone ou appareil pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement. • Pour les appareils fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, téléchargez Samsung SMART CAMERA App depuis www.samsung.com/fr ou www.samsung.ca. • Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction. • Le transfert de fichiers vers plusieurs smartphones peut prendre plus de temps que le transfert vers un seul appareil. • Lorsque vous envoyez des vidéos Full HD à l’aide de la fonction Group Share, il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas lire ces fichiers sur certains appareils. • Lors de l’utilisation de cette fonction sur un appareil iOS, la connexion Wi-Fi risque d’être désactivée. • Il est impossible d’envoyer des fichiers RAW. • Vous pouvez définir la taille des photos transférées en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant d ĺ MobileLink / Taille de l'image NFC ĺ une option. • Vous pouvez également envoyer des fichiers en mode Lecture en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant Partager (Wi-Fi) ĺ Group Share ou en sélectionnant ĺ Group Share. 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi. 2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez . • Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant. • Pour qu’il vous soit demandé de saisir un code PIN lorsque vous connectez le smartphone à l’appareil photo, sélectionnez Paramètres sécurité. (p. 156) 3 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer l’application. • Pour démarrer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à proximité de la balise NFC (p. 28) de l’appareil photo. Vérifiez que le smartphone est connecté à l’appareil photo, puis passez à l’étape 6. 129 Réseau sans fil > Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à plusieurs smartphones 4 Appuyez sur Connexion en regard du smartphone de votre choix figurant dans la liste sur l’appareil photo. • Si le smartphone s’est connecté à l’appareil photo auparavant, la connexion est automatique. • Vous pouvez connecter jusqu’à 4 smartphones. • Si le Verrouillage Wi-Fi est activé, saisissez le code PIN affiché sur l’appareil photo depuis le smartphone. 5 Sélectionnez Suivant. 6 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez les fichiers à transférer depuis l’appareil photo. 7 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez Envoyer. • L’appareil photo envoie les fichiers au smartphone. • Lorsque vous établissez la connexion avec plusieurs smartphones, l’appareil photo envoie les fichiers à tous les dispositifs en même temps. 130 Réseau sans fil L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la fonction Remote Viewfinder via un réseau local sans fil. Utilisez le smartphone pour déclencher à distance l’obturateur à l’aide de la fonction Remote Viewfinder. La photo ainsi prise s’affiche directement sur le smartphone. • La fonctionnalité Remote Viewfinder est prise en charge par les smartphones ou les tablettes fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS. (Certains modèles ne prennent pas en charge toutes ces fonctionnalités.) Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez à jour le firmware à la version la plus récente. Si la version du firmware n’est pas la plus récente, il est possible que cette fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement. • Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone ou appareil pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement. • Pour les appareils fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, téléchargez Samsung SMART CAMERA App depuis www.samsung.com/fr ou www.samsung.ca. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur ĺ Remote Viewfinder sur l’écran en mode Prise de vue. • Les photos ou les vidéos prises en continu ne s’affichent pas sur le smartphone. 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi. 2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez . • Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant. • Pour qu’il vous soit demandé de saisir un code PIN lorsque vous connectez le smartphone à l’appareil photo, sélectionnez Paramètres sécurité. (p. 156) 3 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer l’application. • Pour démarrer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à proximité de la balise NFC (p. 28) de l’appareil photo. Vérifiez que le smartphone est connecté à l’appareil photo, puis passez à l’étape 6. 4 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et établissez la connexion entre le smartphone et l’appareil photo. • Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à la fois. • Si le Verrouillage Wi-Fi est activé, saisissez le code PIN affiché sur l’appareil photo depuis le smartphone. Utilisation d’un smartphone pour le déclenchement de l’obturateur à distance 131 Réseau sans fil > Utilisation d’un smartphone pour le déclenchement de l’obturateur à distance 5 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez la connexion du smartphone. • Si le smartphone s’est connecté à l’appareil photo auparavant, la connexion est automatique. 6 Sur le smartphone, sélectionnez q pour ouvrir le panneau intelligent. 7 Sur le smartphone, définissez les options de prise de vue. • Lors de l’utilisation de cette fonction, certaines touches ne sont plus disponibles sur l’appareil photo. • Avec le smartphone, vous pouvez faire fonctionner l’appareil photo uniquement en appuyant sur l’écran. • Certaines options de prise de vue ne sont pas prises en charge. • Les options de prise de vue réglées sont conservées sur l’appareil photo même après la déconnexion avec le smartphone. 8 Appuyez sur pour revenir à l’écran de prise de vue. 9 Sur le smartphone, maintenez enfoncé pour effectuer la mise au point, puis relâchez pour prendre la photo. • Appuyer sur pour enregistrer une vidéo et sur pour arrêter une vidéo. • Si la fonction GPS est activée sur le smartphone, les informations GPS sont alors enregistrées avec la photo prise. • Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonctionnalité, la distance idéale entre l’appareil photo et le smartphone peut varier, selon les conditions environnantes. • Pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction, le smartphone doit se trouver dans un périmètre de 7 m par rapport à l’appareil photo. • Une fois relâché sur le smartphone, le déclenchement de la prise de vue peut ne pas se faire immédiatement. • Si l’option d’enregistrement du fichier est définie sur Smartphone + Appareil photo, seules les photos seront transférées vers le Smartphone. (Les vidéos et les fichiers RAW ne seront pas transférés.) • Si vous prenez des photos en continu lorsque l’option d’enregistrement du fichier est définie sur Smartphone + Appareil photo, les photos ne seront pas transférées vers le Smartphone. • Lors de l’enregistrement d’une vidéo, l’écran du smartphone ne reflète pas l’écran de l’appareil photo. • La fonction Remote Viewfinder se désactive si : - le smartphone reçoit un appel ; - l’appareil photo ou le smartphone est éteint ; - l’appareil perd sa connexion au réseau local sans fil ; - le signal de la connexion Wi-Fi est mauvais ou instable ; - vous ne réalisez aucune opération dans les 3 minutes une fois la connexion établie ; - le nombre de dossiers et de fichiers a atteint le maximum. • L’écran s’éteint si vous n’effectuez aucune opération sur l’appareil photo dans les 30 secondes. 132 Réseau sans fil Utilisation de la fonction Baby Monitor 3 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez un point d’accès dans la liste, puis positionnez l’appareil photo. • Ne laissez pas l’appareil photo à la portée d’enfants en bas âge ou d’animaux domestiques. • Pointez l’objectif de l’appareil photo sur le sujet. • Il est recommandé de brancher l’appareil photo sur une prise de courant par le biais d’un adaptateur secteur. 4 Sur le smartphone, sélectionnez le point d’accès auquel l’appareil photo est connecté. • Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer l’application. 5 Sur le smartphone, démarrez l’application Samsung Home Monitor. Utilisez la fonction Baby Monitor pour établir la connexion entre l’appareil photo et un smartphone où Samsung Home Monitor est installé pour surveiller un lieu. • La fonction Baby Monitor est prise en charge par les smartphones compatibles avec les résolutions WVGA (800X480) ou supérieures et fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS. (Certains modèles ne prennent pas en charge toutes ces fonctionnalités.) Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez à jour le firmware à la version la plus récente. Si la version du firmware n’est pas la plus récente, il est possible que cette fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement. • Vous devez installer l’application Samsung Home Monitor sur votre smartphone avant d’utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. • N’utilisez cette fonction qu’en intérieur. 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi. 2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez . • Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant. 133 Réseau sans fil > Utilisation de la fonction Baby Monitor 6 Démarrez la vidéo surveillance ou l’audio surveillance. • Visionnez la vidéo live de l’appareil photo sur votre smartphone. Au cours de la vidéo surveillance, appuyez sur Mode de surveillance sonore sur le smartphone pour interrompre le flux vidéo. Si l’appareil photo détecte du bruit, une alarme vous en informe sur le smartphone. • Au cours de la vidéo surveillance par le biais du smartphone, la vidéo n’est pas enregistrée sur l’appareil photo. • Si le lieu surveillé est sombre, appuyez sur pour activer le voyant AF. • Au cours de la surveillance, une alarme retentit sur le smartphone si l’appareil photo détecte du bruit sur une courte période à un volume supérieur à un niveau indiqué. • Au cours de la vidéo surveillance live, aucune alarme sonore ne retentit sur le smartphone même si l’appareil photo détecte du bruit. 7 Appuyez sur pour fermer l’application Samsung Home Monitor. Réglage du niveau de bruit pour l’activation de l’alarme Vous pouvez définir le niveau du bruit entraînant l’activation d’une alarme en cas d’audio surveillance. Appuyez sur [D/I] pour définir le niveau de bruit. Niveau de bruit pour l’activation de l’alarme : quand l’appareil photo détecte du bruit sur une courte période à un volume supérieur au niveau indiqué, une alarme retentit. Retour Paramètres Wi-Fi Sensibilité du capteur N’utilisez pas cette fonction à des fins illégales. 134 Réseau sans fil Utilisation de Sauvegarde automatique pour envoyer des photos ou des vidéos A l’aide de la fonction sans fil, vous pouvez envoyer sur un ordinateur les photos ou vidéos enregistrées avec l’appareil photo. Installation du programme Sauvegarde automatique sur votre ordinateur 1 Installez i-Launcher sur l’ordinateur (p. 162). 2 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. 3 Lorsque l’icône du programme Sauvegarde automatique apparaît, cliquez dessus. • Le programme Sauvegarde automatique est alors installé sur l’ordinateur. Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour terminer l’installation. 4 Débranchez le câble USB. Avant d’installer le programme, assurez-vous que l’ordinateur est connecté à un réseau. Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un ordinateur 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi. 2 Sélectionnez . • Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant. • L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est connecté. • Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il recherche automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles (p. 118). 3 Sélectionnez un ordinateur de sauvegarde. 135 Réseau sans fil > Utilisation de Sauvegarde automatique pour envoyer des photos ou des vidéos 4 Sélectionnez OK. • Pour annuler l’envoi, sélectionnez Annuler. • Il est impossible de sélectionner des fichiers précis à sauvegarder. Cette fonction ne sauvegarde que les nouveaux fichiers de l’appareil photo. • La progression de la sauvegarde s’affiche sur l’écran de l’ordinateur. • Lorsque le transfert est terminé, l’appareil photo s’éteint automatiquement au bout d’environ 30 secondes. Sélectionnez Annuler pour revenir à l’écran précédent et empêcher l’appareil photo de s’éteindre automatiquement. • Pour éteindre automatiquement votre ordinateur une fois le transfert terminé, sélectionnez Eteindre PC après sauvegarde. • Pour changer d’ordinateur de sauvegarde, sélectionnez Changer de PC. • Si vous connectez l’appareil photo au réseau local sans fil, sélectionnez le point d’accès connecté à l’ordinateur. • L’appareil photo recherche les points d’accès disponibles même si vous vous reconnectez au même point d’accès. • Si vous éteignez l’appareil photo ou retirez sa batterie lors de l’envoi de fichiers, le transfert de fichiers est alors interrompu. • Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonction, la commande de l’obturateur se désactive sur l’appareil photo. • Vous ne pouvez connecter qu’un seul appareil photo à l’ordinateur à la fois pour envoyer des fichiers. • La sauvegarde peut être annulée en raison de l’état du réseau. • Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction. • Avant d’utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vous devez désactiver le pare-feu Windows ou tout autre pare-feu. • Vous pouvez envoyer jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers récents. • Sur le logiciel PC, le nom du serveur doit être saisi en alphabet latin et ne peut pas comporter plus de 48 caractères. 136 Réseau sans fil 5 Sélectionnez le champ Nom, indiquez votre nom, puis appuyez sur Effectué. Paramètres expéditeur Nom Enregistrer Courriel Réinitialiser 6 Sélectionnez le champ Courriel, indiquez votre adresse électronique, puis appuyez sur Effectué. 7 Sélectionnez Enregistrer pour enregistrer les modifications. • Pour supprimer vos coordonnées, sélectionnez Réinitialiser. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres du menu Courriel et envoyer par courriel des photos ou des vidéos stockées sur l’appareil photo. Modification des paramètres de courriel Depuis le menu Courriel, il vous est possible de modifier les paramètres pour le stockage de vos informations. Vous avez également la possibilité de définir ou de changer le mot de passe de courriel. Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section « Saisie de texte » (p. 122). Enregistrement de vos informations 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi. 2 Sélectionnez . • L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est connecté. • Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il recherche automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles (p. 118). 3 Appuyez sur [m]. 4 Sélectionnez Paramètres expéditeur. Envoi de phot